exterior hardscape & landscape development @...

INVITATION TO BID 20ITB204811K-JAJ

Exterior Hardscape & Landscape Development @ Pryor Street Entry Plaza

For

Department of Real Estate & Asset Management

BID ISSUANCE DATE: January 3, 2020

BID DUE DATE AND TIME: February 10, 2020 11:00 A.M.

PRE-BID CONFERENCE: January 24, 2020 11:00 A.M.

PURCHASING CONTACT: James A. Jones

E-MAIL: [email protected]

LOCATION: FULTON COUNTY GOVERNMENT

DEPARTMENT OF PURCHASING & CONTRACT COMPLIANCE

130 PEACHTREE STREET, S.W., SUITE 1168

ATLANTA, GA 30303

mailto:[email protected]

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Invitation to Bid Owner-Contractor Agreement – Sample Contract

Section 1 - Instructions to Bidders 1. Contract Documents 2. Bid Preparation 3. Receipt and Opening of Bids 4. Addenda and Interpretations 5. Site Examination 6. Bidder’s Modification and Withdrawal of Bids 7. Bid and Contract Security 8. Surety Bonds 9. Insurance Requirements 10. Right to Reject Bids 11. Applicable Laws 12. Examination of Contract Documents 13. Bid Evaluation 14. Award Criteria 15. Disqualification of Bidders 16. Basis of Award 17. Professional Licenses 18. Wage Clause 19. Notice of Award of Contract 20. Execution of Contract Documents 21. Equal Employment Opportunity (EEO) in Purchasing and Contract Compliance 22. Joint Venture 23. Contractors Compliance with Procurement 24. Georgia Security and Immigration Compliance Act 25. Subcontracting Opportunities 26. Term of Contract 27. No Contact Provision 28. Authorization to Transact Business 29. Pre-Construction Conference 30. Substitutions 31. Right to Protest 32. Bid General Conditions 33. Submittals Section 2 Bid Form Section 3 Bond Forms

Section 4 Scope of Work and Technical Specifications Section 5 Insurance and Risk Management Provisions Section 6 Purchasing Forms

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Form A - Non-Collusion Affidavit of Prime Bidder Form B - Certificate of Acceptance of Request for Bid Requirements Form C - Georgia Professional License Certification (not applicable) Form D – Certification Regarding Debarment Form E – Disclosure Form and Questionnaire Form F – Georgia Security and Immigration Contractor Affidavit and Agreement Form G – Georgia Security and Immigration Subcontractor Affidavit

Section 7 Contract Compliance Requirements Non-Discrimination in Contracting and Procurement Required Forms and EBO Plan:

Exhibit A – Promise of Non-Discrimination Exhibit B – Employment Report Exhibit C – Schedule of Intended Subcontractor Utilization Exhibit D – Letter of Intent to Perform As a Subcontractor or Provide Materials or Services Exhibit E – Declaration Regarding Subcontracting Practices Exhibit F – Joint Venture Disclosure Affidavit Exhibit G – Prime Contractor/Subcontractor Utilization Report Equal Business Opportunity Plan (EBO Plan)

Section 8 General Conditions Section 9 Special Conditions Section 10 Exhibits Section 11 Appendices

20ITB204811K-JAJ Pryor Street Entry Plaza Invitation to Bid

Page 1 of 2

INVITATION TO BID

20ITB204811K-JAJ Exterior Hardscape & Landscape Development @ Fulton County Government Center Pryor Street Entry Plaza

Sealed Bids for furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment and appurtenances necessary for selective demolition of the existing entrance plaza and hardscape, landscape and fountain updates will be received by the Fulton County Department of Purchasing and Contract Compliance at 130 Peachtree Street, S.W. Suite 1168 Atlanta, GA 30303, no later than 11:00 a.m., local time, on February 10, 2020 SCOPE OF WORK The Work includes selective demolition of the existing entrance plaza and fountain and hardscape, landscape, and fountain updates for the new plaza. The detailed scope of work and technical specifications are outlined in the Section 4 Scope of Work and Technical Specifications.. METHOD OF SOURCE SELECTION This procurement is being conducted and the specific method of source selection in accordance with all applicable provisions of the Georgia Local Public Works Construction Law, O.C.G.A. §36-91-1 through 36-91-95 when a public works construction project cost exceeds $100,000. PERMITS [Required] The contractor shall be responsible for all inspections and ensuring compliance with all Federal, State, and County laws and codes. The contractor shall be solely responsible for obtaining all permits from the appropriate jurisdiction RIGHTS OF WAY/EASEMENTS [Required] The successful Bidder shall be required to obtain the necessary rights of easements, if necessary, for the successful completion of this project BID DOCUMENTS

This document and supporting documents can be downloaded at the Fulton County Website, http://www.fultoncountyga.gov under “Bid Opportunities”. PURCHASING CONTACT

Information regarding the bid or bid requirements, either procedural or technical, may be obtained by submitting questions in writing to: Fulton County Government Department of Purchasing & Contract Compliance Attn: James A. Jones

http://www.co.fulton.ga.us/

20ITB204811K-JAJ Pryor Street Entry Plaza Invitation to Bid

Page 2 of 2

Fulton County Public Safety Building 130 Peachtree Street, S.W. Suite 1168 Atlanta, GA 30303 Email: [email protected] Reference Bid #: 20ITB204811K-JAJ

PRE-BID CONFERENCE

Date: January 24, 2020 Time: 11:00 A.M. Location: Department of Purchasing & Contract Compliance 130 Peachtree Street, Suite 1168 Atlanta GA 30303 A Pre-Bid Conference will be held at the Department of Purchasing & Contract Compliance located at 130 Peachtree Street Suite 1168 Atlanta, Georgia 30303,. Inquiries regarding the solicitation either technical or otherwise may be submitted in writing prior to the pre-bid conference and will be addressed at the pre-bid conference. Any additional questions asked at the Pre-Bid Conference must be submitted in written form at the Pre-Bid conference and will be responded to in the form of an addendum with the County’s official responses. The Pre-Bid Conference will be conducted for the purpose of explaining the County’s bid process, the specifications/technical documents, and to provide non-binding verbal responses to questions concerning these bid specifications and to discuss issues from the Bidders perspective. However, no verbal response provided at the Pre-Bid Conference binds the County. Only those responses to written questions that are responded to by the County in written communications will be official. Fulton County does not discriminate on the basis of disability in the admission or access to its programs or activities. Any requests for reasonable accommodations required by individuals to fully participate in any open meeting, program or activity of Fulton County Government should be directed to Mario Avery, Contract Compliance Administrator at (404) 612-6307 or email: [email protected]. BONDING REQUIREMENTS Each Bid must be accompanied by a Bid Bond, prepared on the Bid Bond provided in this Bid Document or a Surety Company’s Standard Bid Bond, duly executed by the Bidder as principal and having as surety, a surety company licensed to do business in the State of Georgia by the Georgia Insurance Commissioner and listed in the latest issue of U.S. Treasury Circular 570, in the amount of fiver percent of the Bid. The successful Bidder for this Contract will be required to furnish a satisfactory Performance and Payment Bond each in the amount of 100 percent of the Bid, and proof of insurance in accordance with the requirements set forth in Section 5 of this Bid Document.

END OF SECTION



20ITB204811K-JAJ Pryor Street Entry Plaza Owner - Contractor Agreement

Page 1 of 4

OWNER - CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT

20ITB204811K-JAJ Exterior Hardscape & Landscape Development @ Pryor Street

Entry Plaza

Contractor: ______________________________ Project No. ___________________ Address: ________________________________ Telephone: ___________________ Contact: ________________________________ Facsimile: ____________________ THIS AGREEMENT is effective as of the ________ day of _________________, 2020, by and between Fulton County, a political subdivision of the State of Georgia (hereinafter called the “County”), and the above named CONTRACTOR in accordance with all provisions of this Construction Agreement (“Contract”), which consists of the following: Owner-Contractor Agreement, Owner's invitation for bid, instructions to bidders, bid form, performance bond, payment bond, acknowledgments, general conditions, special conditions, scope of work and specifications, plans, drawings, exhibits, addenda, Purchasing forms, Office of Contract Compliance Forms, Risk Management insurance provisions forms and written change orders. The specific Exhibits of this Contract are as follows: Exhibit A: General Conditions Exhibit B: Special Conditions (if applicable) Exhibit C: Addenda Exhibit D: Bid Form Exhibit E: Bonds (Bid, Payment & Performance) Exhibit F: Scope of Work and Technical Specifications Exhibit G: Exhibits Exhibit H: Purchasing Forms Exhibit I: Office of Contract Compliance Forms

Exhibit J: Risk Management Insurance Provisions Forms

WITNESSETH: That the said Contractor has agreed, and by these present does agree with the said County, for and in consideration of a Contract Price of [INSERT CONTRACT AMOUNT IN WORDS], ($[INSERT CONTRACT AMOUNT IN NUMBERS]) and other good and valuable consideration, and under the penalty expressed on Bonds hereto attached, to furnish all equipment, tools, materials, skill, and labor of every description necessary to carry out and complete in good, firm, and workmanlike manner, the Work specified, in strict conformity with the Drawings and the Specifications hereinafter set forth, which Drawings and Specifications together with the bid submittals made by the Contractor, General Conditions, Special Provisions, Detailed Specifications, Exhibits, and this Construction Agreement, shall all form essential parts of this Contract. The Work covered by this Contract includes all Work indicated on Plans and Specifications and listed in the Bid entitled:

Project Number: [INSERT PROJECT #]

[INSERT PROJECT NAME]


Page 2 of 4

The Contractor, providing services as an Independent Contractor, shall commence the Work with adequate force and equipment within 10 days from receipt of Notice to Proceed (“NTP”) from the County, and shall complete the work within [INSERT CONTRACT DURATION] calendar days from the Notice to Proceed or the date work begins, whichever comes first. The Contractor shall remain responsible for performing, in accordance with the terms of the Contract, all work assigned prior to the expiration of the said calendar days allowed for completion of the work even if the work is not completed until after the expiration of such days. The Contractor shall agree that in the performance of this Contract he will comply with all lawful agreements, if any, which the contractor has made with any association, union or other entity, with respect to wages, salaries and working conditions, so as to cause inconvenience, picketing or work stoppage. [Insert if applicable For each calendar day that any work remains uncompleted after the time allowed for completion of the work, the Contractor shall pay the County the sum of $ 500.00 not as a penalty but as liquidated damages, which liquidated damages the County may deduct from any money due the contractor. At the County’s convenience and not to it prejudice the County may provide written notice of the commencement of the assessment of liquidated damages]. As full compensation for the faithful performance of this Contract, the County shall pay the Contractor in accordance with the General Conditions and the prices stipulated in the Bid, hereto attached. It is further mutually agreed between the parties hereto that if, at any time after the execution of this Agreement and the Surety Bonds hereto attached for its faithful performance, the County shall deem the surety or sureties upon such bonds to be unsatisfactory, or, if, for any reason, such bonds cease to be adequate to cover the performance of the Work, the Contractor shall, at his expense, within five days after receipt of notice from the County so to do, furnish an additional bond or bonds in such form and amount, and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the County. In such event no further payment to the Contractor shall be deemed to be due under this Agreement until such new or additional security for the faithful performance of the Work shall be furnished in manner and form satisfactory to the County.

The Contractor hereby assumes the entire responsibility and liability for any and all injury to or death of any and all persons, including the Contractor’s agents, servants, and employees, and in addition thereto, for any and all damages to property caused by or resulting from or arising out of any act or omission in connection with this contract or the prosecution of work hereunder, whether caused by the Contractor or the Contractor’s agents, Servants, or employees, or by any of the Contractor’s subcontractors or suppliers, and the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the County, the Construction Manager, County’s Commissioners, officers, employees, successors, assigns and agents, or any of their subcontractors from and against any and all loss and/or expense which they or any of them may suffer or pay as a result of claims or suits due to, because of, or arising out of any and all such injuries, deaths and/or damage, irrespective of County or Construction Manager negligence (except that no party shall be indemnified for their own sole negligence). The Contractor, if requested, shall assume and defend at the Contractor’s own expense, any suit, action or other legal proceedings arising there from, and the Contractor hereby agrees to satisfy, pay, and cause to be discharged of record any


Page 3 of 4

judgment which may be rendered against the County and the Construction Manager arising there from. In the event of any such loss, expense, damage, or injury, or if any claim or demand for damages as heretofore set forth is made against the County or the Construction Manager, the County may withhold from any payment due or thereafter to become due to the Contractor under the terms of this Contract, an amount sufficient in its judgment to protect and indemnify it and the Construction Manager, County’s Commissioners, officers, employees, successors, assigns and agents from any and all claims, expense, loss, damages, or injury; and the County, in its discretion, may require the Contractor to furnish a surety bond satisfactory to the County providing for such protection and indemnity, which bond shall be furnished by the Contractor within five (5) days after written demand has been made therefore. The expense of said Bond shall be borne by the Contractor. [See General Conditions for similar provision]

This Contract constitutes the full agreement between the parties, and the Contractor shall not sublet, assign, transfer, pledge, convey, sell or otherwise dispose of the whole or any part of this Contract or his right, title, or interest therein to any person, firm or corporation without the previous consent of the County in writing. Subject to applicable provisions of law, this Contract shall be in full force and effect as a Contract, from the date on which a fully executed and approved counterpart hereof is delivered to the Contractor and shall remain and continue in full force and effect until after the expiration of any guarantee period and the Contractor and his sureties are finally released by the County. This agreement was approved by the Fulton County Board of Commissioner on [Insert approval date and item number].

[SIGNATURES NEXT PAGE]


Page 4 of 4

IN WITNESS THEREOF, the Parties hereto have caused this Contract to be executed by their duly authorized representatives as attested and witnessed and their corporate seals to be hereunto affixed as of the day and year date first above written.

OWNER: FULTON COUNTY, GEORGIA

CONTRACTOR: [Insert Contractor COMPANY NAME]

Robert L. Pitts Commission Chair Board of Commissioners ATTEST:

[Insert Name & Title of person authorized to sign contract] ATTEST:

Tonya R. Grier Interim Clerk to the Commission ( Affix County Seal)

Secretary/ Assistant Secretary (Affix Corporate Seal)

APPROVED AS TO FORM:

Office of the County Attorney APPROVED AS TO CONTENT:

[Insert Department Head Name] [Insert Department Head Title]

END OF SECTION

20ITB204811K-JAJ Section 1 Pryor Street Entry Plaza Instructions to Bidders

Page 1 of 17

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

1. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

The Contract Documents include the Contract Agreement, Contractor's Bid (including all documentation accompanying the Bid and any post-Bid documentation required by the County prior to the Notice of Award), Bonds, all Special Conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Specifications, Drawings and addenda, together with written amendments, change orders, field orders and the Construction Manager's written interpretations and clarifications issued in accordance with the General Conditions on or after the date of the Contract Agreement. Shop drawing submittals reviewed in accordance with the General Conditions, geotechnical investigations and soils report and drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface structures at or contiguous to the site are not Contract Documents. The Contract Documents shall define and describe the complete work to which they relate.

2. BID PREPARATION

Bidders shall SUBMIT ONE (1) ORIGINAL, SIGNED AND DATED, AND TWO (2) COPIES on the forms provided in the Bid Document. All bids must be made on the bid forms contained herein and shall be subject to all requirements of the Agreement Documents. All bids must be regular in every respect and no interlineations, excisions, or special conditions shall be made or included in the bid by the Bidder. Lump sum, unit price and extensions of unit prices must be entered in the appropriate spaces provided on the Bid Schedule/Bid Form. Unit prices shall include an appropriate allocation of overhead and other indirect costs so that the summation of unit price extensions and lump sum items represents the total bid amount. All blank spaces must be typed or hand written in blue ink on the “Original”. All dollar amounts must be BOTH in writing and figures and represent prices for the published scope of work without exceptions. The County may, in its sole discretion, reject any bid determined as irregular, a conditional bid or any bid on which there is an alteration of, or departure from the Bid Schedule attached. Erasures or other changes in the bids must be explained or noted over the signature of the Bidder. All corrections to any entry must be lined out and initialed by the Bidder. Please do not use correction tapes or fluid. Failure to do so shall render the Bidder as non-responsive and cause rejection of the bid.


Page 2 of 17

Failure to execute the Bid Schedule/Bid Form documents may result in Bidder being deemed non-responsive and cause rejection of the bid.

3. RECIEPT AND OPENING OF BIDS

Sealed bids will be received by the Fulton County Department of Purchasing & Contract Compliance at Fulton County Public Safety Building, 130 Peachtree Street, S.W., Suite 1168 Atlanta, Georgia 30303. All submitted bids shall be time and date stamped according to the clock at the front desk of the Fulton County Department of Purchasing & Contract Compliance. The original signed Bid with three (3) copies shall be submitted in a sealed envelope, addressed to the Department of Purchasing and Contract Compliance and labeled 20ITB204811K-JAJ Exterior Hardscape & Landscape development @Pryor Street Entry Plaza. REQUIRED SUBMITTALS: The bidder must complete and execute the following: 1. Bid Form 2. Acknowledgement of each Addendum 3. Bid Bond 4. Purchasing Forms (See Submittal Check List at end of this Section), fully

executed 5. Contract Compliance Forms (See Submittal Check List at end of this Section),

fully executed 6. Risk Management Insurance Provisions Form Any bids received after the stated time and date will not be considered. It shall be the sole responsibility of the bidder to have his/her bid delivered to the Fulton County Department of Purchasing and Contract Compliance for receipt on or before the stated time and date. If a bid is sent by U.S. Mail, the bidder shall be responsible for its timely delivery to the Purchasing Department. Bids delayed by mail will not be considered, shall not be opened, and arrangements shall be made for their return at the bidder's request and expense. Bid shall be publicly opened, with only the names and total bid price of the bidders disclosed at the opening.

4. ADDENDA AND INTERPRETATIONS

No interpretations of the meaning of the Drawings, Specifications or other pre-bid documents will be made to any Bidder orally. Bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Contract Documents shall make a request in writing, either by mail, hand delivery, e-mail or fax, to the Purchasing Agent at the address below. To be given consideration, requests must be received no later than 2:00 PM, January 31, 2020. The County will not respond to any requests, oral or written, received after this date. Telephone inquiries will not be accepted.


Page 3 of 17

Department of Purchasing and Contract Compliance Attn: James A. Jones, Assistant Purchasing Agent Fulton County Public Safety Building 130 Peachtree Street, S.W., 1168 Atlanta, GA 30303 Fax: (404) 893-1744 [email protected] Bid # 20ITB204811K-JAJ Only communications from firms that are in writing and signed will be recognized by the County as duly authorized expressions on behalf of proposers/bidders. Any and all such interpretations and any supplemental instructions will be in the form of written Addenda to the Specifications which, if any addend are issued to this Invitation to Bid. Failure of Bidders to receive or acknowledge any Addendum shall not relieve them of any obligation under the Bid. All Addenda shall become part of the Contract Documents.

5. SITE EXAMINATION

There will be a site visit for this project. It will be held on January 24, 2020 immediately following the pre-bid conference. Bidders are encouraged to attend.

6. BIDDER’S MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS

A Bidder may modify or withdraw its bid by written request, provided that the request is received by the County prior to the bid due date and time at the address to which bids are to be submitted. Provided further, that in case of an electronic request (i.e. facsimile, e-mail, etc.) a written confirmation thereof over the authorized signature of the Bidder must be received by the County at the address to which original Bids are to be submitted within three (3) calendar days after issue of the electronic message. Following withdrawal of its bid, the Bidder may submit a new bid, providing delivery is affected prior to the established bid opening date and time. No bid may be withdrawn after bid due date for sixty (60) calendar days.

7. BID AND CONTRACT SECURITY

A Bid Bond for an amount equal to five percent (5%) of the bid amount must accompany each Proposal. The bid bond shall be submitted in a separate, sealed envelope marked “Bid Bond”. Bids must be accompanied by a bid bond or certified check in an amount of five percent (5%) of the TOTAL AMOUNT of the base bid. The bid bond or certified check shall apply ONLY TO THIS BID. The bid name and contract number must appear on the security instrument. The bond must remain in full



Page 4 of 17

force and effect until the Bidder executes the final Contract. Bids not satisfying the bonding requirements of this project will be declared non-responsive. Any bid bond, performance bond, payment bond, or security deposit required for public works construction contract shall be approved and filed with purchasing agent. At the option of the County, if the surety named in the bond is other than a surety company authorized by law to do business in this state pursuant to a current certificate of authority to transact surety business by the Commissioner of Insurance, such bond shall not be approved and filed unless such surety is on the United States Department of Treasury’s list of approved bond sureties. A Purchasing Agent shall approve as to form and as to the solvency of the surety any bid bond, performance bond, or payment bond required by this. In the case of a bid bond, such approval shall be obtained prior to acceptance of the bid or proposal. In the case of payment bonds and performance bonds, such approval shall be obtained prior to the execution of the contract. Whenever, in the judgment of the County: (1) Any surety on a bid, performance, or payment bond has become insolvent; (2) Any corporation surety is no longer certified or approved by the Commissioner

of Insurance to do business in the state; or (3) For any cause there are no longer proper or sufficient sureties on any or all the

bonds The County may require the contractor to strengthen any or all of the bonds or to furnish a new or additional bond or bonds within ten days. Thereupon, if so ordered by the County, all work on the contract shall cease unless such new or additional bond or bonds are furnished. If such bond or bonds are not furnished within such time, the County may terminate the contract and complete the same as the agent of and at the expense of the contractor and his or her sureties. As a condition of responsiveness the bidder must contain a Bid Bond for an amount equal to 5% of the bid amount. The Bid Bond shall be included in a separate envelope marked on the outside “Bid Bond”. Checks or letters of credit of any type will not be accepted. A certified cashier’s check will be acceptable. Provide a completed and fully executed Bid Bond. When the bidder’s package is opened, a purchasing agent will verify the presence of the Bid Bond and remove it from the Proposal Package. If the bidder withdraws its bid from the competition after the selection of its bid for a reason not authorized by Georgia law, the County will proceed on the Bid Bond, along with any other available remedies. The Surety of the Bid Bond shall be from a surety company authorized to do business in the State of Georgia, shall be listed in the Department of Treasury Circular 570, and shall have an underwriting limitation in excess of 100% of the bid amount. The Bonds and Surety shall be subject to approval by the County Attorney.


Page 5 of 17

Attorneys-in-fact for bidders who sign bid bonds or contract bonds must file with each bond a certified and effectively dated copy of their power of attorney.

8. SURETY BONDS

The submission of surety bonds subsequent to the Bid submission shall be:

a. Any surety bond submitted in accordance with the Bid or Agreement

requirements must be issued by a corporate surety company satisfactory to the Commission and authorized to act as such in the State of Georgia;

b. Such bonds shall conform to the forms provided with the Bid Documents and be

completed in accordance with the instructions thereon; and c. In accordance with Georgia law, and upon award of the Agreement, separate

performance and payment bonds shall be required of the successful Bidder, each in an amount not less than the total amount payable under the Agreement. The performance bond shall remain in effect for one (1) year after final acceptance of the Work or the guaranty period under the Agreement, whichever is the larger.

The payment bond shall remain in effect for the period required under Georgia law

for the payment bonds on public construction agreements. Reference is made to the bond forms and the Agreement Documents for additional particulars of the terms required in the bonds. In the case of any inconsistency between the Bond Forms and Georgia law, the law shall control. Alterations, extension of the time allowed for performance, extra and additional Work, and other changes authorized under the Agreement may be made without notice to or consent of the surety or sureties.

9. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS

The Contractor shall procure and maintain during the life of this Agreement, Workmen's Compensation, Public Liability, Property Damage, Automobile Liability insurance and any other insurance necessary to satisfy the requirements of the Agreement Documents. At the time of award, a copy of the successful Bidder’s Certificate of Insurance must be provided through the County’s online insurance compliance system.

The County has implemented an online insurance compliance system designed to make the experience of submitting and retrieval of insurance information quick and easy. This system is designed to be used by insurance brokers and agents on behalf of their insurance clients for submittal of Certificates of Insurance (“COI”) directly to the Fulton County Department of Purchasing. Instructions will be provided to the successful bidder.


Page 6 of 17

10. RIGHT TO REJECT BIDS

The County reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive informalities. No bids will be received after the time set for opening bids. Any unauthorized conditions, limitations or provisions attached to the Bid, except as provided herein, will render it informal and may cause its rejection. Unbalanced bids will be subject to rejection. Any bidder may withdraw his/her bid, either personally or by telegraphic or written request, at any time prior to the scheduled closing time for receipt of bids. Telegraphic or written requests for withdrawal must be in the possession of the County prior to the closing time for receipt of bids.

11. APPLICABLE LAWS

All applicable laws and regulations of the State of Georgia and ordinances and regulations of Fulton County shall apply. Protestors shall seek resolution of their complaints in the manner provided in the Fulton County Purchasing Code §102-488 et. seq., which is incorporated by reference herein.

12. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

Prospective bidders shall examine the contract documents and before submitting a bid, shall make a written request to the County for an interpretation or correction of any ambiguity, in consistency or error therein which could be discovered by a bidder. At the bid opening each bidder shall be presumed to have read and be familiar with the contract documents.

13. BID EVALUATION

a. Each Bid timely received and in the County's hands at the time set forth for the Bid opening shall constitute an offer to perform the Agreement on the terms and conditions thereof, in strict accordance with the Agreement documents, and all other requirements, all for the Bid total. For good cause and valuable consideration, the sufficiency of which is acknowledged by submittal of a Bid, each Bidder promises and agrees that its Bid shall be irrevocable for a period of sixty calendar days after the Bid opening and will not be withdrawn or modified during that time. The County may accept any Bid by giving the Bidder Written Notice of acceptance during that time. If necessary, the period of time specified may be extended by written agreement between the County and the Bidder or Bidders concerned.

b. After the Bids have been opened and before any award is made, the County

will evaluate the Bid process, the Bid total, the supplements to the Bid form, Bidder's experience, proposed Subcontractors and equipment manufacturers and other data relating to Bidders' responsibility and qualifications to perform the Agreement satisfactorily.

c. All extension of the unit prices shown and the subsequent addition of

extended amounts may be verified by the County. In the event of a discrepancy between the unit price bid and the extension, the unit price will be deemed intended by the Bidder and the extension shall be adjusted. In


Page 7 of 17

the event of a discrepancy between the sum of the extended amounts and the bid total, the sum of the extended amounts shall govern.

d. Bidder may be required to submit, in writing, the addresses of any proposed

Subcontractors or Equipment manufacturers listed on the Bid, and to submit other material information relative to proposed Subcontractors or Equipment manufacturers. The County reserves the right to disapprove any proposed Subcontractor or Equipment manufacturers whose technical or financial ability or resources or whose experience are deemed inadequate.

e. The County reserves the right to reject any Bid the prices of which appear to

be unbalanced, and to reject any or all Bids, or parts thereof, if it determines, in its sole discretion, that such rejection is in the best interest of the County. Where only a single responsible and responsive Bid is received, the County may in its sole discretion, elect to conduct a price or cost analysis of the Bid. Such Bidder shall cooperate with such analysis and provide such supplemental information as may be required. The determination whether to enter into an Agreement with such sole Bidder shall be solely within the County’s discretion and not dependent upon performance of a price or cost analysis.

f. Bids will be evaluated on the basis of determining the lowest Bid total of a

Bidder, not including alternates, whose Bid is responsive to the Invitation to Bid and who is determined to be technically, financially and otherwise responsible to perform the Agreement satisfactorily, and to meet all other requirements of the Bidding Documents relating thereto. Any Bid may be rejected if it is determined by the County to be non-responsive, provided, however, that the Commission reserves the right to waive any irregularities or technicalities which it determines, within its sole discretion, to be minor in nature and in the interest of the public. Furthermore, any Bid may be rejected if it is determined by the County, in its sole discretion, that the Bidder is not capable of performing the Agreement satisfactorily based upon review of its experience and technical and financial capabilities, or the failure of such bidder to provide information requested relating to such determination. Additionally, the County reserves the right to disqualify Bids, before and after the bid opening, upon evidence of collusion with intent to defraud or other illegal practices upon the part of any Bidder(s).

g. The County intends to award the Agreement at the earliest practicable date

to the lowest responsive, responsible Bidder(s), provided that the Bid is within the funds available for the project. In addition, the County reserves the right to reject all Bids if it determines, in its sole discretion, that the public interest will be best served by doing so.

h. A Pre-award Conference may be conducted with the apparent low Bidder(s)

to review general requirements of the Bidding Documents.


Page 8 of 17

14. AWARD CRITERIA Award will be made after evaluating the prices, responsiveness and responsibility of each Bidder. A. Responsiveness: The determination of responsiveness will be determined by

the following:

a. The completeness of all material, documents and/or information required by the County;

b. Whether the bidder has submitted a complete Bid form without irregularities, excisions, special conditions, or alternative bids for any item unless specifically requested in the Bid form.

B. Responsibility: The determination of the bidder’s responsibility will be

determined by the following

a. The ability, capacity and skill of the Bidder to perform and/or provide the Work required;

b. The County reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the bidder fails to satisfy the County that he/she is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract;

c. The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience and efficiency of the Bidder;

d. The quality of performance of work on previous contracts or work; Maintains a permanent place of business individually or in conjunction with the prime contractor.

e. Has the appropriate and adequate technical experience necessary to perform the Work;

f. Has adequate personnel and equipment to do the Work expeditiously; g. Has suitable financial means to meet obligations incidental to the work.

15. DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS

Any of the following may be considered as sufficient for disqualification of a Bidder and the rejection of the Bid:

a. Submission of more than one Bid for the same work by an individual,

firm, partnership or Corporation under the same of different name(s); b. Evidence of collusion among Bidders; c. Previous participation in collusive bidding on Work for the County; d. Submission of an unbalanced Bid, in which the prices quoted for same

items are out of proportion to the prices for other items; e. Lack of competency of Bidder. The Agreement will be awarded only to

a Bidder(s) rated as capable of performing the Work.


Page 9 of 17

16. BASIS OF AWARD

The Contract, if awarded, will be awarded to the lowest responsive and responsible bidder. No bid may be withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) days after the date of bid opening except as permitted by O.C.G.A., §36-91-41 et seq., as amended. Each Bid must be accompanied by a Bid Bond in accordance with the Bid Bond Requirements provided in the Contract Documents, on a Surety Company’s Standard Bid Bond Form acceptable to the County in an amount no less than 5% of the amount bid. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a Performance Bond and Payment Bond, on or before the issuance of Notice to Proceed, each in the amount of 100% of the Contract Amount. All other required Contract Documents must be fully completed and executed by the Contractor and his/her Surety, and submitted to the Owner on or before the issuance of the Notice to Proceed.

17. PROFESSIONAL LICENSES (APPLICABLE)

The State of Georgia requires that the following professions are required by state law to be licensed:

1. Electricians 2. Plumbers 3. Conditioned Air Contractors 4. Low voltage Contractors

Bidders and any sub-contractors performing any of the above described work must provide a copy of their license for the work they will perform on this project. Bidders must complete Form C3: Georgia Professional License Certification in Section 6, Purchasing Forms Failure to provide the required license may deem your bid non-responsive.

18. WAGE CLAUSE

Pursuant to 102-413, Each Contractor shall agree that in the performance of the Contract he will comply with all lawful agreements, if any, which the Contractor had made with any association, union, or other entity, with respect to wages, salaries, and working conditions, so as not to cause inconvenience, picketing, or work stoppage.

19. NOTICE OF AWARD OF CONTRACT

As soon as possible, and within sixty (60) days after receipt of bids, the County shall notify the successful Bidder of the Award of Contract. The award shall be made by the Board of Commissioners of Fulton County to the lowest responsive, responsible bidder(s) as soon as possible after receipt of bids, taking into consideration price and the responsiveness to the requirements set forth in the Invitation for Bid. In such case, no claim shall be made by the selected Contractor(s) for loss of profit if the contract is not awarded or awarded for less


Page 10 of 17

work than is indicated and for less than the amount of his bid. The total of the awarded contract shall not exceed the available funds allocated for this project. Should the County require additional time to award the contract, the time may be extended by mutual agreement between the County and the successful bidder. If an Award of Contract has not been made within sixty (60) days from the bid date or within the extension mutually agreed upon, the Bidder may withdraw the Bid without further liability on the part of either party. Any award made by the Board of Commissioners as a result of this bid will begin from the date of the notice to proceed. The Bidder agrees hereby to commence work under this Contract, with adequate personnel and equipment, on a date to be specified in a written order from the user department. The contract shall become effective on the Contract Date and shall continue in effect until the end of the term of the contract or until the project has been closed-out unless earlier terminated pursuant to the termination provisions of the contract.

20. EXECUTION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

Upon notification of Award of Contract, the County shall furnish the Contractor the conformed copies of Contract Documents for execution by the Contractor and Contractor’s surety. Within ten (10) days after receipt the Contractor shall return all the documents properly executed by the Contractor and the Contractor’s surety. Attached to each document shall be an original power-of-attorney for the person executing the bonds for the surety and certificates of insurance for the required insurance coverage. After receipt of the documents executed by the Contractor and his surety with the power-of-attorney and certificates of insurance, the County shall complete the execution of the documents. Distribution of the completed documents will be made upon completion. Should the contractor and/or surety fail to execute the documents within the time specified, the County shall have the right to proceed on the Bid Bond accompanying the bid. If the County fails to execute the documents within the time limit specified, the Contractor shall have the right to withdraw the Contractor’s bid without penalty. Should an extension of any of the time limits stated above be required, this shall be done only by mutual agreement between both parties. Any agreement or contract resulting from the acceptance of a bid shall be on a County approved document form. The County reserves the right to reject any agreement that does not conform to the Invitation for Bid and any County requirements for agreements and contracts. The County reserves the right to modify the agreement resulting from this bid upon the recommendation of the County Attorney.


Page 11 of 17

21. INVOICES AND PAYMENT TERMS

Invoices are to be mailed to the County department specified on the resulting purchase order or master agreement. All invoices must include the purchase order number or master agreement number. Failure to comply may result in delayed payments. The County payment terms are Net 30 days unless a cash discount is allowed for payment within not less than twenty (20) days. The payment term shall begin on the date the merchandise is inspected, delivered and accepted by the County. Submittal of Invoices: Invoices shall be submitted as follows:

Via Mail: Fulton County Government 141 Pryor Street, SW Suite 7001 Atlanta, Georgia 30303 Attn: Finance Department – Accounts Payable OR Via Email: Email: [email protected] At minimum, original invoices must reference all of the following information:

1) Vendor Information a. Vendor Name b. Vendor Address c. Vendor Code d. Vendor Contact Information e. Remittance Address

2) Invoice Details

a. Invoice Date b. Invoice Number (uniquely numbered, no duplicates) c. Purchase Order Reference Number d. Date(s) of Services Performed e. Itemization of Services Provided/Commodity Units

3) Fulton County Department Information (needed for invoice approval)

a. Department Name b. Department Representative Name

22. EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY (“EEO”) IN PURCHASING AND

CONTRACTING

To be eligible for award of this Agreement, the Bidder must certify and fully comply with the requirements, terms, and conditions of the County’s Non Discrimination in Contracting and Procurement.



Page 12 of 17

23. JOINT VENTURE

Any Bidder intending to respond to this solicitation as a joint venture must submit an executed joint venture agreement with its offer. The agreement must designate those persons or entities authorized to execute documents or otherwise bind the joint venture in all transactions with Fulton County, or be accompanied by a document, binding upon the joint venture and its constituent members, making such designation. Offers from joint ventures that do not include these documents will be rejected as being non-responsive.

24. NON-COLLUSION

By submitting a signed Bid, Bidder certifies and attests that there has been no collusion with any other Bidder. Reasonable grounds for believing Bidder has an interest in more than one Bid will result in rejection of all Bids in which the Bidder has an interest. Any party to collusion may not be considered in future Bids for the same or similar work.

25. GEORGIA SECURITY AND IMMIGRATION COMPLIANCE ACT This Invitation to Bid is subject to the Georgia Security & Immigration Compliance Act. Effective July 1, 2013, bidders and proposers are notified that all bids/proposals for services that are to be physically performed within the State of Georgia must be accompanied by proof of their registration with and continuing and future participation in the E-Verify program established by the United States Department of Homeland Security. Physical performance of services means any performance of labor or services for a public employer using a bidding process or by contract wherein the labor or services exceed $2,499.99 99 (except for

services performed by an individual who is licensed pursuant to Title 26, Title 43, or the State Bar of Georgia).

A completed affidavit must be submitted on the top of the bid/proposal at the time of submission, prior to the time for opening bids/proposals. Under state law, the County cannot consider any bid/proposal which does not include a completed affidavit. It is not the intent of this notice to provide detailed information or legal advice concerning the Georgia Security & Immigration Compliance Act. All bidders/proposers intending to do business with the County are responsible for independently apprising themselves and complying with the requirements of that law and its effect on County procurements and their participation in those procurements. For additional information on the E-Verify program or to enroll in the program, go to: https://e-verify.uscis.gov/enroll.

The Director of Purchasing & Contract Compliance is authorized to conduct random audits of a contractor’s or subcontractors’ compliance with the Illegal Immigration Reform and Enforcement Act and the rules and regulations of the Georgia Department of Labor.

See Section 00420, Purchasing Forms & Instructions for declarations and affidavits.


Page 13 of 17

26. SUBCONTRACTING OPPORTUNITIES Potential prime contractors submitting a bid on this project for Fulton County and are seeking subcontractors and/or suppliers can advertise those subcontracting opportunities on the County’s website, http://www.fultoncountyga.gov under “Subcontracting Bid Opportunities”.

27. TERM OF CONTRACT The term of the Agreement will be issued as an addendum to this project.

28. NO CONTACT PROVISION

It is the policy of Fulton County that the evaluation and award process for County contracts shall be free from both actual and perceived impropriety, and that contacts between potential vendors and County officials, elected officials and staff regarding pending awards of County contracts shall be prohibited. A. No person, firm, or business entity, however situated or composed, obtaining a

copy of or responding to this solicitation, shall initiate or continue any verbal or written communication regarding this solicitation with any County officer, elected official, employee, or designated County representative, between the date of the issuance of this solicitation and the date of the County Manager’s recommendation to the Board of Commissioners for award of the subject contract, except as may otherwise be specifically authorized and permitted by the terms and conditions of this solicitation.

B. All verbal and written communications initiated by such person, firm, or entity

regarding this solicitation, if same are authorized and permitted by the terms and conditions of this solicitation, shall be directed to the Purchasing Agent.

C. Any violation of this prohibition of the initiation or continuation of verbal or written communications with County officers, elected officials, employees, or designated County representatives shall result in a written finding by the Purchasing Agent that the submitted Bid or proposal of the person, firm, or entity in violation is “non-responsive”, and same shall not be considered for award.

29. AUTHORIZATION TO TRANSACT BUSINESS

If the Contractor is a corporation or corporations combined to form a joint venture, the corporation or members of the joint venture team, prior to Agreement execution, must submit documentary evidence from the Secretary of State that the corporation is in good standing and that the corporation is authorized to transact business in the State of Georgia.

http://www.co.fulton.ga.us/


Page 14 of 17

30. PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A pre-construction conference may be held with the successful Bidder and all known Subcontractors at a time and place set by the County.

31. SUBSTITUTIONS See Special Conditions Article.

32. RIGHT TO PROTEST

Any actual bidder or offeror that has submitted a bid/proposal for a particular procurement and is aggrieved in connection with the solicitation or award of the contract shall protest in writing to the purchasing agent after the date that the specific bid or proposal is submitted. No protest will be accepted or considered prior to the date the specific bid or proposal is submitted; it will be considered untimely. All protests shall set forth in full detail the factual and legal basis for the protest and specific relief sought by the protestor. Protests arising from factual or legal basis that the protestor knew or should have known prior to the submission of the bid/proposal must be submitted within three business days of the submission of the bid/proposal. Protests arising from factual or legal basis that the protestor knew or should have known subsequent to the date the bid/proposal was submitted must be submitted within ten business days after the protestor knew or should have known of such basis, but in no event shall any protest be submitted more than ten business days after the award of the contract. Untimely protests will not be considered by the purchasing agent and will be simply denied as untimely. Decisions on timeliness by the purchasing agent are not appealable. An oral protest or a protest to an official, employee, User Department, or other person apart from the Director of Purchasing & Contract Compliance does not comply.

33. CERTIFICATE OF ACCEPTANCE

By responding to this Bid, Bidder acknowledges that he/she has read this solicitation document, including any addenda, exhibits, attachments, and/or appendices in its entirety, and agrees that no pages or parts of the document have been omitted, that he/she understands, accepts and agrees to fully comply with the requirements therein.

Bidder also certifies and attests that the Bidder has reviewed the form Fulton

County contract included in this solicitation and agrees to be bound by its terms, or that the Bidder certifies that it is submitting any proposed modification(s) to the contract terms with its proposal in accordance with Section 2.26, Exceptions to the County’s Contract. The Bidder further certifies that the failure to submit proposed modifications with the Bid waives the Bidder’s right to submit proposed modifications later. The Bidder also acknowledges that the indemnification and insurance provisions of Fulton County’s contract included in this solicitation document are non-negotiable and that proposed modifications to said terms may be reason to declare the Bidder’s Bid as non-responsive.


Page 15 of 17

34. EXCEPTIONS TO THE COUNTY’S CONTRACT

If Bidder takes exception to any term or condition set forth in the Owner-Contractor Agreement, and any of its exhibits, appendices or attachments, said exceptions must be clearly identified in the response to this Bid. Exceptions or modifications to any of the terms and conditions must be submitted as a separate document accompanying the Bidder’s Bid clearly marked as “Exceptions.” The County shall be the sole determiner of the acceptability of any exception(s).

35. CERTIFICATION REGARDING DEBARMENT By responding to this Bid, Bidder certifies that neither it or its subcontractors is

presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible, or otherwise excluded from doing business with any government agency. Any such exclusion may cause prohibition of your firm from participating in any procurement by the County. Section 102-449 of the Fulton County Code of Laws, which is incorporated as if fully set forth herein, establishes the procedure for the debarment of contractors.

36. BID GENERAL CONDITIONS

1. A Bid may be withdrawn upon receipt of a written request prior to the stated due date and time. If a firm seeks to withdraw a nif after the due date and time, the firm must present a notarized statement indicating that an error was made, with an explanation of how it occurred. The withdrawal request must be accompanied by documentation supporting the claim. Prior to approving or disapproving the request, an opinion will be obtained from the County Attorney’s Office indicating whether the firm is bound by its Bid.

Bids for projects that are solicited pursuant to the Georgia Local Government Public Works Construction Law (O.C.G.A. § 36-91-1 et seq.) may be withdrawn as follows:

The County must advise Bidders in the solicitation of the number of days

that Offerors will be required to honor their Bid. If an Bidder is not selected within 60 days of opening the Bids, any Bidder that is determined by the governmental entity to be unlikely of being selected for contract award will be released from the Bid.

2. Fulton County shall be the sole judge of the quality and the applicability of

all Bids. Design, features, overall quality, local facilities, terms and other pertinent considerations will be taken into account in determining acceptability.

3. The successful Bidder must assume full responsibility for delivery of all

goods and services proposed. 4. The successful Bidder must assume full responsibility for replacement of all

defective or damaged goods and/or performance of contracted services


Page 16 of 17

within thirty (30) days’ notice by the County of such defect, damage or deficiency.

5. The successful Bidder must assume full responsibility for providing

warranty service on all goods, materials, or equipment provided to the County with warranty coverage. Should a vendor be other than the manufacturer, the vendor and not the County is responsible for contacting the manufacturer. The Offeror is solely responsible for arranging for the service to be performed.

6. The successful Bidder shall be responsible for the proper training and

certification of personnel used in the performance of the services proposed. 7. The successful Bidder shall not assign, transfer, convey, sublet, or

otherwise dispose of any contract resulting from the Bid or of any of its rights, title or interest therein without prior written consent of the Fulton County Board of Commissioners.

8. In case of default by the successful Bidder, Fulton County may procure the

articles or services from another source and hold the successful Bidder responsible for any resultant excess cost.

9. All proposals and Bids submitted to Fulton County are subject to the

Georgia “Open Records Act”, Official Code of Georgia, Annotated (O.C.G.A.) § 50-18-70 et seq.

10. All proposals and Bids submitted to Fulton County involving Utility

Contracting are subject to the Georgia law governing licensing of Utility Contractors, O.C.G.A. §43-14-8.2(h).

34. SUBMITTALS The following submittals must be completed and submitted with the Bid Submittal. This checklist is provided to ensure that the Bidder submits certain required information with its Bid.

Bid Submittal Check Sheet Check (√)

1. Georgia Security and Immigration Contractor Affidavit(s) and Agreements

2. Georgia Security and Immigration Subcontractor Affidavit(s)

3. Bid Form

4. Acknowledgment of Addenda

5. Bid Bond

6. Georgia Utility Contractor’s License ( Spec Group 33 )


Page 17 of 17

7. Georgia General Contractors License

8. Georgia Professional License (if applicable)

9. Office of Contract Compliance Requirements (submitted in a separate envelope)

10. Proof of Insurance Coverage

END OF SECTION

20ITB204811K-JAJ Section 2 Pryor Street Entry Plaza Bid Form

Page 1 of 5

BID FORM

Submitted To: Fulton County Government Submitted By: ______________________ For: 20ITB204811K-JAJ Exterior Hardscape & Landscape Development @ Fulton County Government Center Pryor Street Entry Plaza

Submitted on ____________________, 2020. The undersigned, as Bidder, hereby declares that the only person or persons interested in the Bid as principal or principals is or are named herein and that no other person than herein mentioned has any interest in this Bid or in the Contract to be entered into; that this Bid is made without connection with any other person, company or parties making a Bid; and that it is in all respects fair and in good faith without collusion or fraud. The Bidder further declares that he has examined the site of the work and informed himself fully in regard to all conditions pertaining to the place where the work is to be done; that he has examined the Drawings and Specifications for the work and contractual documents relative thereto, and has read all instructions to Bidders and General Conditions furnished prior to the openings of bids; that he has satisfied himself relative to the work to be performed. The Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to contract with the Board of Commissioners of Fulton County, Atlanta, Georgia, in the form of contact specified, to furnish all necessary materials, equipment, machinery, tools, apparatus, means of transportation and labor necessary, and to complete the construction of the work in full and complete accordance with the shown, noted, and reasonably intended requirements of the Specifications and Contract Documents to the full and entire satisfaction of the Board of Commissioners of Fulton County, Atlanta, Georgia, with a definite understanding that no money will be allowed for extra work except as set forth in the attached General Conditions and Contract Documents for the following prices. THE BASE BID IS THE AMOUNT UPON WHICH THE BIDDER WILL BE FORMALLY EVALUATED AND WHICH WILL BE USED TO DETERMINE THE LOWEST RESPONSIBLE BIDDER. The base bid may not be withdrawn or modified for a period of sixty (60) days following the receipt of bids. BASE BID AMOUNT (Do not include any Bid Alternates) $ (Dollar Amount In Numbers) (Dollar Amount in Words)


Page 2 of 5

The Bidder agrees hereby to commence work under this Contract, with adequate personnel and equipment, on a date to be specified in a written “Notice to Proceed” from the County. The Bidder declares that he understands that the quantities shown for the unit prices items are subject to either increase or decrease, and that should the quantities of any of the items of work be increased, the Bidder proposes to do the additional work at the unit prices stated herein; and should the quantities be decreased, the Bidder also understands that payment will be made on the basis of actual quantities at the unit price bid and will make no claim for anticipated profits for any decrease in quantities; and that actual quantities will be determined upon completion of work, at which time adjustments will be made to the contract amount by direct increase or decrease.


Page 3 of 5

BASE BID AMOUNT

ITEM NO.

DESCRIPTION TOTAL PRICE

1.

Lump Sum for All Construction

2. Owner Controlled Contingency

$175,000.00

3. New Granite Material Allowance

$20,000.00

TOTAL BASE BID AMOUNT (lines 1-3)

ALTERNATE #1

DESCRIPTION Add/Deduct TOTAL COST

Refurbish curved cast-in-place wall and steel trellis ADD

The Bidder furthermore agrees that, in the case of a failure on his part to execute the Contract Agreement and Bonds within ten days after receipt of conformed contract documents for execution, the Bid Bond accompanying his bid and the monies payable thereon shall be paid into the funds of the Owner as liquidated damages for such failure.

Enclosed is a Bid Bond in the approved form, in the sum of: Dollars ($ ) according to the conditions of “Instructions to Bidders” and provisions

thereof.

The undersigned acknowledges receipt of the following addenda (list by the number and date appearing on each addendum) and thereby affirms that its Bid considers and incorporates any modifications to the originally issued Bidding Documents included therein. ADDENDUM # DATED ADDENDUM # DATED ADDENDUM # DATED


Page 4 of 5

ADDENDUM # DATED BIDDER: Signed by: [Type or Print Name] Title: Business Address: Business Phone:


Page 5 of 5

Note: If the Bidder is a corporation, the Bid shall be signed by an officer of the corporation; if a partnership, it shall be signed by a partner. If signed by others, authority for signature shall be attached. The full name and addresses of persons or parties interested in the foregoing Bid, as principals, are as follows:

Name Address

Additional Information to be provided on separate sheets with Bid Submittal 1. Provide a written approach of your understanding of the project

given that this is a high profile project i.e. the “front door” of the Fulton County Government Center (FCGC).

2. Provide references of projects similar in scope to the Entry Plaza

completed within the past five to seven years. The references should include Name of Project, Client, Project Manager with email address, contract amount, term of contract, number of change orders with explanation for change orders if applicable.

3. Resumes of proposed Project Executive, Project Manager and

Superintendent.

4. Current Experience Modification Rating (EMR)

END OF SECTION

of 12

BID BOND

INSTRUCTIONS 1. No bid for a contract in Fulton County for work to be done shall be valid for any

purpose unless the Contractor shall give a Bid Bond with good and sufficient surety payable to, in favor of, and for the protection of Fulton County.

2. This form is required for use in connection with the Agreement identified on its

face. There shall be no deviation from this form without approval by the County. 3. The full legal name and business address of the Principal shall be inserted in the

space designated "Principal" on the face of the form. The bond shall be signed by an authorized person.

4. The Bid Bond shall not be less than 5% of the total amount payable by the terms

of the Contract. 5. Corporation executing the bond as surety must be among those appearing on the

U.S. Treasury Department's most current list of approved sureties and must be acting within the amounts and limitations set forth therein.

6. Corporate surety shall be duly authorized by the Commissioner of Insurance of the

State of Georgia to transact surety business in the State of Georgia. 7. Attestation for the Corporation must be by the Corporate Officer; for a partnership

by another partner; for an individual by a notary with the Corporate Seal.

of 12

BID BOND

20ITB204811K-JAJ Exterior Hardscape & Landscaping Development @ Pryor Street Entry Plaza

STATE OF GEORGIA COUNTY OF FULTON

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, THAT WE

hereinafter called the PRINCIPAL, and

hereinafter call the SURETY, a corporation chartered and existing under the laws of the State of

and duly authorized to transact Surety business in the

State of Georgia, are held and firmly bound unto the Fulton County Government (COUNTY), in

the penal sum of

Dollars and Cents ($ ) good and lawful money of the

United States of America, to be paid upon demand of the COUNTY, to which payment well and

truly to be made we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, and administrators and assigns, jointly

and severally and firmly by these presents.

WHEREAS the PRINCIPAL has submitted to the COUNTY, for 20ITB204811K-JAJ Exterior

Hardscape & Landscape Development @ Pryor Street Entry Plaza, a Bid;

WHEREAS the PRINCIPAL desires to file this Bond in accordance with law:

NOW THEREFORE: The conditions of this obligation are such that if the Bid be accepted, the

PRINCIPAL shall within ten (10) calendar days after receipt of written notification from the

COUNTY of the award of the Contract execute the Contract in accordance with the Bid and upon

the terms, conditions and prices set forth therein, in the form and manner required by the

COUNTY, and execute sufficient and satisfactory Performance and Payments Bonds payable to

the COUNTY, each in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the total contract price, in

form and with security satisfactory to said COUNTY, then this obligation to be void; otherwise, to

be and remain in full force and virtue in law; and the SURETY shall upon failure of the

PRINCIPAL to comply with any or all of the foregoing requirements within the time specified

above immediately pay to the COUNTY, upon demand the amount hereof in good and lawful

money of the United States of America, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages.

of 12

In the event suit is brought upon this Bond by the COUNTY and judgment is recovered, the

SURETY shall pay all costs incurred by the COUNTY in such suit, including attorney’s fees to be

fixed by the Court.

Enclosed is a Bid Bond in the approved form, in the amount of

Dollars

($ ) being in the amount of five percent (5%) of the Contract Sum.

The money payable on this bond shall be paid to the COUNTY, for the failure of the Bidder to

execute a Contract within ten (10) days after receipt of the Contract and at the same time furnish

a Payment Bond and Performance Bond.

(SIGNATURES ON NEXT PAGE)

of 12

IN TESTIMONY THEREOF, the PRINCIPAL and SURETY have caused these presents to be duly signed and sealed this day of , 20__ ATTEST: PRINCIPAL BY (SEAL)

CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE PRINCIPAL I, , certify that I am the Secretary of the

Corporation named as principal in the within bond; that , who

signed the said bond of said corporation; that I know this signature, and his/her signature thereto

is genuine; and that said bond was duly signed, sealed and attested for in behalf of said

Corporation by authority of its governing body.

SECRETARY (CORPORATE SEAL) SURETY BY (SEAL)

END OF SECTION

of 12

PAYMENT BOND

INSTRUCTIONS 1. This form is required for use in connection with the Agreement identified on its


space designated "Principal" on the face of the form. The bond shall be signed by an authorized person. Where such person is signing in a representative capacity (e.g., an attorney-in-fact), but is not a member of the firm, partnership, or joint venture, or an office of the corporation involved, evidence of this authority must be furnished.

3. Corporation executing the bond as surety must be among those appearing on the



State of Georgia to transact surety business in the State of Georgia. 5. Do not date this bond. The County will date this bond the same date or

later than the date of the Agreement. 6. The Surety shall attach a duly authorized power-of-attorney authorizing signature

on its behalf of any attorney-in-fact. 7. Corporations executing the bond shall affix their corporate seals. Individuals shall

execute the bond opposite the word "Seal." 8. The name of each person signing this bond shall be typed or printed in the space

provided.

of 12

PAYMENT BOND

"County:" means Fulton County Government; a political subdivision of the State of Georgia (hereinafter called the “Owner”).

"Project:" means [Insert Project Number and Project Name] "Principal:" (Legal Name and Business Address), [Insert Name of Contractor (hereinafter called the “Principal”] Type of Organization ("X" one): ______ Individual ______ Partnership ______ Joint Venture ______ Corporation "Surety:" (Name and Business Address)

duly authorized by the Commissioner of Insurance of the State of Georgia to transact surety business in the State of Georgia.

"Contract:" Agreement between Principal and Owner, dated _____ day of _____________,

20___, regarding performance of Work relative to the Project. "Penal Sum:" [100% of contract amount] KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, the Principal and Surety hereto, as named above, are held and firmly bound to the Owner in the above Penal Sum for the payment of which well and truly to be made we bind ourselves, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally. WHEREAS, the Principal and the Owner entered into a certain written Contract identified above, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety (hereinafter called the “Contract”), for construction-type services for the Project identified above; NOW, THEREFORE, the conditions of this obligation are such that if the Principal shall promptly make payment of all persons working on or supplying labor or materials or equipment for the performance of said work, this obligation shall be void; otherwise of full force and effect.

1. A “Claimant’ shall be defined herein as any subcontractor, person, party, partnership, corporation or the entity furnishing labor, services or materials used, or reasonably required for use, in the performance of the Contract, without regard to whether such labor, services or materials were sold, leased or rented, and without regard to whether such Claimant is or is not in privity of contract with the Principal or any subcontractor performing work on the Project, including, but not limited to, the following labor, services, or materials: water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service or rental of equipment directly applicable to the Contract.

2. In the event a Claimant files a lien against the property of the Owner, and the

Principal fails or refuses to satisfy or remove it promptly, the Surety shall satisfy or

of 12

remove the lien promptly upon written notice from the Owner, either by bond or as otherwise provided in the Contract.

3. The Surety hereby waives notice of any and all modifications, omissions, additions,

changes, alterations, extensions of time, changes in the payment terms, and any other amendments in or about the Contract and agrees that the obligations undertaken by this Bond shall not be impaired in any manner by reason of any such modifications, omissions, additions, changes, alterations, extensions of time, changes in payment terms, and amendments.

4. The Surety hereby agrees that this Bond shall be deemed amended automatically

and immediately, without formal or separate amendments hereto, upon any amendment or modifications to the Contract, so as to bind the Principal and Surety, jointly and severally, to the full payment of any Claimant under the Contract, as amended or modified, provided only that the Surety shall not be liable for more than the penal sum of the Bond, as specified in the first paragraph hereof.

5. This Bond is made for the use and benefit of all persons, firms, and corporations who

or which may furnish any materials or perform any labor for or on account of the construction-type services to be performed or supplied under the Contract, and any amendments thereto, and they and each of them may sue hereon.

6. No action may be maintained on this Bond after one (1) year from the date the last

services, labor, or materials were provided under the Contract by the Claimant prosecuting said action.

7. This Bond is intended to comply with O.C.G.A. Section 13-10-1, and shall be

interpreted so as to comply with the minimum requirements thereof. However, in the event the express language of this Bond extends protection to the Owner beyond that contemplated by O.C.G.A. Section 13-10-1 and 36-91-1, et seq., or any other statutory law applicable to this Project, then the additional protection shall be enforced in favor of the Owner, whether or not such protection is found in the applicable statutes.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and Surety have hereunto affixed their corporate seals and caused this obligations to be signed by their duly authorized representatives this day of , ___________.

PRINCIPAL:

President/Vice President (Sign) President/Vice President (Type or Print) Attested to by: Secretary/Assistant Secretary (Seal)

of 12

SURETY: By: Attorney-in-Fact (Sign) Attorney-in-Fact (Type or Print)

Secretary/Assistant Secretary (Seal)

of 12

PERFORMANCE BOND

INSTRUCTIONS 1. This form is required for use in connection with the Agreement identified on its


space designated "Principal" on the face of the form. The bond shall be signed by an authorized person. Where such person is signing in a representative capacity (e.g., an attorney-in-fact), but is not a member of the firm, partnership, or joint venture, or an office of the corporation involved, evidence of this authority must be furnished.

3. Corporation executing the bond as surety must be among those appearing on the



State of Georgia to transact surety business in the State of Georgia. 5. Do not date this bond. The County will date this bond the same date or later than

the date of the Agreement. 6. The Surety shall attach a duly authorized power-of-attorney authorizing signature

on its behalf of any attorney-in-fact. 7. Corporations executing the bond shall affix their corporate seals. Individuals shall

execute the bond opposite the word "Seal." 8. The name of each person signing this bond shall be typed or printed in the space

provided.

of 12

PERFORMANCE BOND "County:" means Fulton County Government; a political subdivision of the State of Georgia (hereinafter called the “Owner”).

"Project:" means [Insert Project Number and Project Name] "Principal:" (Legal Name and Business Address), [Insert Name of Contractor (hereinafter called the “Principal”] Type of Organization ("X" one): ______ Individual ______ Partnership ______ Joint Venture ______ Corporation "Surety:" (Name and Business Address)

duly authorized by the Commissioner of Insurance of the State of Georgia to transact surety business in the State of Georgia.

"Contract:" Agreement between Principal and Owner, dated _____ day of _____________, 20___,

regarding performance of Work relative to the Project. "Penal Sum:" [100% of contract amount] __________.

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, the Principal and Surety hereto, as named above, are held and firmly bound to the Owner in the above Penal Sum for the payment of which well and truly to be made we bind ourselves, our executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally. WHEREAS, the Principal and the Owner entered into a certain written Contract identified above, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety (hereinafter called the “Contract”), for construction-type services for the Project identified above; NOW, THEREFORE, the conditions of this obligation are such that if the Principal shall faithfully and fully comply with, perform and fulfill all of the undertakings, covenants, conditions and all other of the terms and conditions of said Contract, including any and all duly authorized modifications of such Contract, within the original term of such Contract and any extensions thereof, which shall include, but not be limited to any obligations created by way of warranties and/or guarantees for workmanship and materials which warranty and/or guarantee may extend for a period of time of one year beyond completion of said Contract, this obligation shall be void; otherwise, of full force and effect. Whenever the Principal shall be, and declared by the Owner to be, in default under the Construction-Type Contract, the Surety shall promptly remedy the default as follows:

1. Complete the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions; or, at the sole option of the Owner,

2. Obtain a bid or bids for completing the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions,

and upon determination by the Surety and the Owner of the lowest responsible bidder, arrange for a contract between such bidder and Owner and make available as the work

of 12

progresses (even though there should be a default or succession of defaults under the Contract or contracts of completion arranged under this paragraph) sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion less the balance of the contract price; but not exceeding, including other costs and damages for which the Surety may be liable hereunder, the penal sum set forth in the first paragraph hereof, as may be adjusted, and the Surety shall make available and pay to the Owner the funds required by this Paragraph prior to the payment of the Owner of the balance of the contract price, or any portion thereof. The term “balance of the contract price,” as used in this paragraph, shall mean the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Contract, and any amendments thereto, less the amount paid by the Owner to the Contractor; or, at the sole option of the Owner,

3. Allow Owner to complete the work and reimburse the Owner for all reasonable costs incurred

in completing the work. In addition to performing as required in the above paragraphs, the Surety shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from any and all losses, liability and damages, claims, judgments, liens, costs and fees of every description, including reasonable attorney’s fees, litigation costs and expert witness fees, which the Owner may incur, sustain or suffer by reason of the failure or default on the part of the Principal in the performance of any or all of the terms, provisions, and requirements of the Contract, including any and all amendments and modifications thereto, or incurred by the Owner in making good any such failure of performance on the part of the Principal. The Surety shall commence performance of its obligations and undertakings under this Bond promptly and without delay, after written notice from the Owner to the Surety. The Surety hereby waives notice of any and all modifications, omissions, additions, changes, alterations, extensions of time, changes in payment terms, and any other amendments in or about the Contract, and agrees that the obligations undertaken by this Bond shall not be impaired in any manner by reason of any such modifications, omissions, additions, changes, alterations, extensions of time, change in payment terms, and amendments. The Surety hereby agrees that this Bond shall be deemed amended automatically and immediately, without formal or separate amendments hereto, upon any amendment to the Contract, so as to bind the Principal and the Surety to the full and faithful performance of the Contract as so amended or modified, and so as to increase the penal sum to the adjusted Contract Price of the Contract. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to or for the use of any person, entity or corporation other than the Owner and any other obligee named herein, or their executors, administrators, successors or assigns. This Bond is intended to comply with O.C.G.A. Section 36-91-1 et seq., and shall be interpreted so; as to comply with; the minimum requirements thereof. However, in the event the express language of this Bond extends protection to; the Owner beyond that contemplated by O.C.G.A. Section 36-91-1 et seq. and O.C.G.A. Section 13-10-1, as amended, or any other statutory law applicable to this Project, then the additional protection shall be enforced in favor of the Owner, whether or not such protection is found in the applicable statutes.

of 12

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have caused these presents to be duly signed and sealed this __________ day of ___________________, 20___. PRINCIPAL:

President/Vice President (Sign) President/Vice President (Type or Print) Attested to by: Secretary/Assistant Secretary (Seal)

SURETY: By: Attorney-in-Fact (Sign) Attorney-in-Fact (Type or Print)

END OF SECTION

20ITB204811K-JAJ Section 4 Pryor Street Entry Plaza Scope of Work and Technical Specifications

Page 1 of 1

SECTION 4

SCOPE OF WORK AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The Work includes selective demolition of the existing entrance plaza and fountain and hardscape, landscape and fountain updates for the new plaza.

Detailed specifications are found on the succeeding pages.

.

PROJECT MANUAL

EXTERIOR HARDSCAPE AND LANDSCAPE DEVELOPMENT

AT PRYOR STREET ENTRY PLAZA

141 Pryor Street SW

Fulton County Atlanta, Georgia HGOR #18039

OWNER: Fulton County Georgia

September 13, 2019

PRYOR STREET ENTRY PLAZA HGOR #18039

TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 2

SECTION 000110 – TABLE OF CONTENTS

Procurement and Contracting Requirements Group

Division Section and Subject Number of

Pages

00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements

Introductory Information 000115 List of Drawing Sheets 000115 - 1 Specifications Group

01 General Requirements 011100 Summary 011100 - 5 012100 Allowances 012100 - 6 012200 Unit Prices 012200 - 2 012300 Alternates 012300 - 4 012600 Contract Modification Procedures 012600 - 2 012900 Payment Procedures 012900 - 9 013100 Project Management and Coordination 013100 - 7 013213 Schedule of The Work 013213 - 7 013300 Submittal Procedures 013300 - 20 014000 Quality Requirements 014000 - 7 014200 References 014200 -18 016000 Product Requirements 016000 - 9 017300 Execution 017300 - 6 017329 Cutting and Patching 017329 - 3 017700 Closeout Procedures 017700 - 6 018900 Site Construction Performance Requirements 018900 - 3

02 Existing Conditions 024133 Selective Site Demolition 024113 - 7

03 Concrete 033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete 033000 - 14

04 Masonry 042000 Unit Masonry Assemblies 042000 - 19 044200 Exterior Stone Cladding 044200 - 17 047200 Cast Stone Masonry 047200 - 3

07 Thermal and Moisture Protection 071113 Bituminous Dampproofing 071113 - 5 079200 Joint Sealants 079200 - 11

13 Special Construction 131200 Fountains 131200 - 16


TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 3

31 Earthwork 311000 Earthwork 311000 - 5 312500 Erosion Sedimentation Controls 312500 - 4

32 Exterior Improvements 321313 Concrete Paving 321313 - 8 321373 Concrete Pavement Joint Sealants 321373 - 5 321413 Concrete Unit Paving - Ungrouted 321413 - 9 323119 Decorative Metal Fences and Gates 323119 - 24 328410 PS Planting Irrigation (Performance Specification) 328410 PS 329000 Exterior Landscape 329000 - 34

33 Utilities 331400 Water Utility Transmission and Distribution 331400 - 4 333113 Site Sanitary Sewerage Gravity Piping 333113 - 4 334200 Stormwater Conveyance 334200 - 3

END OF SECTION 000110


LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 000115 - 1

SECTION 000115 – LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS

Drawing No. Drawing Title Dated C - 1 Selective Demolition Plan 09/13/2019 C - 2 Layout Plan 09/13/2019 C - 3 Grading Plan 09/13/2019 C - 4 Utility Plan 09/13/2019 EC - 1 Erosion Control Plan 09/13/2019 EC - 2 Erosion Control Details 09/13/2019 E - 0.0 Electrical Legend, Schedules, and General Notes 09/13/2019 E - 0.1 Electrical Specifications 09/13/2019 L - 1 Plaza Level Lighting Plan 09/13/2019 HS - 0.1 Notes & Abbreviations 09/13/2019 HS - 0.5 Existing Granite Reuse Plan 09/13/2019 HS - 1 Hardscape Improvement Plan 09/13/2019 HS - 2 Paver Layout Diagram 09/13/2019 HS - 3 Hardscape Layout Plan 09/13/2019 HS - 4 Hardscape Grading Plan 09/13/2019 HS - 5 Hardscape Improvement Details 09/13/2019 HS - 6 Hardscape Improvement Details 09/13/2019 HS - 7 Hardscape Improvement Details 09/13/2019 HS - 8 Hardscape Improvement Details 09/13/2019 HS - 9 Hardscape Improvement Details 09/13/2019 LS - 1 Landscape Improvement Plan 09/13/2019 LS - 2 Irrigation Limits Plan 09/13/2019 LS - 3 Landscape Improvement Details 09/13/2019 BE0.20 General Notes 09/13/2019 BE1.00 Demolition Plan 09/13/2019 BE1.10 New Plan 09/13/2019 BE2.00 Wall Sections 09/13/2019 BE2.10 Details 09/13/2019 FC - 0 Water Feature General Information 09/13/2019 FN - 1 Fountain General Notes 09/13/2019 FD - 1 Fountain Equipment Details 09/13/2019 FD - 2 Fountain Equipment Details 09/13/2019 FM - 1 Fountain Site Plan 09/13/2019 FM - 2 Fountain Dimension Plan 09/13/2019 FM - 3 Fountain Suction, Drain and Vent Plan 09/13/2019 FM - 4 Fountain Discharge and Fill Plan 09/13/2019 FM - 5 DBVA Direct Burial Vault Install Details 09/13/2019 FM - 6 DBVA Direct Burial Vault Install Details 09/13/2019 FE - 1 Fountain Electrical Plan 09/13/2019



SUMMARY 011100 - 1

SECTION 011100 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. Type of the Contract. 3. Work under other contracts. 4. Products ordered in advance. 5. Owner-furnished products. 6. Use of premises. 7. Specification formats and conventions.

1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Project Identification: Pryor Street Entry Plaza

1. Project Location: 141 Pryor Street SW, Atlanta, Georgia 30303

B. Owner: Fulton County

1. Owner's Representative: Armond Borders, Heery/McAffee3 141 Pryor Street SW, Suite 6001, Atlanta, Georgia 30303

C. Landscape Architect: HGOR: 3445 Peachtree Road NE, Suite 1425, Atlanta, Georgia 30326

D. The Work consists of the following:

1. The Work includes selective demolition of the existing entrance plaza and fountain and hardscape, landscape, and fountain updates for the new plaza.

E. Landscape Architect Identification: The Contract Documents dated (date of Contract Documents) were prepared for the Project by Hughes, Good, O'Leary and Ryan, Inc., 3445 Peachtree Road NE, Suite 1425, Atlanta, Georgia 30326

1.4 TYPE OF CONTRACT

A. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.


SUMMARY 011100 - 2

1.5 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS

A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.

B. Concurrent Work: Owner will award a separate contract for the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract.

1. Artwork on Steel Trellis: A separate contract will be awarded to TBD to install the Artwork on the Steel Trellis on the Curved Wall at the South end of the limits of Construction.

1.6 USE OF PREMISES

A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and loading areas, and entrances serving

premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of

materials and equipment on-site.

1.7 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 50-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.

1. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross-referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents.

2. Division 01: Sections in Division 01 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.


SUMMARY 011100 - 3

2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted.

a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

1.8 PROJECT SCHEDULE

A. The General contractor will, in conference with Subcontractors and Vendors, develop all required project schedules.

1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS AND FEES

A. Comply with the requirements of the Owner-Contractor Agreement Form. 1. In the event of conflicting requirements between applicable codes and the Contract

Documents; the more stringent requirement shall govern.

B. Contractor shall procure and pay all fees and costs for approvals, permits, licenses, utility connections and meters.

C. Deliver copies of all permits; licenses and certificates to Owner prior to final payments.

1.12 CONTRACT DOCUMENT FORMAT AND LANGUAGE

A. The Drawings: The Drawings are graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents, wherever located and whenever issued, showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams.

B. The Specifications: The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services.

C. The Project Manual: The Project Manual is the volume usually assembled for the Work which may include the bidding requirements for materials, sample forms, Conditions of the Contract and Specifications.

D. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings.

E. In the event of conflicts or discrepancies among the Contract Documents, interpretations will be based on the following priorities.

1. The Owner-Contractor Agreement and the Conditions of the Contract shall take precedence over the Specifications, and any Addenda and Modifications thereto.

2. Between Drawings, and Specifications, the higher quality or greater quantity shall govern.


SUMMARY 011100 - 4

3. Within the Drawings of different scales, the larger scale drawing shall take precedence; descriptive notes shall take precedence over general notes.

4. Within the Specifications, higher quality requirements shall govern. 5. The Contractor shall not rely on scaled dimensions, where dimensions are not given by

figures or notes, Contractor shall request accurate dimensions from the Landscape Architect.

F. If the Contract Documents are not complete as to any minor detail or a required construction system or with regard to the number of combining or installing parts, materials or equipment, but there exists an accepted trade standard for good and workmanlike construction, such detail shall be deemed to be an implied requirement of the Contract Documents in accordance with such standard. The term "minor detail" herein includes the concept of substantially equal components, both where the price of each such component is small even though the aggregate cost or importance may be substantial, and also where a single component is incidental to the work even though its cost or importance may be substantial.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION



ALLOWANCES 012100 - 1

SECTION 012100 - ALLOWANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.

1. Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. In some cases, these allowances include installation. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when additional information is available for evaluation. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order.

B. Allowance: Include in Contract Sum Allowances specified herein covering product or service stated. 1. Schedule of Values: Designate in Schedule of Values value of materials or services

required under each unit cost allowance.

C. Products or Services Under Allowances: Allowances under this Contract are dollar valued determined by the Contractor based on the quantity of products or services described in the allowance description. Allowances shall include all costs associated with providing these products or services including, but not limited to: transportation; delivery; storage; taxes; installation; cutting and patching of the work to provide complete installation; protection, repair or replacement of damage or defects in allowance work or damage to adjacent materials; allowance for waste; and Subcontractor's and Contractor's overhead and profit. No consideration will be given by Owner for additional cost in connection with providing these products and services except changes in the scope as defined by the allowance which will be compensated as described by Unit Prices.

D. Adjustment of Costs: Should quantity of product or system be more or less than specified amount of allowance, Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

E. Schedule of Allowances: Attach Schedule of Allowance to Bid Form when Bid is submitted.

1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE

A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract; advise Landscape Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work.



B. At Landscape Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.

C. Purchase products and systems selected by Landscape Architect from the designated supplier.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders.

B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance.

C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work.

1.5 QUANTITY ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials selected by Architect under allowance and shall include taxes, freight, and delivery to Project site.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials selected by Architect under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance.

1.6 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES – Owner Controlled Contingency Allowance

A. Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Landscape Architect for Owner’s purposes and only by Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowances.

B. Contractor’s [overhead, profit, and] related costs for products and equipment ordered by Owner under the contingency allowance are included in the allowance and are not part of the Contract Sum. These costs include delivery, installation, taxes, insurance, equipment rental, and similar costs.

C. Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will include Contractor’s related costs and reasonable overhead and profit margins.

D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to Owner by Change Order.

1.7 TESTING AND INSPECTING ALLOWANCES

A. Testing and inspection allowances include the cost of engaging testing agencies, actual tests and inspections, and reporting results.



B. The allowance does not include incidental labor required to assist the testing agency or costs for retesting if previous tests and inspections result in failure. The cost for incidental labor to assist the testing agency shall be included in the Contract Sum.

C. Costs of services not required by the Contract Documents are not included in the allowance.

D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the testing and inspecting allowance to Owner by Change Order.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work.

3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES

A. Schedule of Allowances is attached herewith.



SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES

ALLOWANCE NUMBER DESCRIPTION COST

1. Division 01 - General Requirements

Allowance No. 1 Owner construction contingency - Include a contingency allowance of $100,000 for use

according to the Owner's instructions.

$100,000.00



UNIT PRICES 012200 - 1

SECTION 012200 - UNIT PRICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices. 1. Unit Prices shall be valid until the Date of Substantial Completion.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Unit price is an amount proposed by bidders, a price per unit of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by Change Order if estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Unit prices shall include cost of materials and labor to furnish and install items indicated including accessories, attachments and finishes specified or necessary for complete installation including but not limited to wiring, cutting and patching of adjacent materials or for tie in to complete system, transportation, delivery, storage, handling, protection of complete work, repair of damaged work resultant from installation of this work, fees, governmental inspections, taxes and Contractor's and Subcontractor's overhead and profit. No additional cost will be allowed for this work. 1. Unit price shall not apply to replacement or renovation of previously installed work except

as required for installation of allowance work.

B. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections.

C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.

D. List of Unit Prices: A list of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections and Drawings referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price.


UNIT PRICES 012200 - 2


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LIST OF UNIT PRICES

A. A list of Unit Prices is attached herewith.



ALTERNATES 012300 - 1

SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.

B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

D. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials and methods necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate.


ALTERNATES 012300 - 2


PART 3 - EXECUTION



CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1

SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Landscape Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, in the form of a memorandum.

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Landscape Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Proposal Requests issued by Landscape Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Unless otherwise indicated in the proposal request, within 10 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit to the Landscape Architect for the Owner's review a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of

the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.


CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 2

B. Contractor-Initiated Change Order Proposals Requests: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Landscape Architect.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

C. Proposal Request Form: Change Order Proposal Requests will be documented by memorandum.

1.5 ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, base each Change Order proposal on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins.

B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the Purchase Order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. Submit claims within fourteen (14) days of receipt of the Change Order authorizing work to proceed. Owner will reject claims submitted later than fourteen (14) days after such authorization.

1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Landscape Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.


PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)



PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1

SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. 1. Unit Prices shall be valid until the Date of Substantial Completion.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cost Loaded Schedule: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4 COST LOADED SCHEDULE

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Cost Loaded Schedule with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.

1. Correlate line items in the Cost Loaded Schedule with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule.

2. Submit the Cost Loaded Schedule to the Landscape Architect at the earliest possible date but no later than fourteen (14) days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

3. Sub-schedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide sub-schedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment.

B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Cost Loaded Schedule. The maximum duration for each activity in the Schedule is ten (10) days.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification in the Cost Loaded Schedule:

a. Project name and location.



b. Name of Landscape Architect. c. Landscape Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.

2. Submit draft of the Cost Loaded Schedule. 3. Arrange the Cost Loaded Schedule in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the

following for each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value.

1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. Include separate line items under required principal subcontracts for operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project Record Documents, and demonstration and training.

5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the Cost Loaded Schedule for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If specified, include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing.

7. Provide separate line items in the Cost Loaded Schedule for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

8. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Cost Loaded Schedule for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities.

9. Each item in the Cost Loaded Schedule and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Cost Loaded Schedule or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

b. Provide a separate line item for Payment & Performance Bonds.

10. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Cost Loaded Schedule before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.



1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Landscape Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

C. Payment Application Times: Progress payments shall be submitted to Landscape Architect by the 25th day of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month.

D. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 as form for Applications for Payment.

E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Landscape Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the Cost Loaded Schedule and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

F. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, before after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit

waivers. 4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to

Owner. 5. Waiver Delays: Submit each Application for Payment with Contractor's waiver of

mechanic's lien for construction period covered by the application. a. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every

entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.



H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit

waivers. 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity

involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.

5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner.

I. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list. 5. Schedule of unit prices. 6. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance

of the Work. 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report of preconstruction conference. 13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 14. Performance and payment bonds. 15. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. 16. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required.

J. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

K. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that

taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.



3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of

date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

9. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement.


PART 3 - EXECUTION




SCHEDULE OF VALUES

FOR

PRYOR STREET ENTRY PLAZA 141 PRYOR STREET SW

FULTON COUNTY, ATLANTA, GEORGIA

SEPTEMBER 13, 2019

01. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS $_______________

02. EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 41 13 Selective Site Demolition $_______________

03. CONCRETE

03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories $_______________

03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing $_______________

03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete $_______________

03 30 53 Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete (Limited Applications) $_______________

03 33 10 Architectural Concrete $_______________

03 35 20 Brushed Concrete Finishing $_______________

03 45 00 Precast Architectural Concrete $_______________

04. MASONRY

04 05 13 Masonry, Mortaring and Grouting $_______________

04 20 00 Unit Masonry Assemblies $_______________

04 42 00 Exterior Stone Cladding $_______________

04 43 00 Stone Masonry Assemblies $_______________

05. METALS

05 73 10 Decorative Metal Railings $_______________

05 73 16 Wire Rope Decorative Railings $_______________

07. THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 11 13 Bituminous Dampproofing $_______________

07 13 26 Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing $_______________

07 14 16 Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing $_______________

07 19 00 Water Repellents $_______________

07 24 00 Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems $_______________

07 92 00 Joint Sealants $_______________



09. FINISHES

09 63 40 Stone Paving and Flooring $_______________

09 93 13.13 Exterior Staining $_______________

09 96 00 High-Performance Coatings $_______________

13. SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13 12 13 Exterior Fountains $_______________

22. PLUMBING

22 52 00 Fountain Plumbing Systems $_______________

22 52 10 Water Feature Plumbing System $_______________

26. ELECTRICAL

26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical $_______________

26 10 00 Medium Voltage Electrical Distribution $_______________

26 56 26 Landscape Lighting $_______________

31. EARTHWORK

31 12 00 Selective Site Clearing $_______________

31 13 16 Tree Protection and Selective Tree and Shrub Trimming $_______________

31 22 00 Earthmoving $_______________

31 23 00 Excavation and Backfill for Landscape Areas $_______________

31 34 19 Geosynthetic Soil Reinforcement $_______________

32. EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 13 13 Concrete Paving $_______________

32 13 73 Concrete Pavement Joint Sealants $_______________

32 14 13 Concrete Unit Paving – Ungrouted $_______________

32 31 19 Decorative Metal Fences and Gates $_______________

32 84 10PS Planting Irrigation (Performance Specification) $_______________

32 90 00 Exterior Landscape $_______________

33. UTILITIES

33 44 00 Storm Utility Water Drains $_______________

33 46 00 Subdrainage $_______________

33 47 13.13 Pond Liners

$_______________


PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Coordination Drawings. 2. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 3. Project meetings. 4. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).

B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility will be assigned to a specific contractor.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

B. Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Each contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.



4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.

C. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Delivery and processing of submittals. 4. Progress meetings. 5. Preinstallation conferences. 6. Startup and adjustment of systems. 7. Project closeout activities.

E. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

b. Indicate required installation sequences. c. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of

dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Landscape Architect for resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

d. Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings.



2. Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 30 by 40 inches (750 by 1000 mm).

3. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque copies of each submittal. Landscape Architect will return one copy.

a. Submit five copies where Coordination Drawings are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Landscape Architect will retain two copies; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Drawing.

4. Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those Sections.

B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.

1.6 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL

A. General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work.

1. Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with other contractors.

1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Landscape Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting

minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Landscape Architect, within five (5) days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Landscape Architect, but no later than fifteen (15) days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Landscape Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; and other concerned parties shall attend the



conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Project Progress Meetings will take place every other week on Wednesday from 9:00am until 10:00am.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for RFIs. g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. i. Distribution of the Contract Documents. j. Submittal procedures. k. Preparation of Record Documents. l. Use of the premises and existing building. m. Work restrictions. n. Owner's occupancy requirements. o. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. p. Construction waste management and recycling. q. Parking availability. r. Office, work, and storage areas. s. Equipment deliveries and priorities. t. First aid. u. Security. v. Progress cleaning. w. Working hours.

4. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes.

1.8 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs)

A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following:

1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Contractor.



4. Name of Landscape Architect. 5. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or

the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 10. Contractor's signature. 11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments.

C. Hard-Copy RFIs:

1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number.

D. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above.

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.

E. Landscape Architect's Action: Landscape Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow seven working days for Landscape Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Landscape Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.

2. Landscape Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Landscape Architect's time for response will start again.

3. Landscape Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Landscape Architect in writing within seven (7) calendar days of receipt of the RFI response.

F. On receipt of Landscape Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Landscape Architect within five (5) calendar days if Contractor disagrees with response.



G. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log bi-weekly. Include the following:

1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Landscape Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Landscape Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and

Proposal Request, as appropriate. 9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as

appropriate.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS:

A. Inspection of Conditions: Require the installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and condition under which work is to be performed. Do not proceed until satisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner.

B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations to the extent that those instructions and recommendations are more explicit or stringent than requirements contained in Contract Documents.

C. Inspect materials or equipment immediately upon delivery and again prior to installation. Reject damaged and defective items.

D. Visual Effects: Provide uniform joint widths in exposed work. Arrange joints in exposed work to obtain the best visual effect. Refer questionable choices to the Landscape Architect for final decision.

E. Recheck dimensions and measurements, before starting each installation.

F. Temporary Utilities: Monitor the use and verify that adequate services are provided and maintained.

3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.



B. Clean and maintain completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period.


SCHEDULING OF THE WORK 013213 -1


SECTION 013213 – SCHEDULING OF THE WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 INTRODUCTION

A. This Section describes the construction scheduling and progress reporting standard which will be required of the contractor awarded the Contract. The primary objectives of the requirements of this Section are:

1. To insure adequate planning and execution of the Work by the Contractor; 2. To assist the County and Project Manager in evaluating the progress of the Work; 3. To provide for optimum coordination by Contractor of its trades, subcontractors and

suppliers, and of its Work with the work or services provided by the County or any separate contractors; and

4. To permit the timely prediction or detection of events or occurrences which may affect the timely prosecution of the Work.

5. Here/in below, the owner’s representative agent or the program manager (PM), is referred to as the Project Manager.

1.2 GENERAL SCHEDULING REQUIREMENTS

A. The Work of this Contract shall be planned, scheduled, executed, and reported using the critical path method (CPM). The Contractor shall use one of the following software programs to develop its Detailed Construction Schedule:

1. Primavera Project Planner, latest version 2. Microsoft Project, latest version (MPX file)

B. The Detailed Construction Schedule, as defined herein, shall represent the Contractor’s

commitment and intended plan for completion of the Work in compliance with the Contract completion date and interim milestone dates specified. The Detailed Construction Schedule shall take into account all foreseeable activities to be accomplished by any separate contractors or the County, and interface dates with utility companies, the County’s operations, and others. The Detailed Construction Schedule shall anticipate all necessary manpower and resources to complete the Work within the dates set forth.

C. Once approved by the Project Manager, the Detailed Construction Schedule will become the

Schedule of Record, and will be the basis for coordinating the Work, scheduling the Work, monitoring the Work, reviewing progress payment requests, evaluating time extension requests, and all other objectives listed above. No other schedule will be recognized for this Contract.

D. The Contractor is responsible for determining the sequence of activities, the time estimates

of the detailed construction activities and the means, methods, techniques and procedures to be employed. The Detailed Construction Schedule shall represent the Contractor’s best judgment of how it will prosecute the Work in compliance with the Contract requirements. The Contractor shall ensure that Detailed Construction Schedule is current and accurate and is properly and timely monitored, updated and revised as Project conditions and the Contract



Documents may require.

E. When there are separate contractors working concurrently on the Project whose work must interface or be coordinated with the Work of the Contractor, the Contractor shall coordinates its activities with the activities of the separate contractors, and the Detailed Construction Schedule shall take into account and reflect such work by others.

F. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for expediting the delivery of all materials and

equipment to be furnished by it so that the progress of construction shall be maintained according to the currently approved construction schedule for the Work. The Contractor shall notify the Project Manager in writing, and in a timely and reasonable manner, whenever the Contractor determines or anticipates that the delivery date of any material or equipment to be furnished by the Contractor will be later than the delivery date indicated by the currently approved construction schedule, or required consistent with the completion requirements of this Contract, subject to schedule updates as herein provided.

1.3 DETAILED CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Within two (2) weeks after the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit a Detailed Construction Schedule according to the requirements established herein.

B. The Detailed Construction Schedule shall consist of a time-scaled, detailed network graphic

representation of all activities which are part of the Contractor’s construction plan and an accompanying listing of activity’s dependencies and interrelationships. The Detailed Construction Schedule submission shall include, but not be limited to, the following information:

1. Project name 2. Distinct, logical and identifiable subdivisions of Work 3. Activities for all aspects of the Work, with durations not exceeding fourteen (14)

calendar days for all activities for which the Contractor will perform actual construction work. Material procurement, submittals, concrete curing and other similar activities may exceed fourteen (14) calendar days if approved by the Project Manager. Related activities, each of a duration of five (5) calendar days or less, may be shown as one activity together, if not on the critical path of timely job completion.

4. Outage schedules for existing utility services that will be interrupted during the performance of the Work

5. Acquisition and installation of equipment and materials supplied and/or installed by the County or separate contractors

6. All start dates, milestones, float and completion dates 7. An accounting of the number of workdays anticipated to be lost due to weather. 8. A tabular report listing all predecessor and successor activities for each activity 9. A legible time scaled network diagram showing the critical path. 10. A listing of the project calendar, indicating the anticipated days of work performance 11. A usb thumb drive, in a form and format acceptable to the Project Manager, of the

Detailed Construction Schedule including all required submission information resident in the computer system and containing all of the files associated with the schedule.

C. Activities and milestones to appear on the Detailed Construction Schedule shall include, but

not be limited to, site work, exterior wall systems, paving, major material fabrication and



delivery, shop drawings submittals, bi-weekly progress meetings, coordination requirements, mock-up installations and inspections, dates of Substantial and Final Completion, Certificate of Occupancy inspection, systems testing and instruction, and special County reviews and decision points that impact the Work.

D. Schedule Reports: Schedule submissions will contain the following minimum information for each activity:

1. Activity number, description and estimated duration 2. Anticipated start and finish dates 3. Responsibility for activity 4. The cost loading values for each activity.

E. For all major equipment and materials to be fabricated or supplied for the Project, the

Detailed Construction Schedule shall show a sequence of activities including:

1. Preparation of shop drawings and sample submissions 2. A reasonable time for review of shop drawings and samples or such time as specified

in the Contract Documents 3. Shop fabrication, delivery and storage 4. Erection or installation 5. Testing of equipment and materials.

F. The Contractor shall submit, as a part of the data submitted to the Project Manager, a

narrative report indicating the anticipated allocation by the Contractor of the following resources and work shifts for each activity which he proposes to be utilized on the Project:

1. Labor resources; 2. Equipment resources; and 3. Whether it proposes the Work to be performed on single, double or triple shifts, and

whether it is to be done on a 5, 6 or 7 day work week basis.

G. The Project Manager shall have the right to require the Contractor to modify any portion of the Contractor’s Detailed Construction Schedule, or Recovery Schedule, as herein required, (including cost loading) with the Contractor bearing the expense thereof, which the Project Manager reasonably determines to be:

1. Impractical or unreasonable; 2. based upon erroneous calculations or estimates; 3. Not in compliance with other provisions of the Contract Documents; 4. required in order to ensure proper coordination by the Contractor of the Work of its

subcontractors and with the work or services being provided by any separate contractors;

5. Necessary to avoid undue interference with the County’s operations or those of any utility companies or adjoining property owners;

6. Necessary to ensure completion of the Work by the milestone and completion dates set forth in the Contract Documents;

7. Required in order for the Contractor to comply with the requirements of this Section or any other requirements of the Contract Documents; or

8. Not in accordance with the Contractor’s actual operations.



1.4 COST LOADING

A. As part of the submission of the Detailed Construction Schedule, the Contractor shall submit a breakdown of the expected value of each of the schedule activities for which payment is required.

B. The cost breakdown of the Detailed Construction Schedule will be the Schedule of Values and will be used as the bases for which the Contractor submits their monthly progress pay applications.

1.5 UPDATING OF CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE/PROGRESS REPORTS

A. Not less than seven (7) calendar days before the submission of the monthly progress payment request, or on a date specified by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall arrange for its Project Manager, Superintendent and necessary subcontractors and suppliers to attend a monthly schedule meeting with the Project Manager to review the Contractor’s report of actual progress. Said report shall set forth up-to-date and accurate progress data, and shall be prepared by the Contractor in consultation with all principal subcontractors and suppliers.

B. The progress report of the Contractor shall show the activities, or portions of activities,

completed during the reporting period, the actual start and finish dates for these activities, remaining duration and/or estimated completion dates for activities currently in progress, and quantities of material installed during the reporting period.

C. The Project Manager will produce a computerized update worksheet for the Contractor to

complete as a part of this process.

D. At the monthly schedule meeting a total review of the Project will take place including but not limited to, the following:

1. Current update of the Detailed Construction Schedule 2. Anticipated detailed construction activities for the subsequent report period 3. Critical items pending 4. Contractor requested changes to the Detailed Construction Schedule.

E. The Contractor shall submit a narrative with the progress report which shall include, but not

be limited to, a description of problem areas, current and anticipated delaying factors and their impact, explanations of corrective actions taken or planned, any proposed newly planned activities or changes in sequence, and proposed logic for a Recovery Schedule, if required, as further described herein. The report shall also include:

1. A narrative describing actual Work accomplished during the reporting period 2. A list of major construction equipment used on the Project during the reporting period 3. The total number of men by craft actually engaged in the Work during the reporting

period, with such total stated separately as to office, supervisory, and field personnel 4. A manpower and equipment forecast for the succeeding thirty (30) days, stating the total

number of men by craft, and separately stating such total as to office, supervisory and field personnel

5. A list of Contractor supplied materials and equipment, indicating current availability and anticipated job site delivery dates



6. Anticipated changes or additions to Contractor’s supervisory personnel.

F. As part of the updating process, the Project Manager will calculate, based upon progress data provided by the Contractor and agreed to by the Project Manager, the value of Work completed based on the sum of the cost loading amounts for all activities, including activities specifically defined for stored materials, less the amount previously paid. Summation of all values of each activity less the appropriate percent of retainage shall be the maximum amount payable to the Contractor, provided that the Contractor has complied with all requirements of the Contract Documents.

G. No invoice for payment shall be submitted and no payment whatsoever will be made to the Contractor until the required narrative reports, as defined herein, have been submitted and the Detailed Construction Schedule has been updated.

1.6 RECOVERY SCHEDULE

A. Should the updated Detailed Construction Schedule, at any time during the Contractor’s performance, show, in the sole opinion of the Project Manager, that the Contractor is behind schedule for any milestone or completion date for any location or category of work, the Contractor, at the request of the Project Manager, shall prepare a Recovery Schedule within five (5) days, at no additional cost to the County (unless the County is solely responsible for the event or occurrence which has caused the schedule slippage), explaining and displaying how the Contractor intends to reschedule its Work in order to regain compliance with the Detailed Construction Schedule within thirty (30) calendar days.

B. If the Contractor believes that all of the time can be recovered within thirty (30) calendar

days, the Contractor will be permitted to prepare a Recovery Schedule as set forth below. However, if the Contractor believes it will take more than thirty (30) days to recover all of the lost time, it shall prepare and submit a request for revision to the Detailed Construction Schedule and comply with all of the requirements of a Schedule Revision as set forth in Paragraph 8 below.

C. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Project Manager a one month maximum

duration Recovery Schedule, incorporating the best available information from sub- consultants, subcontractors and others which will permit a return to the Detailed Construction Schedule at the earliest possible time. The Contractor shall prepare a Recovery Schedule to the same level of detail as the Detailed Construction Schedule. The Recovery Schedule shall be prepared in coordination with other separate contractors on the Project.

D. Within two (2) days after submission of the Recovery Schedule to the Project Manager, the

Contractor and any of the necessary subcontractors, suppliers, vendors, manufacturers, etc. shall participate in a conference with the Project Manager to review and evaluate the Recovery Schedule. Within two (2) days of the conference, the Contractor shall submit the revisions necessitated by the review for the Project Manager’s review and approval. The Contractor shall use the approved Recovery Schedule as its plan for returning to the Detailed Construction Schedule.

E. The Contractor shall confer continuously with the Project Manager to assess the

effectiveness of the Recovery Schedule. As a result of these conferences, the Project Manager will direct the Contractor as follows:



1. If the Project Manager determines the Contractor continues behind schedule, the Project Manager will direct the Contractor to prepare a Schedule Revision and comply with all of the requirements of a Schedule Revision as stated herein and the other requirements of the Contract Documents; provided, however, that nothing herein shall limit in any way the rights and remedies of the County and Project Manager as provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents; or

2. If the Project Manager determines the Contractor has successfully complied with provisions of the Recovery Schedule, the Project Manager will direct the Contractor to return to the use of the approved Detailed Construction Schedule.

F. In carrying out any approved Recovery Schedule, or whenever it becomes apparent that any critical activity completion date may not be met, the Contractor shall take any or all of the following minimum actions, as may be required, at no additional cost to the County:

1. Increase manpower to put the Work back on schedule. 2. Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per working day, working days

per week, amount of construction equipment, or any combination which will place the Work back on schedule.

3. Reschedule activities to achieve maximum practical concurrence and place the Work back on schedule.

G. If the Contractor fails to take appropriate action as required by this Paragraph 7 to recover

delays in the schedule, the Project Manager may take action to attempt to put the Work back on schedule and deduct the cost of such action from monies due or to become due the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.7 SCHEDULE REVISIONS

A. Should the Contractor desire to or be otherwise required under the Contract Documents to make modifications or changes in its method of operation, its sequence of Work or the duration of the activities in its Construction Schedule, it shall do so in accordance with the requirements of this Paragraph and the Contract Documents. The approved Detailed Construction Schedule may only be revised by written approval of the Project Manager as provided herein.

B. The Contractor shall submit requests for revisions to the Detailed Construction Schedule to

the Project Manager, using a Schedule Revision Form provided by the Project Manager, together with written rationale for revisions and description of logic for rescheduling work, substantiating that the milestone and completion dates will be met as listed in the Contract Documents. Proposed revisions acceptable to the Project Manager and County will be approved in writing and incorporated into the Detailed Construction Schedule.

C. Requests for revision will be accompanied by evidence acceptable to the Project Manager

that the Contractor's suppliers, subcontractors and sub-subcontractors are in agreement with the proposed revisions.

D. If there are separate contractors on the Project, the approval of the separate contractors shall

be obtained to make the proposed schedule revisions. If accepted by the Project Manager and County, the revisions shall be binding upon the Contractor and all separate contractors on the Project.



E. The impact of all change orders to this Contract shall be included in the Detailed Construction Schedule.

1.8 FLOAT TIME

A. Float or slack time associated with one chain of activities is defined as the amount of time between earliest start date and latest start date or between earliest finish date and latest finish date for such activities, as calculated as part of the currently approved construction schedule. Float or slack time shown on the currently approved construction schedule is not for exclusive use or benefit of either the County or the Contractor and is available for use by either of them according to whichever first needs the benefit of the float to facilitate the effective use of available resources and to minimize the impact of Project problems, delays,

impact, acceleration or changes in the Work which may arise during performance. The Contractor specifically agrees that float time may be used by the County or Project Manager in conjunction with their review activities or to resolve Project problems. The Contractor agrees that there will be no basis for any modification of the milestone or completion dates or an extension of the Contract Time, or a claim for additional compensation as a result of any Project problem, delay, impact, acceleration, or change order which only results in the loss of available float on the currently approved construction schedule.

B. Float time shown on any construction schedule shall not be used arbitrarily by the Contractor

in a manner which, in the opinion of the Project Manager, unnecessarily delays separate contractors from proceeding with their work in a way which is detrimental to the interests of the County.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)



SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Landscape Architect's responsive action.

B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Landscape Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Landscape Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Landscape Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities.

D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Landscape Architect's receipt of submittal. No



extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow ten (10) days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Landscape Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow ten (10) days for review of each resubmittal.

E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Landscape Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.01.A).

i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. l. Other necessary identification.

F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Landscape Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Landscape Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. 1. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.



f. Category and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. h. Specification Section number and title. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. j. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. k. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. l. Remarks. m. Signature of transmitter.

2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Landscape Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same label information as related submittal.

I. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "Insert approval notation from Landscape

Architect's action stamp."

J. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

K. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating " Insert approval notation from Landscape Architect's action stamp" taken by Landscape Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.

1. Number of Copies: Submit three (3) copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Landscape Architect, will return two (2) copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.

2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows, unless otherwise indicated: a. Initial Submittal: Submit a preliminary single copy of each submittal where

selection of options, color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics is required. Landscape Architect will return submittal with options selected.

b. Final Submittal: Submit three (3) copies, unless copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit five (5) copies where copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Landscape Architect will retain two (2) copies;



remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. g. Printed performance curves. h. Mill reports. i. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals. j. Compliance with specified referenced standards. k. Testing by recognized testing agency. l. Notation of coordination requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and

control wiring. f. Templates and patterns. g. Schedules. h. Design calculations. i. Compliance with specified standards. j. Notation of coordination requirements. k. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. l. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. m. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. n. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed

wiring.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 18 by 24 inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.

3. Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal as follows:



a. Initial Submittal: Submit one correctable, translucent, reproducible print and three (3) blue- or black-line prints. Landscape Architect will return the reproducible print.

b. Final Submittal: Submit three (3) blue- or black-line prints, unless prints are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit five (5) prints where prints are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Landscape Architect will retain two (2) prints; remainder will be returned.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following:

1. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups. 2. Identification/Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to

facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Landscape Architect's sample where so indicated. Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.

4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples for Initial Selection: Submit one (1) full set of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Landscape Architect will return submittal with options selected.

5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.



a. Number of Samples for Verification: Submit three (3) sets of Samples. Landscape Architect will retain two (2) Sample sets; remainder will be returned.

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three (3) sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

E. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures."

F. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures."

2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.

1. Number of Copies: Submit two (2) copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Landscape Architect will return one (1) copy.

2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity Contractor, testing agency, or design professional responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

B. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

C. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

D. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

E. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

F. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.



G. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

H. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

I. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

J. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

K. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

L. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

M. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." "Closeout Procedures."

N. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

O. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.

P. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:



1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

Q. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.

R. Construction Photographs: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation."

S. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to Landscape Architect.

1. Landscape Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return the entire submittal for resubmittal.

2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Landscape Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit five (5) copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Landscape Architect.

B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. General: Landscape Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.

B. Action Submittals: Landscape Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Landscape Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: 1. Final Unrestricted Release: Where submittals are marked "No Exceptions Taken," that

part of the work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend upon that compliance.

2. Final-but-Restricted Release: Where submittals are marked "Approved as Noted," that part of the work covered by the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend on that compliance.

3. Returned for Re-submittal: When submittal is marked "Rejected, Resubmit," do not proceed with that part of the work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal in accordance with the notations, re-submit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain a different action mark.

4. Other Action: Where a submittal is for information or record purposes or special processing or other activity, the Landscape Architect will return the submittals marked "No Action Taken," or "For Information Only."

C. Informational Submittals: Landscape Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Landscape Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.



QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1

SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Landscape Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Landscape Architect.

C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies to illustrate finishes and materials; that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.



D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.

F. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

G. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

H. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name.

I. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of fifteen (15) previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Landscape Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Landscape Architect for a decision before proceeding.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:



1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. 3. Identification of applicable standards. 4. Identification of test and inspection methods. 5. Number of tests and inspections required. 6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 6. Identification of product and Specification Section. 7. Complete test or inspection data. 8. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 9. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting. 10. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the

Contract Document requirements. 11. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services



of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program.

G. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

H. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing

results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies and mockups to adequately

demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform

same tasks for Project. e. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups; do not

reuse products on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Landscape Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

I. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Landscape Architect.

2. Notify Landscape Architect seven (7) calendar days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Landscape Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or

construction.



5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.

1.7 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as authorized by Change Orders.

3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Contractor's Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

2. Notify testing agencies at least forty-eight (48) hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."

D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Landscape Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.



1. Notify Landscape Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project

site.

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within fifteen (15) days of date established for commencement of the Work.

1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows:

B. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.

2. Notifying Landscape Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.



3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Landscape Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Landscape Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Landscape Architect's and Owner's reference during normal working hours.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.

2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.



REFERENCES 014200 - 1

SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of Project. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.

1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied



directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents except comply with standards having different revision dates as referenced in the codes.

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States."

B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 www.aabc.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 www.aamanet.org AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation

Officials (202) 624-5800

www.transportation.org AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (919) 549-8141 www.aatcc.org ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155 www.americanbearings.org ACI American Concrete Institute (248) 848-3700 (Formerly: ACI International) www.concrete.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 www.concrete-pipe.org AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530



www.aeic.org AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878 www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700 AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 www.aga.org AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955 www.aham.org AHRI Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The) (703) 524-8800 www.ahrinet.org AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960 www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837 www.aia.org (202) 626-7300 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100 www.steel.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559 www.aitc-glulam.org AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 www.amca.org ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. (607) 256-3313 www.aosaseed.com APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 www.apawood.org APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989 www.archprecast.org API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000 www.api.org ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (See AHRI) ARI American Refrigeration Institute



(See AHRI) ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917 www.asphaltroofing.org ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 ASCE/SEI American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering

Institute

(See ASCE) ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-

Conditioning Engineers (800) 527-4723

www.ashrae.org (404) 636-8400 ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) (973) 882-1170 www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Safety Engineers (The) (847) 699-2929 www.asse.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9500 (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org ATIS Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions (202) 628-6380 www.atis.org AWEA American Wind Energy Association (202) 383-2500 www.awea.org AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (571) 323-3636 www.awinet.org AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of

Canada (403) 453-7387

www.awmac.com AWPA American Wood Protection Association (205) 733-4077 (Formerly: American Wood-Preservers' Association) www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 www.aws.org (305) 443-9353 AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337



www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 www.buildershardware.com BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010 www.gobrick.com BICSI BICSI, Inc. (800) 242-7405 www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991 BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285-3963 (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's

Association)

www.bifma.com BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866) 342-4772 www.bissc.org BOCA BOCA (Building Officials and Code Administrators International

Inc.)

(See ICC) BWF Badminton World Federation 60 3 9283 7155 (Formerly: International Badminton Federation) www.bwfbadminton.org CDA Copper Development Association (800) 232-3282 www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 CEA Canadian Electricity Association (613) 230-9263 www.electricity.ca CEA Consumer Electronics Association (866) 858-1555 www.ce.org (703) 907-7600 CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. (216) 241-7333 www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com CFSEI Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute (866) 465-4732 www.cfsei.org (202) 263-4488 CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700 www.cganet.com CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462 CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 www.cisca.org



CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (404) 622-0073 www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 www.chainlinkinfo.org CPA Composite Panel Association (703) 724-1128 www.pbmdf.com CRI Carpet and Rug Institute (The) (706) 278-3176 www.carpet-rug.org CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council (866) 465-2523 www.coolroofs.org (510) 485-7175 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (800) 328-6306 www.crsi.org (847) 517-1200 CSA Canadian Standards Association (800) 463-6727 www.csa.ca (416) 747-4000 CSA CSA International (866) 797-4272 (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416) 747-4000 www.csa-international.org CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300 CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700 www.cedarbureau.org CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087 (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) www.cti.org CWC Composite Wood Council (See CPA) DASMA Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 www.dasma.com DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 www.dhi.org ECA Electronic Components Association (703) 907-8024 www.ec-central.org ECAMA Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association (See ECA)



EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (See TIA) EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462 www.eima.com (703) 538-1616 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 www.ejma.org ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937 (Electrostatic Discharge Association) www.esda.org ESTA Entertainment Services and Technology Association (See PLASA) EVO Efficiency Valuation Organization (415) 367-3643 www.evo-world.org 44 20 88 167 857 FIBA Fédération Internationale de Basketball 41 22 545 00 00 (The International Basketball Federation) www.fiba.com FIVB Fédération Internationale de Volleyball 41 21 345 35 45 (The International Volleyball Federation) www.fivb.org FM Approvals FM Approvals LLC (781) 762-4300 www.fmglobal.com FM Global FM Global (401) 275-3000 (Formerly: FMG - FM Global) www.fmglobal.com FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors

Association, Inc. (407) 671-3772

www.floridaroof.com FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850 www.fluidsealing.com FSC Forest Stewardship Council U.S. (612) 353-4511 www.fscus.org GA Gypsum Association (301) 277-8686 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208 www.glasswebsite.com GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400



www.greenseal.org HI Hydraulic Institute (973) 267-9700 www.pumps.org HI/GAMA Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers

Association

(See AHRI) HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (See NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 www.hpva.org HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550 www.hpwhite.com IAPSC International Association of Professional Security Consultants (415) 536-0288 www.iapsc.org IAS International Approval Services (See CSA) ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (See ICC) ICC International Code Council (888) 422-7233 www.iccsafe.org (202) 370-1800 ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369 www.icea.net ICPA International Cast Polymer Alliance (703) 525-0511 www.icpa-hq.org ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830 www.icri.org IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 www.iec.ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 www.ieee.org IES Illuminating Engineering Society (212) 248-5000 (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of North

America)

www.ies.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America



(See IES) IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847) 981-0100 www.iest.org IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613) 233-1510 www.igmaonline.org IGSHPA International Ground Source Heat Pump Association (405) 744-5175 www.igshpa.okstate.edu ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426 www.iliai.com Intertek Intertek Group (800) 967-5352 (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA) www.intertek.com ISA International Society of Automation (The) (919) 549-8411 (Formerly: Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation

Society)

www.isa.org ISAS Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (The) (See ISA) ISFA International Surface Fabricators Association (877) 464-7732 (Formerly: International Solid Surface Fabricators

Association) (801) 341-7360

www.isfanow.org ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 www.iso.org ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (See ISFA) ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11 www.itu.int/home KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690 www.kcma.org LMA Laminating Materials Association (See CPA) LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 www.lightning.org MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 www.mbma.com



MCA Metal Construction Association (847) 375-4718 www.metalconstruction.org MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. (888) 480-9138 www.maplefloor.org MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc. (312) 644-6610 www.metalframingmfg.org MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190 MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222 www.marble-institute.com MMPA Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 (Formerly: Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers

Association) (530) 661-9591

www.wmmpa.com MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937 www.paintinfo.com (604) 298-7578 MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and

Fittings Industry Inc. (703) 281-6613

www.mss-hq.org NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (630) 942-6591 www.naamm.org NACE NACE International (800) 797-6223 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) 228-6200 www.nace.org NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926 www.nadca.com NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084 www.naima.org NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848 www.nbgqa.com NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222 www.ncaa.org NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 www.ncma.org NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698



www.nebb.org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 www.necanet.org NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association (207) 829-6901 www.nelma.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (888) 300-6382 www.netaworld.org (269) 488-6382 NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317) 972-6900 www.nfhs.org NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555 (National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770-3000 www.nfpa.org NFPA NFPA International (See NFPA) NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776 www.nfrc.org NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318 www.nhla.com (901) 377-1818 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 www.nlga.org NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association (See NWFA) NOMMA National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association (888) 516-8585 www.nomma.org NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070 NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400 NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010 www.nsf.org NSPE National Society of Professional Engineers (703) 684-2800 www.nspe.org



NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415 www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788 NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800) 323-9736 www.ntma.com NWFA National Wood Flooring Association (800) 422-4556 www.nwfa.org (636) 519-9663 PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 www.pci.org PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720 PLASA PLASA (212) 244-1505 (Formerly: ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology

Association)

www.plasa.org RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections www.boltcouncil.org RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (706) 882-3833 www.rfci.com RIS Redwood Inspection Service (925) 935-1499 www.redwoodinspection.com SAE SAE International (877) 606-7323 (Society of Automotive Engineers) (724) 776-4841 www.sae.org SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. (See ICC) SCTE Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers (800) 542-5040 www.scte.org (610) 363-6888 SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458-4647 www.sdi.org SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 www.steeldoor.org SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (877) 294-5424 www.sefalabs.com (516) 294-5424 SEI/ASCE Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil

Engineers



(See ASCE) SIA Security Industry Association (866) 817-8888 www.siaonline.org (703) 683-2075 SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 293-1995 www.steeljoist.org SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (773) 636-0672 www.smainfo.org SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National

Association (703) 803-2980

www.smacna.org SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100 www.smpte.org SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154 www.sprayfoam.org SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (850) 434-2611 www.spib.org SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781) 647-7026 www.spri.org SRCC Solar Rating and Certification Corporation (321) 638-1537 www.solar-rating.org SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355 www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630 SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772 www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331 STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 www.steeltank.com SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333 www.steelwindows.com SWPA Submersible Wastewater Pump Association (847) 681-1868 www.swpa.org TCA Tilt-Up Concrete Association (319) 895-6911 www.tilt-up.org TCNA Tile Council of North America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 (Formerly: Tile Council of America) www.tileusa.com



TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 www.tema.org TIA Telecommunications Industry Association (703) 907-7700 (Formerly: TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry

Association/Electronic Industries Alliance)

www.tiaonline.org TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic

Industries Alliance

(See TIA) TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700 www.masonrysociety.org TPI Truss Plate Institute (703) 683-1010 www.tpinst.org TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800) 405-8873 www.turfgrasssod.org (847) 649-5555 TRI Tile Roofing Institute (312) 670-4177 www.tileroofing.org UBC Uniform Building Code (See ICC) UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854-3577 www.ul.com UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902 www.uni-bell.org USAV USA Volleyball (888) 786-5539 www.usavolleyball.org (719) 228-6800 USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (800) 795-1747 www.usgbc.org USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. (800) 938-7488 www.usitt.org (315) 463-6463 WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869 www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283-1486 www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651 WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 www.wcmanet.org



WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 www.wdma.com (312) 321-6802 WI Woodwork Institute (916) 372-9943 (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California) www.wicnet.org WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (See MMPA) WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333 www.wsrca.com (650) 938-5441 WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930 www.wwpa.org

C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung e.V. 49 30 2601-0 www.din.de IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-4100 www.iapmo.org ICC International Code Council (888) 422-7233 www.iccsafe.org ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, LLC (800) 423-6587 www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543

D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

COE Army Corps of Engineers (202) 761-0011 www.usace.army.mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-7923 DOC Department of Commerce (301) 975-4040 National Institute of Standards and Technology www.nist.gov



DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-2664 http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220 www.energy.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167 www.epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835-5322 www.faa.gov FG Federal Government Publications (202) 512-1800 www.gpo.gov GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111 www.gsa.gov (202) 619-8925 HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112 www.hud.gov LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000 Environmental Energy Technologies Division http://eetd.lbl.gov OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742 www.osha.gov SD Department of State (202) 647-4000 www.state.gov TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934 National Cooperative Highway Research Program www.trb.org USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-3656 Agriculture Research Service U.S. Salinity Laboratory www.ars.usda.gov USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 Rural Utilities Service www.usda.gov USDJ Department of Justice (202) 307-0703 Office of Justice Programs National Institute of Justice www.ojp.usdoj.gov USP U.S. Pharmacopeia (800) 227-8772 www.usp.org (301) 881-0666



USPS United States Postal Service (202) 268-2000 www.usps.com

E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-1800 Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1800 www.gpo.gov/fdsys DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-2664 Military Specifications and Standards Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus (See FS) FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification (215) 697-2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil Available from Defense Standardization Program www.dsp.dla.mil Available from General Services Administration (800) 488-3111 www.gsa.gov (202) 619-8925 Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole

Building Design Guide (202) 289-7800

www.wbdg.org/ccb MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards (See DOD) USAB United States Access Board (800) 872-2253 www.access-board.gov (202) 272-0080 USATBC

B U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board

(See USAB)



F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

CBHF State of California (800) 952-5210 Department of Consumer Affairs (916) 574-2041 Bureau of Electronic Appliance and Repair, Home Furnishings and

Thermal Insulation

www.bearhfti.ca.gov CCR California Code of Regulations (916) 323-6225 Office of Administrative Law California Title 24 Energy Code www.calregs.com CDHS California Department of Health Care Services (Formerly: California Department of Health Services) (See CCR) CDPH California Department of Public Health Indoor Air Quality Program www.cal-iaq.org CPUC California Public Utilities Commission (800) 848-5580 www.cpuc.ca.gov (415) 703-2782 SCAQMD

South Coast Air Quality Management District www.aqmd.gov

(909) 396-2000

TFS Texas Forest Service Forest Resource Development and Sustainable Forestry (979) 458-6606 http://txforestservice.tamu.edu


PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)



PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1

SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.

D. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.



E. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product.

1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule.

2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings: a. Specification Section number and title. b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f. Installer's name and address.

3. Initial Submittal: Within thirty (30) days after date of commencement of the Work, submit three (3) copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements.

4. Completed List: Within sixty (60) days after date of commencement of the Work, submit three (3) copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements.

5. Landscape Architect's Action: Landscape Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within fifteen (15) days of receipt of completed product list. Landscape Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Landscape Architect's response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement to comply with the Contract Documents.

B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use form provided at end of Section. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,

as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to

other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested.



f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.

g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated.

h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.

j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently

become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

3. Landscape Architect's Action: If necessary, Landscape Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven (7) days of receipt of a request for substitution. Landscape Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within fifteen (15) days of receipt of request, or seven (7) days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. b. Use product specified if Landscape Architect cannot make a decision on use of a

proposed substitution within time allocated.

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.



2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage: 1. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 2. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 3. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 4. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and

equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Refer to Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Landscape Architect will make selection.

5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Landscape Architect's.

6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products.

7. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturer" or "Source" name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.

3. Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Products" include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.

4. Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturer's" include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.

5. Product Options: Where Specification paragraphs titled "Product Options" indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system indicated or a comparable product or system by another manufacturer. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system.

6. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Basis-of-Design Product(s)" are included and also name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers.



a. Substitutions may be considered. 7. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established

Sample, select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with requirements and matches Landscape Architect's sample. Landscape Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product.

8. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with other specified requirements.

a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Landscape Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items.

b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

9. Allowances: Refer to individual Specification Sections and "Allowance" provisions in Division 01 for allowances that control product selection and for procedures required for processing such selections.

2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Timing: Landscape Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within thirty (30) days after commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Landscape Architect.

B. Conditions: Landscape Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Landscape Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Landscape Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

indicated results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.



10. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions: Landscape Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Landscape Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM:

A. Product Substitution Request Form is attached herewith.




PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

TO: _________________________________________________________________________________

FROM: ______________________________________________________________________________

PROJECT NAME: _____________________________________________________________________

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NUMBER: _________________________________________

We hereby submit for your consideration the following product instead of the specified item for the above project:

Section Paragraph Specified Item

_______________ _________________________ ____________________________________

Proposed Substitution: __________________________________________________________________

Attach complete technical data, including laboratory tests, if applicable. Include complete information on changes to Drawings and/or Specifications which proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. Fill in Blanks Below:

A. Does the Substitution affect dimensions shown on Drawings? __________________________________________________________________________

B. Will the undersigned pay for changes to the building design, including engineering and detailing

costs caused by the requested substitution? __________________________________________________________________________

C. What affect does substitution have on other trades?

___________________________________________________________________________

D. Differences between proposed substitution and specified item?

___________________________________________________________________________

E. Manufacturer's warranty of the proposed and specified items are:

Same Different (explain on attachment)

F. Savings in cost and/or time: ____________________________________________________



The undersigned states that the function, appearance and quality are equivalent or superior to the specified item.

Submitted by: _________________________________________ For Use By Design Consultant _________________________________________ Signature Recommended For Owner to: _________________________________________ Accept Accept As Noted _________________________________________ Do Not Accept Firm By ______________________________ Date _____________________________________ Consultant Signature/Owner Initial Telephone ________________________________ Date _____________________________ Remarks __________________________ _________________________________ Landscape Architect's Project Number __________ _________________________________


EXECUTION 017300 - 1

SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. General installation of products. 4. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction. 8. Correction of the Work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor or professional engineer to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor or professional engineer certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.


A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated.

B. Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer of the discipline required, registered in the state in which the Project is located, to perform required engineering services.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.

B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical services.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.

C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Landscape Architect.



Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Landscape Architect promptly.

B. General: Engage a land surveyor or professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions.

3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 5. Notify Landscape Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed

allowable tolerances. 6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by

authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.

D. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Landscape Architect.

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.

1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Owner. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Landscape Architect before proceeding.

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points.

B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two (2) permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.



1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.

2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.

3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Landscape Architect.

2. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.



3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire

work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

K. Cutting and Patching: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.



1. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching."

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.



CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329 - 1

SECTION 017329 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least ten 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided.

2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 4. Utility Services: List services/systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or

affect. List services/systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will be disrupted.


A. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

B. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to



perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting, and patching are to be performed.

1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.



B. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

C. Existing Utility Services: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.

3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-

core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 Sections

where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.



CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1

SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Warranties. 2. Final cleaning. 3. Observation procedures. 4. Project Record Documents. 5. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 6. Instruction of Owner's personnel.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.

1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.

2. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

3. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

4. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

6. Complete startup testing of systems. 7. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.



B. Observation: Submit a written request for site visit for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Landscape Architect will either proceed with site visit or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Landscape Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after site visit or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Landscape Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Repeat Site Visit: Request site visit when the Work identified in previous site visit as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed site visit will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.

1.4 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final site visit for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures."

2. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems.

B. Observation: Submit a written request for final site visit for acceptance. On receipt of request, Landscape Architect will either proceed with site visit or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Landscape Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after site visit or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Repeat Site Visit: Request site visit when the Work identified in previous site visit(s) as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.5 WARRANTIES

A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Landscape Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.



1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENT

A. General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss; provide access to Project Record Documents for the Landscape Architect's reference during normal working hours.

B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue- or black-line white prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that

shown originally. Require individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be readily

identified and recorded later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup

before enclosing concealed installations. d. Mark Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing

actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on Contract Drawings.

2. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between

changes for different categories of the Work at the same location. 3. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted

from original Drawings. 4. Note Change Order numbers, alternate numbers, and similar identification where

applicable. 5. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD

DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

C. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows: 1. Operation Data:

a. Emergency instructions and procedures. b. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards. c. Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend

operations.



d. Description of controls and sequence of operations. e. Piping diagrams.

2. Maintenance Data:

a. Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts. b. Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier. c. Maintenance procedures. d. Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance. e. Maintenance record forms. f. Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials. g. Copies of maintenance service agreements. h. Copies of warranties and bonds.

B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and index

data in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, with pocket inside to covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify each binder on front and spine with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting site visit/inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.



c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from

Project site. e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,

free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces.

f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

g. Clean transparent materials, including glass. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

h. Remove labels that are not permanent. i. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.

Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates.

j. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.

k. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.

3.2 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system 1. Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. 2. Provide instruction at mutually agreed-upon times. For equipment that requires seasonal

operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season. 3. Schedule training with Owner with at least fourteen (14) days' advance notice. 4. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of

instruction, and course content.

B. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. For each training module, develop a learning objective and teaching outline. Include instruction for the following: 1. System design and operational philosophy. 2. Review of documentation. 3. Operations. 4. Adjustments.



5. Troubleshooting. 6. Maintenance. 7. Repair.


HGOR #18039 PRYOR STREET ENTRY PLAZA

SECTION 018900 - SITE CONSTRUCTION PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Site work includes the work shown and reasonably inferred from the drawings, technicalspecifications, and contract documents. Provide materials, labor, equipment and supervisionrequired to perform the work complete.

B. The scope of site work includes, but is not limited to the following:1. Construction staking and other construction engineering required to control the work.2. Erosion and sedimentation control construction.3. Temporary groundwater control.4. Site preparation, including stripping and undercutting unsuitable subgrade soils, demolition,

and removal from the project lands of materials not to be used for construction.5. Site grading, including excavation, filling, compaction, and preparation of subgrades for

paving. Site grading includes importing material, stockpiling and hauling from stockpiles,and other work necessary to construct embankments and excavations as shown and specified.

6. Construction and building pads and staging areas.7. Coordination of temporary utilities.8. Installation of the site drainage system complete, including building roof drain laterals.9. Installation of water distribution and sanitary sewer system complete, including service

laterals.10. Construction of curbs.11. Construction of paving.12. Striping and traffic control.13. Backfilling curbs and islands with approved soils for planting.14. Backfilling walls.15. Installation and coordination of temporary warning signs, directional signs, barricades and

fences required to direct, control and protect the public throughout the construction period.16. Coordination of installation of light poles and conduits.

1.2 SAFETY

A. Safety & Protection: Initiate, maintain, and supervise safety precautions and programs inconnection with the Work. Take necessary precautions for the safety of, and provide thenecessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to employees on the job and other personsor organizations.

B. Safe trench construction is mandatory. Lay back slopes or shore as necessary.

C. Control traffic during operations on existing streets.

D. Erect and maintain barricades, fences, and other physical blockages sufficient to exclude thepublic from construction areas.

1.3 PROTECTION OF ADJACENT LANDS

A. Limit construction to areas so indicated on the drawings and designated by the Owner. Protectareas beyond the construction which are subject to the effect or byproduct of the constructioneffort.


B. Make special effort to prevent soil erosion and sediment transport onto adjacent lands. Restoredisturbance to areas outside the designated construction limits to a satisfactory condition, asdetermined by the Owner or governing authority, at no cost to the Owner.

C. Take precautionary measures to prevent damage to the adjoining public street system. Clean mudor debris deposited as a result of this construction.

D. Perform construction on the right-of-way or on other properties not in possession of the Owner instrict accordance with the terms of the permits or easements. Obtain copies of permit andeasement conditions affecting the work.

1.4 CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING

A. Provide construction staking, dimensional control, and related construction engineering forphases of the Work.

1.5 GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING

A. Geotechnical quality control services will be performed by a geotechnical engineering firm(referred to as the Geotechnical Engineer) selected and hired by the Owner.

B. Provide in cooperation with the Geotechnical Engineer, as a minimum, monitoring and testingservices of earthwork, drainage, utility construction, site preparation and demucking, underdrainconstruction, and pavement construction. Report results of tests verbally on completion of thework and provide daily written reports at the job site.1. Fill Placement: Monitor placement of fill for suitability of fill materials, uniformity of

compaction operations, and compliance with aspects of these Specifications. Test soil fill forcompliance with compaction requirements. Monitor rock fill for appropriate placementprocedures, particle size, and lift thickness.

2. Stripping and Demucking: Evaluate subgrades upon which fill is to be placed prior to fillplacement. Monitor conditions and make appropriate recommendations. In the event ofunstable subgrades, soil bridging, or provide stabilization stone as required. Discuss with theOwner, who will then authorize the procedure to be used.

3. Underdrains: Monitor underdrain construction for compliance with the plans andspecifications. If unforeseen conditions which impact the design and construction ofunderdrains are encountered, make appropriate recommendations to the Owner.

4. Underground Utilities: Monitor installation of underground utilities and structures forcompliance to specifications for materials, procedures, and workmanship. Evaluate thesuitability of the subgrade upon which the pipes are to be constructed. Issue appropriaterecommendations if unsuitable conditions are detected.

5. Backfilling: Monitor backfills and test to evaluate compliance with the specifications.6. Retaining Walls: Provide monitoring and testing services during construction of retaining

walls. The actual scope of these services will be dependent upon the type of wall used.Comply with the practice recommended by the designer of the wall system.

7. Pavements: Monitor preparation and proofrolling of the soil subgrade upon which pavementsare to be constructed. When unstable soils are encountered, recommend appropriate remedialaction to the Owner, who will then direct the Contractor as to the course of action. Monitorconstruction of the pavement system. Test thickness, gradations, and compactions of basecourse and surface course.

1.6 RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR

A. The Contractor is responsible for compliance with the Contract Documents. Monitoring andtesting by the Geotechnical Engineer does not infer acceptance of responsibility by the


Geotechnical Engineer, the Architect, the Engineer, or the Owner. When monitoring and testing indicates that construction does not meet Specification requirements, rework to obtain compliance.

1.7 AS-BUILT PLANS

A. Maintain "Contractor's mark-up as-built" plans of construction. Certify the accuracy andcompleteness of these plans and deliver to the Owner. The Owner shall deliver a sepiareproducible, if requested, to facilitate final recording.

B. Prepare as-built plans of construction to be dedicated to Governmental entities and deliver in aform that is acceptable to the receiving agency.

C. As-built topographic maps of detention structures are required. Provide a topographic surveysufficient to confirm structure volume as well as dimensions and deviations of outlet structures.

D. Retain a registered surveyor to certify as-built surveys required above.

1.8 PAYMENT

A. The Technical Specifications for Sitework contain limited information relative to payment.Consult other divisions for detailed payment provisions.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 024113 - SELCTIVE SITE DEMOLITION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide labor, material and equipment necessary to remove existing building, equipment pads,foundations, paving, curb and gutter, underground tanks, pipes and utilities and site items asrequired.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule: Submit proposed methods and operations of demolition to the Owner for review priorto the start of work. Include in the schedule the coordination for shut-off, capping andcontinuation of utility services as required. Obtain necessary permits required for demolitionand submit copies to the Owner before beginning demolition work.

1.3 PROTECTION

A. Protection of Existing Work: Before beginning cutting or demolition work, carefully survey theexisting work and examine the drawings and specifications to determine the extent of the work.Take necessary precautions to insure against damage to existing work to remain in place, to bereused, or to remain the property of the Owner. Repair or replace damage to work at noadditional cost to the Owner. Carefully coordinate the work of this section with other work andconstruct and maintain shoring, bracing and supports, as required. Ensure that structuralelements are not overloaded. Increase structural supports or add new supports as required as aresult of cutting, removal, or demolition work performed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Use the proper tools and equipment to complete the work in a safe, non-hazardous manner.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 DEMOLITION

A. Structures: Demolish existing structures by breaking these materials into smaller pieces fortransport. The use of explosives is not permitted.

B. Utilities: Remove or abandon in place existing utilities as indicated on the drawings.Disconnect utility services, with related meters and equipment, employing appropriate utilitycompany. When utility lines are encountered that are not indicated on the drawings, notify theOwner.

3.2 DISPOSITION OF MATERIALS

A. Dispose of demolished materials off of the project site unless otherwise notified by the Owner.Transport materials in a manner that will prevent spillage on streets and adjacent areas. Disposeof materials in a manner acceptable to the regulatory agency having jurisdiction.


3.3 PROTECTION OF TREES

A. Protect trees to remain in the manner described in the Section CLEARING AND GRUBBING.

B. Provide tree protection measures prior to beginning of demolition and maintain throughout thework period.

3.4 BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION

A. Backfill holes and depressions resulting from demolition as specified in the SectionEARTHWORK.

B. Meet backfill requirements for the final intended use of the area. Where the final use isundefined, meet as a minimum the backfill requirements for General Area Fill.

END OF SECTION


CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:

1. Footings. 2. Foundation and Retaining walls. 3. Subbases and Subslabs.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Section Cross Reference: Refer to Division 01 Submittals Section for general requirements.

B. Product Data: Submit, for information only, for each type of manufactured material and product indicated, including fibrous concrete reinforcement materials, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, dry-shake finish materials, and others as requested by Landscape Architect.

C. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

D. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

E. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.



F. Samples: Submit samples of materials as requested by Landscape Architect, including names, sources, and descriptions, as follows: 1. Color finishes.

G. Welding certificates.

H. Qualification Data: For installer, manufacturer, and testing agency.

I. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements:

1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.

J. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers, certifying that each item complies with requirements: 1. Admixtures.

a. Certificate shall indicate trade name and amount of fiber reinforcement per cubic

yard of concrete.

2. Curing compounds.

K. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements to determine compliance with specified tolerances.

L. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Allowable Tolerances in finished, exposed work: 1. Maximum ± 3/16 inch in length of 20 feet-9 inches maximum, ± 3/8 inch in length of 40

feet-0 inches or more. 2. In cross sectional dimension: ± 3/16 inch. 3. In surface plane, plumb and level: ± 1/8 inch in 10 feet-0 inches in any direction when

measured with a 10 feet-0 inches straight edge. 4. Tolerances shall conform to ACI 301.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.



Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for formwork and shoring and reshoring installations that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, extent and scope of work.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer.

E. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

F. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Weather: 1. Precaution shall be taken to prevent high temperatures in fresh concrete during hot weather,

in accordance with ACI 305. Water reducing set retarding admixtures shall be used in such quantities as recommended by concrete supplier to assure that concrete remains workable and lift lines will not be visible.

2. Cold weather placement shall be in accordance with ACI 306.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Single-source Responsibility: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain each admixture from a single manufacturer.

2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Pavement Form Materials: Plywood, metal, or other suitable material of size to provide full-depth and strength to resist movement during the placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal. Use forms, free of distortion and defects to provide straight, smooth exposed surfaces.



B. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on Drawings.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1,

and as follows: a. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

3. Lumber: Southern Pine Species; Select Structural No. 2 grade or better with grade stamp

clearly visible.

C. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

D. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.

E. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.

F. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent with maximum of 350 g/L volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. Use single source for all forms.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

G. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane of exposed concrete surface.

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter in concrete surface.

H. Earth Forms: Forms or footings may be cut into earth provided that earth is dry, stable, level and sound.

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.



C. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 and ASTM A 706, deformed bars, ASTM A 775 or ASTM A 934, epoxy coated, with less than 2 percent damaged coating in each 12-inch (300-mm) bar length.

D. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184, fabricated from ASTM A 615/, Grade 60 (Grade 420) and ASTM A 706/, deformed bars, assembled with clips.

E. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets, not rolls.

F. Tire Wire: 16 gauge annealed steel wire.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

B. Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, ASTM A 775 epoxy coated.

C. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement and complying with ASTM A 775.

D. Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780, zinc-based solder, paint containing zinc dust, or sprayed zinc.

E. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports.

3. For zinc-coated reinforcement, use galvanized wire or dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports.

2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, gray natural color, domestic manufacture. Use only one brand of cement throughout Project. Supplement portland cement with the following, serving as replacement for 50 percent of portland cement:

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.



B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3M coarse aggregate or better, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330, 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.

D. Water: ASTM C 94, clean and potable.

2.6 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. Add to produce air entrainment in accordance with ACI 318.

B. General: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A only. 2. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.

C. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures; color stable, free of carbon black, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis.

1. Color: As selected by Landscape Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.7 CURING MATERIALS

A. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

B. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating. 1. Curing compounds must not change the color of the concrete (i.e.: yellowing) and

breakdown in a two to four (2-4) week period.

2.8 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Isolation Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

B. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.0217-inch- (0.55-mm-) thick, galvanized steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

C. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, not less than 0.0336 inch (0.85 mm) thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.



D. Embedded items such as sleeves, straps, washers, angles and plates, shall be of structural steel conforming to ASTM A36. Anchor bolts shall conform to ASTM A36 and shall be regular hexagon type. All embedded items shall be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123.

E. Headed Concrete Anchors: ASTM A108, install in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, and in accordance with AWS D1.1.

F. Expansion Bolts: Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

2. Do not use the Owner's field quality-control testing agency as the independent testing agency.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. 2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent.

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.30 percent by weight of cement.

D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low

humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Proportion mixtures to provide normal weigth concrete with the following properties as indicated on Drawings.

Class Minimum Comprehensive Strength @ 28 Days

Maximum Slump Water: Cement Ratio

A 2500 psi 4 inches 0.50 maximum

B 3000 psi 4 inches 0.50 maximum

C 3500 psi 4 inches 0.45 maximum

D 4000 psi 4 inches 0.45 maximum

E 5000 psi 4 inches 0.45 maximum



B. Air Content: Six (6) percent, plus or minus one and one-half (1.5) percent for 3/4 inch, nominal maximum aggregate.

C. Class of Concrete: The following classes of concrete are required as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Class B – 3000 psi normal weight.

2.11 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.12 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials, vapor retarder/barrier, and other related materials with placement of forms and reinforcing steel.

3.2 INSPECTION

A. Examine surfaces designated to receive work described in this Section for conditions adversely affecting the finished work. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerances or quality requirements imposed within specifications governing substrate construction prior to initiating this work.

3.3 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:



1. Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for concrete surface exposed to view. 2. Class C, 1/2 inch (13 mm) for other concrete .

D. Check completed slab and pavement formwork and screeds for grade and alignment to following tolerances: 1. Top of Forms: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 2. Vertical Face on Longitudinal Axis: Not more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet.

E. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

F. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

G. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for bases, subbases, slabs and pavement to achieve required lines, grades, elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. 1. Install forms to allow continuous progress of bases, subbases, slab and pavement work and

so that forms can remain in place at least twenty-four (24) hours after concrete placement.

H. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

I. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete as indicated.

J. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

K. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

L. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

M. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

N. Check completed slab and pavement formwork and screeds for grade and alignment to following tolerances: 1. Top of Forms: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 2. Vertical Face on Longitudinal Axis: Not more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet.

O. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage.



P. Place form liners accurately to provide finished surface texture indicated. Provide solid backing and attach securely to prevent deflection and maintain stability of liners during concreting. Prevent form liners from sagging and stretching in hot weather. Seal joints of form liners and form liner accessories to prevent mortar leaks. Coat form liner with form-release agent.

3.4 INSTALLING EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions.

3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated on Drawings.

B. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips using strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

3.5 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, if concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations are maintained.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Landscape Architect.


A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete.



C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4, where indicated.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet width, to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

F. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M. Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-coated steel reinforcement.

G. Concrete cover shall be as called for in the Drawings with the following minimum guidelines: 1. Concrete footings deposited against grade; 3 in. 2. Exposed to weather after form removed; 1-1/2 in.

H. Place reinforcement not indicated on Drawings at locations required and lap lengths in accordance with ACI 318. Mechanical composition splices will not be permitted. Where welded splices are indicated, use full penetration butt welds in accordance with AWS Specifications. Welded splices shall be inspected by an independent testing laboratory. Lapped bars shall have Class "B" laps where less than 50 percent of the bars are lapped within a required lap length, and Class "C" laps where more than 50 percent of the bars are lapped within a required lap length.

I. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum two (2) inch overlap to adjacent mats.

J. Conduit and Pipes: Concrete cover shall be equal to cover for reinforcing bars. Ebedded conduit diameter shall not exceed one third (1/3) slab or wall thickness. Tie down low conduit on top of bottom reinforcing bars. Space not conduit less than three (3) diameters apart and minimum one (1) inch separation from parallel reinforcing bars. Use no aluminum conduits or couplings in concrete.

3.7 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Landscape Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. 3. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated.



4. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Contraction (Control) Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth (1/4) of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut one-quarter (1/4) inch wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface.

2. Joint Fillers and Sealants: Where sealants are indicated, terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," or Division 32, "Concrete Pavement Joint Sealants" are indicated.

3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.

E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Landscape Architect.

C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete



that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

E. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

F. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed one-fourth (1/4) inch in height on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view in the finished Work or concealed by other construction.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.



1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.

C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3.10 FINISHING BASES, SUBBASES, AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 1 direction.

1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated to receive concrete floor toppings, to receive mortar setting beds and other bonded cementitious floor finishes.

C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated to receive trowel finish other surfaces as specified and to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing.

D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view to be covered with paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system.

E. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. Refer to Division 03, Brushed Concrete Finishing, for requirements.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Landscape Architect before application.

3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss before and during finishing operations. Apply according



to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces, by moist curing with forms in place for the full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

a. Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered with finish materials applied directly to concrete.

3.12 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one six month(s). Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry.

C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.



3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Landscape Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Landscape Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/4 inch in any dimension and holes left by tie rods and bolts down to solid concrete, but in no case for a depth of less than one (1) inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Landscape Architect.

3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Testing: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports.

C. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Headed bolts and studs. 4. Verification of use of required design mixture. 5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs.

D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:



1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof.

2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m) or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

3. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

4. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample.

6. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

7. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; one (1) set of five (5) standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cured test specimens are required.

a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

8. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days; one (1) set for each 150 cu. yds., or fraction thereof each class placed in any one (1) day; one (1) specimen tested at seven (7) days, two (2) specimens tested at twenty-eight (28) days for acceptance, and two (2) specimens retained in reserve for later testing if required.

a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

9. Test results shall be reported in writing to Landscape Architect, Structural Engineer, ready-mix producer, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 twenty-four (24) hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

10. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Landscape Architect. Testing and



inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Landscape Architect.

11. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

12. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate dos not comply with the Contract Documents.



MASONRY, MORTARING AND GROUTING 040513 - 1

SECTION 040513 – MORTAR AND GROUT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes mortar and grout for unit masonry:

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Mortar: Composed of water, sand and cementitious materials, is placed between masonry units (joints) as they are laid to form a integrated structural assembly.

B. Grout: Composed of water, portland cement and aggregates, is mixed to a highly fluid consistency to be poured into the cores or cavities of unit masonry construction.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Section Cross Reference: Refer to Division 01 Submittals section for general requirements.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data, for information only, for each manufactured product including; specifications, mixing and installation instructions.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Colored mortar showing the full range of colors available.

D. Samples for Verification: Colored mortar for each color required showing the full range of colors expected in the finished construction. Make samples using the same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on the Project. Label samples to indicate type and amount of pigments used.

E. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency, employed and paid by contractor or manufacturer, indicating and interpreting test results of the following for compliance with requirements indicated:

1. Mix design for mortar using proportion specification of ASTM C270. 2. Grout mix design complying with compressive strength requirements of ASTM 476.

Include description of type and properties of grout ingredients.




A. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1093 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

C. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform the following pre-construction testing:

1. Grout Test: For comprehensive strength per ASTM C 1019.

D. Field Constructed Mock-Ups: Prior to installation of work, install mortar and grout in field constructed mock-up as called for in related sections.

1. Acceptance of mock-ups is for relationship of mortar showing the full range of colors available.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

B. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

C. Maintain sand for volume proportioning of mortar and grout in a damp, loose condition.

1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Follow requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE6/TMS602 for cold and hot weather construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

1. For pigmented mortar, use a colored cement formulation as required to produce color indicated, or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard formulation. a. Pigments shall not exceed ten (10) percent of portland cement by weight for mineral

oxides.

B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91, Type S, Gray.



1. For pigmented mortars, use a colored cement formulation as required to produce color indicated, or if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer’s standard formulation. a. Pigments shall not exceed five (5) percent of masonry cement by weight for mineral

oxides nor one (1) percent for carbon black.

C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

D. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or II, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207.

E. Aggregates for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than one-fourth (1/4) inch (6.5 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with one-hundred (100) percent passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.

F. Aggregates for Grout: ASTM C 404.

G. Ready-Mixed Mortar: Cementitious materials, water, and aggregate complying with requirements specified in this Article, combined with set-controlling admixtures to produce a ready-mixed mortar complying with ASTM C 1142.

H. Non-Shrink Grout: Provide prepackaged, non metallic, non gaseous shrinkage resistant grout. Test in accordance with ASTM C 1107.

1. Characteristics: High-flow, non-metallic, controller expansive type grout.

I. Water: Clean, potable, free from deleterious amounts of alkalis, acids, and organic materials.

J. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.

2.2 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water repellent agents, anti-freeze compounds or other admixtures. Do not lower the freezing point of mortar by use of admixtures or anti freeze agents. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.

B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification.

1. Extended-Life Mortar for Unit Masonry: Mortar complying with ASTM C 1142 may be used instead of mortar specified above, at Contractor’s option.

2. Mortar Proportions:

Type

Portland Cement (cu. ft.)

Hydrated Lime/ Lime

Putty (cu. ft.)

Masonry Ce-ment (cu. ft.)

Maximum Damp Loose

Aggregate (cu. ft.)

Minimum Compressive

Strength 2” cubes @ 28 days, ASTM C270 (psi)

S 1 1/4 to 1/2 ---- 3-3/8 to 4-1/2 1800 S ---- ---- 1 2-1/4 to 3 1800



a. The weight of one (1) cubic foot of materials is considered to be: Portland Cement 94 lbs. (one (1) bag); hydrated lime, 40 lbs.; lime putty, 80 lbs.; dry sand, 80 lbs.; masonry cement, weight printed on bag.

b. For each type of mortar, the figures above the line show proportions for portland cement lime mortar. Mortars made with masonry cement are shown below the line.

c. Damp, loose aggregate shall not be less than two and one-fourths (2¼) times, nor more than three (3) times, the cementitious material used, as measured by volume.

C. Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required

1. Limit pigments to the following percentages of cement content by weight:

a. For mineral oxide pigments and portland cement-lime mortar, not more than ten (10) percent

b. For mineral oxide pigments and masonry-cement mortar, not more than five (5) percent.

D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 2500 psi at twenty-eight (28) days. 2. Use grout of type indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, of type that will comply with

Table 5 of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 3. Provide grout with a slump of eight to eleven (8-11) inches (200 to 280 mm) as measured

according to ASTM C 143. 4. Grout Proportions:

a. Fine aggregate in grout measured in damp, loose condition shall be two and one-fourths to three (2¼-3) times the sum of the volume of the cementitious materials.

b. Course aggregate in grout measured in damp, loose condition shall be one to two (1-2) times the sum of the volume of the cementitious materials.

E. Non shrink grout: Mix prepared non shrink grout product with water as directed by manufacturer's product data to achieve a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi at twenty-eight (28) days.

F. Pointing Mortar: Three (3) part clean masonry sand to one (1) part Portland cement with admixture following manufacturer's recommendations.

Type

Portland Ce-ment or

Blended Ce-ment

Slag Cement (cu ft.)

Hydrated Lime or Lime Putty

(cu. ft.)

Maximum Damp Loose

Aggregate Fine (cu. ft.)

Course (cu. ft.)

Fine 1 0 to 1/10 2-1/4 to 3 None Coarse 1 0 to 1/10 2-1/4 to 3 1 to 2



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MIXING

A. Measure materials for job-mixed mortars by volume or equivalent weight. Do not measure by shovels.

B. Mix mortar in clean, power driven, drum type mixers. Operate mixer three to five (3-5) minutes after addition of all materials.

C. Mix grout in accordance with ASTM C 94.

D. Measure grout materials mixed at jobsite by volume and mix all ingredients in mechanical mixer for minimum of five (5) minutes.

E. For job-mixed mortars add water reducing and plasticizing admixture in accord with admixture manufacturer's product data.

F. Addition of other admixtures, including anti freeze ingredients, will not be permitted.

G. Discard grout not placed within one to one-half (1-1½) hours after water is added to mix, or sooner as indicated by grout manufacturer.

3.2 PLACING MORTAR AND GROUT

A. Install mortar and grout in accordance with ACI 530.1/ASCE6/TMS602.

B. Re-temper mortar as necessary to keep plastic. Use no mortar after setting has begun or after two and one-half (2½) hours of initial mixing.

C. Keep bed uniform in width, except for minor variations required to maintain bond. Standard thickness for horizontal mortar joints shall be one-half (1/2) inch unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

D. Adjustment shall be made only while mortar is still soft and plastic by tapping to plumb and bringing to alignment. Remove until and relay in fresh mortar when unit must be pulled back to align.

1. Where adjustment must be made after mortar has started to set, remove and replace mortar with fresh mortar.



UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 042000 - 1

SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:

1. Concrete masonry units (CMUs). 2. Mortar and grout. 3. Reinforcing steel. 4. Masonry joint reinforcement. 5. Ties and anchors. 6. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:

1. Dovetail slots for masonry anchors, installed under Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following:

1. Cast-stone trim, furnished under Division 04 Section "Cast Stone Masonry." 2. Steel lintels and shelf angles for unit masonry, furnished under Division 05 Section "Metal

Fabrications."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. For each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product specified, for information only.

C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:

1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Stone Trim Units: Show sizes, profiles, and locations of each stone trim unit required.



3. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:

1. Decorative concrete masonry unit samples, in the form of small-scale units showing full range of colors and textures available for each different exposed masonry unit required.

2. Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. 3. Colored mortar samples showing full range of colors available.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:

1. Full size units for each different exposed and decorative concrete masonry units required showing full range of exposed colors, textures, and dimensions to be expected in completed work.

2. Face and hollow brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. 3. Special brick shapes. 4. Pigmented mortar samples for each color required showing full range of colors expected

in the finished construction. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project. Label Samples to indicate types and amounts of pigments used.

5. Stone trim samples not less than twelve (12) inches (300 mm) in length, showing the full range of colors and textures expected in the finished construction.

6. Weep holes/vents in color to match mortar color. 7. Accessories embedded in masonry.

F. Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties, signed by the manufacturer, indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards. Provide for each type and size of the following:

1. Each type of masonry units required. a. For bricks, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within

specified tolerances.

2. Cementitious materials required for mortar and grout. Include brand, type, name of manufacturer and weight slips at time of delivery.

3. Each material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars. 4. Each type and size of joint reinforcement. 5. Each type and size of anchors, ties, and metal accessories.


A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required.

B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.



C. Mockups: Before installing unit masonry, build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work.

1. Locate mockups in the locations indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Landscape Architect.

2. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 3. Build mockups for each type of exposed unit masonry construction in sizes approximately

48 inches (1200 mm) long by 48 inches (1200 mm) high by full thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories.

4. Where masonry is to match existing, erect mockups adjacent and parallel to existing surface.

5. Clean exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated. 6. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 7. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of

mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship.

a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Landscape Architect in writing.

b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved by Landscape Architect in writing.

8. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

9. Notify Landscape Architect seven (7) days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

10. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.


A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.




A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides and hold cover securely in place.

2. Where 1 wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place.

B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface.

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and

integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from

splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning.

D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. 1. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F (38 deg C) or 90 deg F (32 deg C) with a

wind velocity greater than 8 mph (13km/h), do not spread mortar beds more than forty-eight (48) inches (1200 mm) ahead of masonry. Set masonry units within one (1) minute of spreading mortar.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified



dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will impair the quality of completed masonry.

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs)

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.

2. Provide bullnose units for outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent where indicated.

1. Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive according to ASTM E 514, with test period extended to 24 hours, show no visible water or leaks on the back of test specimen.

C. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90, and as follows:

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 1900 psi (13.1 MPa).

2. Weight Classification: Normal weight, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide Type I, moisture-controlled units. 4. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions. 5. Size (Width): Manufactured to the following dimensions:

a. 4 inch (100 mm) nominal; 3-5/8 inch (92 mm) actual. b. 6 inch (150 mm nominal); 5-5/8 inch (143 mm) actual. c. 8 inch (200 mm nominal); 7-5/8 inch (194 mm) actual. d. 10 inch (250 mm nominal); 9-5/8 inch (244 mm) actual. e. 12 inch (300 mm nominal); 11-5/8 inch (295 mm) actual.

6. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Section Cross Reference: Refer to Division 04 Masonry, Mortaring and Grouting Section for requirements.

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.


D. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S.

E. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.



F. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.

G. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For joints less than 1/4 inch (6.5 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing

the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.

H. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

I. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: ASTM C 395, epoxy-resin-based material formulated for use as pointing mortar for structural-clay tile facing units (and approved for such use by manufacturer of units); in color indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Landscape Architect from manufacturer's colors.

J. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with concrete masonry units, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer.

K. Water: Potable.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615 or ASTM A 996; Grade 60.

B. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615, Grade 60; epoxy coated to comply with ASTM A 775.

C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951. 1. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch (3.8-mm) diameter. 3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch (3.8-mm) diameter. 4. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: W1.7 or 0.148-inch (3.8-mm) diameter. 5. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units.

D. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods and across rods spaced not more than sixteen (16) inches (407) o.c.

E. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry:

1. Ladder type with 1 side rod at each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches (100 mm) in width, plus 1 side rod at each wythe of masonry 4 inches (100 mm) or less in width.

2. Adjustable (two-piece) type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with separate ties that extend into facing wythe. Ties have two hooks that engage eyes or slots in reinforcement and resist movement perpendicular to wall. Ties extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face.



2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL

A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from materials that comply with eight subparagraphs below, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2

coating. 2. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580, Type 304. 3. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel, hot-dip

galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153. 4. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. 5. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.

B. Corrugated Metal Ties: Metal strips not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide with corrugations having a wavelength of 0.3 to 0.5 inch (7.6 to 12.7 mm) and an amplitude of 0.06 to 0.10 inch (1.5 to 2.5 mm) made from stainless-steel sheet not less than 0.067 inch (1.7 mm) thick.

C. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches (100 mm) wide.

1. Z-shaped ties with ends bent 90 degrees to provide hooks not less than 2 inches (50 mm) long may be used for masonry constructed from solid units or hollow units laid with cells horizontal.

2. Where wythes do not align, use adjustable ties composed of two (2) parts; one(1) with pintles, the other with eyes connections having a maximum adjustment of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).

3. Wire: Fabricate from 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

D. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structure: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.

1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch (25 mm) of masonry face, made from 0.188-inch- (4.8-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

3. Connector Section for Concrete: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and attached to tie section; formed from 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.

4. Tie Section for Concrete: Corrugated metal ties with dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and sized to extend to within 1 inch (25 mm) of masonry face.

E. Partition Top anchors: 0.097-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick metal plate with 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) diameter metal rod 6 inches (150 mm) long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from stainless steel.

F. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick by 24 inches (600 mm) long, with ends turned up 2 inches (50 mm) or with cross pins, unless otherwise indicated and bent to configuration indicated.

1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153.

G. Stone Anchors: Fabricate dowels, cramps, and other stone anchors from stainless steel.



2.6 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS

A. Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable-iron wedge-type inserts of type and size indicated.

B. Dovetail Slots in Concrete: Furnish dovetail slots with filler strips, of slot size indicated, fabricated from 0.034-inch (0.9-mm), galvanized steel sheet.

C. Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class C; of dimensions indicated and in the following configurations: 1. Headed bolts. 2. Nonheaded bolts, bent in manner indicated.

D. Postinstalled Anchors: Provide torque-controlled expansion anchors, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in solid or grouted unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Type: Expansion anchors. 2. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,

Class Fe/Zn 5 (5 microns) for Class SC 1 service condition (mild). 3. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and

ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 for bolts and nuts; ASTM A 666 or ASTM A 276, Type 304, for anchors.

4. For Post-Installed Anchors in Concrete: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to four (4) times the load imposed.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene or PVC.

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. 1. Styrene-Butadiene-Rubber Compound: ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805. 2. PVC: ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

D. Weep/Vent Products: Use one of the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Wicking Material: Absorbent rope, made from cotton or UV-resistant synthetic fiber, 1/4 to 3/8 inch (6 to 10 mm) in diameter, in length required to produce 2-inch (50-mm) exposure on exterior and 18 inches (450 mm) in cavity between wythes.



2. Round Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Medium-density polyethylene, 3/8-inch (9-mm) OD by 4 inches (100 mm) long.

2.8 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2 cup (0.14-L) dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and 1/2 cup (0.14-L) dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. (4 L) of water.

B. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.

2.9 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. Section Cross Reference: Refer to Division 04, Masonry, Mortaring and Grouting Section for requirements.

B. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement, mortar cement, and lime. 3. Limit cementitious materials in mortar for exterior and reinforced masonry to portland

cement, mortar cement, and lime. 4. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to

view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

C. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

D. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry.

1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S.

E. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products

1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 2. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement by weight. 3. For mineral-oxide pigments and portland cement-lime mortar, not more than 10 percent. 4. For carbon-black pigment and portland cement-lime mortar, not more than 2 percent. 5. For mineral-oxide pigments and masonry cement mortar, not more than 5 percent. 6. For carbon-black pigment and masonry cement mortar, not more than 1 percent.



F. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.

2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 mm) as measured according to ASTM C 143.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work.

2. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated.

B. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

C. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures.

1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

D. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.

E. Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following:

1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

2. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.



3. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

4. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm). Do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm).

5. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm).

6. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units.

7. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) from one masonry unit to the next.

3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 4-inches (100-mm). Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.

D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

E. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.

F. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows:

1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on

footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on

footings where cells are not grouted.



B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C. Set stone trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel, anchor, and similar holes.

1. Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear water.

2. Allow cleaned surfaces to dry before setting. 3. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar.

D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint), unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 CAVITY WALLS

A. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Strike joints facing cavities flush. Bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into cavity. 1. Use wood strips temporarily placed in cavity to collect mortar droppings. As work

progresses, remove strips, clean off mortar droppings, and replace in cavity.

B. Coat cavity face of backup wythe to comply with Division 07 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing."

3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Provide continuous masonry joint reinforcement as indicated. Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 1. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings

and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings.

a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.



3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS

A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following:

1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials.

2. Anchor masonry to structural members with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure.

3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36 inches (915 mm) o.c. horizontally.

3.8 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS

A. Anchor masonry veneers to concrete and masonry backup with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements:

1. Fasten anchors to concrete and masonry backup with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener.

2. Embed tie sections, connector sections and continuous wire in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2 inches (50 mm) of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing.

3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down.

4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. vertically and 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 3.5 sq. ft. (0.33 sq. m) of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 36 inches (914 mm), around perimeter.

3.9 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry where indicated. Build-in related items as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:

1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of concrete masonry units on one side of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of sealant.

C. Form expansion joints in brick made from clay or shale as follows:

1. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4 inches (100 mm) in direction of water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints if any.

2. Build flanges of factory-fabricated, expansion-joint units into masonry. 3. Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated.



4. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm) for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." Maintain joint free and clear of mortar.

3.10 LINTELS

A. Install steel lintels where indicated.

B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches (305 mm) for brick-size units and 24 inches (610 mm) for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. 1. Provide precast lintels made from concrete matching concrete masonry units in color,

texture, and compressive strength and with reinforcing bars indicated or required to support loads indicated. Cure precast lintels by the same method used for concrete masonry units.

2. Provide prefabricated or built-in masonry lintels. Use specially formed bond beam units with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.

3.11 WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated.

B. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above finished grade and as follows:

1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes formed from plastic tubing 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.

C. Place pea gravel in cavities as soon as practical to a height equal to height of first course above finished grade, but not less than 2 inches (50 mm), to maintain drainage.

3.12 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:



1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.

2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Landscape Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.

4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.

5. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20, using job-mixed detergent solution.

6. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.

7. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.

8. Clean stone trim to comply with stone supplier's written instructions. 9. Clean limestone units to comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone

Handbook."

3.13 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure unit masonry is without damage and deterioration at Date of Substantial Completion.

3.14 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.

1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches (100 mm) in each dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry

waste. Fill material is specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade.

C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.



EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING 044200 - 1

SECTION 044200 - EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of dimension stone cladding:

1. Dimension stone cladding set, with mortar joints.

B. Stone Types: Descriptions of stone types required for other Sections are included in Part 2 of this Section.

C. Allowances: Furnish quality-control testing under the Inspection and Testing Allowance as specified in Division 01 Section "Allowances."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions contained in ASTM C 119 apply to this Section.

B. Dimension Stone Cladding System: An exterior wall covering system consisting of dimension stone panels together with anchors, backup structure, mortar, adhesives, fasteners, and sealants used to secure the stone to a structure and to produce a weather-resistant covering.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Design stone anchors and anchoring systems according to ASTM C 1242.

B. Structural Performance: Provide dimension stone cladding system capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures:

a. Uniform pressure of 30 lbf/sq. ft. (1436 Pa), acting inward or outward.

C. Thermal Movements: Provide dimension stone cladding system that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing displacement of stone, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base



engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

D. Safety Factors for Stone: Design dimension stone cladding system to withstand loads indicated without exceeding allowable working stress of stone determined by dividing stone's average ultimate strength, as established by testing, by the following safety factors:

1. Safety Factor for Granite: three (3) for uniform loads and four (4) for concentrated loads. 2. Safety Factor for Dolomitic Limestone: Five (5) for uniform loads and ten (10) for

concentrated loads. 3. Safety Factor for Quartz-Based Stone: Eight (8) for uniform loads and ten (10) for

concentrated loads. 4. Safety Factor for Concentrated Stresses: 4 for granite and 10 for stone varieties other than

granite.

E. Design stone anchors and backup structure to withstand loads indicated without exceeding allowable working stresses established by the following:

1. For Structural Steel: AISC's S335, "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings - Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design with Commentary."

2. For Cold-Formed Steel: AISI's SG-973, Part V, "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

3. For Cold-Formed Stainless Steel: ASCE 8, "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Stainless Steel Structural Members."

4. For Cast-in-Place and Postinstalled Fasteners in Concrete: One-fourth of tested capacity when installed in concrete with compressive strength indicated.

5. For Post-Installed Fasteners in Masonry: One-sixth of tested capacity when installed in masonry units indicated.

F. Limit deflection in each prefabricated assembly caused by indicated loads and thermal movements, acting singly or in combination with one another.

1. 1/16 inch (1.5 mm), measured in plane of wall.

G. Provisions for Fabrication and Erection Tolerances: Allow for fabrication and erection tolerances of building's structural system. Concrete fabrication and erection tolerances are specified in Division 03 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete.”

H. Provision for Deflection of Structure: Allow for the following:

1. Deflection due to Weight of Dimension Stone Cladding System: Allow for 1/4-inch (6-mm) vertical deflection in 20-foot (6-m) span of structural members supporting dimension stone cladding system.

I. Control of Corrosion and Staining: Prevent galvanic and other forms of corrosion as well as staining by isolating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. Use materials that do not stain exposed surfaces of stone and joint materials.



1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: For each variety of stone, stone accessory, and other manufactured products indicated, for information only.

C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for dimension stone cladding system, including dimensions and profiles of stone units.

1. Show locations and details of joints both within dimension stone cladding system and between dimension stone cladding system and other construction.

2. Include details of mortar joints, sealant joints and mortar joints pointed with sealant. 3. Show locations and details of anchors and backup structure. 4. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis

data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For joint materials involving color selection.

E. Stone Samples for Verification: Sets for each color, grade, finish, and variety of stone required; not less than 12 inches (300 mm) square.

1. Sets shall consist of at least two (2) Samples, exhibiting extremes of the full range of color and other visual characteristics expected and will establish the standard by which stone will be judged.

F. Colored Pointing Mortar Samples for Verification: For each color required, showing the full range of exposed color and texture expected in the completed Work.

G. Sealant Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required.

H. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

I. Material Test Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for the following for compliance with requirements, as follows:

1. Stone Test Reports: For each stone variety proposed for use on Project, provide test data indicating compliance with required physical properties, according to referenced ASTM standards. Include test data for flexural strength based on testing according to ASTM C 880, performed on specimens representative of minimum thickness and finish of installed stone, in both wet and dry conditions. Base reports on testing done within previous five years.

2. For metal components, indicate chemical and physical properties of metal. 3. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Test Report: From sealant manufacturer complying

with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and indicating that sealants will not stain or damage stone. Include interpretation of test results and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.



4. Preconstruction Sealant Field Test Report: From Installer, complying with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

5. Anchorage Test Reports: For each combination of stone variety, finish, and anchor type, based on testing according to ASTM C 1354, performed on specimens representative of minimum thickness and finish of installed stone.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing dimension stone cladding systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has a record of successful in-service performance. 1. Installer shall have completed a minimum of twenty (20) projects similar to that indicated

for this Project.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate dimension stone cladding systems similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

1. Fabricator's responsibilities include fabricating dimension stone cladding and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility.

2. Engineering Responsibility: Comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer to prepare or supervise the preparation of shop drawings.

C. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of dimensions stone cladding systems that area similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design and scope.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

E. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone, regardless of finish, from a single quarry, whether specified in this Section or in another Section of the Specifications, with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

1. For stone types that include same list of varieties and sources, provide same variety from same source for each.

F. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality for each cementitious component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer.

G. Source Limitations for Other Materials: Obtain each type of stone accessory, sealant, and other material from a single manufacturer for each product.

H. Preconstruction Stone Testing: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below.



1. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

2. Furnish test specimens that are representative of materials proposed for incorporation into the Work.

3. Physical Property Tests: For each stone variety proposed for use on Project, tested for compliance with physical property requirements, other than abrasion resistance, according to referenced ASTM standards.

4. Flexural Strength Tests: For each combination of stone variety, thickness, orientation of cut, and finish, proposed for use on Project, tested according to ASTM C 880, in both wet and dry conditions.

5. Anchorage Tests: For each combination of stone variety, orientation of cut, finish, and anchor type proposed for use on Project, tested according to ASTM C 1354.

6. Testing agency will report test results in writing to Landscape Architect and Contractor. 7. One (1) set of test specimens will be required for each stone variety, of number and size

indicated in referenced standards.

I. Preconstruction Field Testing of Sealants: Before installing joint sealants, field test their adhesion to joint substrates per requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

J. Field-Constructed Mockups: Before installing dimension stone cladding construct sample wall panel indicated with proposed materials and workmanship to be expected in completed work. Purpose of mockups is further verification of selections made for color and finish under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities expected in completed Work. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements using materials indicated for completed work. 1. Locate mockups on site where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Landscape

Architect. 2. Build mockups for the following kinds of dimension stone cladding:

a. Typical masonry wall with stone cladding, approximately seventy-two (72) inches (1800 mm) long by forty-eight (48) inches (1200 mm) high.

b. Dimension stone cladding panel system corresponding to area indicated on Drawings, showing typical components, connections, attachments to structure, and methods of installation.

3. Obtain Landscape Architect's acceptance of qualities of sample before start of final work. 4. Replace unsatisfactory mock-up work; as directed, until acceptance to Landscape

Architect. 5. Maintain mockup during construction in undisturbed condition as standard for judging

completed Work. Do not alter, move or destroy mock-up until work is completed. The accepted mock-up may become part of the completed work and remain in place, if in undisturbed condition at Date of Substantial Completion. a. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved by Landscape Architect in writing.


A. Store and handle stone and related materials to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, breaking, chipping, and other causes.



1. Lift stone with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes containing tar or other substances that might cause staining. Move stone, if required, using dollies with cushioned wood supports.

2. Store stone on wood skids or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to stone. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation.

B. Deliver sealants to Project site in original unopened containers labeled with manufacturer's name, product name and designation, color, expiration period, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

C. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.


A. Protect dimension stone cladding during erection as follows:

1. Cover tops of dimension stone cladding installation with nonstaining, waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed structures when work is not in progress. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold securely in place.

2. Prevent staining of stone from mortar, grout, sealants, and other sources. Immediately remove such materials without damaging stone.

3. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on ground and over wall surface.

4. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar and sealant droppings.

B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Remove and replace dimension stone cladding damaged by frost or freezing conditions.

1. Comply with cold-weather construction and protection requirements for masonry contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

2. Cold-Weather Construction: When ambient temperature is within limits indicated, use the following procedures:

a. At 40 deg F (5 deg C) and below, produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (5 and 49 deg C) by heating mixing water, sand, or both. Do not heat water to above 160 deg F (71 deg C).

b. At 32 deg F (0 deg C) and below, maintain temperature of mortar on boards above freezing. Heat stone and substrates so they are above 32 deg F (0 deg C) at time of installation.

c. At 25 to 20 deg F (minus 4 to minus 7 deg C), heat both sides of walls under construction. Use windbreaks or enclosures when wind velocity exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).

d. At 20 deg F (minus 7 deg C) and below, provide enclosure and auxiliary heat to maintain air temperature above 32 deg F (0 deg C) within enclosure.

3. Cold-Weather Protection: When mean daily temperature is within limits indicated, provide the following protection for 48 hours after construction:



a. 40 to 25 Deg F (Plus 5 to Minus 4 Deg C): Cover dimension stone cladding with a weather-resistant membrane.

b. 25 to 20 Deg F (Minus 4 to Minus 7 Deg C): Cover dimension stone cladding with weather-resistant, insulating blankets or provide enclosure and heat to maintain air temperature above 32 deg F (0 deg C) within enclosure.

c. 20 Deg F (Minus 7 Deg C) and below: Provide enclosure and heat to maintain air temperature above 32 deg F (0 deg C) within enclosure.

C. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction and protection requirements for masonry contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

D. Environmental Limitations for Sealants: Do not install sealants when ambient and substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (5 deg C) or when joint substrates are wet.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of inserts that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry and similar items to be used by dimension stone cladding Installer for anchoring and supporting dimension stone cladding system. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing such items and deliver to Project site in time for installation.

B. Time delivery and installation of dimension stone cladding to avoid extended on-site storage and to coordinate with work adjacent to dimension stone cladding.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Dimension Stone Units: Furnish two (2) full size finished stone panels for each finish and variety of stone specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Single-Source Responsibility for Stone: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, and variety of stone from a single quarry with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties, including the capacity to cut and finish material without delaying the progress of the work.

B. Single-Source Responsibility for Mortar and Grout Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality and from one manufacturer for each cementitious and admixture component and from one (1) source or producer for each aggregate.

C. Single-Source for Other Materials: Obtain each type of stone accessory, sealant, and other materials from one (1) manufacturer for each product.



2.2 STONE – GENERAL

A. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide stone varieties from sources indicated in the Stone Schedule.

B. For each stone variety, provide matched blocks extracted from a single bed of quarry stratum unless Landscape Architect approves stone from blocks randomly selected for aesthetic effect.

C. Quarry stone in a manner to ensure that as-quarried block orientations yield finished stone with required characteristics.

2.3 STONE TYPES

A. Granite: Provide granite complying with ASTM C 615 and NBGQA's Specifications for Architectural Granite.

2.4 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white, or a blend, cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

1. Low-Alkali Cement: Portland cement for use with limestone shall contain not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207.

D. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III; hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207; and mortar pigments. Use a mix of formulation required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard formulations. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.

E. Aggregate: ASTM C 144; except for joints narrower than 1/4 inch (6 mm) and pointing mortar, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.

1. White Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone. 2. Colored Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other durable

stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color.

F. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in mortar and containing no carbon black.

G. Water: Potable.



2.5 ANCHORS AND FASTENERS

A. Fabricate anchors, including shelf angles, from stainless steel, ASTM A 666, Type 304, temper as required to support loads imposed without exceeding allowable design stresses. Fabricate dowels and pins for anchors from stainless steel, ASTM A 276, Type 304.

B. Cast-in-Place Concrete Inserts: Steel, cast iron, or malleable iron adjustable inserts, with bolts, nuts, washers, and shims; all hot-dip galvanized or mechanically zinc coated, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

C. Postinstalled Anchor Bolts for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors made from stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Alloy Group A1 or A4) for bolts and nuts; ASTM A 666 or ASTM A 276, Type 304 or 316, for anchors, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed, for masonry, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

D. Weld Plates for Installation in Concrete: Comply with Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications."

2.6 STONE ACCESSORIES

A. Setting Shims: Strips of resilient plastic or vulcanized neoprene, nonstaining to stone, of thickness needed to prevent point loading of stone on anchors and of depths to suit anchors without intruding into required depths of pointing materials.

B. Setting Buttons: Lead or resilient plastic buttons, nonstaining to stone, sized to suit joint thicknesses and bed depths of stone units without intruding into required depths of pointing materials or joint sealants or causing third-side adhesion between sealant and setting button.

C. Cementitious Dampproofing for Limestone: Provide cementitious formulations that are recommended by ILI and that are nonstaining to stone, compatible with joint sealants, and noncorrosive to anchors and attachments.

D. Weep and Vent Tubes: Medium-density polyethylene tubing, 1/4-inch (6-mm) OD and of length required to extend from exterior face of stone to cavity behind.

E. Sealants for Joints in Dimension Stone Cladding: Manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated below that comply with applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and do not stain stone. 1. Single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant ES-2. 2. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to comply with the following requirement:

a. Provide color as selected by Landscape Architect from manufacturer's full range.

F. Sealant for Filling Kerfs: Manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated below that comply with applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and that do not stain stone.



1. Single-component, nonsag, neutral-curing, medium to high modulus, silicone sealant; Class 25, Use NT (nontraffic), and Use M (masonry). ES-3.

2. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to comply with the following requirements a. Provide color as selected by Landscape Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.7 STONE FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate stone units in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated, including details on Drawings and Shop Drawings.

1. For granite, comply with recommendations in NBGQA's "Specifications for Architectural Granite."

2. For limestone, comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone Handbook."

B. Control depth of stone and back check to maintain minimum clearance of 1 inch (25 mm) between backs of stone units and surfaces or projections of structural members, backup walls, and other work behind stone.

C. Dress joints (bed and vertical) straight and at right angle to face, unless otherwise indicated. Shape beds to fit supports.

D. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stone for anchors, fasteners, supports, and lifting devices as indicated or needed to set stone securely in place; shape beds to fit supports.

E. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone, except sawed reveals, to comply with requirements indicated for finish and to match approved samples and mockups.

F. Quirk-miter corners, unless otherwise indicated; provide for cramp anchorage in top and bottom bed joints of corner pieces.

G. Cut stone to produce uniform joints 3/8 inch (10 mm) wide and in locations indicated.

H. Contiguous Work: Provide chases, reveals, reglets, openings, and similar features as required to accommodate contiguous work.

I. Fabricate molded work, including washes and drips, to produce stone shapes with a uniform profile throughout entire unit length, with precisely formed arris slightly eased to prevent snipping, and with matching profile at joints between units.

1. Produce moldings and molded edges with machines that use abrasive shaping wheels made to reverse contour of molding shape; do not sculpt moldings.

J. Carve and cut inscriptions and decorative surfaces according to Shop Drawings approved by Landscape Architect. Use skilled stone carvers experienced in the successful performance of work similar to that indicated.

K. Abrasively etch inscriptions and decorative surfaces according to Shop Drawings.

L. Laser etch inscriptions and decorative surfaces according to Shop Drawings.



M. Clean backs of stone to remove rust stains, iron particles, and stone dust.

N. Carefully inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units.

1. Grade and mark stone for overall uniform appearance when assembled in place. Natural variations in appearance are acceptable if installed stone units match range of colors and other appearance characteristics represented in approved samples and mockups.

O. Cut stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated to comply with fabrication and construction tolerances recommended by applicable stone association or, if none, by stone source, for faces, edges, beds, and backs. 1. Minimum Thickness: Provide stone units of not less than the following thickness, unless

otherwise indicated: a. Granite: 1-1/14 inches (32 mm).

2.8 MORTAR MIXES

A. General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions for mix proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce mortar of uniform quality and with optimum performance characteristics.

1. Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium chloride.

2. Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious materials, water, and aggregates in a mechanical batch mixer, unless otherwise indicated. Discard mortar when it has reached initial set.

B. Portland Cement-Lime Setting Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for types of mortar and stone indicated below:

1. Set granite with Type S mortar. 2. Set limestone with Type N mortar. 3. Set quartz-based stone with Type S mortar.

C. Pointing Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for types of mortar indicated. Provide pointing mortar mixed to match Landscape Architect's sample and complying with the following: 1. Packaged Portland Cement-Lime Mix Mortar: Use portland cement-lime mix of selected

color. 2. Point granite with Type N mortar. 3. Point limestone with Type N mortar. 4. Point quartz-based stone with Type N mortar.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive dimension stone cladding and conditions under which dimension stone cladding will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of dimension stone cladding.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of dimension stone cladding.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Advise Installers of other work about specific requirements relating to placement of inserts, flashing reglets, and similar items to be used by Stonework Installer for anchoring, supporting, and flashing of dimension stonework. Furnish Installers of other work with drawings or templates showing locations of these items.

B. Protect dimension stonework during erection as follows: 1. Cover top of dimension stone cladding installation with nonstaining waterproof sheeting

at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed structures when work is not in progress. Extend cover a minimum of twenty-four (24) inches down both sides and hold securely in place.

2. Prevent staining of stone from mortar, grout, sealants and other sources. Immediately remove such materials from stone without damage to latter.

3. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of coverings spread on ground and over wall surface.

4. Protect sills, ledges and projections from mortar and sealant droppings.

C. Clean stone surfaces that are dirty or stained by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials before setting. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh filler or abrasives.

3.3 SETTING DIMENSION STONE CLADDING, GENERAL

A. Before setting stone clean surfaces that are dirty or stained by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives.

B. Execute dimension stone cladding installation by skilled mechanics and employ skilled stone fitters at Project site to do necessary field cutting as stone is set.

1. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone. Produce lines cut straight and true, with edges eased slightly to prevent snipping.



C. Contiguous Work: Provide reveals, reglets, and openings as required to accommodate contiguous work.

D. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings and Shop Drawings. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure dimension stone cladding in place. Shim and adjust anchors, supports, and accessories to set stone accurately in locations indicated with uniform joints of widths indicated and with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.

E. Provide expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints of widths and at locations indicated.

1. Sealing expansion and other joints is specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 2. Keep expansion joints free of mortar and other rigid materials.

F. Keep cavities open where unfilled space is indicated between back of stone units and backup wall; do not fill cavities with mortar or grout.

1. Place weep holes in joints where moisture may accumulate, including base of cavity walls, above shelf angles, and flashing. Locate weep holes at intervals not exceeding 24 inches (600 mm). Use weep and vent tubes.

2. Place vents in cavity walls at tops of cavities, below shelf angles and flashing, and at intervals not exceeding 20 feet (6 m) vertically. Locate vents in joints at intervals not exceeding 60 inches (1500 mm) horizontally. Use weep and vent tubes.

3.4 SETTING DIMENSION STONE CLADDING WITH MORTAR

A. Set stone in full bed of mortar with head joints filled, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use setting buttons of adequate size, in sufficient quantity, and of thickness required to maintain uniform joint width and to prevent mortar from extruding. Hold buttons back from face of stone a distance at least equal to width of joint, but not less than depth of pointing materials.

2. Do not set heavy units or projecting courses until mortar in courses below has hardened enough to resist being squeezed out of joint.

3. Support and brace projecting stones until wall above is in place and mortar has set. 4. Provide compressible filler in ends of dowel holes and bottoms of kerfs to prevent end

bearing of dowels and anchor tabs on stone. Fill remainder of anchor holes and kerfs with mortar.

B. Fill space between back of stone units and backup wall solidly with mortar or grout.

C. Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depths of not less than 1/2 inch (12 mm). Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides.

D. Prepare stone-joint surfaces for pointing with mortar by removing dust and mortar particles. Where setting mortar was removed to depths greater than surrounding areas, apply first layer of pointing mortar in layers not more than 3/8 inch (10 mm) until a uniform depth is formed.

E. Point stone joints by placing pointing mortar in layers not more than 3/8 inch (10 mm). Compact each layer thoroughly and allow to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer.



F. Tool joints with a round jointer having a diameter 1/8 inch (3 mm) larger than width of joint, when pointing mortar is thumbprint hard.

G. Rake out mortar from sealant-pointed joints to depths of not less than 1/2 inch (12 mm) nor less than that required for sealant and sealant backing. Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides.

H. Set the following dimension stone cladding with unfilled head joints for installing joint sealants: 1. Copings. 2. Capstones. 3. Wall veneer or panels.

3.5 JOINT-SEALANT INSTALLATION

A. Prepare joints and apply sealants of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.6 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of walls, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (10 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch in 40 feet (12 mm in 12 m) or more. For external corners, corners and jambs within 20 feet (6 m) of an entrance, expansion joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 3/8 inch in 40 feet (10 mm in 12 m) or more.

B. Variation from Level: For lintels, sills, water tables, parapets, horizontal bands, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 3/8 inch (10 mm) maximum.

C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For positions shown in plan and related portions of walls and partitions, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) or 1/2 inch in 40 feet (12 mm in 12 m) or more.

D. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For thickness of walls from dimensions indicated, do not exceed plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).

E. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary from average joint width more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) or a quarter of nominal joint width, whichever is less.

F. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Stone Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) difference between planes of adjacent units.

3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone, defective joints, and dimension stone cladding that does not match approved samples and mockups. Damaged stone may be repaired if Landscape Architect approves methods and results.



B. Replace in a manner that results in dimension stone cladding's matching approved samples and mockups, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean dimension stone cladding as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. Remove excess sealant and smears as sealant is installed.

D. Final Cleaning: Clean dimension stone cladding no fewer than six days after completion of pointing and sealing, using clean water and stiff-bristle fiber brushes. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents, cleaning agents containing caustic compounds or abrasives, or other materials or methods that could damage stone.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Fabricator and Installer ensures dimension stone cladding is without damage or deterioration at Date of Substantial Completion.

3.9 STONE SCHEDULE EXAMPLE

A. Stone Type ST - 1: Provide stone classified in the granite group and as follows: 1. Existing salvaged granite from on site



CAST STONE MASONRY 047200 - 1

SECTION 047200 - CAST STONE MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Cast stone trim. a. Wall panels.

2. Cast stone steps. 3. Cast stone curbing.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cast Stone: Architectural precast concrete building units intended to simulate natural cut stone.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for cast stone units, for information only.

C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for cast stone units. Include dimensions, details of reinforcement and anchorages if any, and indication of finished faces.

1. Include elevations showing layout of units and locations of joints and anchors.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For colored mortar; showing the full range of colors available.

E. Samples for Verification:

1. For each color and texture of cast stone required, 10 inches (250 mm) square in size. 2. For colored mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on

Project.

F. Full-Size Samples: For each type of cast stone unit required.



1. Make available for Landscape Architect's review at Project site before installing cast stone or at manufacturing plant, if acceptable to Landscape Architect.

2. Make Samples from materials to be used for units used on Project immediately before beginning production of units for Project.

3. Approved Samples may be installed in the Work.

G. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

1. Include copies of material test reports for completed projects, indicating compliance of cast stone with ASTM C 1364.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer of cast stone units similar to those indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units and with a record of successful in-service performance.

1. Manufacturer is a producing member of the Cast Stone Institute.

B. Source Limitations for Cast Stone: Obtain cast stone units through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.


A. Coordinate delivery of cast stone with unit masonry work to minimize the need for on-site storage and to avoid delaying the Work.

B. Pack, handle, and ship cast stone units in suitable packs or pallets.

1. Lift with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move cast stone units, if required, using dollies with wood supports.

2. Store cast stone units on wood skids or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to units. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation.

C. Store installation materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

D. Store mortar aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided.




A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until cast stone has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning.

B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate production and delivery of cast stone with unit masonry work to minimize the need for on-site storage and to avoid delaying the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CAST STONE MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1364 and the following:

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114.

C. Coarse Aggregates: Granite, quartz, or limestone complying with ASTM C 33; gradation as needed to produce required textures and colors as needed to produce required cast stone colors.

D. Fine Aggregates: Manufactured or natural sand or crushed stone complying with ASTM C 33, gradation as needed to produce required textures and colors as needed to produce required cast stone colors.

E. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures; color stable, free of carbon black, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis.

F. Admixtures: Do not use admixtures unless specified or approved in writing by Architect.

1. Do not use admixtures that contain more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride.

2. Use only admixtures that are certified by manufacturer to be compatible with cement and other admixtures used.

3. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by the manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures used. Add to mixes for units exposed to the exterior at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in an air content of 4 to 6 percent.

4. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 5. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 6. Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.



G. Reinforcement: Deformed steel bars complying with ASTM A 615. Use galvanized or epoxy-coated reinforcement when covered with less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) of cast stone material.

1. Epoxy Coating: ASTM A 775. 2. Galvanized Coating: ASTM A 767.

H. Embedded Anchors and Other Inserts: Fabricated from stainless steel complying with ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666, Type 304.

2.2 CAST STONE UNITS

A. Provide cast stone units complying with ASTM C 1364.

1. Provide units that are resistant to freezing and thawing as determined by laboratory testing according to ASTM C 666, Procedure A, as modified by ASTM C 1364.

B. Fabricate units with sharp arris and details accurately reproduced with indicated texture on all exposed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Slope exposed horizontal surfaces at least 1:12, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide drips on projecting elements, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fabrication Tolerances:

1. Variation in Cross Section: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm).

2. Variation in Length: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch (3 mm), whichever is greater, but in no case by more than 1/4 inch (6 mm).

3. Warp, Bow, and Twist: Not to exceed 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch (3 mm), whichever is greater.

4. Location of Grooves, False Joints, Holes, Anchorages, and Similar Features: Do not vary from indicated position by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) on formed surfaces of units and 3/8 inch (10 mm) on unformed surfaces.

D. Cure units by one of the following methods:

1. Cure units with dense fog and water spray in enclosed warm curing room at 95 to 100 percent relative humidity for 24 hours.

2. Yard cure units until the sum of the mean daily temperatures for each day equals or exceeds 350 deg F.

E. Acid etch units after curing to remove cement film from surfaces to be exposed to view.

F. Colors and Textures: As selected by Landscape Architect from manufacturer's full range.

G. Color and Texture: Provide units with fine-grained texture and buff color resembling Indiana limestone.

H. Reinforce units as indicated and as required by ASTM C 1364. Use galvanized or epoxy-coated reinforcement when covered with less than one and one-half (1 ½) inches (38 mm) of material.



2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. 1. For pigmented mortars, use colored portland cement-lime mix of formulation required to

produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard formulations. Pigments shall not exceed ten (10) percent of portland cement by weight for mineral oxides or two (2) percent for carbon black.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S.

D. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.

E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 2. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand, crushed stone or ground marble, granite or

other sound stone, of color necessary to produce required mortar color, as required matching Landscape Architect's sample.

F. Water: Potable.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchors: Type and size indicated, fabricated from stainless steel complying with ASTM A 240, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666, Type 304.

B. Dowels: Round stainless-steel bars complying with ASTM A 276, Type 304, and 1/2-inch (12-mm) diameter.

C. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength, general-purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other construction stains from new masonry surfaces without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by cast stone manufacturer and expressly approved by cleaner manufacturer for use on cast stone and adjacent masonry materials.

D. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of one-half (1/2) cup (125 mL) of dry-measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and one-half (1/2) cup (125 mL) of dry-measure laundry detergent dissolved in one (1) gallon (4 L) of water.

2.5 MORTAR MIXES

A. Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.



1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime.

B. Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification.

1. For setting mortar, use Type S. 2. Packaged Portland Cement-Lime Mix Mortar: Use portland cement-lime mix of selected

color. 3. Colored-Aggregates Mortar: Produce color required by combining colored aggregates

with portland cement of selected color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of cast stone.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 SETTING CAST STONE IN MORTAR

A. Set cast stone as indicated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.

1. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure units in place.

B. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar or setting in mortar.

C. Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Build anchors and ties into mortar joints as units are set. 2. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots with mortar. 3. Fill collar joints solid as units are set. 4. Keep head joints in coping and other units with exposed horizontal surfaces open, clear of

mortar and raked out to receive sealant.

D. Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depths of not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm). Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides. Scrub faces of units to remove excess mortar as joints are raked.

E. Point mortar joints by placing and compacting mortar in layers not greater than 3/8 inch (10 mm). Compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer.

F. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated.



G. Provide isolation, control, and pressure-relieving joints of widths and at locations indicated. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. 1. Section Cross Reference: Refer to Division 07, Joint Sealants Section, for sealant joints. 2. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials.

3.3 SETTING ANCHORED CAST STONE WITH SEALANT-FILLED JOINTS

A. Set cast stone as indicated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.

1. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure units in place.

2. Shim and adjust anchors, supports, and accessories to set cast stone in locations indicated with uniform joints.

B. Keep cavities open where unfilled space is indicated between back of cast stone units and backup wall; do not fill cavities with mortar or grout.

C. Fill anchor holes with sealant.

1. Where dowel holes occur at pressure-relieving joints, provide compressible material at ends of dowels.

D. Set cast stone supported on clip or continuous angles on resilient setting shims. Use material of thickness required to maintain uniform joint widths. Hold shims back from face of cast stone a distance at least equal to width of joint.

E. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. Remove temporary shims and spacers from joints after anchors and supports are secured in place and cast stone units are anchored. Do not begin sealant installation until temporary shims and spacers are removed.

1. Section Cross Reference: Refer to Division 07, Joint Sealants Section, for sealant joints.

3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 3/8 inch (9 mm) maximum.

B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 3/8 inch (9 mm) maximum.

C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches (3 mm in 900 mm) or one-fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less.

D. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Do not vary from flush alignment with adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).



3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching approved Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Landscape Architect.

B. Replace units in a manner that results in cast stone matching approved Samples, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean cast stone as work progresses.

1. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. 2. Remove excess sealant immediately, including spills, smears, and spatter.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed cast stone as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.

2. Test cleaning methods on sample; leave one sample uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Landscape Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of cast stone.

3. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.

4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water.

5. Clean cast stone by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes No. 20 Revised II, using job-mixed detergent solution.

6. Clean cast stone with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.



BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 071113 - 1

SECTION 071113 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes cold applied, cut-back and cold-applied, emulsified asphalt dampproofing applied to the following surfaces:

1. Exterior, below-grade surfaces of concrete and masonry foundation walls. 2. Back side of concrete and masonry retaining walls, below grade. 3. Exterior face of concrete and masonry indicated to receive stone veneer assemblies and

dimension stone cladding.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, for information only. Include recommendations for method of application, primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness, and protection course.

C. Material Certificates: For each product, signed by manufacturers. 1. Certification by dampproofing manufacturer that products supplied comply with local

regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC's).

D. Installer Certification: Submit written documentation certifying that Installer complies with requirements of "Installer Qualifications" below.


A. Qualifications: 1. Installer Qualifications: Engage a firm specializing in bituminous dampproofing

installations. Installer shall have successfully completed at least ten (10) projects of the same materials, design and of similar size and scope to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.



B. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers through one source from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Substrate: Proceed with dampproofing only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COLD-APPLIED, CUT-BACK ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Degussa Building Systems; Sonneborn Brand Products. 2. Meadows, W. R., Inc. 3. Tamms Industries, Inc.

C. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 4586, Type I, Class 1, fibered.

D. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 4479, Type I, fibered.

E. VOC Content: 2.5 lb/gal. (300 g/L) or less.

2.2 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Degussa Building Systems; Sonneborn Brand Products. 2. Meadows, W. R., Inc. 3. Tamms Industries, Inc.

C. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.

D. Fibered Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.



E. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1.

F. VOC Content: 0.25 lb/gal. (30 g/L) or less.

2.3 PROTECTION COURSE

A. Protection Course, Asphalt-Board Type: ASTM D 6506, premolded, 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick, multi-ply, semirigid board consisting of a mineral-stabilized asphalt core sandwiched between layers of asphalt-saturated felt, and faced on 1 side with polyethylene film.

B. Protection Course, Roll-Roofing Type: Smooth-surfaced roll roofing complying with ASTM D 6380, Class S, Type III.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Cut-Back Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41.

B. Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Asphalt-Coated Glass Fabric: ASTM D 1668, Type I.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for surface smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Proceed with dampproofing application only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering and clogging weep holes and drains.

B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal joints, and apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prime material manufacturer.

3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of dampproofing.



1. Apply additional coats if recommended by manufacturer or if required to achieve coverages indicated.

2. Allow each coat of dampproofing to cure 24 hours before applying subsequent coats. 3. Allow 48 hours drying time prior to backfilling.

B. Apply dampproofing to footings and foundation walls where opposite side of wall faces building interior whether indicated or not.

1. Apply from finished-grade line to top of footing, extend over top of footing, and down a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) over outside face of footing.

2. Extend 12 inches (300 mm) onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto surfaces exposed to view when Project is completed.

3. Install flashings and corner protection stripping at internal and external corners, changes in plane, construction joints, cracks, and where shown as "reinforced," by embedding an 8-inch- (200-mm-) wide strip of asphalt-coated glass fabric in a heavy coat of dampproofing. Dampproofing coat for embedding fabric is in addition to other coats required.

3.4 COLD-APPLIED, CUT-BACK ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING

A. On Concrete Foundations and Parged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply 2 brush or spray coats at not less than 1.25 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.5 L/sq. m) for first coat and 1 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.4 L/sq. m) for second coat, or 1 trowel coat at not less than 4 gal./100 sq. ft. (1.6 L/sq. m).

B. On Unparged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply primer and 2 brush or spray coats at not less than 1.25 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.5 L/sq. m) for first coat and 1 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.4 L/sq. m) for second coat, or primer and 1 trowel coat at not less than 4 gal./100 sq. ft. (1.6 L/sq. m).

C. On Unexposed Face of Concrete Retaining Walls: Apply 1 brush or spray coat at not less than 1.25 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.5 L/sq. m).

D. On Unexposed Face of Masonry Retaining Walls: Apply primer and 1 brush or spray coat at not less than 1.25 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.5 L/sq. m).

E. On Concrete Backup for Stone Veneer Assemblies and Dimension Stone Cladding: Apply 1 brush or spray coat at not less than 1 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.4 L/sq. m).

F. On Masonry Backup for Stone Veneer Assemblies and Dimension Stone Cladding: Apply primer and 1 brush or spray coat at not less than 1 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.4 L/sq. m).

3.5 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING

A. On Concrete Foundations and Parged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply 2 brush or spray coats at not less than 1.5 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.6 L/sq. m) for first coat and 1 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.4 L/sq. m) for second coat, 1 fibered brush or spray coat at not less than 3 gal./100 sq. ft. (1.2 L/sq. m), or 1 trowel coat at not less than 4 gal./100 sq. ft. (1.6 L/sq. m).

B. On Unparged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply primer and 2 brush or spray coats at not less than 1.5 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.6 L/sq. m) for first coat and 1 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.4 L/sq. m) for second



coat, primer and 1 fibered brush or spray coat at not less than 3 gal./100 sq. ft. (1.2 L/sq. m), or primer and 1 trowel coat at not less than 5 gal./100 sq. ft. (2 L/sq. m).

C. On Unexposed Face of Concrete Retaining Walls: Apply 1 brush or spray coat at not less than 1.25 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.5 L/sq. m).

D. On Unexposed Face of Masonry Retaining Walls: Apply primer and 1 brush or spray coat at not less than 1.25 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.5 L/sq. m).

E. On Concrete Backup for Stone Veneer Assemblies and Dimension Stone Cladding: Apply 1 brush or spray coat at not less than 1 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.4 L/sq. m).

F. On Masonry Backup for Stone Veneer Assemblies and Dimension Stone Cladding: Apply primer and 1 brush or spray coat at not less than 1 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.4 L/sq. m).

3.6 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION COURSE

A. Where indicated, install protection course over completed-and-cured dampproofing. Comply with dampproofing material manufacturer's written recommendations for attaching protection course.

1. Support protection course with spot application of adhesive of type recommended by protection board manufacturer over cured coating.

2. Install protection course on same day of installation of dampproofing (while coating is tacky) to ensure adhesion.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Remove dampproofing materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing.



JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants.

B. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below: 1. Expansion joints in brick pavers set with mortar. 2. Control, expansion and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs for paving. 3. Joints in stone paving units. 4. Joints in architectural precast concrete paving units. 5. Joints between different materials listed above and between curbs, building facades and

existing structures.

C. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces as indicated below: 1. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete. 2. Joints between architectural precast concrete units. 3. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. 4. Joints in dimension stone cladding.

1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.

1. Use manufacturer's standard test method to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.

2. Submit not fewer than three (3) pieces of each kind of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.

3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for

corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers. 5. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data

that are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.



1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit, for information only, manufacturer's product data for each joint-sealant product indicated, including instructions for joint preparation and joint sealant application.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

D. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. Install joint sealants sample in project mock-up for approval by Landscape Architect.

E. Qualification Data: Submit written documentation certifying that installer complies with requirements of "Installer Qualifications" below.

F. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer of joint sealants certifying that their products furnished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.

G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.

H. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

I. Warranties: Sample of special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Industry Reference Standards: Refer to Division 01 References Section.

B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. Engage a firm specializing in joint sealant applications. Installer shall have successfully completed at least ten (10) projects of the same material, design, and of similar size and scope to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance. 1. Firm Experience Period: Seven years minimum.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer.

D. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.



1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

2. Test according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement, adhesion-in-peel, and indentation hardness.

E. Field Constructed Mockups: Prior to installation of joint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants as follows to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution: 1. Joints in field constructed mock-ups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are

indicated to receive elastomeric joint sealants, which are specific by reference to this Section.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer.

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint

widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where

contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates.

5. Sequence joint sealant installation to occur after water repellent installation.


A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to project site in original unopened containers with labels indicating manufacturer; product name and designation; color, expiration date, pot life, curing time and mixing instructions for mulit-component materials.

B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, conaminants, or other causes.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition



to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years from date of Substantial Completion.

D. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Landscape Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one (1) of the products indicated for each type in the sealant schedules at the end of Part 3.

2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

A. Elastomeric Sealants Standards: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemical curing sealant in the Elastomeric Joint Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class and uses.



B. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in Elastomeric Joint Sealant Schedule, provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated.

C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

D. Continuous-Immersion-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants will be immersed continuously in water, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247, including six (6) week immersion period and additional immersion periods specified below, and have not failed in adhesion or cohesion when tested with substrates indicated for Project. 1. Two (2) additional four (4) week immersion periods.

2.4 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT.

B. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT.

2.5 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T.

B. Immersible Multicomponent, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, for Uses T and I.

2.6 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) or Type O (open-cell material); not suitable for horizontal surfaces; and of size and density to control sealant depths; prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.



C. Backer Strips for Cold-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 2, closed cell polyethylene; of thickness and width required to control sealant depths, prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant, and fill remainder of joint opening under sealant. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products may be

incorporated in the Work includes, but are not limited to, the following: a. Acceptable Manufacturer and Products:

1) Manufacturer: W.R. Meadows, Inc.

a) Product: Sealtight Deck-O-Foam.

2) Manufacturer: Sonneborn; ChemRex, Inc.

a) Product: Sonolastic Expansion-Joint Filler.

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

2.7 JOINT FILLER MATERIALS

A. General: Provide joint fillers of thicknesses and widths indicated.

B. Bituminous Fiber Joint Filler: Preformed strips of composition below, complying with ASTM D 1751: 1. Asphalt saturated fiberboard.

C. Asphalt Joint Filler: ASTM D 994, preformed strips, water proof and self sealing.

D. Plastic Joint Filler Caps: Two-piece preformed plastic cap of thickness and width required to provide reservoir for joint sealant, and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be


1) Manufacturer: W.R. Meadows, Inc.

a) Product: Sealtight Snap-Cap.

2) Manufacturer: Bo Metals, Inc.

a) Product: Expansion Board Caps.




A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete. b. Masonry.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not

stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal. b. Glass.



B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and

replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193.




A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.

b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length thereafter.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.

a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:

a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint

substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.

5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.



3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Multi-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant ES-1: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide one of the following:

a. Manufacturer: Tremco, Inc. 1) Product: Vulkem THC-901.

b. Manufacturer: Pecora Corp. 1) Product: Dynatred 2) Product: Dynaflex (heavy high heal exposure)

c. Manufacturer: BASF Construction Chemicals 1) Product: Sonneborn Sonolastic SL-2

2. Type and Grade: M (Multi component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: T (traffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, a, and as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.

a. Use O Joint Substrates: Brick, granite, limestone and wood. 6. Applications: Concrete pavement, sidewalks, curb, curb and gutter, brick paving and stone

paving.

B. Low-Modulus Nonacid-Curing Silicone Sealant ES-2: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products:

a. Manufacturer: Dow Corning Corp. 1) Product: Dow Corning 790.

b. Manufacturer: Pecora Corp. 1) Product: Pecora 890, NST.

c. Manufacturer: GE Silicones/Momentive Performance Materials 1) Product: SilPruf LM SCS 2700.

d. Manufacturer: Tremco, Inc. 1) Product: Spectrem I.

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Additional Movement Capability: 50 percent movement in extension and 50 percent

movement in compression for a total of 100 percent movement. 5. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 6. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and as applicable to joint substrates indicated,

O. a. Use O Joints Substrates: Galvanized steel, brick, granite, limestone, marble, ceramic

tile, and wood. 7. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per ASTM C 1248.



8. Applications: Stone cladding, cast-in-place architectural concrete and precast architectural concrete.

C. High-Modulus Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant ES-3: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide one of the following:

a. Manufacturer: Dow Corning, Corp. 1) Product: Dow Corning 795.

b. Manufacturer: Tremco, Inc. 1) Product: Spectrem 2.

c. Manufacturer: GE Silicones/Momentive Performance Materials 1) Product: SilPurf NB SCS 9000.

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and as applicable to joint substrates indicated,

O. a. Use O Joint Substrates: Galvanized steel.

6. Applications: Stone Cladding Kerfs.



FOUNTAINS 131200 - 1

SECTION 131200 - FOUNTAINS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Supply and installation of fountain mechanical and electrical equipment in accordance with the Contract Documents. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and services as required for a complete working fountain installation, as detailed in the project drawings and specifications.

1.02 RELATED WORK 1.03 REFERENCES

A. This installation shall comply with all applicable provisions of the latest edition of the following codes:

NEC National Electrical Code. BOCA National Building Code. UPC Uniform Plumbing Code.

B. Materials furnished hereunder shall comply with the latest edition of applicable standard specifications published by the following organizations:

ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials. ANSI - American National Standards Institute. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering. AWWA - American Water Works Association. CS - Commercial Standards. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association. NSF - National Sanitation Foundation. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Prime contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, apparatus, tools, equipment, transportation, temporary construction, and special or occasional services as required to make a complete working fountain installation, as shown on the drawings or described in these specifications.

B. Work included:

1. Fountain display system including pumps, valves, piping and specialties. 2. Fountain filtration system including filter, media, valves, piping and specialties. 3. Fountain water treatment system and related accessories. 4. Fountain plumbing and electrical services including water, sewer and power supply

to designated points of connection with site utilities. 5. All special tools for proper operation and maintenance of the equipment provided

under this section.

C. Water effects shall be as follows:



1. Single-Level, Exterior Fountain – A rectangular shaped fountain basin with water depth of approximately 12”. Located in the fountain are two linear rows of (11) Jet Cluster nozzles, (22) total. The jet cluster nozzles create a vertical column of water that operates at a spray height of 18”. A throttling valve is located below each jet to manually adjust each individual spray height, and a main throttling valve is located at the pump to adjust all the jets as a group. Each jet is illuminated by a ring LED light fixture with RGBW diodes to make the jet glow white, any color, or cycle through a color changing display. Fittings in the basin maintain the proper water level and return water to an underground equipment vault. The vault contains the fountain pump, cartridge filter, chemical feeder, valve assemblies, sump pump, vent fan, and a UL listed electrical control panel with digital timeclocks and a main disconnect switch.

1.05 DRAWINGS

A. Drawings for this work consist of a set of plans, detail drawings and diagrams. Other drawings may be added by the Architect during the period of construction, as required for clarification of proper installation of equipment.

B. The drawings accompanying these specifications are to be considered as important and

integral parts of same, and anything omitted from one and embodied in the other is to be considered as essential to the requirements of the contract and must be furnished and installed by the Contractor.

C. The drawings are essentially diagrammatic, intended mainly to indicate the scope of work to

be done. Equipment and material locations may be distorted for clearness in presentation. 1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. The use of manufacturers' names and catalog numbers followed by the phrase "or equal" is generally used to establish a standard of quality and utility for the specified items and to provide a dimensional reference for construction documents that are drawn to scale.

B. Submittals for "equal" items shall, where applicable, include the following data which are not

necessarily required for specified items: 1. Performance characteristics. 2. Materials. 3. Finish. 4. Certification of conformance with specified codes and standards.

C. Submittals of "equal" components or systems may be rejected if: 1. The material or equipment would necessitate the alteration of any portion of the

mechanical, electrical, architectural or structural design. 2. Dimensions vary from the specified material or equipment in such a manner that

accessibility or clearances are impaired or the work of other trades is adversely affected.

D. Proposed substitutions for materials or equipment must be submitted ten (10) days prior to

final bid date with complete drawing documents for consideration as approved equals. Otherwise, such substitutions will not be permitted. Proposals for substitutions shall be made



only by the prime bidders. Manufacturers, distributors, and sub-contractors shall not make proposals to the Architect for substitutions.

E. No substitution shall be made unless authorized in writing by the Architect. Should a

substitution be accepted, and should the substitute material prove defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service intended, and within the guarantee period, the Contractor shall replace this material or equipment with material or equipment specified, at his own expense, and to the satisfaction of the Architect.

F. Contractors submitting bids on substitute materials and equipment must also submit a bid on

the "as specified" materials and equipment.

G. Contractors submitting bids on substitute materials and equipment must also provide a written performance guarantee certifying that the substitute materials and equipment will produce the specified water effects.

1.07 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall submit complete shop drawings to the Architect for approval, in quantities required for proper distribution and in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions.

B. Shop drawings shall include or incorporate those final drawings furnished by the Equipment

Supplier, as specified herein, together with all additional information and drawings by the Contractor required in showing the proper installation of all equipment. Preliminary or schematic drawings provided by the equipment supplier shall not be used for installation.

C. The Contractor shall deliver drawings for approval, after the signing of the contract, so as not

to delay the construction required under other sections.

D. Submittals may be rejected if they are difficult to read due to insufficient scale, poor image quality, poor drafting quality or if the required information is not included.

E. Work shall not proceed until the Architect has approved submittals.


A. All workmanship and materials shall conform and comply with the requirements of building ordinances, codes, rules and regulations of all departments of Federal, State, county and city having lawful jurisdiction over the work in this section.

B. When these specifications and/or drawings call for or describe materials, workmanship or

construction of a better quality, higher standard or larger size than is required by the above mentioned rules and regulations, the provisions of these specifications and/or drawings shall take precedence over the requirements of said rules and regulations.

C. The Contractor shall furnish, without extra charge, any additional material and/or labor

required for compliance with these rules and regulations, although not mentioned in these specifications or indicated on the drawings.



D. All materials shall be new and shall conform with applicable standards in every case where such standards have been established for the particular material in question.

E. Workmen skilled in the craft that they are assigned shall execute all work.

F. Adequate supervision shall be provided to maintain high quality workmanship.

G. The Contractor shall provide labeled equipment-certifying approval, as hereinafter specified,

by Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 1.09 SITE CONDITIONS

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of the Owner's property from injury or loss due to his work. All damage to existing property (buildings, utilities, pavement, etc.) or planting (trees, shrubs, lawn or ground cover) caused by the Contractor during his operation or as a result of malfunction of installed work during the guarantee shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense.

B. The Contractor shall fully inform himself regarding any available space limitations and

unusual requirements, for the installation of all materials and work furnished under this section. Although the location of equipment may be shown on the drawings in certain positions, the Contractor shall also be guided by the Architectural details and conditions at the job, correlating his work with that of the other sections.

1.10 PERMITS AND FEES

A. Permits: The Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits, inspections, and certificates of inspection, of any governmental and inspection body having jurisdiction over all or any part of the work included under this section, and/or such inspections, etc., required by these specifications.

B. Fees: The Contractor shall secure and pay for all fees and assessments in connection with the

work under this contract, and shall include this cost in his bid and contract price. 1.11 GUARANTEE

A. In entering into a contract covering this work, the Contractor accepts the specifications and drawings and guarantees that the work will be performed in accordance with the requirements of the specifications and drawings or such modifications to said specifications and drawings as may be made in the contract documents.

B. The Contractor further guarantees that the workmanship and material will be of the best

quality procurable and that none but experienced workmen, familiar with each particular class of work, will be employed.

C. The Contractor further agrees to hold himself responsible for any defects which may develop

in any part of the entire system, including equipment as provided for under this specification, due to faulty workmanship, design or material and to replace and make good, without cost to the Owner, any such faulty parts or construction which may develop at any time within one (1) year from the date of system startup. Any repairs or replacements required because of



defects, as outlined in this clause, are to be made promptly and approved in writing by the Architect.

1.12 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. The Equipment Supplier shall deliver to the Owner three (3) copies of the Operations and Maintenance Manual, together with any additional information or manuals that would assist in the proper maintenance of equipment.

B. The Contractor shall arrange and provide for the technical instruction of the Owner's

maintenance personnel, by the Equipment Supplier's personnel, for such time as is reasonably required to acquaint them with the operation and maintenance of all equipment furnished or installed under this section.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL

A. Prime contractor shall be responsible for purchasing all specialized fountain materials for the fountain and shall then furnish electrical fountain components to the electrical contractor and mechanical fountain components to the mechanical contractor for installation and connection.

B. Equipment not listed within these specifications or on drawings as furnished by the Equipment

Supplier but required for the complete installation of the fountain mechanical and/or the Contractor shall furnish electrical systems, unless otherwise specified.

C. Products shown on the drawings but not specified herein shall be provided in accordance with

information shown on the drawings and the general provisions of this part of the specification. 2.02 SPECIALIZED FOUNTAIN MATERIAL SUPPLIER

A. All Fountain equipment specified and supplied to the Contractor shall be supplied by a single fountain equipment supplier unless otherwise specified herein.

B. The Equipment Supplier must currently be in the business of supplying fountain equipment

for a minimum of ten years and shall have previously supplied fountain equipment similar in size and complexity.

C. The Equipment Supplier shall also provide engineering design as it pertains to the fountain

system and the equipment supplied, referring specifically to complete hydraulic and electrical design. This shall include: display system, filtration system, water level control system and electrical control system design; pump selection and pump pit or equipment room sizing; piping system sizing, and suction pit and/or sump design; and, lighting and junction box selection and layout.

D. The engineering design information shall further be delineated on final schematic,

installation, and detail drawings showing the proper installation of the supplier's equipment. These drawings shall be furnished to the Contractor by the Equipment Supplier as an integral part of his fountain equipment package.



E. Approved Equipment Suppliers: Fountain People, Inc. 4600 HWY. 123, San Marcos, Texas 78666. Contact: Bryan Had, telephone 770-366-3302, e-mail [email protected]

2.03 MATERIAL SUPPLIER'S RESPONSIBILITY

A. All materials and component parts, excluding lamps, supplied by the Equipment Supplier shall be guaranteed to be free from defects of materials and/or workmanship, for a period of one (1) year from date of fountain start-up.

B. Design Responsibility: The Equipment Supplier shall accept complete design responsibility

for the hydraulic and electrical system, providing that all equipment is supplied by him as indicated. This does not include responsibility for the actual installation of the equipment except where the equipment is installed by the Equipment Supplier.

C. Performance Guarantee: The Equipment Supplier shall provide a written performance

guarantee certifying that the fountain system will perform to the designed water heights and patterns, and to create the designed lighting effects, provided the equipment is supplied by a single Equipment Supplier and the installation is in accordance with the supplier's recommendations and drawings.

D. Any material supplied by the Equipment Supplier that is not actually manufactured by the

Equipment supplier shall be supplied under the name of the particular equipment manufacturer's name.

2.04 Fountain Components Item# Qty Model # Description

1 22 JC-100 or equal Jet Cluster Nozzle, machined cast bronze construction with 1” connection, produces. a cluster of solid streams which create the effect of a column of water.

2 22 TBV-100 or

equal

Throttling Ball Valve, brass construction with stainless steel handle, 1” connections.

3 28 FWS-100 or equal

Waterstop Fitting, cast bronze coupling with integral waterstop flange, bonding lug and 1” female threaded connections.

4 2 R-83-3 or equal

Anti-Vortex Plate & Sump, heavy-duty frp construction with black gel coat interior finish, integral waterstop, and 3” sealed PVC pipe connection. Includes a 13” square anti-vortex/diverter plate of cast bronze with integral stand-offs and SS fasteners

5 1 FFD-300 or equal Floor Drain with Plug, cast bronze with integral waterstop flange, grounding screw, threaded bronze plug, and 3" female threaded connection.

6 1 FWD-300B or

equal Wall Mounted Overflow Fitting, cast bronze housing with integral waterstop, grounding screw, and 3” connection

7 1 R-50 or equal Mechanical Float with Niche, consists of brass valve with plastic float assembled into white acrylic niche with brass or stainless steel faceplate. 3/4” female threaded water supply connection.

8 2 R85B or equal Adjustable Eyeball Inlet Fitting, constructed of machined cast bronze and brass with bonding screw, 5/8” orifice eyeball, and 1-1/2” (F) N.P.T. connection.



9 2 FSK-150J or

equal

Front Access Skimmer, heavy duty ABS construction, floating weir with removable trash basket, cast bronze faceplate with natural finish. 1-1/2” NPT connection.

10 22 FX-LED-RING-

RGB or equal

LED Underwater Ring Light Fixture, type 304 stainless steel construction, 6.5” diameter, 1-1/2” x 1-1/4” transition adapter, tempered glass lens with silicone gasket, and 20 feet of cable. 24V input voltage, 36 watts from (9) RGBW diodes.

11 1 JB8-2 or equal

Junction Box, conduit mount, UL listed, underwater cast bronze junction box with internal grounding lug, neoprene gasket, 1” power connection, and two (2) 3/4“ side connections for lights. Includes cord seals.

12 5 JB8-4 or equal

Junction Box, conduit mount, UL listed, underwater cast bronze junction box with internal grounding lug, neoprene gasket, 1” power connection, and four (4) 3/4“ side connections for lights. Includes cord seals.

13 6 RPC-4441 or

equal Potting compound for use in underwater junction boxes, 12 oz. package, meets NEC article 680 as an approved potting compound.

14 1 DBVA-XF300 or

equal

Direct Burial Vault, fully pre-assembled and tested heavy duty FRP vault (4’-2” x 3’-4” x 4’-2” deep) with gel-coat interior and exterior, furnished with lockable fiberglass reinforced access hatch (green). The vault includes a 3-HP self-priming pump with integral basket strainer, cartridge filter, chemical feeder, suction & discharge valve assemblies, 1/3HP sump pump with 2” drain connection, 3” connection forced air ventilation system, and a UL listed electrical control panel in NEMA enclosure with motor starter, water level control relays, 24/7 digital timeclock, LED lighting dmx drivers & power supplies, HOA switches, and a main disconnect switch. Unit is factory engineered, assembled and tested prior to shipment. Power requirement:: 120/208 Volt, 3-phase, 4-wire feeder + GND.

15 2 VCA-300-P or equal

Vent Cap Assembly, PVC construction, 3” connection

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SITE AND DRAWING EXAMINATION

A. Any Contractor submitting a proposal for this work shall first examine the site of the proposed work and all conditions at the site that he may fully understand any facilities, difficulties, and restrictions attending the execution of the contract. No subsequent allowances shall be made because of omission, error, or negligence in connection with this provision.

B. Any Contractor submitting a proposal for this work shall carefully examine the architectural

and structural drawings and specifications for the work in this particular trade.

C. Questions pertaining to work that does not appear to be sufficiently detailed or explained, or pertaining to the true meaning of any part of the drawings or specifications, or discrepancies found existing in or between the specification and/or drawings, shall be referred to the Architect for clarification or correction.

3.02 COORDINATION



A. The Contractor shall cooperate with subcontractors of other trades, whose work is in any way affected by, or affects the work under this section.

B. The Contractor shall also coordinate the work under this section with that of other trades, as

required, to effect a completely satisfactory installation consistent with the requirements and intent of the contract drawings and specifications, to avoid omissions and delays in the work.

C. The Contractor shall furnish necessary materials in ample quantities as required to avoid delay

in the progress of the work and shall so store them as to prevent interference with other work. 3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. Install and connect all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations unless otherwise noted. If specified installation is contrary to manufacturer's instructions, cease installation of affected components or systems. Notify Project Manager and Architect/Engineer and do not resume installation without clear instructions.

B. Protect all pipes, conduits, equipment and other parts of the work against injury by exposure

to the weather during construction while stored and after installed in place.

C. Accurately locate items to be cast in concrete and rigidly support to resist loads imposed during concrete pour.

3.04 DIRECT-BURIAL VAULT SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Installation shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

2. Handle vault with forklift or lift using the provided lifting lugs. Rig vault so all lugs see equal lifting force.

3. Vault system must be protected at all times from flooding. Conduit and vent piping entries shall be protected from moisture entry prior to connection and drain piping and/or temporary power supply for sump pumps shall be connected immediately upon placement in excavation.

4. Vault piping and conduit connections shall not be externally loaded or used to support piping or conduit.

5. Vent piping, where required, shall not exceed twenty feet in length and ends of vent piping shall be protected with screen to prevent entry of insects.

B. Install as follows:

1. Excavate as required and pour a flat ballast slab as per manufacturer's instructions. 2. Place vault into excavation and anchor to ballast slab using the stainless steel anchor

cables provided by manufacturer. 3. Connect drain piping and/or temporary power to sump pump where required. 4. Connect all piping and conduit. 5. Pressure test-piping system. 6. Connect vent piping and protect openings. 7. Connect wiring to lugs and terminals provided in vault panel.



8. Install backfill material around vault. 9. Install vent pipe caps and screen.

C. Backfilling:

1. Backfill material shall be free-flowing gravel or crushed stone and shall be a nature rounded aggregate of 1/4" nominal size. Do not use sand or dirt for backfill.

2. A minimum of two feet of backfill material shall be provided between the vault and surrounding earth on all sides of vault. Top of vault may be backfilled with soil as specified by Architect up to a depth of twelve inches. If top of vault is located more than 12" below final grade, backfill material as described in #1 above, shall be provided between the vault and soil layer above vault.

D. Filter Media Installation

1. Filter media, where required, shall be installed in strict accordance with written

instruction from manufacturer. Media must be installed in filter tank prior to circulating water through filter. Operation of filter without media may damage filter.

3.05 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Provide isolation valves on each side of all pumps, strainers, filters or any other device or equipment that must be isolated for maintenance.

2. Provide throttling valves in discharge piping which supplies nozzles, waterfall diverters or any device or equipment which requires flow to be throttled or adjusted.

3. Provide check valves in discharge piping that connects two or more pools of different elevations to prevent backflow.

4. Valves with stems shall be installed with stem horizontal or above. Do not install with valve stems below horizontal centerline.

5. Angle valves shall close against pressure.

B. Applications:

1. Isolation valves shall be gate, ball or butterfly unless otherwise specified. 2. Throttling valves shall be globe, ball or butterfly. Butterfly valves used for throttling

must be equipped with infinite control handles up to 6" in size and hand wheel operators for sizes larger than 6".

3. Valves installed underwater or underground shall be of all non-corrosive material and furnished with non-corrosive handles or operators.

3.06 PIPE INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Install piping straight and true without loops or traps in accordance with the best modern practice.

2. Make pipe runs as direct as possible using a minimum number of fittings.



3. Slope piping to the pump for drainage. If piping cannot be sloped to pump, make provision for the complete draining of each pipe line by connecting minimum a 1-1/2" drain line and valve to lowest point in pipe run.

4. Pump suction piping shall be a straight run into the pump free of pipe bends or tees for a minimum of ten pipe diameters preceding the pump's suction connection unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

5. Pump suction piping reduction 4" or larger shall be made with eccentric type fittings to eliminate the entrapment of air in the suction piping.

6. Cut pipe and tubing ends square. Remove rough edges and burrs so that a smooth and unobstructed flow will be obtained.

7. Cut pipe to measurements established at the site. Work into place without springing or forcing.

8. Protect all openings in piping during construction to prevent entrance of foreign matter.

9. Provide flanges or unions as indicated and as necessary to allow removal and re-installation of any item of equipment or accessory without cutting, welding or soldering.

10. All connections between dissimilar metals shall be made with dielectric fittings. 11. Arrange exposed piping straight, parallel and perpendicular to the walls of the

structure unless otherwise shown on the drawings. 12. All city water lines connected to fountain system shall be protected by a backflow

preventer approved for application and a pressure regulator which limits supply pressure to a maximum 50 psi.

B. Pipe joints:

1. Welded pipe: Perform all welding in accordance with the requirements of ASME Boiler Pressure Piping Code or ANSI B31.1.

2. Threaded pipe: a. Cut all threads with axis of thread coinciding with axis of pipe. b. No more than two threads shall show beyond fittings. c. Make up joints with Teflon tape or paste. d. Remake leaky joints with new materials.

3. Compression copper joints: a. Use soft tubing. b. Cut ends using tubing cutter. Ream and clean. c. Install tube fitting as per manufacturer’s instructions.

4. PVC pipe: a. Bevel all pipe ends with a coarse file or beveling tool. b. Clean surfaces to be joined of all loose dirt and moisture from the I.D. and

O.D. of the pipe end and the I.D. of the fitting socket. c. Apply a coating of appropriate primer to the entire I.D. surface of the fitting

socket and to an equivalent area on the O.D. of the pipe end. d. Apply solvent cement using an appropriate natural bristle brush as follows:

Apply a liberal coating or cement around the entire perimeter of the pipe end to a width slightly more than the equivalent socket depth of the fitting. Apply a light but complete coating once around the entire depth of the socket surface, avoiding excessive cement application. Apply a second liberal coating onto the pipe end.

e. Immediately after cementing, insert the pipe into the fitting to the full socket depth while rotating the pipe or fitting one-quarter turn. Hold joint together



for at least 15 seconds after joining to make sure pipe does not back out of socket.

f. Do not disturb or move the joint for at least one hour after joining. g. Do not solvent weld pipe if atmospheric temperature is below 40 degrees F.

or above 90 degrees F., or if it is raining. h. Discard cement when an appreciable change in viscosity takes place or if

cement is lumpy or stringy. Do not thin. Cement must be used before the expiration date shown on the container.

C. Underground piping:

1. Excavate trenching for underground piping to required depths providing sufficient slope for proper pipe fall and adequate space at both sides and bottom of trench to facilitate pipe installation.

2. Tamp trenches hard. 3. Install piping on 6" deep bed of pea gravel in the bottom of trench. 4. Perform piping tests before coating or wrapping pipe. 5. Backfill trench with pea gravel to a height of 12" above top of pipe. 6. Backfill to surface in 6" layers with a minimum of 95% compaction. At paved areas,

material may be gravel, or native soil. At planted areas, soil shall be as specified by the Architect.

D. Pipe protection:

1. Copper, encased in concrete: Exterior shall be wrapped with one layer of pipe wrap at half lap.

2. Copper piping, underground: Exterior shall be coated with two coats of coal tar mastic to a total thickness of 8 to 10 mils. Allow 12 hours drying time between applications. Clean and prepare pipe exterior in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

E. Penetrations:

1. Core drilling for pipe penetrations shall be accomplished only at locations and in a manner approved by the Architect.

2. Provide a metal sleeve or core drilled hole for every pipe passing through a concrete wall or floor.

3. Provide a waterstop or membrane clamp for every pipe or sleeve penetrating an exterior concrete wall or floor or the fountain wall or floor, whichever is appropriate to the waterproofing method and as shown on the drawings.

4. Seal sleeves passing through exterior walls with resilient seal and foam sealant, or as indicated on the Drawings.

3.07 UNDERWATER LIGHT FIXTURE INSTALLATION

A. Install underwater lighting fixtures in accordance with Article 680 of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and as per manufacturer's instructions.

B. Secure underwater light flexible cords to junction boxes using brass compression type strain

relief seals approved for application.

C. Exposed underwater flexible cords may not exceed 10 feet in length.



D. Protect all underwater lighting circuits operating above 15 volts with a Class "A" ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI). Circuits operating below 15 volts shall be protected by a transformer UL listed and marked for application.

E. Provide sufficient flexible cord to allow underwater light fixtures to be removed from the

water for re-lamping and normal maintenance. 3.08 UNDERWATER JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION

A. Install underwater junction boxes in accordance with Article 680 of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and as per manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install all junction boxes connected to underwater light fixtures, but located outside of

fountain basin, as an underwater junction box if not located 4 feet or more from pool and 8" or higher above maximum pool water level.

C. Underwater junction boxes shall be sealed after being wired as follows:

1. Seal all conduit openings using duct seal or other approved sealant. 2. Make sure all wiring connections are grouped in center of box away from box walls

and recessed below opening. 3. Fill junction box completely with potting compound to encapsulate electrical

connections and prevent moisture entry. 3.09 CONDUIT INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring in sealed conduit in accordance with best modern practice, except flexible cord approved for submersible application shall be used between underwater light fixtures and underwater junction boxes.

B. Applications (Unless otherwise indicated on drawings):

1. Conduit located within pool and all stub-ups through pool floor or walls shall be red brass.

2. Conduit located in equipment room or exposed to sunlight shall be steel. 3. Buried conduit shall be PVC.

C. Conceal conduit located in finished areas unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

D. Cut ends of all conduit square and carefully ream to remove rough edges.

E. Seal ends of conduit during construction to prevent entry of moisture or contaminates.

F. Provide a bushing to protect conductors from abrasion where conduit enters a box or other

fitting.

G. Where junctions, bends or offsets are required on exposed runs of conduit, fittings with accessible covers shall be provided. Bends around corners of beams, walls or equipment will not be permitted.

H. Do not use threadless couplings and/or connectors with conduit installed in wet locations or

where buried in concrete or other fill. All threads shall be NPT (tapered pipe threads) run up tight with Teflon tape or sealant. Running threads will not be permitted.



I. Bend conduit so that conduit is not damaged and such that the inside diameter is not

effectively reduced. No more than the equivalent of two 90-degree bends shall be used on any single run of conduit between accessible outlets and/or other fittings.

J. Provide dielectric fittings for all connections made between dissimilar metals.

K. Seal all conduits after conductor installation to prevent entry of moisture.

3.10 CONDUCTOR INSTALLATION

A. Install conductors in conduit after conduit has been installed and all moisture and debris have been removed from conduit, junction boxes and other conduit fittings.

B. Install conductors connected to equipment having a tendency to cause noise or vibration in

flexible conduit not to exceed four feet in length. Cover all flexible conduit subject to moisture with watertight plastic and make all connections with watertight fittings.

C. Install only stranded type copper conductors with waterproof insulation between underwater

junction boxes and Fountain Control Panel. Do not use solid copper conductors.

D. Do not use cleaning agents or lubricants that might have a deteriorating effect on conductor coverings.

E. Make all electrical connections to mechanical equipment as required to place this equipment

in operating service.

F. Connect conductors to terminals using approved connectors. Wires in panel cabinets, pull boxes, and wiring gutters shall be neatly grouped and fanned out to the terminals.

3.11 CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING

A. Color code conductors (600 volts and under) and identify by one color with continuity being maintained throughout the project.

B. Color code as follows:

1. Phase "A" - Black. 2. Phase "B" - Red. 3. Phase "C" - Blue. 4. "Neutral" - White. 5. "Ground" - Green.

3.12 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Provide a securely attached permanent nameplate for each piece of equipment, where appropriate, containing all data required to properly identify the equipment, (i.e., manufacturer, type, size, capacity, horsepower, etc.).

B. Provide a permanently attached valve tag of non-corrosive material for each valve, to provide

information to correlate the valve with the outlet or fitting served.



C. Provide a legible copy of the "As-built" schematic diagram, permanently encased in plastic or glass, to provide the Owner's operating personnel ready correlation of each valve identified with each outlet or fitting served.

D. Provide nameplates for all pressure and/or compound gauges, pressure switches, vacuum

switches and other sensory or control devices to identify and provide information to correlate the device to operation and maintenance manual.

E. Provide nameplates on exterior of all electrical panels to identify panel and designate

maximum voltage within panel.

F. Provide labels for all panel control switches and pilot lights to identify equipment controlled and function.

G. Provide labels in all power distribution panels designating device connected to each circuit

breaker.

H. Provide labels on each time clock, control relay, contactor, and motor starter within control panels to identify and provide information to correlate the device to panel electrical drawings.

3.13 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. The Contractor or subcontractor shall keep on the job, one complete set of contract working drawings, on which he shall record any deviations or changes from such drawings made during construction. The record drawings shall show changes in size, type, capacity, etc., of material, device or piece of equipment, rerouting of any piping or conduit, or changes in other building services.

B. These drawings shall also record the location of all concealed services, piping, conduit and

other equipment, by indication of measured dimensions to each such line, from readily identifiable and accessible reference points.

C. Before the date of the final inspection, the Contractor shall transfer all information from the

"as-built" prints to a sepia Mylar procured from the Architect at cost. All work shall be neat, in ink and subject to the approval of the Architect.

D. After final acceptance the approved sepia drawings shall be delivered to the Architect in good

condition, as a permanent record of the installation as actually constructed. 3.14 DEFECTIVE WORK AND MATERIALS

A. All materials or work found to be defective or not in strict conformity with the drawings, or different from the requirements of the drawings and specifications, or defaced or injured, shall be removed and satisfactory material and work substituted.

3.15 CLEAN UP

A. Upon completion of the work of this section, the Contractor shall remove all unused equipment and implements of service, and leave the entire area involved in a neat, clean, and acceptable condition as approved by the Owner.



B. All soiled, abraded or discolored surfaces of decorative fountain work shall be cleaned, polished and left free from blemishes or defects.

C. All water pipe lines shall be flushed free of debris as follows:

1. Completely drain all piping and equipment. 2. Remove all construction debris and thoroughly sweep pools clean. 3. Fill the system to the required capacity. 4. Circulate the water throughout the system for one hour, using the display pump. Do

not allow cloudy water to pass through the filter tank. 5. Completely drain pool, piping and equipment and remove all debris that may have

collected in suction and/or discharge strainers. 3.16 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS

A. General: The Contractor shall test all equipment installed by him, as necessary, to show that it complies with all requirements specified. Testing shall be done in a manner approved by the Architect.

B. Piping tests:

1. Provide all temporary piping, pumps, and gauges necessary to conduct the specified tests.

2. Conduct all tests before concealment of work and before any coating, paint or wrap is applied.

3. Use water as test medium. Do not test piping with air or any other compressible gas. Vent air from all piping being tested before applying pressure.

4. Replace or repair any part that leaks. Repeat test until criteria are met. 5. Do not subject any item to a test pressure greater than the pressure rating of the item. 6. Underground piping shall be tested as follows:

a. Pressurize all underground piping (except for drain system) to 40 psi prior to backfilling (spot backfilling to anchor piping may be done prior to pressurizing). Piping shall remain pressurized until all backfilling, grading, planting and concrete work in the area of the piping is completed.

b. Pressurize all underground drain piping beneath the equipment space to 15 psi prior to backfilling (spot backfilling to anchor piping may be done prior to pressurizing). Piping shall remain pressurized until all backfilling and concrete work in the area of the piping is completed.

7. The completed piping systems shall be tested as follows: a. Conduct each test for a minimum continuous duration of eight hours. b. Hydrostatically pressure test all storm and sanitary drain piping at 15 psi. c. Hydrostatically pressure test all other piping and equipment at 40 psi. d. Strike all solder joints with a soft-face hammer while under pressure.

8. Log pressure readings for all tests required at the beginning and end of each test. Note the location and cause of any failures and method of repair on a daily log. Submit copy of log to the Architect.

C. Electrical tests:

1. All electrical circuits, feeders, and equipment shall be tested and proven free of

improper grounds, open circuits or shorts, as required by the public authorities, to demonstrate compliance with codes or laws.



D. The Contractor shall, at his expense, make the fountain operational using an authorized Technician from the Equipment Supplier and make tests, adjustments, and corrections, until it is shown to be in proper operating condition.

3.17 THIRTY-DAY OPERATION PERIOD

A. As soon as the fountain structure has been completed and all-mechanical and electrical equipment has been installed and tested, the fountain may be placed in operation.

B. Prior to acceptance of the installation by the Owner, the Contractor shall demonstrate a

concurrent thirty-day, fully automated, uninterrupted daily operation of not less than twelve hours nor more than twenty hours for all systems provided under this section.

C. The Contractor shall supervise the operation of the equipment and be responsible for the

proper operation and maintenance thereof and make no claim against the Owner for any damage to the equipment during such operation. The Contractor shall make such changes, adjustments, or replacements of equipment as may be required to make the installation comply with the Specifications, or to replace any defective parts or materials.

D. The Owner will pay water and normal operational supplies during the thirty-day operation

period the costs of electricity. The Contractor shall pay for all operating costs resulting from system deficiencies.

3.18 1-YEAR MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

A. Contractor is to provide a 1-year maintenance program with bi-weekly visits to visually and manually check all components of the fountain. Contractor is to also provide an option for a 5-year maintenance program.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 310000 - EARTHWORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide labor, material and equipment for excavating, backfilling, filling, grading and relatedwork.

B. Earthwork includes, but is not limited to, excavation, filling, compacting and grading in theareas shown on the drawings to obtain the required finished ground surface properly prepared toreceive pavements, walks, building floor slabs, utilities, and drainage structures.

C. The work includes ditching in soil areas of high moisture content to allow the soil to drain priorto making excavations.

D. The work includes adjustment of moisture content up or down by discing of soils placed in fillsif soil tests show drying to be necessary to meet compaction requirements.

E. The work includes spreading topsoils in sufficient quantities to backfill islands, medians, androadway shoulders and open graded areas.

F. The work includes undercutting unsuitable soil materials and replacing with compactedapproved soils.

G. The work includes stockpiling approved soil material in convenient location and in sufficientquantity for use in backfill of walls.

H. The work includes removal from the job of unsuitable, excess materials if pre-approved byOwner.

I. The work includes importing material, if required, from offsite.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE CRITERIA

A. Testing Laboratory1. The Owner may choose to engage geotechnical engineering services for quality control

testing during earthwork operations.

B. Adjacent to buildings and in parking lots and roads, grade to within five hundredths (5/100) of afoot of the elevations and contours shown on the Drawings. In open areas, grade to within one-tenth of a foot of those shown on the Drawings. Hand dress grades under buildings, slabs,walks, and steps to obtain the required elevation as shown on the Drawings.

C. Perform no unauthorized or unnecessary grading. This consists of removal of materials beyondthe plan limits of grading and removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevation ordimensions without specific direction of the Owner’s representative. Provide necessary remedialwork at the Contractor’s expense.

D. Submit certification by a Geotechnical Engineer that materials imported to the site contain nohazardous substances.

E. Include in the bid submittal unit costs to purchase and place (or perform) as specified on thejobsite the following items.1. surge stone2. 57 stone3. geotextile fabric (stabilization)


1.3 SAMPLES

A. Deliver the following samples to testing and inspection service as directed by the Owner:1. Fifty pound sample of each class fill material encountered as directed by the Geotechnical

Engineer using care that samples are representative.2. Fifty pound sample of proposed fill material.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Definitions:1. Satisfactory soil materials consist of soil material that has been submitted to and approved

by the Geotechnical Engineer as satisfactory for backfill and fill.2. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of clay, rock or gravel larger

than 2" in any dimension, free of debris, waste, frozen materials, organic and otherdeleterious matter. Provide additional backfill and fill materials from off-site sources asrequired.

3. Use soils for structural backfill having a minimum dry density of 97 pounds per cubic footunless otherwise approved by the Geotechnical Engineer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROCEDURES

A. After clearing and disposal is complete, strip from the top of the existing ground topsoil in allareas to be graded. Stockpile in approved locations where it will not interfere with building orutility operations. Use topsoils free from subsoil, debris and stones larger than 2" in diameter.Locate stockpiles as designated by the Owner. At the completion of the work, distribute topsoilover the grounds to form a minimum cover of 4 inches loose measure on graded areas to receivevegetation and other areas indicated by the Owner. Scarify subgrade prior to spreading topsoil.Form berms as directed to dispose of excess topsoil and haul off topsoil remaining. Import

topsoil to meet the minimum coverage if onsite topsoil is insufficient.

B. Perform exterior grading in accordance with the drawings to ease contours sloping away fromthe building from sides. In these cases, provide grades of sufficient pitch to drain water from thearea.

C. Graded Areas: Repair and reestablish grades to the required elevations and slopes if anysettlement or washing occurs prior to the acceptance of the work. Fill to required subgrade levelsany areas where settlement occurs.

D. Temporary Grading and Drainage: Provide effective drainage for the entire site.

E. Excavating: Make no footing excavations to the full depth indicated when freezing temperaturesor rain is expected. When full depths are reached, protect bottoms from frost or rain if placingof concrete is delayed.1. Excavate material of every description and whatever substance encountered, to dimensions

and levels shown on the Drawings. Excavate work to be clean-cut and true with bottomslevel and sound.

2. Lab Testing: The Geotechnical Engineer will make necessary tests for required soilbearing values, and soil compaction.

3. Existing Site Conditions: Excavate any existing depressions or trenches that areencountered and are entirely within the new building walls, or within 5 feet of walls, tosolid sub-grade and fill with compacted gravel or concrete to underside of new foundationor floor slab.

4. Unsuitable Bearing Material: Place the bottom of trenches, foundations and footings andbase for paving on compacted suitable material. Remove loose materials, surface


vegetation, debris and existing fill before any fill is placed. Proof roll the subgrade in the presence of the Geotechnical Engineer. Fill operations can then take place. Do not place footings until the Geotechnical Engineer and the Owner have examined and approved the soil upon which they will rest. If the bearing capacity at the levels indicated be found by the Testing Laboratory to be insufficient, the Owner may order the excavations carried to proper bearing. Inspect and approve excavations for footings carried deeper than required by error for proper bearing and then fill only with concrete, same as specified for footings, at no additional cost to the Owner. Provide a minimum of six (6) inches compacted crushed #57 stone between bottom of footings and any rock encountered. Compact fill in accordance with requirements for backfill.

5. Extend excavation, to the depths and dimensions required by the Drawings, includingremoval of rock.

3.2 FOUNDATION TEST BORINGS

A. The Geotechnical Testing Lab will provide labor and material to drill 2" diameter earth augerborings in foundation trenches for footings to a depth of 6'-0" below bearing. Locate boring andspecify quantities as directed by the Owner and do not exceed the equivalent of one boring per50 linear feet of foundation lines. Use a Registered Geotechnical Engineer to verify the bearing.

3.3 ADDED EXCAVATIONS

A. Should the bearings at the levels indicated be found by the Geotechnical Engineer to beinsufficient, the Owner may order the excavations carried to proper bearings. This work may beclassified as additional work. Adjust the contract sum as provided for in other divisions.

3.4 FILLING AND BACKFILL

A. Work Included: Include in the contract grading required for subgrade, under floor slabs, pavedwalks, drives, parking areas and against walls. Construct fills as herein specified.1. Structural Fill is defined as fill supporting retaining wall footings or any structure

whatsoever and extending for a distance of ten feet (10') on each side of said structuremeasured at the finished grade, thereafter tapering away at a 45 degree angle.

2. Paving Area Fill is defined as fill supporting any asphalt, concrete paving, or specialpaving for parking of cars, or trucks, or concrete walks and extending for a distance of fivefeet (5') on each side of said area measured at the finished grade, thereafter tapering awayat a 45 degree angle.

3. General Area Fill is defined as fill in the general grading area covering banks, lawns,hollows, drainage ditches.

B. Clear and grub vegetation from areas to be filled. Scarify the ground to insure bond between thefill and the original surface. For fill to be placed on hillsides, plow deeply or, where existingground is steeper than 2:1, bench the existing ground surface before beginning the fillingoperations.

C. Place fill material in uniform, horizontal layers, not more than 8” thick. Moisten each layer asnecessary to insure a proper bond and maximum compaction. Use suitable equipment to mix thematerial and insure uniform moisture content. Fully and uniformly compact each layer with asheep’s foot roller or vibratory roller of the proper size and weight to achieve specification.

3.5 BACKFILL AGAINST FOUNDATION WALLS, IN TRENCHES AND EXCAVATIONS, AND OTHER NECESSARY LOCATIONS

A. Do not place backfill against foundation walls until foundation walls are braced and have curedsufficiently to develop the strength necessary to withstand, without damage, the pressures thatwill result from backfilling and compacting operations. Secure approval of the Owner beforecommencing backfilling.


B. Placing Backfill: Place al backfill material in uniform, approximately horizontal layers, notexceeding 8" before compacting. Compact each layer with pneumatic tampers or sheepsfootroller to optimum moisture to produce a minimum of 95% of the standard proctor maximum drydensity (ASTM specifications D-698). Use a testing laboratory to perform tests of fill density inplace for every lift. Submit reports of tests to the Owner.

C. Surplus Materials: Dispose of excess or unsuitable materials.

3.6 GRADING

A. Place fill as specified for backfill except as noted herein. Accomplish compaction by traversingwith a sheepsfoot roller or other approved heavy grading machinery. Compact fill to a minimumof 95% of the standard proctor maximum dry density (ASTM specifications D-698) to 12 inchesbelow subgrade for structural fill areas for a minimum distance of ten feet outside of structureperimeter and for locations for future buildings. Compact parking area fill soils to 95% of thesoil's standard density to 12 inches below subgrade. Compact general fill areas to 90% of thestandard density.

B. Compact the upper 12 inches of fill in structural fill areas and paving areas to 98% standardproctor density.

C. Preparation of sub-grade for slabs: Remove roots and debris subject to termite attack, rot orcorrosion and other material not suitable for fill. Fill holes and minor depressions and compactfillings as specified herein including re-compaction of sub-grade. Place subgrade soils within+/-3% of the soils optimum moisture content per ASTM 698, contain no deleterious material andno rock fragments over 4” (inches) in diameter.

3.7 SITE GRADING

A. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, slope the sub-grade evenly to provide drainage awayfrom building walls. Provide berms and swales at top and swales, at bottom of banks, and atother breaks in grade. Grade the finish of the surface to be uniform and smooth and free fromirregular surface change. The base of cuts and top edges of fills must be straight and even.

B. Materials: Provide clean, suitable earth for additional fill if a sufficient quantity of suitablematerial is not available from the required excavation on the site.

C. Grading Operations: Perform cutting, filling, backfilling and grading required to bring the entireproject area to sub-grades as follows:1. For floor slabs, to underside of concrete slab; for surface area; including driveways, walks

and parking area; to the underside of the respective surfacing as fixed by finished grades.

D. Finished Grades: The words "finished grades" as used herein means the required final gradeelevations indicated on the Drawings. If finished grades shown by spot elevations conflict withthose shown by contours, the spot elevations will govern. Repair areas where settlement, erosionor other deviations occur in the grade. Re-compact and bring to the required section and gradesat no additional expense to the Owner.


A. Quality Control Testing During Construction: Allow testing and inspection service to inspectand approve subgrades and fill layers before further construction work is performed. Test asfollows:1. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D-698.

B. Test fill in place by laboratory approved by the Owner. Make tests continuously as necessaryduring the placing and compacting of the fill. Make tests in fill-in trenches outside of buildingareas. Obtain approval of fill material by the Testing Lab before it is placed.


C. Test as follows:1. Structural Fill and Backfill: Make one test for each two-foot lift of each 2,000 sq. ft. of

area.2. Paving Area Fill: Make one test for each two-foot lift of each 2,000 sq. ft. of area.3. General Area Fill: Make one test for each two-foot lift of each 10,000 sq. ft. of area.

D. Pay for retesting of failed tests.

3.9 PROTECTION OF EXISTING TREES REMAINING

A. Protect tops, trunks, and roots of trees to remain; box, fence or otherwise protect trees which aresubject to site work or construction damage. See the Section CLEARING AND GRUBBINGfor tree protection and removal of any interfering branches. Immediately and properly trim andpaint with a protective tree wound and sealing compound any cuts, or accidental injury to thebark or trunk. Remove protection only when danger from operations no longer exists.

3.10 PROTECTION OF ADJACENT PROPERTY

A. For the duration of the construction and until release, protect adjoining property from anyexcessive drainage and debris. Do not enter upon adjoining property without the permission ofthe property owner.

3.11 CLEAN-UP

A. During the construction and clean-up, do not dump debris on any part of the property or in anyunauthorized place. Remove debris, construction material, equipment, logs, stumps, boulders, orany other extraneous material deposited during construction from the site. Remove existingdebris or other extraneous material from undisturbed areas. Material that is removed from thesite is the property of the Contractor.

END OF SECTION


CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 1

SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following:

1. Curbs. 2. Walkways. 3. Unit paver base. 4. Stairs

B. Extent of cement concrete pavement is indicated on Drawings.

C. All areas of pavement shall receive water repellent coating, unless otherwise indicated.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast-furnace slag.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated, for information only.

C. Design Mixtures: For each concrete pavement mixture. Include alternate mixture designs when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

D. Qualification Data: Submit written documentation certifying that Installer complies with requirements of "Installer Qualifications" below.

E. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials complies with requirements:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.



3. Fiber reinforcement. 4. Admixtures. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Joint fillers.


A. Industry Reference Standards: Refer to Division 01 References Section. 1. Georgia Department of Transportation Standard Specifications Construction of Roads and

Bridges (GADOT), current edition. 2. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI): Manual of Standard Practice, current edition. 3. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):

M 248-91(00) Specification for Ready-Mixed White and Yellow Traffic Paints.

B. Installer Qualifications: Engage a firm specializing in cement concrete pavement installation. Installer shall have successfully completed at least twenty (20) pavement installation projects of the same materials, design and of similar size and scope or work to that indicated for this Project and whose Work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products who complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program.

E. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

F. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

G. Field Constructed Mockups: Prior to installing concrete pavement, furnish and install a 100 square foot sample of pavement indicated with proposed materials, and workmanship to be expected in completed work. Build mockup to comply with the following requirements; using materials, joints, edges and finish, as indicated for final unit of Work.

1. Locate mockup on site in location indicated; or if not indicated as directed by Landscape Architect.

2. Obtain Landscape Architect's acceptance of qualities of sample before start of final unit of Work.

3. Replace unsatisfactory mockup Work; as directed, until acceptance of Landscape Architect.



4. Maintain approved mockup during construction in undisturbed condition as a standard for judging completed Work. Do not alter, move or destroy mockup until Work is completed. The approved sample in undisturbed condition at Date of Substantial Completion may become part of completed unit of Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain primary materials, accessories and joint materials from a single source.

2.2 SUBBASE MATERIALS

A. Subbase Course Materials: Refer to Division 31, Earthmoving Section, for requirements.

2.3 FORMS

A. Concrete Formwork: Refer to Division 03, Concrete Forming and Accessories Section, for requirements.

B. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces.

1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves with a radius.

C. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent with a maximum of 350 g/L volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. Use single source for all forms.


A. Concrete Reinforcement: Refer to Division 03, Concrete Reinforcing Section, for requirements.

B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

C. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.

D. Epoxy-Coated Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 884, Class A, plain steel.

E. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60; deformed.

F. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775 or ASTM A 934; with ASTM A 615, Grade 60 deformed bars.



G. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184; with ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed bars; assembled with clips.

H. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

I. Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 775; with ASTM A 615, Grade 60, plain steel bars.

J. Tie Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

K. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows:

1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs.

2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports.

2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source throughout the Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, gray. Supplement with the following:

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S coarse aggregate, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) nominal.

C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 2. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.

2.6 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) dry.



B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

E. Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B.

2.7 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

B. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures; color stable, free of carbon black, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis.


2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete mixture designs for the trial batch method.

2. Do not use the Owner's field quality-control testing agency as the independent testing agency.

B. Proportion mixtures to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3500 psi (24.1 MPa). 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 3-4 inches.

C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows:

1. Air Content: 5 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size

D. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements for concrete exposed to deicing chemicals. as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. 2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent.



2.9 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.

1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.

B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.

1. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction and repeat in perpendicular direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).

2. Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons (13.6 tonnes).

3. Subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch (13 mm) require correction according to requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

C. Proceed with concrete pavement operations only after nonconforming conditions have been corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.

B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and verify need for additional compaction. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been corrected and are ready to receive paving.

3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Form Construction: Refer to Division 03, Concrete Forming and Accessories Section, for requirements.

B. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

C. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage.




A. Reinforcement: Refer to Division 03, Concrete Reinforcement Section, for requirements. Locate and place reinforcement according to the Drawings.

B. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

C. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.

D. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.

E. Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, extend mesh to within one (1) inch of edges of pavement, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

F. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-coated reinforcement. Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M.

G. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch (50-mm) overlap of adjacent mats.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated. Joint types and locations are indicated on the Drawings.

B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless pavement terminates at isolation joints.

1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Butt Joints: Use bonding agent at joint locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

3. Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete.

4. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

1. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint.



2. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished surface if joint sealant is indicated.

3. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated. 4. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or

clip joint-filler sections together. 5. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other

temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.

6. Doweled Isolation Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 1/4-inch (6-mm) radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks.

E. Installation of Joint Sealants: Refer to Division 32, Concrete Pavement Joint Sealants Section, for requirements.

F. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch (6-mm) radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Concrete Placement: Refer to Division 03 Cast-In-Place Concrete Section, for requirements.

B. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.

C. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.

D. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.

E. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

F. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site.



G. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing.

H. Deposit and spread concrete pavement in a continuous operation between transverse construction joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked

around reinforcement, other embedded items and into corners. 2. When concrete placing is interrupted for more than one-half (1/2) hour, place a

construction joint.

I. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

J. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate concrete complying with ACI 309R.

1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices.

K. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or derbies to form a smooth surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.

L. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.

M. Curbs and Gutters: When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter placement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not approved, remove and replace with formed concrete.

N. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on concrete until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28-day compressive strength.

O. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on a subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.



P. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist:

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.7 FLOAT FINISHING

A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.

B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture.

1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.

2. Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating float-finished concrete surface 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) deep with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic.

3.8 SPECIAL FINISHES

A. Monolithic Exposed-Aggregate Finish: Expose coarse aggregate in pavement surfaces as follows:

1. Immediately after float finishing, spray-apply chemical surface retarder to pavement according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Cover pavement surface with plastic sheeting, sealing laps with tape, and remove when ready to continue finishing operations.

3. Without dislodging aggregate, remove excess mortar by lightly brushing surface with a stiff, nylon-bristle broom.

4. Fine-spray surface with water and brush. Repeat water flushing and brushing cycle until cement film is removed from aggregate surfaces to depth required.

3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.



C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. Weather permitting; keep continuously moist for not less than seven (7) days.

E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows:

1. Moist Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.10 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows:

1. Elevation: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch (10 mm), minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- (3-m-) long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch (6

mm). 4. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1 inch (25 mm). 5. Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 6. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: 1/2 inch (13

mm). 7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: Length

of dowel 1/4 inch per 12 inches (6 mm per 300 mm). 8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches (75 mm). 9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus. 10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch (3 mm), no minus.



3.11 WHEEL STOPS

A. Securely attach wheel stops into pavement with not less than two galvanized steel dowels embedded in holes drilled or cast into wheel stops at one-quarter to one-third points. Firmly bond each dowel to wheel stop and to pavement. Securely install dowels into pavement and bond to wheel stop. Recess head of dowel beneath top of wheel stop.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least 1 composite sample for each 5000 sq. ft. (465 sq. m) or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day.

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test 1 specimen at 7 days and 2 specimens at 28 days.

C. Test results shall be reported in writing to Landscape Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

D. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Landscape Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.

E. Remove and replace concrete pavement where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.



3.13 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section.

B. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

C. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.

D. Remove all surplus materials, rubbish, cartons, and other debris resultant from work of this Section and haul off site. Repair damage resulting from pavement operations. Leave entire work in broom-clean condition.



CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 321373 - 1

SECTION 321373 - CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cold-applied joint sealants.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated, for information only.

B. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

C. Qualification Data: Submit written documentation certifying that installer complies with requirements of "Installer Qualifications" below.

D. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer, certifying that products furnished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. Engage a firm specializing in joint sealant application. Installer shall have completed at least seven (7) projects of the same material, design and of similar size and scope to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in joint sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance. 1. Firm Experience Period: Five years minimum.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:



1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer.

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from

joint substrates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Landscape Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 COLD-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Multicomponent, Sealant ES-1, chemically curing elastomeric formulation complying with the following requirements, ASTM C 920, and uses indicated:

1. Urethane Formulation: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses T, M, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.

2. Additional capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the following percentage changes in joint width as measured at time of application and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated:

a. 25 percent movement in extension and 25 percent movement in compression for a total of 50 percent movement.

3. Application: Concrete pavement, sidewalks, curb, curb and gutter, brick paving and stone paving.

B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, cold-applied joint sealants that may be incorporated in the Work includes, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Acceptable Manufacturer and Products:

a. Manufacturer: Tremco, Inc.

1) Product: Vulkem THC – 901.

b. Manufacturer: Pecora Corp.



1) Product: Dynatred. c. Manufacturer: Sonneborn; ChemRex, Inc.

1) Product: Sonolastic SL-2.

2.3 JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS

A. General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Round Backer Rods for Cold-Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and density required to control joint-sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.

C. Backer Strips for Cold-Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness and width required to control joint-sealant depth, prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant, and fill remainder of joint opening under sealant. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be


1) Manufacturer: W.R. Meadow, Inc.

a) Product: Sealtight Deck-O-Foam.

2) Manufacturer: Sonneborn; ChemRex, Inc.

a) Product: Sonolastic Expansion-Joint Filler.

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

2.4 PRIMERS

A. Primers: Product recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Joint-Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install joint-sealant backings of kind indicated to support joint sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint-sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint-sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent joint-sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application

and replace them with dry materials.

D. Install joint sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place joint sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Joint Sealants: Immediately after joint-sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to the following requirements to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint:



1. Remove excess joint sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer and that do

not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

F. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess joint sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses, by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants, during and after curing period, from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately and replace with joint sealant so installations in repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.



UNIT PAVING - UNGROUTED 321413 - 1

SECTION 321413 – CONCRETE UNIT PAVING - UNGROUTED

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Concrete pavers set in aggregate mortar setting beds. 2. Steel edge restraints. 3. Cast-in-place concrete edge restraints.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ICPI: Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: For the following, for information only. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties.

1. Pavers. 2. Edge restraints.

C. Sieve Analyses: For aggregate setting-bed materials, joint sand, and bituminous setting bed aggregate according to ASTM C 136.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer’s color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of unit paver indicated.

E. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each type of unit paver indicated, in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing full range of variations expected in these characteristics.

F. Installer Certification: Submit written documentation that Installer complies with requirements of “Installer Qualifications”. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, and other information specified. Include copy of installer’s current ICPI Installer Certification program certificate.



G. Manufacturer’s Certification: Submit written certification of concrete unit pavers by ICPI as having met applicable ASTM standards.


A. Industry Reference Standards: Refer to Division I References Section.

1. Interlocking Concrete Power Institute (ICPI): Tech Spec Technical Bulletins, latest edition.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit paver, joint material, and setting material from single source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

C. Qualifications:

1. Installer Qualifications: Engage a firm specializing in concrete unit paver installation. Installer shall have successfully completed at least ten (10) concrete unit paver installation projects of the same materials, design and of similar size and scope of work to that indicated for this Project. Installer shall have completed and hold a current certificate from ICPI installer certification program.

2. Manufacturer Qualifications: A paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by authorities having jurisdiction or the DOT of State in which project is located.

D. Field Constructed Mock-Up: Prior to installing concrete unit pavers, furnish and install a 100 square foot sample of pavement for each form and pattern of pavement indicated with proposed materials, and workmanship to be expected in completed work. Build mock-ups to comply with the following requirements; using materials, same base construction, joints and edges as indicated for final unit of Work.

1. Locate mock-ups on site in the location and of the size indicated; or if not indicated, as directed by Landscape Architect.

2. Obtain Landscape Architect’s acceptance of mock-ups before start of the final unit of Work.

3. Replace unsatisfactory mock-up work, as directed, until acceptable by Landscape Architect.

4. Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed unit of Work. Do not alter, move or destroy mock-up until work is completed. The approved sample in undisturbed condition at Date of Substantial Completion may become part of completed unit of Work.


A. Store pavers on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied.

B. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.



C. Store asphalt cement and other bituminous materials in tightly closed containers.


A. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit paver work damaged by frost or freezing.

B. Weather Limitations for Bituminous Setting Bed:

1. Install bituminous setting bed only when ambient temperature is above 40 deg F (4 deg C) and when base is dry.

2. Apply asphalt primer/tack coat and adhesive coat only when substrate and ambient temperature is above 50 deg F (10 deg C) and when temperature has not been below 35 deg F (2 deg C) for 12 hours immediately before application. Do not apply when setting bed is wet or contains excess moisture.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE PAVERS

A. Regional Materials: Provide concrete pavers that have been manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site from aggregates and cement that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.

B. Concrete Pavers: Solid interlocking paving units complying with ASTM C 936 and resistant to freezing and thawing when tested according to ASTM C 67, made from normal-weight aggregates, in sizes and shapes indicated.

C. Manufacturer Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the concrete unit paver schedule by use of shortened versions of their names, which are shown in parenthesis. 1. Hanover Architectural Products Inc. (Hanover), or equal. For Owner’s Approval.

D. Colors, Textures and Sizes: Provide materials and products that result in colors, textures and sizes of exposed unit paver surfaces indicated by reference to manufacturers listed herein. Refer to the Drawings for location of paver designated.

1. **Paver P-1:** a. Manufacturer: Hanover b. Shape: Prest c. Dimensions: Approximately 12 inches x 12 inches d. Thickness: 2 inches e. Color: Limestone Gray f. Finish: Tudor

2. **Paver P-2:** a. Manufacturer: Hanover b. Shape: Prest c. Dimensions: Approximately 12 inches x 12 inches



d. Thickness: 2 inches e. Color: Charcoal f. Finish: Natural

3. **Paver P-3:** a. Manufacturer: Hanover b. Shape: Prest c. Dimensions: Approximately 12 inches x 12 inches d. Thickness: 2 inches e. Color: Quarry Red f. Finish: Natural

4. **Paver P-3:** a. Manufacturer: Hanover b. Shape: Prest c. Dimensions: Approximately 24 inches x 24 inches d. Thickness: 2 inches e. Color: Limestone Gray f. Finish: Tudor

2.2 CURBS AND EDGE RESTRAINTS

A. Steel Edge Restraints: Manufacturer's standard painted steel edging 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) thick by 4 inches (100 mm) high with loops pressed from or welded to face to receive stakes at 36 inches (900 mm) o.c., and steel stakes 15 inches (380 mm) long for each loop.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Border Concepts, Inc.


B. Job-Built Concrete Edge Restraints: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mixed concrete with minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa).

2.3 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED MATERIALS

A. Graded Aggregate for Base: Sound, crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 2940, base material.

B. Sand for Bedding/Leveling Course: Sound, sharp, symmetrically shaped, washed, natural sand or manufactured from crushed stone complying with gradation requirements of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregate. Do not use mason sand, or sand conforming to ASTM C144.

C. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve and no more than ten (10) percent passing No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve. Do not use mason sand.

1. Provide sand of color needed to produce required joint color.



D. Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation applications; made from polyolefins or polyesters, with elongation less than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced:

1. Survivability: Class 2, AASHTO M 288. 2. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 (0.250-mm) sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. 3. Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. 4. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure, ASTM D 4355.

E. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered with the EPA. Provide in granular, liquid, or wettable powder form.

F. Joint Sand Stabilizer: Commercial dry joint sand admixture of inorganic or polymer compounds that stiffen and stabilize the joint sand when activated by water. Provide pre-mixed in joint sand or job-mixed with joint sand on project.

2.4 MORTAR SETTING-BED MATERIALS

A. Regional Materials: Provide aggregate, cement, and lime for mortar that has been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II.


D. Sand: ASTM C 144.

E. Latex Additive: Acrylic-resin water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with field-mixed portland cement and aggregate mortar bed, and not containing a retarder.

F. Thinset Mortar: Latex-modified portland cement mortar complying with ANSI A118.4.

1. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber liquid-latex additive at Project site.

G. Water: Potable.

2.5 MORTAR MIXES

A. General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions for mix proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing times, and other procedures needed to produce setting-bed and joint materials of uniform quality and with optimum performance characteristics. Discard mortars and grout if they have reached their initial set before being used.

B. Mortar-Bed Bond Coat: Mix neat cement and water to a creamy consistency.

1. For latex-modified portland cement setting-bed mortar, substitute latex admixture for part of all of water per directions of latex additive manufacturer.



C. Latex-Modified, Portland Cement Setting-Bed Mortar: Proportion and mix portland cement, sand, and latex additive for setting bed to comply with written instructions of latex-additive manufacturer and as necessary to produce stiff mixture with a moist surface when bed is ready to receive pavers.

D. Thinset Mortar Bond Coat: Proportion and mix thinset mortar ingredients according to manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas indicated to receive paving, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Where pavers are to be installed over waterproofing, examine waterproofing installation, with waterproofing Installer present, for protection from paving operations, including areas where waterproofing system is turned up or flashed against vertical surfaces.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and waterproofing protection is in place.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Subgrade Preparation: Excavate and compact soil subgrade. Compact soil no less than 95 percent maximum dry density as determined in accordance with ASTM D 698.

B. Proof-roll prepared subgrade according to requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Proceed with unit paver installation only after deficient subgrades have been corrected and are ready to receive subbase and base course for unit pavers.

C. Joint Sand: Mechanically mix dry joint sand stabilizer with joint sand per manufacturer’s instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, or other defects that might be visible or cause staining in finished work.

B. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors and textures.

C. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable.

D. Joint Pattern: As indicated.



E. Bituminous Setting Bed Thickness: Setting bed thickness should be established so that when the pavers are fully set on adhesive layer, finished surface will be approximately 1/8 inch (3.1-mm), but no more than 1/8 inch (3.1-mm) above required grades.

F. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) nor in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m) from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving.

G. Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers.

1. Install edge restraints to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install stakes at intervals required to hold edge restraints in place during and after unit paver installation.

2. For metal edge restraints with top edge exposed, drive stakes at least 1 inch (25 mm) below top edge.

3. Install job-built concrete edge restraints to comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

4. Where pavers set in mortar bed are indicated as edge restraints for pavers set in aggregate setting bed, install pavers set in mortar and allow mortar to cure before placing aggregate setting bed and remainder of pavers. Cut off mortar bed at a steep angle so it will not interfere with aggregate setting bed.

3.4 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS

A. Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least 95 percent of ASTM D 698 laboratory density.

B. Proof-roll prepared subgrade to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

C. Place separation geotextile over prepared subgrade, overlapping ends and edges at least 12 inches (300 mm).

D. Place aggregate base, compact to 100 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum laboratory density, and screed to depth indicated.

E. Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 1 to 1-1/2 inches (25 to 38 mm), taking care that moisture content remains constant and density is loose and uniform until pavers are set and compacted.

F. Treat leveling course with herbicide to inhibit growth of grass and weeds.

G. Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) and a maximum of 1/8 inch (3 mm), being careful not to disturb leveling base. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers hand tight against spacer bars. Use string lines to keep straight lines. Fill gaps between units that exceed 3/8 inch (10 mm) with pieces cut to fit from full-size unit pavers.

1. When installation is performed with mechanical equipment, use only unit pavers with spacer bars on sides of each unit.

H. Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to 5000-lbf (16- to 22-kN) compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz. Use vibrator with neoprene mat on face



of plate or other means as needed to prevent cracking and chipping of pavers. Perform at least three passes across paving with vibrator.

1. Compact pavers when there is sufficient surface to accommodate operation of vibrator, leaving at least 36 inches (900 mm) of uncompacted pavers adjacent to temporary edges.

2. Before ending each day's work, compact installed concrete pavers except for 36-inch (900 mm) width of uncompacted pavers adjacent to temporary edges (laying faces).

3. As work progresses to perimeter of installation, compact installed pavers that are adjacent to permanent edges unless they are within 36 inches (90 mm) of laying face.

4. Before ending each day's work and when rain interrupts work, cover pavers that have not been compacted and cover leveling course on which pavers have not been placed with nonstaining plastic sheets to protect them from rain.

I. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Vibrate pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand. Leave a slight surplus of sand on the surface for joint filling.

J. Do not allow traffic on installed pavers until sand has been vibrated into joints.

K. Where dry joint sand stabilizer is used, completely sweep surface to remove all residue. Surfaces must be free of stabilizer product. Wet surface per manufacturer’s instructions. Allow for drying and restrict use per manufacturer’s instructions.

L. Repeat joint-filling process 30 days later.

3.5 REPAIRING AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace unit pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in same manner as original units, with same joint treatment and with no evidence of replacement.

B. Cleaning:

1. Remove temporary protective coating as recommended by coating manufacturer and as acceptable to paver manufacturers.

2. Do not allow protective coating to enter floor drains. Trap, collect, and remove coating material.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Installer, which ensures unit paver work being without damage or deterioration at Date of Substantial Completion.



SECTION 312500 - EROSION SEDIMENTATION AND POLLUTION CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Conform to the Georgia Water Quality Act, the Federal Clean Water Act, the rules andregulations promulgated to each of these Acts and the Georgia NPDES General Permit No. GAR100000.

B. Conform, at a minimum, to the "Manual for Erosion and Sediment Control in Georgia"(MESCG), latest edition, published by the Georgia Soil Conservation Service (MESCG).

C. Maintain a copy of the MESCG on site throughout construction.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Sections includes erosion sedimentation and pollution control.

1.3 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide labor, material, and equipment for temporary and permanent management practices asshown on the plans, as contained in the Erosion, Sediment, and Pollution Control Plan (ESPCP),and as directed by the Owner during the life of the Contract to control erosion, storm waterrunoff, and pollution through the use of berms, dikes, dams, sediment basins, fiber mats, netting,mulches, grasses, slope drains, temporary silt fences, and other management practices.

B. Coordinate temporary erosion control provisions with permanent erosion control features toassure economical, effective, and continuous erosion, sedimentation, and pollution controlthroughout the construction and stabilization period.

C. Management practices required are not limited to the measures shown on the plans. Provideadditional practices necessitated by actual conditions and methods.

D. Silt and pollution leaving the site and any effects of the release are the sole and totalresponsibility of the Contractor as Primary, Secondary or Tertiary Permittee or Operator.

E. Provide Subcontractors with a copy of the ES & PC Plan. Post notices requiring Subcontractorsto review and comply with the ES & PC Plan.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE CRITERIA

A. Project Review - Prior to the preconstruction conference, review in detail the ES & PC Plan.

B. Provide qualified personnel to supervise provision and maintenance of management practices.

1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. Refer to the Georgia NPDES General Permit and the Manual for Sediment Control in Georgiafor a complete list of definitions.

B. The partial list of definitions is provided for the Contractor’s convenience only. Obtain copiesof the reference documents and learn appropriate terms required to fully implement the ES & PCPlan.


C. Terms Defined:1. Best Management Practices (BMPs): schedules of activities, prohibitions of practices,

maintenance procedures, and other management practices to prevent or reduce the pollutionof waters of Georgia. BMPs include treatment requirements, operating procedures, andpractices to control site runoff, spillage or leaks, sludge or waste disposal, or drainage fromraw material storage.

2. Final Stabilization: soil disturbing activities at the site have been completed for unpavedareas and areas not covered by permanent structures, at least 70% of the soil surface isuniformly covered in permanent vegetation or equivalent permanent stabilization measures(the use of rip rap, gabions, permanent mulches or geotextiles). Permanent vegetation:planted trees, shrubs, perennial vines; a crop of perennial vegetation appropriate for the timeof year and region; or a crop of annual vegetation and a seeding of target crop perennialsappropriate for the region, so that within the growing season a 70% coverage by perennialvegetation shall be achieved. Final stabilization applies to each phase of construction. Forlinear construction projects on land used for agricultural or silvicultural purposes,accomplish final stabilization by stabilizing the disturbed land for its agricultural orsilvicultural use.

4. General Contractor: the operator of the common development or site.5. NPDES: National Pollution Discharge Elimination System.9. Operator: the entity that has the primary day-to-day operational control of those activities at

the facility necessary to ensure compliance with Erosion, Sedimentation and PollutionControl Plan, Comprehensive Monitoring Program requirements and permit conditions.

10. Sediment: solid material, both organic and inorganic, that is in suspension, is beingtransported, or has been moved from its site of origin by, wind, water, ice, or gravity as aproduct of erosion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SILT FENCE

A. Filter Fabrics:1. Synthetic Fabric: Use filter fabric composed of strong rot-proof synthetic fibers formed into

a fabric of either woven or non-woven type. Use fabric free of any treatment or coatingwhich might significantly alter its physical properties. Use fabric containing stabilizers orinhibitors to make the filaments resistant to deterioration resulting from exposure to sunlightor heat. Use a pervious sheet of synthetic fibers oriented into a stable network so that thefibers retain their relative position with respect to each other. Finish the edges of the fabricto prevent the outer yarn from pulling away from the fabric. Use fabric free of defects orflaws which significantly affect its physical and/or filtering properties. Use fabric with aminimum width of 36 inches. Sew or bond sheets of fabric together. No deviation from anyphysical requirements will be permitted due to the presence of the seam.

B. Posts: Straight steel posts, 1.33 pounds per linear foot min., 5 feet long, at 4 feet max. o.c., 1-3/4inches wide, which have projections for fastening the wire to the fence.

C. Woven Wire Fence: Wire fence fabric at least 32 inches high, with at least 6 horizontal wires.Vertical wires spaced 6 inches apart. Top and bottom wires at least 10 gage. Other wires atleast 14 gage.

D. Wire staples: Wire No. 9 staple at least 1 ½ inches long.

E. MESCG: Meet MESCG regulations, Type C Application, per Table 6-20.5.


2.2 MATS AND BLANKETS

A. Jute or Hemp Mat: Woven, 76 to 80 warpings per 4 foot width, 39 to 43 weftings per 3 footlength, 0.9 pounds per square yard minimum, 1.5 pounds per square yard maximum.

B. Excelsior Blanket: 80% of fibers 6” min. length, smolder resistant, photo-degradable plasticmesh, maximum 1-1/2 x 3 inches, ¼ inch min. thickness, 0.8 pounds per square yard.

C. Coconut Fiber Blanket: 100% coconut, ¼” min. thickness, 48” min. width, 0.5 pounds persquare yard, photo-degradable plastic mesh 5/8” x 5/8” maximum.

D. Wood Fiber Blanket: Free of germination inhibitors, photo-degradable plastic mesh, 5/8” x ¾”max. spacing, 0.35 pounds per square yard minimum dry weight.

2.6 POLYMERS

A. Anionic polyacrylamide soil binding agents, environmentally benign, 0.05% monomer by weight.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Install management practices in accordance with the ES & PC Plan.

B. Maintain management practices throughout construction and until the site is finally stabilized.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION OF STRUCTURES

A. Sediment Control Structures1. When the use of temporary sediment control structures is discontinued, remove sediment

accumulation and excavation backfill and properly compact. Restore the existing ground toits natural or intended condition.

B. Temporary Seeding and Mulching1. Perform seeding and mulching in accordance with the drawings and specifications.

C. Baled Hay or Straw Erosion Checks1. Embed hay or straw erosion checks in the ground 4 to 6 inches to prevent water flowing under

them. Anchor bales securely to the ground by driving wooden stakes through the bales intothe ground. Retain bales in place until they rot. Remove after final stabilization if so directedby the Owner. Keep the checks in good condition by replacing broken or damaged balesimmediately after damage occurs. Normal debris clean-out is considered routine maintenance.

D. Temporary Silt Fences1. Maintain the silt fence in a satisfactory condition for the duration of the project. Distribute the

silt accumulation at the fence to conform to the grading plan. Remove silt fence from the siteafter final stabilization.

3.4 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain temporary management practices until no longer needed or permanent managementpractices are provided and the site is stabilized. Remove temporary materials.

B. In the event that temporary management practices are required due to negligence, carelessness,or failure to provide permanent management practices as a part of work as scheduled, provide atno cost to the Owner.


C. When silt deposited in sediment basins or fences occupies more than 30% of the basin capacity,remove the silt. Remove the silt from the site unless otherwise permitted by the Owner. Restorethe basin to the conditions and grades as shown on the Drawings.

3.5 EROSION CONTROL OUTSIDE PROJECT AREA

A. Use temporary management practices for construction work outside the project area.

END OF SECTION


DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 323119 - 1

SECTION 323119 - DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Decorative metallic-coated steel wire fences. 2. Decorative aluminum fences. 3. Swing gates.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, for information only.

C. Shop Drawings: For gates. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: Color selections for polymer finishes in form of manufacturer’s color charts; and finials, caps, and accessories in the form of actual samples.

E. Samples for Verification: For each fence material and for each color specified.

1. Provide Samples 6 inches in length for linear materials. 2. Provide Samples 6 inches square for wire mesh, bar grating and sheet or plate materials.

F. Welding certificates.

G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for decorative metallic-coated steel tubular picket fences, including finish, indicating compliance with referenced standard and other specified requirements.

H. Maintenance Data: For gate operators to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications:



1. Installer Qualifications: Engage a firm specializing in ornamental fence installation. Installer shall have successfully completed at least five (5) ornamental fence projects of the same materials, design and of similar size and scope to that indicated for this Project. a. Firm Experience: Ten years experience. b. Field Foreman Experience: Five years of experience with installing firm.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. UL Standard: Provide gate operators that comply with UL 325.

E. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain ornamental fence and gates, including accessories, fittings and fastenings from a single manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ALUMINUM

A. Aluminum, General: Provide alloys and tempers with not less than the strength and durability properties of alloy and temper designated in paragraphs below for each aluminum form required.

B. Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5.

C. Tubing: ASTM B 429, Alloy 6063-T6.

D. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061-T6.

E. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247 (ASTM B 247M), Alloy 6061-T6.

F. Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy A356.0-T6.


A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

1. For aluminum, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for strength and compatibility in fabricated items.

B. Concrete: Normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete complying with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa), 3-inch (75-mm) slump, and 1-inch (25-mm) maximum aggregate size.

C. Nonshrink Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107 and specifically recommended by manufacturer for exterior applications.



2.3 DECORATIVE METALLIC-COATED STEEL WIRE FENCES

A. Decorative Metallic-Coated Steel Wire Fences:


a. View Rail, or equal for owner’s approval.

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Wire: Welded-wire fence fabric, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Weight of zinc coating shall be not less than 1.0 oz./sq. ft. (305 g/sq. m).

1. Spacing of Horizontal Wires: See Details. 2. Horizontal Wire Size: See Details.

2.4 DECORATIVE ALUMINUM FENCES

A. Decorative Aluminum Fences: Fences made from aluminum extrusions.


a. View Rail, or equal for owner’s approval. b. Viva Rail, or equal for owner’s approval.

B. Posts: Square extruded tubes.

1. Line Posts: See Details. 2. End and Corner Posts: See Details. 3. Swing Gate Posts: See Details.

C. Post Caps: See Details.

D. Rails: See Details.

E. Pickets: See Details.

F. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard concealed fastening system.

G. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard tamperproof, corrosion-resistant, color-coated fasteners matching fence components with resilient polymer washers.

H. Fabrication: Refer to manufacturer’s specifications.

I. Finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA Guideline 1, refer to manufacturer’s specifications.

J. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coating.



2.5 SWING GATES

A. Gate Configuration: As indicated.

B. Gate Frame Height: As indicated.

C. Gate Opening Width: As indicated.

D. Aluminum Frames and Bracing: See Details.

E. Frame Corner Construction: Welded.

F. Additional Rails: Provide as indicated, complying with requirements for fence rails.

G. Infill: Comply with requirements for adjacent fence.

H. Picket Size, Configuration, and Spacing: Comply with requirements for adjacent fence.

1. Treillage: Provide iron castings of pattern indicated between each pair of pickets. Finish as specified for gates.

I. Hardware: Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate, hinges, and keepers for each gate leaf more than 5 feet (1.52 m) wide. Provide center gate stops and cane bolts for pairs of gates. Fabricate latches with integral eye openings for padlocking; padlock accessible from both sides of gate.

J. Spring Hinges: BHMA A156.17, Grade 1, suitable for exterior use.

1. Function: 320 - Gate spring pivot hinge. Adjustable tension. 2. Material: Malleable iron.

K. Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, suitable for exterior use.

1. Function: 39 - Full surface, triple weight, antifriction bearing. 2. Material: Wrought steel, forged steel, cast steel, or malleable iron.

L. Electric Strikes: BHMA A156.31, Grade 1, of configuration required for use with lock specified, fail safe, and suitable for exterior use.

1. Mounting Plate: Configuration necessary for mounting electric strikes. Fabricate from 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick, aluminum plate.

2. Mounting: Mortise into post.

M. Finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA Guideline 1, Finish #4 - good-quality, uniform undressed weld with minimal splatter.

N. Galvanizing: For items other than hardware that are indicated to be galvanized, hot-dip galvanize to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M unless otherwise indicated. For hardware items, hot-dip galvanize to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

O. Aluminum Finish: Baked enamel or powder coating.



2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.

1. Color and Gloss: See Details.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for site clearing, earthwork, pavement work, construction layout, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise permitted by Architect.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 100 feet or line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments.

3.3 DECORATIVE FENCE INSTALLATION

A. Install fences according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install fences by setting posts as indicated and fastening rails and infill panels to posts.

C. Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts in firm, undisturbed soil. Excavate holes to a diameter of not less than 4 times post size and a depth of not less than 24 inches (600 mm) plus 3 inches (75 mm) for each foot (300 mm) or fraction of a foot (300 mm) that fence height exceeds 4 feet (1200 mm).

D. Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil.

1. Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in position during setting with mechanical devices.

2. Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter.

3. Space posts uniformly at space indicated on Drawings.



3.4 GATE INSTALLATION

A. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach hardware using tamper-resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Gates: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.

B. Lubricate hardware, gate operators, and other moving parts.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain gates.



PLANTING IRRIGATION (PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION) 328410 - 1

SECTION 328410 - PLANTING IRRIGATION (PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION)

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Piping. 2. Manual valves. 3. Pressure-reducing valves. 4. Automatic control valves. 5. Automatic drain valves. 6. Transition fittings. 7. Dielectric fittings. 8. Miscellaneous piping specialties. 9. Quick couplers. 10. Drip irrigation specialties. 11. Controllers. 12. Boxes for automatic control valves.

B. The limits of the area to be irrigated by a underground irrigation system is shown on the Drawings. The Drawings to not depict the irrigation design.

C. Provide all labor, materials and equipment required by or inferred from the Drawings and Specifications to complete the Work of this Section.

1. Provide and complete an operable system for the irrigation of all landscaped areas indicated, on the project site. The Drawings and specifications are intended to provide a guideline for all items deemed necessary and requisite for the proper irrigation of the Project.

2. The Contractor shall be responsible for adjusting head location, head/nozzle type and size, and any other system components so that irrigation system layout is coordinated with actual field conditions. Such adjustments shall be made at no cost to the Owner except, when authorized in writing, such adjustments which will be compensated for at an agreed upon cost.

D. Provide additional work and materials required by local authorities at no extra cost to Owner.



1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Supply Piping: Piping from water source to connection to irrigation system pressure piping. Piping is under same pressure as water supply.

B. Main Piping: Downstream from point of connection to water distribution piping to, and including, control valves. Piping is under water-distribution-system pressure.

C. Circuit Piping: Downstream from control valves to sprinklers, specialties, and drain valves. Piping is under pressure during flow.

D. Drain Piping: Downstream from circuit-piping drain valves. Piping is not under pressure.

E. Control Valve: Manual or automatic (electrically operated) valve to control water flow to irrigation system zone.

F. Drain Valve: Manual or automatic (pressure operated) drain valve for draining or f Downstream from circuit piping drain valves. Piping is not under pressure.

G. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.

H. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. ABS: Acrulobitrile – butadiene – styrene plastic. 2. NP: Nylon plastic. 3. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 4. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic. 5. PVC: Polyvinylchloride plastic.


A. The Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the limits of the irrigation Work to be installed. The Drawings do not depict the irrigation design and sleeves. The Contractor shall furnish such items as may be required to complete the work.

B. Irrigation zone control shall be automatic operation with controller and automatic control valves.

C. Location of Specialties: Make minor location adjustments, based on field conditions, necessary to avoid plantings and obstructions such as signs and light standards.

D. Delegated Design: Design 100 percent coverage irrigation system, including comprehensive design analysis by a qualified professional irrigation designer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

E. Minimum Working Pressures: The following are minimum pressure requirements for piping, valves, and specialties unless otherwise required in the final design. Indicate deviation from the following in the delegated-design shop drawings.

1. Irrigation Main Piping: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 2. Circuit Piping: 150 psig (1035 kPa).



3. Drain Piping: 100 psig (690kPA).

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Approval: Obtain approval from Landscape Architect for all submittals prior to the beginning of Work, unless otherwise approved.

B. Product Data: Submit for information only, manufacturer’s specifications, product data, installation instructions and general recommendations for all components of the irrigation system. Individual copies of product data shall be submitted with the specific product name and model number visibly identified with specific product and model number being identified using a highlighter, asterisk or underlining.

C. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For irrigation systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional irrigation designer responsible for their preparation.

E. Delegated-Design Shop Drawings: Irrigation systems, drawn to scale, on which components are shown and coordinated with each other. Also include adjustments necessary to avoid plantings and obstructions such as signs and light standards.

F. Pump Station Shop Drawings: Submit certified shop drawings showing complete information for fabrication and installation of pump station. Shop drawings shall include a complete electrical wiring diagram.

G. Qualification Data: Submit written documentation certifying that Installer complies with requirements of “Installer Qualifications”.

H. Test Reports: Field test results of irrigation supply well.

I. As-Built Drawings: Any changes in the layout and/or arrangements of the proposed irrigation system, or any other differences between the proposed system and actual installed conditions are to be recorded by the Irrigation Contractor in the form of an “As-Built” Drawing. As-Built Drawing shall be produced in an electronic format using AutoCAD. Provide the Owner and Landscape Architect an AutoCAD and PDF file along with five (5) hard copies of the As-Built Drawings before Work under this Contract will be considered for Acceptance. All automatic and manual valves, hose bibs or quick couplers, and wire splice locations shall be shown with actual dimensions in feet and inches from two reference points so they may be located easily in the field. Submittal of approved As-Built Drawings shall precede any Application for Final Payment by the Contractor.

J. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit for inclusion in Operation and Maintenance Manuals copies of Maintenance and Operation Data for the pump station which shall include calibration procedures, operating instructions, and maintenance instructions. Refer to Division 1 Operation and Maintenance Data for submittal requirements.




A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Engage a firm or firms specializing in irrigation and pump station design and installation. Installer shall have successfully completed ten (10) projects similar in material, size, scope and complexity to that indicated for this Project that have resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

a. Design Responsibility: Installer shall engage a certified irrigation designer qualified by the American Society of Irrigation Consultants (ASIC) who is experienced in providing the design services of the kind indicated. The irrigation designer’s stamp shall appear on the shop drawing submittals.

b. Firm Experience Period: Ten (10) years of experience. c. Field Foreman Experience: Five (5) years of experience with installing firm.

2. Fabricator Qualifications: Engage a firm specializing in pump station fabrications. Fabricator shall provide evidence to indicate successful completion of ten (10) projects similar in material and scope of work to that specified.

a. Design and Engineering Responsibility: Fabricator shall engage a professional engineer legally authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where the project is located. The professional engineer’s stamp shall appear on shop drawings submittals including drawings and design calculations.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Codes and Standards: Perform the work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction. County regulations supersede these specifications. Notify Landscape Architect in writing of all discrepancies immediately.

D. Approval and Selection of Materials and Work: The selection of all materials and the execution of all operations required under the Specifications is subject to the approval of the Owner and Landscape Architect. They have the right to reject any and all materials and any and all Work which, in their opinion, does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents at any state of the operations. Remove rejected Work and/or materials from project site and replace promptly.

E. Workmanship: Install materials and equipment in a neat and professional manner following manufacturer’s recommendations.

1.7 MATERIAL QUANTITIES

A. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to total and confirm all material quantities.


A. Deliver materials and equipment in such a manner as to not damage the parts or decrease the useful life of equipment.



B. Store materials away from detrimental elements. Coordinate with Owner or General Contractor to secure a safe staging area. Security of stored materials shall be provided by the contractor at all times.

C. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

D. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

E. Handle, load, unload, stack and transport materials for irrigation system carefully to avoid damage. Handle pipe in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.


A. The site irrigation system is comprised of four major components, a supply well, pump station, irrigation distribution, and sprinkler system. Do not order, procure or make deposits on the pump station and related equipment until a successful supply well has been completely installed. If an acceptable well can not be installed the pump station will be deleted from the Work. The Contractor shall connect the distribution network to the domestic water meter. The Owner reserves the right to delete the well and pump station installation from the project at any time. The Contractor will reimburse the Owner for all work deleted and not completed.

B. Pump station shall be a pre-fabricated skid mounted unit with all equipment, pump, controls, valves and attached hardware as part of the skid assembly. All equipment shall be furnished by a single pump station manufacturer. The skid mounted pump station shall be arranged so the pump will discharged through an automatic control valve or electronic butterfly valve and piped into a hydro-pneumatic tank.

C. Insurance on irrigation materials or equipment stored or installed is the responsibility of the Contractor. Such insurance shall cover fire, theft and vandalism. Should the Contractor elect not to provide for such insurance, he will in no way hold the Owner responsible for any losses incurred by the aforementioned acts. The Contractor is responsible for all costs incurred in replacing damaged or stolen materials or equipment prior to Substantial Completion of the Work.

D. Obtain all required permits and pay all required fees, at no additional cost to the Owner. Any penalties imposed due to failure to obtain permits or pay fees are the responsibility of the Contractor.

E. Provide and maintain all passageways, guard fences, warning lights and other protection devices required by the local authorities.

F. Existing Grades: Existing grades will be within .2 feet of grades shown on the Civil Engineering Drawings at time of irrigation work. Determine conditions of existing grades prior to beginning the Work. When irregular or incomplete grading conditions are encountered, notify the Owner in writing before beginning the Work. Determine location of existing drainage patterns and maintain patterns in completed Work. Perform Work in a manner which will avoid damage to finished grading and drainage patterns. All damage to finished grading and drainage resulting from Work covered in these Contract Documents shall be repaired at the Contractor’s expense.



G. Existing Utilities: Determine location of underground utilities. Perform Work in a manner which will avoid possible damage. Excavate as required. Maintain grade stakes set by other unless removal is mutually agreed upon by parties concerned. All damage to utilities resulting from Work covered in these Contract Documents shall be repaired at the Contractor’s expense.

H. Existing Conditions: Perform irrigation Work in the Tree Protection zones and in existing or previously completed landscape areas to avoid damage and disturbance to these areas. Limit work in these areas to only that necessary to perform work specified herein and shown on the Drawings. Return and repair any areas damaged or disturbed while performing the Work to the existing conditions encountered prior to the Work.

I. Existing Site Improvements: Perform Work in a manner which will avoid possible damage to other work. The Contractor is responsible for any damage of mechanical nature as well as damage resulting from leaks in the irrigation system whether due to negligence or otherwise.

1. Protect improvements on adjoining properties and on Owner’s property. 2. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition at the Contractor’s expense.

J. Test Water Conditions: The Contractor shall check the pressure at the irrigation meter and/or the pump station discharge and confirm minimum operating pressure required by the delegated-design. If minimum operating pressure cannot be obtained, notify Landscape Architect.

1. In the event the water pressure does not meet minimum operating pressure at the meter as required, notify the Owner and/or Landscape Architect, state conditions and submit a proposal to for installing a booster pump system capable of increasing the pressure to the minimum required.

2. In the event the water pressure significantly exceeds the operating pressure required, provide a pressure regulator down stream of the backflow preventer.

K. Coordinate and schedule all Work with General Contractor.

L. Damages resulting from irrigation installation to work of other trades must be repaired at the expense of the Irrigation Contractor in a timely fashion.

M. Make minor adjustments to system layout as may be required and requested at no additional cost to the Owner.

N. Keep project site clean and orderly at all times during construction.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Drip-Tube System Tubing: Equal to 10 percent of total length installed for each type and

size indicated, but not less than 500 feet (152 m).



1.11 WARRANTY

A. Warranty all Work for a period of one year, starting on the Date of Substantial Completion, against defects in materials, equipment, workmanship and any repairs required resulting from leaks or other defects of workmanship, material or equipment.

B. Provide written warranty executed by pump station manufacturer that all system equipment and components will be free from all defects in material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the Date of Substantial Completion.

C. Emergency repairs may be made by the Owner without relieving the Contractor of his warranty obligations.

D. Repair settling of backfill trenches occurring during the warranty period, including restoration of damaged plantings, paving or improvements resulting from settling of trenches or repair operations.

E. Respond to Owner’s request for repair work within ten (10) days. If not, Owner may proceed with such necessary repairs at the Contractor’s expense.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES AND FITTINGS

A. Comply with requirements in the piping schedule for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

B. Ductile-Iron Pipe with Mechanical Joints: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and spigot ends.

1. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.

a. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

C. Ductile-Iron Pipe with Push-on Joint: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and spigot ends.

1. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.

a. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.

D. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, PVC 1120 compound, Schedule 80.

1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2466, Schedule 80.

E. PVC Pipe, Pressure Rated: ASTM D 2241, PVC 1120 compound, SDR 21 of the following size and class



1. 3 inches and larger; Class 200. 2. 2-1/2 inches to ¾ inches; Class 200. 3. ½ inch; Class 315. 4. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2467, Schedule 80.

F. Pipe three (3) inch and larger shall be PVC pipe with bell and rubber ring gasket, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Pipe smaller than three(3) inches shall be solvent weld PVC pipe.

H. Fittings for integral bell rubber ring gasketed pipe (three (3) inches and larger) shall have the gasket type fittings.

I. All pipe fittings size three (3) inches and greater shall be ductile iron in construction. All fittings two and one-half (2 ½) inches and under shall be Schedule 40 solvent weld fittings rated for 200 psi (ASTM D 3139).

J. Solvent weld PVC pipe shall be rigid PVC pipe and shall be assembled using appropriate PVC pipe cleaner/primer and solvent cement in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Solvent cement shall be No. 717 Gray NSF approved.

K. All solvent weld firings shall conform to Schedule 40 or Schedule 80 PVC dimensions and specifications for solvent weld fittings.

L. Expansion Joints: Shall consist of integral bell and rubber gasket coupling, install every three hundred (300) feet of solvent weld piping.

M. Runs of pipe over twenty (20) feet in length must be installed with standard twenty (20) feet length sections.

N. PVC Pipe Couplings located Within Sleeves: Four (4) inches and smaller shall be solvent weld. Six (6) inches and larger shall be mechanical joints. Upon exiting sleeves, pipe solvent weld or integral bell and rubber gasket, as specified.

2.2 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick unless otherwise indicated; full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solvent Cements for Joining PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.

D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.



2.3 ELECTRIC WIRING

A. 120 Volt AC Wiring: 120 volt service to controller shall consist of three wires: one black, one white, and one ground. Electrical service to be provided by Contractor:

B. Splices in controller wiring shall be waterproof.

C. Control wiring shall be 600 volt wire U.L. approved for direct burial in ground. Minimum wire size: 14 gauge. Control wiring and wiring connections from the controller to the valves is included in this Contract.

2.4 MANUAL ISOLATION VALVES

A. Bronze Gate Valves:

1. Valves for isolation purposes shall be bronze manually operated gate valves, allowing full diameter opening when in the full open position of the same size as line.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2. b. Class: 125. c. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). d. Body Material: ASTM B 62 bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Stem: Bronze, nonrising. g. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. h. Packing: Asbestos free. i. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.

2.5 PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES

A. Water Regulators:

1. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1003. b. Body Material: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron for NPS 2-1/2 and

NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN 80). c. Pressure Rating: Initial pressure of 150 psig (1035 kPa). d. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2

and NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN 80).

2.6 AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES

A. Plastic, Automatic Control Valves:

1. Description: Manufacturer’s standard control valves for irrigation zones, of type and size indicated, and as follows: Valves are to be constructed of a glass filled nylon material with



a self cleaning stainless steel screen. The control valve shall be considered to be a “contamination resistant style valve” with flow/low pressure operating capabilities. Flow .25 to 200 GPM.; Pressure: 20 to 200 PSO. Valves to conform to Manufacturer’s Specifications concerning performance and at pressure provided. Operation will occur through a 24-volt pulse to the AC solenoid.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Water Hammer Arresters: ASSE 1010 or PDI WH 201, with bellows or piston-type pressurized cushioning chamber and in sizes complying with PDI WH 201, Sizes A to F.

B. Pressure Gages: ASME B40.1. Include 4-1/2-inch- (115-mm-) diameter dial, dial range of two times system operating pressure, and bottom outlet.

2.8 QUICK COUPLERS

A. Description: Factory-fabricated, bronze or brass, two-piece assembly. Include coupler water-seal valve; removable upper body with spring-loaded or weighted, rubber-covered cap; hose swivel with ASME B1.20.7, 3/4-11.5NH threads for garden hose on outlet; and operating key.

1. Locking-Top Option: Vandal-resistant locking feature. Include two matching key(s).

B. Quick coupling valves shall be used as a source to the pressurized main line so that a hose can be attached for manual hand watering. The quick coupling valve will be constructed of brass with a spring loaded seal that will keep the valve in a closed position until the key is inserted into the valve. The valve will also have a hinged locking purple rubber cover to prevent any debris getting into the internal mechanism of the valve. The cover shall be marked with “Do Not Drink” in English and Spanish. All quick coupling valves will be installed on a triple elbow swing joint. Provide size as indicated on drawings.

C. Quick coupling keys shall be of the single lug variety. Attached to the key will be a hose swivel adapter sized to the commonly used hose on the project. The key and swivel will both be constructed of brass.

2.9 DRIP IRRIGATION SPECIALTIES

A. Drip Irrigation Emitters: In-line self-cleaning, pressure compensating variety with individual check valves as indicated. In-line emitters will be spaced at twelve (12) inches on-center. Manual flush valves will be required at all locations necessary for maintenance flush and winterization blow down to assure water has been evacuated prior to freezing temperatures that would cause damage to the tubing and in-line emitters.

B. Pressure Regulators: In-line pressure regulator sized as shown on Drawings. Maximum regulated pressure not to exceed 40 psi.

C. Manual Flush Valves: All drip zones shall be installed with manual flushing valve(s), number of valves will be based on size of zones and location of “dead ends”.



D. Application Pressure Regulators: Brass or plastic housing, NPS 3/4 (DN 20), with corrosion-resistant internal parts; capable of controlling outlet pressure to approximately 20 psig (138 kPa).

E. Filter Units: Brass or plastic housing, with corrosion-resistant internal parts; of size and capacity required for devices downstream from unit.

F. Air Relief Valves: Brass or plastic housing, with corrosion-resistant internal parts.

G. Vacuum Relief Valves: Brass or plastic housing, with corrosion-resistant internal parts.

2.10 CONTROLLERS

A. Description:

1. Provide an electronic solid state hybrid controller system capable of fully automatic and manual operation of the system, made for control of irrigation system automatic control valves. Controller housing shall be wall or pedestal mounted, as indicated on the Drawings, in a weatherproof and lockable cabinet.

2. Provide controller, which operates on a minimum of 110 volts AC power input and is capable of operating 24 volt AC electric remote control valves, with a reset circuit breaker to protect from overload. Contractor is responsible for connection to 120 VAC power to controller.

3. Each state shall have a time setting which can be set for variable timing in increments from 0 to 60 minutes, or set to omit the station from the irrigation cycle.

4. The controller shall have a calendar for setting the programmed start days, and a 24 hour clock for programming the irrigation cycle start time. A master “on-off” switch shall allow the valve power output to be interrupted without affecting the controller.

5. The controller shall be constructed so that all internal parts are accessible through the controller door without disturbing the cabinet installation.

6. Each controller location must be easily accessible for maintenance. Provide for the possibility of making minor timing adjustments to the controller in the field.

7. Moisture Sensor: Adjustable from one to seven days, to shut off water flow during rain. 8. Wiring: UL 493, Type UF multiconductor, with solid-copper conductors; insulated cable;

suitable for direct burial.

a. Feeder-Circuit Cables: No. 12 AWG minimum, between building and controllers. b. Low-Voltage, Branch-Circuit Cables: No. 14 AWG minimum, between controllers

and automatic control valves; color-coded different from feeder-circuit-cable jacket color; with jackets of different colors for multiple-cable installation in same trench.

c. Splicing Materials: Manufacturer's packaged kit consisting of insulating, spring-type connector or crimped joint and epoxy resin moisture seal; suitable for direct burial.

9. Concrete Base: Reinforced precast concrete not less than 36 by 24 by 4 inches (900 by 600 by 100 mm) thick, and 6 inches (150 mm) greater in each direction than overall dimensions of controller. Include opening for wiring. a. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 3000 psi.

1) Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 2) Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3) Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel.



4) Water: Potable b. Reinforcement: Steel conforming to the following:

1) Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.

2.11 BOXES FOR AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES

A. Plastic Boxes:

1. Description: Box and cover, with open bottom and openings for piping; designed for installing flush with grade.

a. Size: As required for valves and service. 1) Control Valves: 12 inches x 18 inches 2) Backflow Preventer: 20 inches x 34 inches 3) Isolation Valves, Wire Splices and Quick Coupling Valves: 10 inch diameter

b. Shape: 1) Control Valves: Rectangular 2) Backflow Preventer: Rectangular 3) Isolation Valves, Wire Splices and Quick Coupling Valves: Round

c. Sidewall Material: PE. d. Cover Material: PE.

B. Drainage Backfill: Cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum to 2 inches (30 mm) maximum.

2.12 IDENTIFICATION

A. Section Cross Reference: Refer to Division 31, Earthmoving Section, for plastic underground warning tape requirements.

2.13 SLEEVES

A. Class 200 PVC Pipe Type SDR 21: Size as indicated on Drawings.

2.14 SURGE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT

A. Provide and install lightning arrestor for controllers not equipped with primary surge protection.

2.15 MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Provide and install risers, reducers, couplings, adaptors, fittings as necessary to complete the irrigation system.

B. Provide and install wireless rain sensor with adjustable shut-off point from one-eighth (1/8) inch to one (1) inch of accumulated rainfall. Provide and install freeze sensor that will cancel scheduled irrigation cycle if temperature is 37 degrees Fahrenheit or below. Switch will interrupt common wire. These units can be combined or separate. Unit shall be UL approved.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Observation of Work in Progress: During the installation, the Landscape Architect will make regular site visits and reject any work and materials which do not meet the requirements called for in the Contract Documents.

B. Inspect project site prior to start of Work to determine that all site conditions are acceptable for Work to begin. Inform Landscape Architect of unsuitable conditions. Do not proceed with installation of irrigation system until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.

C. Locate all existing underground utilities prior to trenching and/or boring operations and protect them against damage during the Work. Obtain utility locations from Owner and/or General Contractor and utilize utility locating services when necessary.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Investigate and determine available water supply, water pressure and flow characteristics.

B. When unanticipated utilities that conflict with the intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of the conflict. Promptly submit a written report to the Owner for action.

3.3 EARTHWORK

A. All excavation is unclassified and includes all materials encountered that are not classified as rock excavation.

B. Report exceptions to Landscape Architect before excavation. An adjustment in price will be established which includes removal and disposal of the unsuitable material, and the acquiring of additional backfill material.

C. Backfill material shall be free from rocks, large stones, and other unsuitable substance which would damage the pipe or create unusual settling problems. Backfill in six (6) inch layers and tamp after each layer to prevent excessive settling.

D. Backfill trenches containing plastic pipe when pipe is cool to avoid excessive contraction in cold water. Such backfilling can be done in early morning hours or the pipe may be water cooled prior to backfilling procedures.

E. Install warning tape directly above pressure piping, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grades, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavement and slabs.

F. Provide minimum cover over top of underground piping according to the following:

1. ½ inch – 1 inch pipe – minimum depth cover is 12 inches. 2. 1 ¼ inch – 2 inch pipe – minimum depth cover is 18 inches.



3. 2 ½ inch – 4 inch pipe – minimum depth cover is 36 inches. 4. 6 inch – 8 inch pipe – minimum depth cover is 42 inches. 5. 10 inch – 12 inch pipe – minimum depth cover is 54 inches.


A. Supply Well Test: Select a test pump that is the appropriate size and type for the well drilled. Perform tests to determine long term capacity, specific capability, and recovery of well.

B. Tests to be performed: 1. Step Draw Down Test 2. Constant Head Test 3. Constant Rate Test

C. Fabricators Representative: Pump station fabricator’s representative shall be available for start-up and calibration of the pump station

3.5 SLEEVING

A. Location of sleeving shown on the Drawings is schematic. Contractor to make adjustments necessary to accommodate existing vegetation, utilities and other existing conditions.

B. Repair of damage to existing utilities, structures or other construction resulting from installation for sleeves is the responsibility of the Contractor.

3.6 PAVING WORK

A. Section Cross Reference: Refer to Division 32 Asphalt Paving Section for cutting and patching of asphalt paving.

B. Section Cross Reference: Refer to Division 32 Concrete Paving Section for cutting and patching of concrete paving.

3.7 PREPARATION

A. Layout of Mains and Laterals: Layout sprinkler mainlines and perform line adjustments and site modifications to laterals prior to execution.

B. Coordinate all installation with landscape planting work, especially fine grading, and soil preparation for planting areas.

C. Coordinate and cooperate with all other contractors to enable the work to proceed as rapidly and efficiently as possible.

D. Valve Location: Locate valves to assure ease of access for maintenance and that no physical interference with other elements of the project exist. Valve boxes shall be placed a minimum of five (5) feet from walkways and roads. Valve boxes shall be located in planting beds and away from view of pedestrians.



E. Furnish temporary support, adequate protection and maintenance of all underground and surface utilities, structures, drains, sewers and other obstructions encountered in the progress of the work.

F. Contractor shall acquaint himself with all site conditions. Should utilities not shown on the plans be found during excavations, Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner for instructions as to further actions. Failure to do so will make Contractor liable for any and all damage thereto rising from his operations subsequent to discovery of such utilities not shown on the Drawing.

G. Where the grade or alignment of the pipe is obstructed by existing utility structures such as conduit, ducts, pipe branch connections to sewer mains, main drains, water services, etc., the obstruction shall be permanently supported, relocated, removed, or reconstructed by the Contractor in cooperation with the Owner of such utility. No deviation from the required line or grade shall be made without the written direction of the Landscape Architect.

3.8 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Location and Arrangement: Drawings indicate location and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping free of sags and bends.

C. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.

D. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

E. Install unions adjacent to valves and to final connections to other components with NPS 2 (DN 50) or smaller pipe connection.

F. Install flanges adjacent to valves and to final connections to other components with NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) or larger pipe connection.

G. Install underground thermoplastic piping according to ASTM D 2774 and ASTM F 690.

H. Install expansion loops in control-valve boxes for plastic piping.

I. Lay piping on solid subbase, uniformly sloped without humps or depressions.

J. Install ductile-iron piping according to AWWA C600.

K. Install PVC piping in dry weather when temperature is above 40 deg F (5 deg C). Allow joints to cure at least 24 hours at temperatures above 40 deg F (5 deg C) before testing.

L. Install water regulators with shutoff valve and strainer on inlet and pressure gage on outlet. Install shutoff valve on outlet. Install aboveground or in control-valve boxes.

M. Water Hammer Arresters: Install between connection to building main and circuit valves aboveground or in control-valve boxes.

N. Install piping in sleeves under parking lots, roadways, and sidewalks.

O. Install sleeves made of Schedule 80 PVC pipe and socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.



P. Install transition fittings for plastic-to-metal pipe connections according to the following:

1. Underground Piping:

a. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Plastic-to-metal transition fittings. b. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: AWWA transition couplings.

2. Aboveground Piping:

a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Plastic-to-metal transition fittings. b. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits with one plastic flange.

Q. Tunneling: Install pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed by tunneling, boring or jacking.

R. Main Line: Install according to Manufacturer’s Recommendations: Provide concrete thrust blocks at all directional changes n all pipe 3-inches and larger that is of the gasketed variety, as per Drawings.

S. Lateral Lines:

1. Install according to Manufacturer’s Recommendations using standard techniques. 2. Combine lateral lines and main supply lines in common trenches wherever possible. 3. Plug lines immediately upon installation to minimize infiltration of foreign matter. 4. Flush lateral lines and risers prior to installation of drip irrigation. 5. Above ground risers must be dark gray or black in color.

3.9 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

B. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

C. Flanged Joints: Select rubber gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

D. Ductile-Iron Piping Gasketed Joints: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.

E. Copper-Tubing Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal.

F. PVC Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:



1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number, ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

3. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.

G. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Construct joints using adapters that are compatible with both piping materials, outside diameters, and system working pressure.

3.10 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Valves: Install underground valves in valve boxes or pits.

1. Install according to manufacturer’s recommendations, and as indicated on the Shop Drawings. Position boxes at a height that will not cause them to interfere with maintenance machinery (e.g. movers) and such that soil and mulch do not wash into the box. Locate valve box in mulched or natural areas one (1) foot inside the bed line. Where no mulched areas or natural areas exist within forty (40) feet of valve box locations install valve box in turf area. Install no more than two (2) valve boxes together when installed in turf areas.

B. Control Valves: Install in control valve service box, arranged for easy adjustments and removal. Install union on downstream side.

C. Pressure-Reducing Valves: Install in boxes for automatic control valves or aboveground between shutoff valves.

3.11 BACKFLOW PREVENTER INSTALLATION

A. Install backflow preventers of type, size and capacity required. Include valves and test cock. Install according to plumbing code and health department authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Install pressure-type vacuum breakers a minimum of twelve (12) inches above downstream piping system.

C. Do not install bypass around backflow preventer.

D. Do not install backflow preventers with drains or vents in pits or areas subject to flooding.

E. Support backflow preventers, valves, and piping on 3000 psi minimum, portland-cement mix concrete piers.

3.12 PRESSURE REGULATOR INSTALLATION

A. Install pressure regulators with shutoff valve and strainer on inlet and pressure gauge on outlet. Install shutoff valve on outlet and valved bypass where required.



3.13 DRIP IRRIGATION SPECIALTY INSTALLATION

A. Install drip tubes with direct-attached emitters on ground.

B. Drip irrigation emitters are to be located in a manner that will provide optimum concentration of water to the plant material. Drip in-line emitter irrigation shall be installed in a grid pattern with manifolds to insure hydraulic balance. The grid pattern should allow for two parallel lines of drip tubing for every row of plant material, snaking is not acceptable. All drip zones shall be equipped with a pressure reducing valve not to exceed 40 psi and manual flush valves at the dead ends of the drip grids.

3.14 CONTROL WIRE INSTALLATION

A. Install control wires in orderly fashion, locate in main line trench. Bundle wires together and tape at ten (10) foot intervals. Position wires to the right of the water supply line in the direction of the water flow.

B. Provide looped slack at directional changes in supply line to allow for contraction of wires.

C. Keep wire splices to a minimum and provide ten (10) inch round valve box at each splice location.

D. Pass wires under existing or future paving, construction, etc., through PVC sleeves.

E. For each open station on any given controller, there shall be spare wires to the furthest two (2) control valves located in diametrically opposed directions from the controller, plus one (1) additional spare wire.

3.15 AUTOMATIC IRRIGATION-CONTROL SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install controllers according to manufacturer’s written instructions and as required.

1. Install surge protection equipment on primary (110 VAC) power lines. Connect each surge protection unit to at least one (1) five-eighths (5/8) inch diameter by nine (9) foot copper clad grounding electrode driven into the soil to it’s full depth. Place electrodes no closer than two (2) feet from controller cabinet or any control or power wire. Be consistent in locating ground rods throughout the installation with respect to controller positions.

2. Ground wire between surge protection device and grounding electrode to be a single strand bare copper wire at least one size greater than the wire supplying power to the control unit. Route ground wire away from power and control wire where possible. When it is necessary to pass through the controller cabinet wall use two (2) #L-70 copper grounding lugs and a brass bolt. Use a #WE five-eighths (5/8) ground clamp rod and a ground wire. Bury ground wire passing between controller and ground rod a minimum of ten (10) inches. Cover the top of the rod and the clamp itself with a four (4) inch round cover with lid at grade level.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install exterior freestanding controllers on precast concrete bases.

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.



2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Where dimensions are not indicated, furnish bases not less than thirty-six (36) inches by

twenty-four (24) inches by four (4) inches thick, not less than six (6) inches greater in each direction than overall dimensions of controller.

3.16 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect water supply from exterior water service piping, water meters, protective enclosures, and backflow preventers.

B. Connect piping to sprinklers, devices, valves, control valves, specialties and accessories.

C. Install piping adjacent to equipment, valves, and devices to allow service and maintenance.

D. Connect wiring between controllers and automatic control valves.

3.17 IDENTIFICATION

A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplates and signs on each automatic controller.

1. Text: In addition to identifying unit, distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.

B. Warning Tapes: Arrange for installation of continuous, underground, detectable warning tapes over underground piping during backfilling of trenches. See Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for warning tapes.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, operate controllers and automatic control valves to confirm proper system operation.

3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

C. Any irrigation product will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.



3.19 ADJUSTING

A. Balance and adjust the various components of the sprinkler system so that the overall operation of the system is most efficient. This includes synchronization of the controllers, adjustments to pressure regulators, part circle sprinkler heads, and individual station adjustments on the controllers.

B. Adjust settings of controllers and automatic control valves.

C. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate at rated operating pressure required for each sprinkler circuit.

D. Adjust sprinklers and devices, except those intended to be mounted aboveground, so they will be flush with, or not more than ¼ inch above, finish grade.

E. Upon completion of the irrigation system, perform a coverage test with the Owner’s representative to determine if the irrigation coverage is adequate. Correct any inadequacies.

3.20 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Flush dirt and debris from piping before installing sprinklers and other devices.

B. Upon completion of Work, clear grounds of debris, superfluous materials and all equipment. Remove from site to the satisfaction of the Owner and/or rpLandscape Architect.

C. Protect the Work and materials from damage due to irrigation operations, operations by other contractor and trades and trespassers. Maintain protection until Date of Substantial Completion.

D. Cover all openings into the system as it is being installed to prevent obstructions in the pipe and the breakage, misuse or disfigurement of the equipment.

E. Theft: Irrigation Contractor is responsible for theft of equipment and material at the job site before, during and after installation, until Date of Substantial Completion of the Work in total.

3.21 DEMONSTRATION

A. Upon completion of the Work and at a time and place acceptable to the Landscape Architect, and Owner, the Irrigation Contractor is responsible for the orientation of the Owner’s maintenance personnel in the operation, maintenance, and repair of the system. Furnish copies of all available parts lists, troubleshooting lists and specification sheets, to the Landscape Architect.

1. Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall constitute the basis of orientation.

B. Set the initial watering schedules and programming of the automatic controllers at direction of Landscape Architect.



3.22 WINTERIZING THE SYSTEM

A. The irrigation system shall be winterized the first winter season following Substantial Completion of the Project in total. The irrigation piping shall be winterized by first blowing the system clear of water using compressed air (80 psi maximum) admitted into the piping at a quick coupling valve or hose bib located at a higher elevation on the system piping. Activate individual zones, higher zones first, then proceed successively through the system towards lower elevations. Proceed through all zones twice. The air compressor used to winterize the system must have an engine separate from the compressor tanks to prevent high temperature air from being injected directly into the PVC piping.

3.23 OBSERVATION AND ACCEPTANCE

A. Periodic site visits will be made by the Landscape Architect to review the quality and progress of the work. Work found to be unacceptable must be corrected within five (5) calendar days. Remove rejected materials promptly from the project.

B. Upon completion of Work, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect and Owner at least ten (10) days prior to requested date of the site visit for Substantial Completion of all portions of the Work. Landscape Architect will issue a punch list for work to be corrected. All work on the punch list must be completed within five (5) working days from the date of the site visit. Where Irrigation Work does not comply with requirements, replace rejected Work. If such replacements are not completed within the time specified, the Irrigation Contractor may be considered to be in default of the Contract, and the Owner may use the Contract Retainage to hire other Contractors to finish the Work.

C. It will be the responsibility of the Irrigation Contractor to provide reliable communication system (i.e. two way radios or remote control activation system) for Substantial Completion and all periodic site visits.

D. If a site visit to verify Substantial Completion has been scheduled and the Landscape Architect arrives at the site and determines that the irrigation system is not substantially complete (all system components in place, operational and checked) the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred by the Landscape Architect to visit the site. Reimbursable expenses include but are not limited to the following: mileage, airfare, consultant’s time, parking fees, meals, rental car, etc. All incurred expenses will be deducted from the final contract amount.

E. Certificate of Substantial Completion will be issued for acceptable work and completion of “As-Built” Drawings, the Landscape Architect will verify the system for Substantial Completion. If punch list items are issued with the Certificate, they must be corrected within five (5) working days.



EXTERIOR LANDSCAPE 329000 - 1

SECTION 329000 - EXTERIOR LANDSCAPE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Extent of Landscape Work is indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

B. Provide and furnish all labor, materials and equipment required or inferred from Drawings and Specifications to complete the Work of this Section.

1.3 UNIT PRICES

A. Work of this Section is affected by unit prices specified in Division 00 Section “Proposal Form – Unit Price” or Division 01 Section "Unit Prices."

1. Unit prices apply to authorized work covered by quantity allowances. 2. Unit prices apply to additions to and deletions from Work as authorized by Change Orders.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.

B. Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants grown in a container, with a well-established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.

C. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

D. Manufactured Topsoil Backfill Media: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil for use in planting soil mix or topsoil planting backfill media.

E. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.

F. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired, or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.



G. Planting Area: Areas to be planted.

H. Planting Soil Mix: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.

I. Plant; Plants; Plant Material: These terms refer to vegetation in general, including trees, shrubs, vines, ground covers, ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or herbaceous vegetation.

J. Stem Girdling Roots: Roots that encircle the stems (trunks) of trees below the soil surface.

K. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.

L. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.

M. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Plant Material Orders from Approved Nurseries:

1. Submit confirmed orders for plant materials from approved nurseries as indicated on the Drawings within thirty (30) days from date that contract is awarded to General Contractor. Contractor is responsible for payment of deposits required by the approved nurseries to secure the plant material for the Project.

2. Alternate Nurseries Proposed by Contractor: Alternate nurseries will be considered by the Landscape Architect only if photographs of specified materials are submitted within thirty (30) days prior to bid due date. The Landscape Architect will tentatively accept, subject to physical observation and tagging, or reject alternate nurseries within two (2) weeks of submittal date of photographs. The Landscape Architect will select and tag 100 percent of plant materials from acceptable alternate nurseries prior to delivery to Project Site. The Contractor will be responsible for all expenses related to tagging trips to alternate nurseries, including usual professional service fees charged by the Landscape Architect. The Contractor shall arrange or and provide transportation for the Landscape Architect. Contractor shall provide the Landscape Architect a minimum of three (3) weeks advance notice to proposed tagging trip(s). Contractor shall limit tagging trips to no more than two (2) at a maximum of two (2) days each. All tagging trips will be completed within forty-five (45) days from date contract is awarded to General Contractor. Contractor will submit confirmed orders from acceptable alternate nurseries within ten (10) days of tagging by the Landscape Architect. Contractor is responsible for payment of deposits required by acceptable alternate nurseries to secure plant material for the Project.

a. Photographs submitted from alternate nurseries shall indicate a person and measuring pole, with clear numerical indicators of height in each scene. Submit



photograph(s) of individual plant and one photograph showing an overall view of the field(s) that plants are being grown in.

C. Topsoil Location and Sample: Furnish Landscape Architect with written statement stating location of property from which topsoil is to be obtained, depth to be stripped, and crops grown during past two (2) years. Submit one (1) gallon Ziploc bag of topsoil proposed for use.

D. Topsoil Test Report: Submit results of soil analysis by a qualified soil-testing laboratory, for information only, for standardized ASTM 5268 topsoil proposed for use in planting soil mixes. Report shall include percentages of deleterious materials; organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content, as determined by test methods included in Part 2 - Products; cation exchange capacity; pH level; mineral, major nutrient and micro nutrient content of top soil.

E. Planting Soil Mix Sample: Submit one (1) gallon Ziploc bag of each proposed planting soil mix.

F. Planting Soil Mix Test Report: Submit results of soil analysis by a qualified soil-testing laboratory, for information only, of each planting soil mix as specified. Report shall included percentages of organic matter; pH level; mineral content (percentage of sand, silt, and clay); major nutrient and micro nutrient content of each mix.

1. State recommended quantities of nitrogen, phosphorus, potash and other nutrients and soil amendments to be added for suitable plant growth.

G. Plant Material Photographs: Include color photographs in digital format of each required species and size of plant material as it will be furnished to the Project. Include a scale rod or other measuring device in each photograph. Image should represent the quality of all material delivered. Any plants not meeting all specified dimensions may be subject to rejection. Identify each photograph with the full scientific name of the plant, plant size, and name of the growing nursery.

H. On Site Soil Report: Submit results of soil analysis by a qualified soil-testing laboratory, for information only, of on site soil. Report shall include pH level, mineral; major nutrient and micro nutrient content of on site soil.

I. Product Data: Submit, for information only, product data for proprietary materials and items, including soil amendments, soil conditioner, and other packaged and manufactured products.

J. Soil Permeability Test Report: Submit laboratory test results of planting soil mix to be used in all structured planters. Planting soil mix shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D 2434.

K. Fertilizer Analysis: Submit, for information only, label or technical data for fertilizer bearing the trade name, manufacturer's name, weight and analysis for fertilizers used in planting soil mixes and on sodded lawn areas.

L. Planting Schedule: Submit planting schedule showing scheduled dates for each type of planting in each area of site. The Owner may require special schedule requirements for specific areas of the project, prior to beginning the Work.

M. Certification: Prior to acceptance of plant material submit certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities, and manufacturer's or vendors certified analysis for soil amendments and fertilizer materials. Submit other data substantiating that materials comply with specified



requirements. Submit seed vendor's certified statement for each grass seed mixture required, stating botanical and common name, percentage by weight, and percentages of purity, germination, and weed seed for each grass seed species.

N. Maintenance Instructions: Upon completion of the installation, submit typewritten recommendations for maintenance of any portion of the landscape which, in the opinion of the Contractor, requires special attention.

O. Installer Certification: Submit written documentation certifying that Installer complies with requirements of "Installer Qualifications" below.

P. Filter Fabric: Submit, manufacturer’s product data, for information only, including specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations.


A. Industry Reference Standards: Refer to Division 01 References Section. National List of Scientific Plant Names, latest edition. American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI): ANSI Z60.1 American Standard for Nursery stock by the American Association of Nurseryman.

B. Qualifications:

1. Installer Qualifications: Engage a firm specializing in landscape installation. Submit written documentation of successful completion of ten (10) projects of similar size, scope and complexity to work specified for this Project.

a. Firm Experience Period: Seven (7) years of experience. b. Field Foreman Experience: Five (5) years of experience with installing firm.

C. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Engage a reputable independent laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct testing and analysis of existing surface soils representative of planting areas and lawn areas on site, new topsoil to be used in soil mixes and soil mixes with reference to specified plant materials. Soil report to include analysis of a minimum of three (3) soil samples from different locations for existing on site surface soils.

D. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; sodium absorption ratio; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant-nutrient content of the soil.

1. Testing methods and written recommendations shall comply with USDA’s Handbook No. 60.

2. The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling; with depth, location, and number of samples to be take per instructions from Landscape Architect. A minimum of three representative samples shall be taken from varied locations for each soil to be used or amended for planting purposes.

3. Report suitability of tested soil for plant growth.



a. Based upon the test results, state recommendations for soil treatments and soil amendments to be incorporated. State recommendations in weight per 1000 sq. ft. (92.9 sq. m) or volume per cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m.) for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants.

b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals, including aluminum, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, and vanadium. If such problem materials are present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action.

E. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1.

1. Selection of plants purchased under allowances will be made by Landscape Architect, who will tag plants at their place of growth before they are prepared for transplanting.

F. Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1. Do not prune to obtain required sizes.

1. Trees and Shrubs: Measure with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Take height measurements from or near the top of the root flare for field-grown stock and container grown stock. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip to tip. Certain tree species, particularly conifers, may have extended leaders which protrude well beyond the body of the crown. In such cases, only the first foot of growth of the leader beyond the closest side branch will count towards its overall height measurement. Take caliper measurements 6 inches (150 mm) above the root flare for trees up to 4-inch (100-mm) caliper size, and 12 inches (300 mm) above the root flare for larger sizes.

2. Each plant procured for the project must, at the minimum, meet all of the specified size parameters listed, i.e. caliper, height, spread, container size, comment. The Landscape Architect has the right to reject any material that falls short of the specified sizes.

3. All container sizes listed are full sizes (e.g. one gallon must fit the dimensions of a full one gallon pot). No trade gallons will be acceptable unless prior approval is granted by the Landscape Architect.

4. Other Plants: Measure with stems, petioles, and foliage in their normal position.

1.7 MATERIAL QUANTITIES:

A. It is the Contractor's responsibility to total and confirm all material quantities. Items quantified by an area (i.e., square feet - sf., square yard - sq. yd.) or volume (cubic feet - cu. ft., cubic yard - cu. yd.) shall be calculated and confirmed by the Contractor. The quantities listed on the plant list are estimated. In the event of a discrepancy between the totals listed on the plant list and the numerical callouts on the Drawings, the Drawings shall govern. The actual total quantities shall be determined by the Contractor.

1. The plants listed on the unit price proposal form in the project manual is provided for convenience. In the event of a discrepancy between the unit price proposal form and

plant quantities indicated on the Drawings, the Drawings shall govern.

1.8 MATERIAL SIZES:



A. It is the Contractor's responsibility to confirm that the sizes indicated on the Drawing callouts match the sizes on the Drawing plant list. The plants list on the Drawings is provided for convenience and is only a summary. In the event of a discrepancy between the sizes on callouts and the plant sizes indicated on the Drawing plant list, the larger of the two sizes shall govern. The Contractor shall bring any discrepancy to the Landscape Architect's and Owner's attention.

1. The plants listed on the unit price proposal form in the project manual is provided for convenience. In the event of a discrepancy between the unit price proposal form and the plant sizes indicated on the Drawing callouts, the Drawings shall govern.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original and unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored on site.

B. Bulk Materials

1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants.

2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways.

3. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers, lime, and soil amendments with appropriate certificates.

C. Shrubs and Ground Cover: Provide freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind-tie shrubs in such manner as to damage bark, break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during shipment.

1. Immediately after digging up bare-root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting.

D. Deliver shrubs and ground cover after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than six (6) hours after delivery, set shrubs and ground cover in shade, protect from current and forecasted weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.

1. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers until planting time. 2. Water root systems of plant material stored on-site. Water as often as necessary to maintain

root systems in a moist condition.

E. Label at least one (1) shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. All shrubs and groundcovers should bear professional pre-printed tags. Any shrubs or groundcovers not supplied with tags may be rejected by the landscape architect if deemed to be the incorrect species or cultivar.

F. Do not remove labels attached to plant material by the Landscape Architect until directed to do so.



1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS:

A. Insurance on plant material and other materials stored or installed is the responsibility of the Contractor. Such insurance shall cover fire, theft, vandalism and other unusual phenomenon. Should the Contractor elect not to provide such insurance, he will in no way hold the Owner responsible for any losses incurred by the aforementioned acts. The Contractor is responsible for all costs incurred in replacing damaged or stolen materials prior to Date of Substantial Completion of the Work.

B. Proceed with and complete landscape work as rapidly as portions of Site become available, working within seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work required.

C. Existing Grades: Existing grades will be within 0.2 feet of grades shown on the Civil Engineering Drawings when landscape work is to begin. Determine condition of existing grades prior to beginning the Work. When irregular or incomplete grading conditions are encountered, notify the Owner in writing before beginning the Work. Determine location of existing drainage patterns and maintain patterns in completed Work. Perform Work in a manner which will avoid damage to finished grading and drainage patterns. All damage to finished grading and drainage resulting from Work covered in these Contract Documents shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense.

D. Existing Utilities: Determine location of underground utilities. Perform Work in a manner which will avoid possible damage. Excavate as required. Maintain grade stakes set by others unless removal is mutually agreed upon by parties concerned. All damage to utilities resulting from Work covered in these Contract Documents shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense.

E. Existing Conditions: Perform landscape Work in the Tree Protection Zones and in existing or previously completed landscape areas to avoid damage and disturbance to these areas. Limit work in these areas to only that necessary to perform work specified herein and shown on the Drawings. Return and repair any areas damaged or disturbed while performing the Work to the existing conditions encountered prior to the Work.

F. Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Landscape Architect in writing before planting.

G. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting when existing and forecasted weather conditions are suitable.

H. Planting Schedule: Prepare a proposed planting schedule. Schedule dates for each type of landscape work during contract period. Coordinate schedule with General Contractor and Irrigation Contractor.

I. Coordination With Turf Areas (Lawns): Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to planting of turf, unless otherwise acceptable to Landscape Architect. If planting of trees and shrubs occurs after turf Work, protect turf areas and promptly repair damage to turf areas resulting from plant operations.

1.11 WARRANTY:



A. Warranty for a period of one (1) year, following the Date of Substantial Completion, all trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants and grass against any defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, as determined by the Landscape Architect. Warranty shall include the complete cost to supply and install all replacement plant materials according to the requirements herein. Defects resulting from lack of adequate maintenance, neglect or abuse by the Owner, abuse or damage by others, or unusual phenomenon or incidents beyond the Contractor's control are excepted. Should questions arise concerning the responsibility of replacement, the Landscape Architect will be available for arbitration provided the Owner and Contractor mutually desire.

B. Remove and replace all trees, shrubs, groundcovers and lawn, or other plants found to be more than 25 percent dead or in unhealthy condition during warranty period as determined by Landscape Architect or Owner. Make replacements immediately unless required to plant in the succeeding planting season.

C. Replacements: Match adjacent specimens of same species. Replacements are subject to all requirements stated in the Contract Documents and are subject to observation by the Landscape Architect prior to digging.

D. Repair grades, lawn areas, paving and any other damage resulting from replacement planting operations, at no additional cost to the Owner.

E. Inspect Project site monthly during warranty period to determine what changes, if any, should be made in the maintenance program. Submit all recommended changes in writing to the Landscape Architect and the Owner.

F. Replacements made during the Warranty Period or following the site visit for Final Acceptance will carry an additional one (1) year warranty beginning at the time of replacement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL:

A. General: Only plant material grown in a recognized nursery in accordance with good horticultural practice will be accepted. Provide healthy, vigorous stock free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun-scald, injuries, abrasions or disfigurement.

B. Observation of Plant Material Prior to Digging:

1. Contractor must locate all plant material to be supplied for the Project and inform the Landscape Architect in writing of location within thirty (30) days of the date of the Contract or notice to proceed, which ever is first.

2. The Landscape Architect may select and tag the trees required for the Project, at the Contractor's sources. In any event the Landscape Architect shall approve 100 percent of the trees required for the Project.

3. In the event plant material is found to be unacceptable, the Contractor will pursue other sources until acceptable plant material is found, at no additional cost to the Owner. If, due to unacceptable plant material at the Contractor's source, additional tagging trips are required by the Landscape Architect, the Contractor will reimburse the Landscape Architect for his time and travel expenses.



4. Approval at the plant source does not impair the right of the Landscape Architect to observe and reject material at the time of shipping or during progress of the Work.

C. Shipping:

1. Ship landscape materials with certificates of inspection required by governing authorities. Inspection by Federal and/or State Governments at Grower does not preclude rejection of plants at the site by the Landscape Architects. Comply with regulations applicable to landscape materials. Prepare plants for shipment to prevent damage to the plants.

2. From March 15th to September 15th, ship plant material to be transported over one hundred (100) miles at night only. Make arrangements to have plant material watered during shipment as necessary to avoid excessive stress. Plant material may be rejected if not properly shipped.

3. Do not ship plant material in temperatures below 20 degrees Fahrenheit.

D. Do Not Make Substitutions: If specified landscape material is not obtainable, submit to Landscape Architect proof of non-availability and for use of equivalent material. For proof of non-availability submit a written statement from a minimum of six (6) reliable nursery sources (American Nurserymen's Association Members) that the plant in question is not obtainable in the Eastern United States.

E. Analysis and Standards: Package standard products with manufacturer's certified analysis. Including but not limited to:

1. Soil Amendments 2. Mulch

F. Approval and Selection of Materials and Work: The selection of all materials and the execution of all operations required under the Drawings and Specifications is subject to the approval of the Landscape Architect. The Landscape Architect has the right to reject any and all materials and any and all Work which, in his opinion, does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents at any stage of the operations. The Contractor shall remove rejected work and/or materials from Project site and replace promptly.

2.2 TOPSOIL:

A. Topsoil has not been stockpiled for re-use in planting soil and other Landscape Work.

B. Provide new topsoil which is fertile, friable, pervious, sandy loam, surface soil; free of subsoil, clay lumps, brush, weeds and other litter, and free of roots, stumps, stones larger than one and one-half (1½) inches in any dimension, and other extraneous or toxic matter harmful to plant growth.

C. Obtain topsoil from local sources or from areas having similar soil characteristics to that found at Project Site. Obtain topsoil only from naturally, well-drained sites where topsoil occurs in a depth of not less than four (4) inches; do not obtain from bogs or marshes, unless specified.

D. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268 complying with the following composition as determined by the indicated test methods:



1. Deleterious Materials: 2 percent max. by mass; ASTM D 2487. (Rock, gravel, slag, cinder, stone).

2. Organic Material: 5-10 percent min. by mass; ASTM D 2974. 3. Sand Content: 20 - 60 percent by mass. 4. Silt Content: 20 - 60 percent by mass. 5. Clay Content: 20 - 40 percent by mass. 6. pH Range: 5 to 6.5; ASTM D 4972.

Topsoil should fall into the range clay loam, loam or silt loam on the USDA Soil Texture Triangle.

2.3 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS:

A. Lime: ASTM C 602, Class T, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent, with a minimum 99 percent passing a No. 8 sieve and a minimum 75 percent passing a No. 60 sieve.

B. Aggregate Soil Conditioner: Rotary kiln expanded slate specially graded for use as a horticultural soil conditioner with the following composition as determined by the indicated test methods:

1. Dry Loose Unit Weight: 48-55 lbs/cu.ft.; ASTM C 29. 2. Specific Gravity: To meet 1.45 to 1.60 dry bulk; ASTM C 127. 3. Gradation: 3/8-inch to No. 8; ASTM C 330 with 100 percent passing the 3/4-inch sieve. 4. Absorption: Five percent or more; ASTM C 127. 5. LA Abrasion: Weight loss between 20 percent and 30 percent; AASHTO T 96. 6. Chemical Characteristic:

a. pH: 6.5 to 10 range. b. Soluble salts: To meet horticultural rural range of 0.75 to 3.5 mmhos/cm.

7. Process the slate using only non-hazardous fuels such as coal or natural gas. 8. The expanded slate shall be free of clay lumps and organic impurities. 9. Obtain aggregate soil conditioner from a single supplier. 10. Available Products: Subject to compliance with the requirements, aggregate soil

conditioners that may be incorporated in the Work includes, but is not limited to the following:

a. Acceptable Supplier and Products:

1) Supplier: Caroline Stalite Company

a) Product: 5/16-inch Perma Till

C. Coarse Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured sand, free of extraneous or toxic matter with the following grain size distribution or coarser; ASTM C136.

Sieve Size % Passing .5 in. 100.0 .375 in. 98.0 #4 98.0 #10 93.0



#20 21.0 #60 1.0 #140 0.5 #200 0.5

2.4 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS:

A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch (25-mm) sieve; soluble salt content of 4 to 6 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows:

1. Organic Matter Content: 50 percent minimum of dry weight. 2. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; or source-

separated or compostable mixed solid waste that meet all State Environmental Protection Agency requirements.

3. Available Products: Subject to compliance with the requirements, compost products that may be incorporated in the Work includes, but is not limited to the following:


1) Supplier: ERTH Products, LLC

a) Product: ERTH Food

2) Supplier: It Saul Natural, LLC

a) Product: Hen Manure Compost

B. Humus: Air dried, finely shredded, and pH range suitable for intended horticultural use. Humus shall be completely decomposed forest type including composted leaves, bark and organic wastes.

C. Peat: Air dried, finely shredded or granular texture, completely decomposed and free of fibers with pH range suitable for intended horticultural use. Peat shall be a naturally occurring, highly organic and derived primarily from plant materials.

D. Manufactured Organic Soil Amendment: Composted and screened 100 percent organic manufactured soil amendment.

1. Acceptable Supplier and Products:

a. Supplier: It Saul Natural, Inc.

1) Product: Mr. Natural CLM. 2) Product: Mr. Natural WSM.

b. Supplier: ERTH Products, LLC

1) Product: Total Landscape Planting Mix.



E. Shredded Pine Bark: Shredded bark pieces between one-quarter (1/4) inch and one (1) inch in length with partially decomposed bark matter.

2.5 FERTILIZER:

A. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw, finely ground; minimum of 4 percent nitrogen and 20 percent phosphoric acid.

B. Superphosphate: Commercial phosphate mixture, soluble, minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid.

C. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-released nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:

1. General: For trees, shrubs and ground cover, provide a homogeneous fertilizer complete with micro nutrients having an analysis of 12-4-8 (12 pounds of nitrogen, 4 pounds of available phosphoric acid, and 8 pounds of water soluble potash respectively for each 100 pounds of mixture).

2. For trees, shrubs, and ground cover provide fertilizer with adjusted analysis in accordance with results and recommendations of planting soil mix test reports.

3. For lawns, provide fertilizer in accordance with results and recommendations of existing on site surface soil report relative to lawn installation. Provide nitrogen in a form that will be available to lawn during initial period of growth.

D. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in existing on site surface soil reports from a qualified soil-testing laboratory.

E. Chelated Iron: Commercial-grade FeEDDHA for dicots and woody plants, and commercial-grade FeDTPA for ornamental grasses and monocots.

2.6 PLANTING SOIL:

A. Planting Soil Mix For On-Grade Plantings: Provide soil mix consisting of existing surface soil amended with a completely decomposed and manufactured natural organic soil amendment in not less than the following quantities. Surface soil must be premixed with manufactured soil amendments before spreading as the required planting soil mix over the site.

1. Existing surface soil by volume: 40 percent. 2. Manufactured organic soil amendment by volume: 60 percent.

a. Acceptable soil amendment manufacturers and products. 1) Manufacturer: ERTH Products, LLC.

a) Product: Total Landscape Planting Mix. 2) Manufacturer: It Saul Natural, LLC.

a) Product: Mr. Natural CLM. 3. Commercial fertilizer as recommended in soil report.



B. Manufactured Structural Soil Planting Media Backfill Mix for Planting Areas (pits and under paved areas in on-grade conditions): Provide manufacturer’s pre-mixed backfill soil mix.

1. Provide and install structural soil planting media specifically for horticultural use with the following composition by volume and requirements as determined by the indicated test methods and standards:

a. 80 percent ¾ - inch expanded slate. b. 8 percent course, natural river sand. c. 5 percent certified compost. d. 7 percent silt soil. e. Standard Compaction Requirement: 95 percent maximum dry density; ASTM D

698. f. Total Porosity: 30-40 percent by volume. g. Water Retention: 10-20 percent by volume, at 0.1 bar; ASTM D 2325. h. Permeability (Hydraulic Conductivity): ¼ - ½ inches per hour min.; ASTM D 2434

or D5084.

2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with the requirements, structural soil planting media that may be incorporated into the Work includes, but is not limited to, the following:


1) Supplier: ItSaul Natural, LLC

a) Product: Mr. Natural Structural Soil Mix for Trees

2) Supplier: Carolina Stalite Company

a) Product: Stalite Structural Soil for Trees

C. Humus shall be omitted from planting soil mixes if topsoil used has an organic content of 40 percent or greater as determined by the topsoil test report.

2.7 PLANT MATERIALS:

A. General:

1. Provide plants true to species and variety, complying with recommendations of ANSI Z60.1 "American Standard for Nursery Stock". Nomenclature to comply with "National List of Scientific Plant Names."

2. Specific requirements concerning plant material and the manner in which it is to be supplied are shown on the Drawings and plant list.

3. Plant material indicated as pre-tagged and pre-purchased on the Drawings has been selected and purchased for the Project by the Owner at the nursery indicated. Contractor



shall be responsible for the total installation of the material including freight, labor, profit, complete warranty and replacement, and all items specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings.

4. Acclimatization: Plants must have grown under climatic conditions similar to those of the locality of the project site for a minimum of two (2) years immediately prior to being planted on the Project.

B. Quality and Size:

1. Furnish nursery grown plants, freshly dug, normally shaped and well branched, fully foliaged when in leaf and with healthy well developed root systems. Plants to be free of disease, insect infestations or their eggs and larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions and disfigurement.

2. Furnish plants to match as closely as possible whenever symmetry is called for. 3. Provide trees and shrubs of sizes shown or specified. Trees and shrubs of larger size may

be used if acceptable to the Landscape Architect, and if sizes of roots or rootballs are increased proportionately. The increased size will not result in additional cost to the Owner.

4. Stock Specified in a Size Range: Within each size range not less than 50 percent the plants must be of the maximum size specified.

5. Balled and Burlapped Plants: Plants designated "B&B" are to have firm, natural balls of soil corresponding to sizes specified in ANSI Z60.1 "American Standard for Nursery Stock". Balls to be firmly wrapped in biodegradable burlap and securely tied with biodegradable heavy twine, rope and/or wire baskets. Plants with loose, broken or manufactured rootballs will be rejected. Rootballs shall be lifted from the bottom only, not by stems or trunks.

6. Container grown plants in cans, plastic containers or timber boxes will be acceptable in lieu of balled and burlapped plants provided that they are of specified quality. The container must be removed prior to planting, with care being exercised as to not injure the plant.

C. Shrubs: Provide established and well-rooted plants, in removable containers, with not less than the minimum number of canes required by and measured according to ANSI Z60.1 for type, shape, and height of shrub.

D. Ground Cover: Provide established and well-rooted plants, in removable containers or integral peat pots, having not less than minimum number and length of runners by ANSI Z60.1 for the pot size specified.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS LANDSCAPE MATERIALS:

A. Drainage/Separation Fabric: Manufacturer's standard nonwoven pervious geotextile fabric of polypropylene, nylon or polyester fibers, or a combination.

1. Provide filter fabrics that meet or exceed the listed minimum physical properties determined according to ASTM D 4759 and the referenced standard test method:

a. Grab Tensile Strength (ASTM D 4632): 100 lb. b. Apparent Opening Size (ASTM D 4751): #100 U.S. Standard Sieve. c. Permeability (ASTM D 4491): 150 gallons per minute per sq. ft.



B. Drainage Gravel: Washed crushed stone.

C. Water and water transportation is the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

D. Mulch:

1. Pinestraw: Pine needle mulch predominately composed of Longleaf Pine needles and other long needled Southern Yellow Pine species. Clean, fresh, dark brown, and free of branches, cones, foreign matter, insects and disease.

E. Anti-Desiccant: Water-insoluble emulsion type, film-forming agent designed to permit transpiration but retard excessive loss of moisture from plants. Deliver in manufacturer's fully labeled containers and mix in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

F. Drainage Matt: Provide prefabricated drainage matt with integral non-woven filter fabric. Weight of filter fabric to be determined from results of permeability test in accordance with ASTM D 2434.

1. Acceptable Manufacturer's and Products:

a. Manufacturer: Mirifi Inc.

1) Product: Mira Drain 6000

b. Manufacturer: ECM, Inc.

1) Product: Ultra Drain I

c. Manufacturer: Grace Construction Products

1) Product: Hydroduct Drainage Composite

G. Drain Pipe and Fittings: Corrugated perforated polyethylene drain tubing, black, meeting ASTM F 405.

H. Drain Basins and Grates: Black meeting in ASTM D 1892 and ASTM D 4549. As shown on the Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION:

A. General:

1. Contractor shall examine conditions under which planting is to be installed, review applicable architectural and engineering Drawings, and be familiar with alignment of underground utilities before digging.



2. Planting Time: Planting operations are to be performed at such times of the year as the job may require, with the stipulation that the Contractor guarantees the plant material as specified. Plant only during periods when weather conditions are suitable.

3. Verify layout information shown on the Drawings, in relation to property survey and existing bench marks before proceeding to layout the work. Locate and protect existing benchmarks and control points. Preserve reference points (coordinates) shown on the Drawings during construction.

4. Work from lines established by the property survey, established bench marks and markers to set coordinate points for the tree locations on the Project. Calculate and measure required dimensions. Do not scale Drawings to determine dimensions.

5. Tree Locations: Locate and layout tree (coordinate) locations by instrumentation and similar appropriate means.

6. Layout individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations and outline areas and secure Landscape Architect's acceptance before start of excavation for planting work. Make adjustments as requested.

7. Notify Landscape Architect of adverse sub-surface drainage or soil conditions. State conditions and submit a recommendation for correction including costs. Obtain approval for method of correction prior to continuing Work in the affected area. In the event that alternate locations are selected, the Contractor shall prepare such areas at no additional expense to the Owner.

B. Subsoil Removal:

1. Dispose of subsoil removed from landscape excavations at an off-site location. Do not mix with planting soil. Do not use as backfill.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Testing: Contractor shall employ testing agency to perform soil permeability test in accordance with ASTM 2434 on planting soil mix to be used in structured planters prior to procuring and installing drainage matting. Test results shall be used to determine weight of integral non-woven filter fabric.

3.3 PREPARATION OF PLANTING SOIL:

A. Before mixing, clean topsoil, or existing surface soil if using a soil conditioner, of roots, plants, clods, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful or toxic to plant growth.

B. Mix specified soil amendments and fertilizers with topsoil, or soil conditioner with existing surface soil at rates specified. Delay mixing of fertilizer if planting will not follow placing of planting soil within a few days.

C. For pit and trench type backfill, mix planting soil prior to backfilling and keep covered until used.

D. For planting soil prepared with a manufactured soil conditioner, mix planting soil in large batches before backfilling, stock pile for use at site and keep covered until used. Do not mix soil conditioner at individual planting sites.



E. For groundcover and shrub beds, mix planting soil either prior to planting or apply on a surface layer over prepared bed area and mix both thoroughly in the bed before planting.

1. Mix lime, if required, with dry soil prior to mixing of fertilizer. 2. Prevent lime from contacting roots of acid-loving plants. 3. Apply phosphoric acid fertilizer (in addition to that constituting a portion of complete

fertilizers) directly to subgrade before applying planting soil and tilling.

3.4 PREPARATION OF SHRUB AND GROUNDCOVER PLANTING BEDS:

A. Layout planting beds on the ground to the lines shown on the Drawings. Have layout approved by Landscape Architect prior to constructing the bed.

B. Outline bed with a trench edge as shown on the Drawings. Place soil for trench edge within bed area.

C. Loosen existing soil to a minimum depth of twelve (12) inches using a roto tiller or similar equipment. Remove all sticks, stones, rubbish and other material detrimental to plant growth.

D. Spread four (4) inch minimum layer of planting soil mix over entire bed area. (Additional soil mix may be necessary to build up shrub beds to grade as shown on the Drawings.) Work planting soil mix into top of loosened soil with roto tiller.

E. Smooth planting areas to conform to specified grades after settlement has occurred. Slope surface of shrub beds to drain toward the trench edge.

F. Mass preparation of beds is not applicable for areas exceeding 4:1 slope.

3.5 PLANTING SHRUB AND GROUNDCOVER BEDS:

A. Excavate large enough area in loosened soil to install specified container grown plants.

B. Remove containers without damaging the rootball and set in excavated hole. If the plants are root bound, gently pull roots apart by hand to loosen up the rootball.

C. Place container grown plant in excavated hole with top of rootball even with final shrub bed elevation.

D. Backfill rootball with soil from the bed and lightly compact soil around plant to eliminate voids and air pockets.

E. Mulching: Immediately after planting mulch planting beds with a minimum depth of two (2) inches of bark or three (3) inches of pine straw. Finish edges according to the Drawings. Remove all mulch from foliage of plants.

F. Watering: Soak entire area immediately after planting. Continue watering thereafter as necessary until Date of Substantial Completion.

3.6 SPACING AND LAYOUT OF SHRUBS AND GROUNDCOVER:



A. Layout bed outline per the plans.

B. Layout individual shrubs and groundcovers per the spacing indicated on the plans. Mass plantings are usually laid out by either staggered rows (SR) or even rows. Note that the spacing between rows may be different than the on-center spacing between the plants.

C. Unless otherwise noted, all shrubs and groundcover shall be given the same spacing from hardscape edges (i.e. sidewalks, roads, or buildings) as their on center spacing (e.g. a shrub labeled as thirty-six inches (36”) on center shall have the row closest to the hardscape edge planted thirty-six inches (36”) from the hardscape edge.) The Landscape Architect shall approve all plant placement prior to plant material installation.

D. When two shrub or groundcover beds abut, the on-center spacing between the different plant beds shall be the combined on-center spacing of the two differing plants (e.g. if one plant spaced thirty-six inches (36”) on center abut another plant spaced twenty-four inches (24”) on center, the on-center spacing between the two different plant beds shall be sixty inches (60”))

E. Should the site conditions differ from that indicated on the Drawings, notify the Landscape Architect of such conditions with a recommendation for correcting the condition. Obtain approval of method of correction prior to continuing Work.

F. All plant beds and plants shall be laid out prior to the review of the Landscape Architect.

G. Should the number of plants not properly match the space allocated for the layout, notify the Landscape Architect prior to installation and obtain an approved, alternate course of action prior to continuing Work.

H. In cases where the number of too many plants listed on the Drawing become too many for the bed area in the field, maintain the specified spacing. Do not change the spacing in an attempt to use all of the plants listed.

I. Refer to the Drawings for clarification of spacing details and layout information.

3.7 MAINTENANCE:

A. Begin maintenance immediately after planting.

B. Maintain plants until Date of Substantial Completion of the Work.

C. Maintain plants by watering, pruning, cultivating, weeding, and re-mulching as required for healthy growth. Restore trench edges around mulch rings and along bed limes. Tighten and repair stake and guy supports and reset trees and shrubs to proper grades or vertical position as required. Restore or replace damaged wrappings. Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease.

D. Remove all shrubs, ground covers, or other plants which die, turn brown and/or defoliate prior to Date of Substantial Completion from the site. Replace immediately with plant material of the same species, quantity, size and meeting all requirements.

3.8 CLEAN UP AND PROTECTION:



A. During Landscape Work, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition.

B. Upon completion of Work, clear grounds of debris, superfluous materials and all equipment. Remove from site to satisfaction of Landscape Architect and Owner.

C. Protect landscape Work and materials from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other contractors and trades and trespassers. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair or replace damaged landscape Work as directed, at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Theft: Contractor is responsible for theft of plant material at the Project site before, during and after planting, until the Date of Substantial Completion of the Work.

3.9 OBSERVATION AND ACCEPTANCE:

A. Periodic site visits will be made by the Landscape Architect to review the quality and progress of the Work. Work found to be unacceptable must be corrected within five (5) calendar days. Remove rejected plants and materials promptly from the Project.

B. Upon completion of Work, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect and the Owner at least ten (10) days prior to requested date of site visit for Substantial Completion of all or portions of the Work. Landscape Architect will issue a punch list for work to be corrected. All work on the punch list must be completed within five (5) working days from date of site visit. Where Work does not comply with requirements, replace rejected Work and continue specified maintenance until by Landscape Architect finds work to be acceptable.

C. If a site visit to verify Substantial Completion has been scheduled and the Landscape Architect arrives at the site and determines that the Landscape Development is not substantially complete, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred by the Landscape Architect to re-visit the site. Reimbursable expenses include but are not limited to the following: mileage, airfare, consultant's time, parking fee, meals, rental car, etc. All incurred expenses will be deducted from the final contract amount.

D. Certificate of Substantial Completion will be issued for acceptable Work. If punch list items are issued with the Certificate, they must be corrected within five (5) working days.

E. One (1) Year Warranty commences on the date of issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion. Refer to Section 32 90 00, 1.11 Warranty.

F. Final Acceptance: One (1) year after Date of Substantial Completion of the Work in total the Landscape Architect and/or the Owner will visit the site to determine Final Acceptance. Upon satisfactory completion of repairs and/or replacements the Landscape Architect and/or the Owner will certify, in writing, the Final Acceptance of the Work. The Final Acceptance letter will serve as evidence that the Contractor's one (1) year warranty obligations have been met.



SECTION 331400 - WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide labor, material, and equipment for the construction of the water distribution system asshown on the drawings from taps to the public system to building plumbing connection.

B. Testing and disinfection of the installed system is incidental to the work.

C. Provide construction staking in accordance with generally accepted practice for layout ofunderground utilities.

D. The work includes coordination with building plumbing Contractors and building plumbingplans.

E. Coordinate responsibilities for installation of meters, vaults, check valves, backflow preventors,taps, valves and appurtenances with the local jurisdiction.

F. Identify fees related to water main installation and clarify prior to bid submittal whether tap,meter, and other fees will be paid by the Owner or by the Contractor. Identify fees forinstallation of water services and provide a written report to the Owner.


A. Meet the requirements of the Local Jurisdiction. Where a conflict exists between thisspecification and the Local County, City, or State specification, meet the most strictspecification.

1.3 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Coordinate installation of the water distribution system with grading and paving operations.

B. Provide water mains when grade is within 6 inches of final grade and prior to paving baseinstallation.

C. After completion and testing of the water distribution system, provide the Owner with theContractor's Material and Test Certificates required by the National Fire Protection Association.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE

A. PVC pipe may be installed where permitted by local authorities:a. For domestic potable water service, meet ASTM D2241, PVC 1120, SDR 21, Class 200.

2.2 WATER MAIN FITTINGS

A. Use joints and fittings, complete with joint accessories, for the class and type of pipe with whichthey are to be used.

B. For valves up to and including 2 inches, use Bronze Body, Bronze Trim, Rising Stem, InsideScrew, Single Wedge or Disc.


C. Provide underground valves in standard cast iron valve boxes. Use boxes of the two-piece screwtype, adjustable to suit the depth of bury and type of valve, with a minimum shaft diameter of 51/4 inches. Provide one operating wrench for each ten valves, or fraction thereof.

2.3 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS AND DOUBLE DETECTOR CHECK VALVES

A. Use Commercial Standard Backflow Preventers and Double Detector Check Valves of the sizeand capacity to meet the design flow condition.

B. Conform to the requirements of the local jurisdiction.

C. Manufacturers: As required by the local jurisdiction; If not locally specified, WATTS,NEPTUNE, or equal.

2.4 THRUST BLOCKING:

A. Use pipe restrained by thrust blocking in the event of the following piping conditions:1. A change of direction with the use of a tee or bend.2. Reduction in the size of the line by use of a reducer.3. Termination of line (dead end).

2.5 DETECTION TAPE

A. Lay metallic detection tape where PVC Pipe is installed atop the pipe in the trench no less than18" and no more than 24" below finish grade.

B. Meet pipe manufacturer's specification.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Line and Grade: Lay and maintain pipe to the required lines and grades with fittings and valvesat the required locations and with joints centered.

B. Protecting Underground and Surface Structures: Provide at your own expense, temporarysupport, adequate protection and maintenance of underground and surface utility structures,drains, sewers, and other obstructions encountered in the progress of the work.

C. Sub-Surface Exploration: Whenever necessary to determine the location of existing pipes,valves, or other underground structure, examine available records and make explorations andexcavations.

3.2 LAYING PIPE

A. General: Before lowering pipe into trenches, grade the bottom of the ditch so that when pipe isin the ditch, it will have a bearing for its entire length. Carefully examine the pipe for defectsand clean the inside. After placing pipe into ditch, wipe free of dirt, sand and foreign materialthe bell, gasket, and spigot. Apply to the gasket and spigot a film of lubricant. Enter the plainends of the pipe into the socket and force the pipe into the socket until it makes contact with thebottom of the socket.

B. Trench Water: At times when pipe laying is not in progress, plug the open ends of the pipe byapproved means and so no trench water enters the pipe.

C. Cutting Pipe: Perform cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces in a neatand workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe, using approved mechanical cutters.


D. Direction of Laying: Unless otherwise directed, lay pipe with bell ends facing in the direction oflaying. For lines on an appreciable slope, bells face upgrade.

E. Permissible Deflection: Whenever necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line either in thevertical or the horizontal plane to avoid obstruction, to plumb stems, or where long radius curvesare permitted, use the degree of deflection recommended by the manufacturer of the pipe.

F. If wet or otherwise unstable trench conditions are encountered, undercut the trench 6 inches andbed the pipe in #57 stabilization stone. If rock is encountered, undercut the trench 6 inches andbed the pipe in #57 stone.

3.3 BACKFILLING

A. Immediately after pipes are laid, backfill trenches and excavations, unless other protection forthe pipeline is directed. Use backfilling material selected and deposited with special reference tothe future safety of the pipes. Tamp solidly, clean earth or sand about the pipe up to the level of6 inches above the top of the pipe and carefully deposit in uniform layers, solidly tamp or rameach layer with proper tools so as not to disturb or injure the pipeline. Ram or tamp theremainder of the backfilling in layers of not more than 6 inches in depth with either approvedmechanical or hand tamps. Compact as specified under the EARTHWORK Section of thesespecifications. Use backfilling material free of rock, trash, and debris.

3.4 SETTING APPURTENANCES

A. Valves and Fittings: Set and joint gate valves and pipe fittings to new pipe in the mannerpreviously specified for cleaning, laying, and jointing pipe.

B. Valve Boxes: Support, maintain center and plumb over the wrench nut of the gate valve withbox cover flush with the surface of the finished pavement.

3.5 SETTING WATER METERS, BACKFLOW PREVENTERS, DOUBLE DETECTOR CHECK VALVES, VAULTS AND APPURTENANCES

A. Field adjust vault locations to fit into assigned vault areas.

B. Set vaults plumb and level.

C. Drain vaults as needed. Leave no standing water in vaults.

D. Seal wall openings around pipes with flexible sealant and grout to allow for pipe movement andvault settlement.

E. Provide traffic grade top slabs, accessways, and appurtenances where vaults are located invehicular areas.

F. Provide clearance around valves and flanges to allow for disassembly of piping and equipment.

3.6 HYDROSTATIC TESTS

A. Pressure During Tests: After the pipe has been laid and partially backfilled, test newly laid pipeor any other valved section of it, unless otherwise directed.

B. Duration of Pressure Tests: At least 2 hours.

C. Procedure: Conform to NFPA 24 and AWWA C600. Slowly fill each section of pipe withwater and measure the specified test pressure measured at the lowest point elevation by means ofa pump connected to the pipe in a satisfactory manner. Provide the pump, pipe connection;


gauges, and necessary apparatus. Apply the tests to each valved section in order to check the leakage through valves.

D. Expelling Air Before Test: Before applying the specified test pressure, expel all air from thepipe. Make taps, if necessary, at points of highest elevation and afterward tightly plug.

E. Leakage Defined: Leakage is defined as the quantity of water to be supplied into the newly laidpipe or any valved section of it necessary to maintain the specified leakage test pressure after thepipe has been filled with water and air expelled.

F. Permissible Leakage: Provide suitable means for determining the quantity of water lost byleakage under normal operating pressure. No pipe installation will be accepted until or unlessthe leakage is less than 2 quarts per hour per 100 gaskets or joints irrespective of pipe diameter.

G. Variation from Permissible Leakage: When any test of combined sections of pipe laid discloseleakage per mile of pipe greater than that specified, or if individual sections show leakagesgreater than the specified limit, locate and repair the defective joint until the leakage is withinthe specified allowance at no cost to the Owner.

H. Time for Making Tests: Subject pipe to hydrostatic pressure, inspect, and test for leakage at anyconvenient time after partial completion of backfilling. Truck water as necessary to make thetest when each section is ready.

3.7 ALTERNATE TESTING AND STERILIZATION

A. Testing and sterilization methods may be requested by Local Jurisdiction.

3.8 WORK ON EXISTING MAINS

A. Connections:1. Connections between the new construction and existing mains may be made by the Local

Jurisdiction.2. Water service may be brought to the property line by The Local Jurisdiction. Connect site

piping to the Local Jurisdiction main.3. Verify the extent of Local Jurisdiction work and coordinate the work with the work of The

Local Jurisdiction to provide proper locations and complete assemblies for the waterservice, meters, taps and appurtenances.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 333113: SITE SANITARY SEWERAGE GRAVITY PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment to construct pipelines and all required appurtenancesat the points and to the lines, slopes, and elevations shown on the Drawings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Data: When requested, submit four copies of manufacturer's specifications andinstallation instructions to the Owner for the following products, including laboratory testreports, notarized certifications, or other data as may be required to show compliance with thesespecifications:1. Pipe, fittings, and joints;2. Granular material for pipe bedding;3. Castings and ironwork;

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE

A. Where allowed by local authorities, PVC gravity sewer pipe may be used with the writtenpermission of the Owner. Use PVC gravity sewer pipe that meets ASTM D3034, ASTM F 679,SDR 35. Use gaskets that meet ASTM F 477. Use joints that meet ASTM D 3212.

2.4 DETECTION TAPE:

A. Where PVC Pipe is used, place metallic detection tape in pipe trench no less than 18" nor morethan 24" below finish grade atop pipe.

B. Meet pipe manufacturer's specification.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TRENCHING AND EXCAVATING

A. Excavate the ground in open trench to the width, depth, and in the direction necessary for theproper construction of the sewer pipe according to the plan.

B. Shape bottoms of sanitary sewer trenches in accordance with local jurisdiction requirements. Incase wet, unstable, or rock conditions are encountered, undercut and backfill the trench withdrainage fill or select material.

C. Build pipe sewers in a trench the width of which at the top of the pipe does not exceed theexternal diameter of the barrel of the pipe, plus 12 inches each side, unless otherwise directed bythe Owner. In no case is the width of the trench be less than 30 inches.

3.2 BACKFILLING

A. Backfill all trenches and excavations immediately after the pipes are laid therein unless otherprotection for the pipe is directed. Select and deposit the backfilling material with special


reference to the future safety of the pipes. Solidly tamp clean earth, sand, or rock dust about the pipe up to the level of 6 inches above the top of the pipe and carefully deposit in uniform layers; each layer solidly tamped or rammed with proper tools so as not to disturb or injure the pipeline. Mechanical means may be permitted for backfilling, provided that the equipment meets the approval of the Owner. Ram or tamp the remainder of the backfilling of trenches in layers of not more than 6 inches in depth with either approved mechanical or hand tamps. Backfill material and compaction as specified under the EARTHWORK Section of these specifications.

B. Use backfilling material free from rock, trash, and debris.

3.3 LAYING PIPE

A. Use pipe and specials of the dimensions and laid to the line and grade as shown on the plans.

B. Lay pipe with joints close and even, butting all round, with no sagging at the hub and truesurface given to the invert throughout the entire length of sewer.

C. Place wyes and/or service connections and stubs from manholes where shown on the plans andas directed by the Owner. Blank-off such connections with suitable stopper and make watertightwith cement mortar.

D. Water in Trenches: Do not use sewers with fresh joints for draining water from ditches. Provideand operate pumps, if necessary, to remove water from trenches while pipe is being laid andjoints made.

E. Bedding; Provide bedding of PVC sewer pipe in accordance with manufacturer's details andlocal jurisdiction requirements. Bed all PVC pipe on crushed stone or gravel bedding, minimum6" thickness.

F. Install PVC sewer pipe in accordance with ASTM D2321. In any area where the pipe is belowexisting groundwater levels or the 100-year flood plain, place drainage fill to the top of the pipe.In all other areas, place drainage fill to the spring line of the pipe.

3.4 JOINTING PIPE

A. In jointing gasket pipe, thoroughly clean both the bell and the spigot before the gasket is applied.Use the proper size gasket for each size of pipe and lubricate only with a lubricant recommendedby the manufacturer of the pipe. Insert the spigot end in the bell the proper distance and takecare that the pipe remains in this position.

B. Thoroughly clean out all joint material that may be left on the inside and leave the pipe cleanand smooth throughout. Fill around every third pipe immediately after being properly placedand jointed to prevent moving of joints.

C. Carefully clean the interior of the pipe of all dirt and superfluous material of every description asthe work proceeds.

D. Repair and make tight defective joints discovered after laying pipe. Remove defective pipes andmake the proper replacement. Close all openings with an approved plug held in place and withmaterial such as specified for filling joints. Similarly plug dead ends of sewer lines.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Properly cap all connections which are for future use. Do not cut pipe for connections exceptwhere permitted by the Owner.

B. Install wyes for service connections where shown on the plans or as directed by the Owner.


3.7 TIE-IN TO EXISTING MAIN

A. Make all tie-ins to existing systems involving manhole coring under the supervision of LocalJurisdiction. Contact the Local Jurisdiction to arrange an appointment.

3.8 TESTS, IF REQUIRED BY OWNER

A. Laboratory or Plant Tests: Pipes may be tested for conformity with the Specifications. Test atthe manufacturing plant in the presence of the Owner or at a commercial laboratory designatedby the Owner.

B. Cleaning: Prior to initiating the various tests herein specified, thoroughly clean the section ofline to be tested through the use of a hydro-jet or other similar sewer cleaning device.

C. Low Pressure Air Testing:1. Test all sewer for leakage using low air testing as specified herein.2. Perform air testing in accordance with ASTM C828-80 except as herein modified or

directed.3. Temporarily plug line segments between two manholes using plugs having air-tight

fittings through which low pressure air can be introduced into the pipe segment beingtested.

4. Plug all wyes, tees, and/or stubs in a manner acceptable to the Local Jurisdiction.Securely fasten plugs to withstand the internal test pressures. Such plugs are to be readilyremovable, and their removal provide a socket suitable for making a lateral houseconnection or extension.

5. The Local Jurisdiction may dictate the procedure for determining the amount of leakageby low pressure testing.

6. Introduce low pressure air into the test pipe segment until the internal air pressure reaches4.5 psi above ground water pressure, if any.

7. Where high ground water is known to exist, divide the height in feet of ground waterabove the invert of the sewer by 2.31 to establish the pounds of pressure that will be addedto the internal air pressure used for the test.

8. Wait at least two minutes for air temperature in the test segment to stabilize while internalair pressure remains no less than 3.5 psi above groundwater pressure.

9. Bleed internal air pressure to exactly 3.5 psi above ground water pressure.10. Accurately determine the elapsed time for internal pressure to drop to 2.5 psi above

ground water pressure.11. The air test is acceptable if elapsed time is no less than shown by the following table:

Pipe Dia. Inches

Seconds Per 100 Ft. of Pipe

Pipe Dia. Inches

Seconds Per 100 Ft. of Pipe

4 11 27 77 6 17 30 85

02530-4 Sanitary Sewer System

12. If the installation fails to meet the requirements of this test, determine the source of leakage. Repair or replace all defective materials and/or workmanship and then retest the installation for compliance with these specifications for the line acceptance test.

13. Final acceptance of each section of run of sewer tested will not be issued until leakage has been reduced to rates not exceeding the maximum specified herein as permissible.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 334200 - STORMWATER CONVEYANCE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary for the construction of storm sewers, catchbasins, headwalls, spillways, and related items, complete. Conduct in a manner not to conflictwith paving, site grading, and other construction.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Data: Upon request of the Owner, submit four copies of manufacturer'sspecifications and installation instructions to the Owner for the following products, includinglaboratory test reports, notarized certifications, or other data required to show compliance withthese Specifications:1. Pipe, Fittings, and Joints;2. Granular material for pipe bedding;3. Drainage Casting and Iron Work.

B. Where aluminized or polyethylene storm drain is proposed as an alternate, submit a letter fromthe Local Jurisdiction approving its use for the application intended.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Conform to Local Codes and Specifications. Where conflicts arise between the LocalSpecifications and these specifications, Local requirements govern.

1.4 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES

A. Maintain in operating condition existing surface or subsurface utilities and repair or haverepaired to the satisfaction of the Owner any damage to existing utilities.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Use only materials from manufacturer’s specifications for NDS areas drains, trench drains, andgrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Preparation of Trenches for Pipe Laying.1. Keep the width of trenches at any point below top of pipe less than the outside diameter of

pipe plus 16", to permit satisfactory jointing and thorough tamping of bedding materialunder and around pipe.

2. Keep trenches free from water until the pipe is laid and trench backfilled and mortar hassufficiently hardened.

3. Shore, barricade and maintain trenches to protect workmen and the public from danger, inaccordance with Local, State, and Federal regulations. Lift shoring as backfill is added totrench where shoring is to be removed.

4. Take the depth of the trench at each grade board. Use the average of the two adjacentdepths to compute the depth of the cut for that section. If drainage lines are placed by use


of laser beam, measure trench depths at points where grade boards would otherwise be. Measure drainage line lengths horizontally from center to center of structures.

B. Preparation of Foundation for Pipe Laying1. Form the foundation in the trench to prevent any subsequent settlement which might result

in excessive pressure and consequent rupture of the pipes. Set batter boards at 50 footintervals to check the line and invert grade.

2. Remove rock in either ledge or boulder formation and replace with selected materials toprovide a compacted earth cushion having a thickness between rock and pipe of at least6". Where bell and spigot pipe is used, maintain cushion under bell as well as understraight portion of pipe.

3. Whenever wet or otherwise unstable soil that is incapable of adequately supporting pipe isencountered in trench bottoms, remove material to depth required and replace to theproper grade with suitable fill material.

4. Construct bedding surfaces for pipe to provide a firm foundation of uniform densitythroughout entire length of pipe. Carefully bed pipe in a soil foundation that has beenaccurately shaped and rounded to conform to lowest 1/4 of outside portion of circularpipe. When necessary, tamp bedding firm. Make bell holes and depressions for joints oflength, depth, and width as to required properly make joints.

5. Where bedding conditions dictate, lay the pipes in a concrete cradle supported on amasonry foundation carried to a soil of satisfactory bearing, or supported on a structuredesigned to carry the weight of pipe and its load to a firm bearing.

C. Pipe Laying1. Carefully examine each length of pipe before laying and reject any defective pipe.2. Commence the laying of pipes in finished trenches at the lowest point.3. Lay pipes with ends abutting and true to line and grade. Fit and match pipes so that when

laid in the work, they will form a sewer with a smooth and uniform invert.4. Clean ends of pipe carefully before pipes are lowered into trenches.5. Set the joints firmly according to line and grade and join together to be structurally sound

and water tight.

D. Backfilling Trenches1. After bedding has been prepared and pipe installed, place suitable fill material along both

sides of pipe in layers not exceeding 6" in compacted depth. Bring backfill up evenly onboth sides of pipe for its full length. Insure thorough compaction of fill under haunches ofpipe. Thoroughly compact each layer with mechanical tampers or rammers. Continue thismethod of filling and compacting until fill has reached an elevation of at least 6" above thetop of pipe. Backfill and compact remainder of trench by spreading and rolling, orcompact by mechanical rammers or tampers in layers not exceeding 6".

2. Wet down each layer of fill and backfill to obtain optimum moisture content. Compact toa minimum of 95% of the standard proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D-698).

3. Do not puddle or water flood to consolidate the backfill.4. Do not walk or work on the completed pipeline, except as necessary in tamping or

backfilling, until the trench has been backfilled to a height of at least two feet (2') abovethe top of the pipes.

5. Fill trench simultaneously on both sides of the pipes is a manner that injurious sidepressures do not occur.

3.2 PAVEMENT CUTS

A. Repair pavement cut during construction.


B. Use a cutting machine to make pavement cuts. Make straight, parallel lines to conform to thedetailed drawings.

C. Provide temporary patches as required in order to properly allow free flow of traffic. Use coldmix asphalt for temporary patches, 3 inches deep furnished flush with adjoining pavement. Usebinder course patches with concrete.

D. Provide proper sign, signals and warnings to traffic to prevent risk of injury to motorists.

3.4 TESTS

A. Field Tests: Test the complete sewer between manholes with lanterns and reflected lights, toshow a good clear view from manhole to manhole, without obstruction.

3.5 SILT RETENTION BARRIERS

A. Provide material for silt retention barriers as detailed.

3.6 TEMPORARY SURFACE DRAINAGE

A. Leave openings at subgrade in drainage structures for surface drainage.

3.7 CLEAN-UP

A. Upon completion of work, remove forms, equipment, protective covering, and rubbish from thepremises. Carefully clean interior of sewers of dirt, rubbish and surplus mortar and leave cleanand smooth upon completion of contract.

END OF SECTION

Demo/Construction/Hardscape/Landscape Contract

Effective 121719 jj

Insurance and Risk Management Provisions

Demolition Construction of Hardscape and Landscape The following is the minimum insurance and limits that the Contractor/Vendor must maintain. If the

Contractor/Vendor maintains broader and/or higher limits than the minimum shown below, Fulton

County Government requires and shall be entitled to coverage for the higher limits.

It is Fulton County Government’s practice to obtain Certificates of Insurance from our Contractors and

Vendors. Insurance must be written by a licensed agent in a company licensed to write insurance in the

State of Georgia, with an A.M. Best rating of at least A- VI, subject to final approval by Fulton County.

Respondents shall submit with the bid/proposal evidence of insurability satisfactory to Fulton County

Government as to form and content. Either of the following forms of evidence is acceptable:

A letter from an insurance carrier stating that upon your firm/company being the

successful Bidder/Respondent that a Certificate of Insurance shall be issued in

compliance with the Insurance and Risk Management Provisions outlined below.

A Certificate of Insurance complying with the Insurance and Risk Management

Provisions outlined below (Request for Bid/Proposal number and Project Name, Number

and Description must appear on the Certificate of Insurance).

A combination of a specific policy written with an umbrella policy covering liabilities in

excess of the required limits is acceptable to achieve the applicable insurance coverage

levels.

Any and all Insurance Coverage(s) and Bonds required under the terms and conditions of the contract

shall be maintained during the entire length of the contract, including any extensions or renewals thereto,

and until all work has been completed to the satisfaction of Fulton County Government. Evidence of said

insurance coverages shall be provided on or before the inception date of the Contract.

Accordingly the Respondent shall provide a certificate evidencing the following:

1. WORKERS COMPENSATION/EMPLOYER’S LIABILITY INSURANCE – STATUTORY

(In compliance with the Georgia Workers Compensation Acts, including but not limited to U.S.

Longshoremen and Harbor Workers Act and any other State or Federal Acts or Provisions in

which jurisdiction may be granted)

Employer’s Liability Insurance BY ACCIDENT EACH ACCIDENT $1,000,000

Employer’s Liability Insurance BY DISEASE POLICY LIMIT $1,000,000

Employer’s Liability Insurance BY DISEASE EACH EMPLOYEE $1,000,000

2. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE (Including contractual Liability

Insurance)

Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability Each Occurrence $1,000,000

(Other than Products/Completed Operations) General Aggregate $2,000,000

Products\Completed Operation Aggregate Limit $2,000,000

Personal and Advertising Injury Limits $1,000,000

Damage to Rented Premises Limits $100,000


Effective 121719 jj

3. BUSINESS AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE

Bodily Injury & Property Damage Each Occurrence $1,000,000

(Including operation of non-owned, owned, and hired automobiles).

4. UMBRELLA LIABILITY Per Occurrence/Aggregate $2,000,000/$2,000,000

5. CONTRACTORS POLLUTION LIABILITY Each Occurrence $1,000,000

Applicable to the work being performed.

*Or by endorsement to General Liability Policy for sudden and accidental

The Contractor shall ensure that its landscape architect, engineers and any other

Design consultants used on the Project maintain Professional (Errors and Omissions) Liability

insurance appropriate to the Contractors profession with limits of liability not less than:

Per occurrence/Aggregate $1,000,000/3,000,000 (with 3 year extended reporting period)

Certificates of Insurance

Certificates of Insurance are to list Fulton County Government, Its Officials, Officers and Employees as

an Additional Insured (except for Workers’ Compensation) using ISO Additional Insured Endorsement

form CG 2010 (11/85) version), its’ equivalent or on a blanket basis.

I The Contractor/Vendor insurance shall apply as Primary Insurance before any other insurance or self-

insurance, including any deductible, non-contributory, and Waiver of Subrogation provided in favor of

Fulton County.

Fulton County by added as Additional Insured under the General Liability, Auto Liability, Umbrella

Policies (with exception of Workers Compensation and Professional Liability), with no Cross Suits

exclusion.

If Fulton County Government shall so request, the Respondent, Contractor or Vendor will furnish the

County for its inspection and approval such policies of insurance with all endorsements, or confirmed

specimens thereof certified by the insurance company to be true and correct copies.

Such certificates and notices shall be sent to:

Fulton County Government

Attn: Purchasing Department

130 Peachtree Street, S.W.

Suite 1168

Atlanta, GA 30303-3459

Important:

The obligations for the Contractor/Vendor to procure and maintain insurance shall not be constructed to

waive or restrict other obligations. It is understood that neither failure to comply nor full compliance with

the foregoing insurance requirements shall limit or relieve the Contractor/Vendor from any liability

incurred as a result of their activities/operations in conjunction with the Contract and/or Scope of Work.


Effective 121719 jj

USE OF PREMISES

Contractor/Vendor shall confine its apparatus, the storage of materials and the operations of its workers to

limits/requirements indicated by law, ordinance, permits and any restrictions of Fulton County

Government and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with its materials (Where applicable).

PROTECTION OF PROPERTY

Contractor/Vendor will adequately protect its own work from damage, will protect Fulton County

Government’s property from damage or loss and will take all necessary precautions during the progress of

the work to protect all persons and the property of others from damage or loss.

Contractor/Vendor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of employees of the work and shall

comply with all applicable provisions of the Federal, State and local safety laws and building codes to

prevent accidents or injury to persons on, about, or adjacent to the premises where work is being

performed.

Contractor/Vendor shall erect and properly maintain at all times as required by the conditions and

progress of the work, all necessary safeguards for the protection of its employees, Fulton County

Government employees and the public and shall post all applicable signage and other warning devices to

protect against potential hazards for the work being performed (Where applicable).

CONTRACTOR/VENDOR ACKNOWLEDGES HAVING READ, UNDERSTANDING, AND

AGREEING TO COMPLY WITH THE AFOREMENTIONED STATEMENTS, AND THE

REPRESENTATIVE OF THE CONTRACTOR/VENDOR IDENTIFIED BELOW IS

AUTHORIZED TO SIGN CONTRACTS ON BEHALF OF THE RESPONDING

CONTRACTOR/VENDOR.

COMPANY: ___________________________ SIGNATURE: __________________________

NAME: _______________________________ TITLE: ________________________________

DATE: _______________________________

20204811K-JAJ Section 6 Pryor Street Entry Plaza Purchasing Forms & Instructions

Page 1 of 12

PURCHASING FORMS & INSTRUCTIONS

This section contains the procurement forms that are required to be executed and submitted with the bid package. This section does not contain all forms required to be included with the bid package submittal. To be deemed responsive to this ITB, Bidders must provide the information requested and complete in detail all Purchasing Forms. The appropriate individual(s) authorized to commit the Bidder to the Project must sign the Purchasing Forms. Bidders should reproduce each Purchasing Form, as required, and complete the appropriate portions of the forms provided in this section.

Form A: Georgia Security and Immigration Contractor Affidavit and Agreement

Form B: Georgia Security and Immigration Subcontractor Affidavit

Form C: Professional License Certifications (not applicable)

Form C1 – Georgia Utility License Contractor License Form C2 – Georgia General Contractors License Form C3 – Georgia Professional License

Form D: Disclosure Form and Questionnaire


Page 2 of 12

FORM A: GEORGIA SECURITY AND IMMIGRATION CONTRACTOR AFFIDAVIT AND AGREEMENT

Instructions: Contractors must attest to compliance with the requirements of O.C.G.A 13-10-91 and the Georgia Department of Labor Rule 300-10-01-.02 by executing the Contractor Affidavit provided.


Page 3 of 12

STATE OF GEORGIA COUNTY OF FULTON FORM A: GEORGIA SECURITY AND IMMIGRATION CONTRACTOR AFFIDAVIT

AND AGREEMENT By executing this affidavit, the undersigned contractor verifies its compliance with O.C.G.A. 13-10-91, stating affirmatively that the individual, firm or corporation which is engaged in the physical performance of services1 under a contract with [insert name of prime contractor] _______________________________________________ on behalf of Fulton County Government has registered with and is participating in a federal work authorization program*,2 in accordance with the applicability provisions and deadlines established in O.C.G.A. 13-10-91. The undersigned further agrees that, should it employ or contract with any subcontractor(s) in connection with the physical performance of services to this contract with Fulton County Government, contractor will secure from such subcontractor(s) similar verification of compliance with O.C.G.A. 13-10-91 on the Subcontractor Affidavit provided in Rule 300-10-01-.08 or a substantially similar form. Contractor further agrees to maintain records of such compliance and provide a copy of each such verification to the Fulton County Government at the time the subcontractor(s) is retained to perform such service. ______________________________________________ EEV/Basic Pilot Program* User Identification Number ______________________________________________ BY: Authorized Officer of Agent (Insert Contractor Name) ______________________________________________ Title of Authorized Officer or Agent of Contractor ______________________________________________ Printed Name of Authorized Officer or Agent Sworn to and subscribed before me this ______ day of _________________, 20__. Notary Public: ________________________________ County: _____________________________________

Commission Expires: __________________________________

1O.C.G.A.§ 13-10-90(4), as amended by Senate Bill 160, provides that “physical performance of services” means any performance of labor or services for a public employer (e.g., Fulton County) using a bidding process (e.g., ITB, RFQ, RFP, etc.) or contract wherein

the labor or services exceed $2,499.99, except for those individuals licensed pursuant to title 26 or Title 43 or by the State Bar of

Georgia and is in good standing when such contract is for service to be rendered by such individual. 2*[Any of the electronic verification of work authorization programs operated by the United States Department of Homeland Security

or any equivalent federal work authorization program operated by the United States Department of Homeland Security to verify information of newly hired employees, pursuant to the Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986 (IRCA), P.L. 99-603].


Page 4 of 12

FORM B: GEORGIA SECURITY AND IMMIGRATION SUBCONTRACTOR AFFIDAVIT

Instructions: In the event that your company is awarded the contract for this project, and will be utilizing the services of any subcontractor(s) in connection with the physical performance of services pursuant to this contract, the following affidavit must be completed by such subcontractor(s). Your company must provide a copy of each such affidavit to Fulton County Government, Department of Purchasing & Contract Compliance with the proposal submittal. All subcontractor affidavit(s) shall become a part of the contract and all subcontractor(s) affidavits shall be maintained by your company and available for inspection by Fulton County Government at any time during the term of the contract. All subcontractor(s) affidavit(s) shall become a part of any contractor/subcontractor agreement(s) entered into by your company.


Page 5 of 12

STATE OF GEORGIA COUNTY OF FULTON

FORM B: GEORGIA SECURITY AND IMMIGRATION SUBCONTRACTOR AFFIDAVIT

By executing this affidavit, the undersigned subcontractor verifies its compliance with O.C.G.A. 13-10-91, stating affirmatively that the individual, firm or corporation which is engaged in the physical performance of services3 under a contract with [insert name of prime contractor] _______________________________________________behalf of Fulton County Government has registered with and is participating in a federal work authorization program*,4 in accordance with the applicability provisions and deadlines established in O.C.G.A. 13-10-91. ______________________________________________ EEV/Basic Pilot Program* User Identification Number ______________________________________________ BY: Authorized Officer of Agent (Insert Subcontractor Name) ______________________________________________ Title of Authorized Officer or Agent of Subcontractor ______________________________________________ Printed Name of Authorized Officer or Agent Sworn to and subscribed before me this ______ day of _________________, 20__. Notary Public: ________________________________ County: _____________________________________ Commission Expires: __________________

3O.C.G.A.§ 13-10-90(4), as amended by Senate Bill 160, provides that “physical performance of services” means any performance of labor or services for a public employer (e.g., Fulton County) using a bidding process (e.g., ITB, RFQ, RFP, etc.) or contract wherein

the labor or services exceed $2,499.99, except for those individuals licensed pursuant to title 26 or Title 43 or by the State Bar of

Georgia and is in good standing when such contract is for service to be rendered by such individual. 4*[Any of the electronic verification of work authorization programs operated by the United States Department of Homeland Security

or any equivalent federal work authorization program operated by the United States Department of Homeland Security to verify information of newly hired employees, pursuant to the Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986 (IRCA), P.L. 99-603].


Page 6 of 12

FORM C1: CONTRACTOR’S GEORGIA UTILITY LICENSE CERTIFICATION

Contractor’s Name: ______________________________________________________ Utility Contractor’s Name: _________________________________________________ Expiration Date of License: ________________________________________________ I certify that the above information is true and correct and that the classification noted is applicable to the Bid for this Project. Signed: ______________________________________________________________________ Date: ______________________________________________________________________

(ATTACH COPY OF LICENSE)


Page 7 of 12

FORM C2: CONTRACTOR’S GEORGIA GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S LICENSE CERTIFICATION

Contractor’s Name: ______________________________________________________ General Contractor’s License Number: ______________________________________ Expiration Date of License: ________________________________________________ I certify that the above information is true and correct and that the classification noted is applicable to the Bid for this Project. Signed: _____________________________________________________________________ Date: ______________________________________________________________________



Page 8 of 12

FORM C3: GEORGIA PROFESSIONAL LICENSE CERTIFICATION

NOTE: Please complete this form for the work your firm will perform on this

project. Contractor’s Name: ______________________________________________________ Performing work as: Prime Contractor ____ Sub-Contractor _____ Professional License Type: ________________________________________________ Professional License Number: ______________________________________________ Expiration Date of License: ________________________________________________ I certify that the above information is true and correct and that the classification noted is applicable to the Bid for this Project. Signed: _____________________________________________________________________ Date: ______________________________________________________________________



Page 9 of 12

FORM D: DISCLOSURE FORM AND QUESTIONNAIRE

1. Please provide the names and business addresses of each of the Offeror’s firm’s

officers and directors.

For the purposes of this form, the term “Offeror” means an entity that responds to a solicitation for a County contract by either submitting a proposal in response to a Request for Proposal or a Request for Qualification or a Bid in response to an Invitation to Bid. Describe accurately, fully and completely, their respective relationships with said Offeror, including their ownership interests and their anticipated role in the management and operations of said Offeror.

2. Please describe the general development of said Offeror's business during the

past five (5) years, or such shorter period of time that said Offeror has been in business.

3. Please state whether any employee, agent or representative of said Offeror who

is or will be directly involved in the subject project has or has ever: (i) directly or indirectly had a business relationship with Fulton County; (ii) directly or indirectly received revenues from Fulton County; or (iii) directly or indirectly receives revenues from the result of conducting business on Fulton County property or pursuant to any contract with Fulton County. Please describe in detail any such relationship.


Page 10 of 12

LITIGATION DISCLOSURE: Failure to fully and truthfully disclose the information required, may result in the disqualification of your bid or proposal from consideration or termination of the Contract, once awarded.

1. Please state whether any of the following events have occurred in the last five (5)

years with respect to said Offeror. If any answer is yes, explain fully the following:

(a) whether a petition under the federal bankruptcy laws or state insolvency

laws was filed by or against said Offeror, or a receiver fiscal agent or similar officer was appointed by a court for the business or property of said Offeror;

Circle One: YES NO

(b) whether Offeror was subject of any order, judgment, or decree not

subsequently reversed, suspended or vacated by any court of competent jurisdiction, permanently enjoining said Offeror from engaging in any type of business practice, or otherwise eliminating any type of business practice; and

Circle One: YES NO

(c) whether said Offeror's business was the subject of any civil or criminal

proceeding in which there was a final adjudication adverse to said or Offeror, which directly arose from activities conducted by the business unit or corporate division of said Offeror which submitted a bid or proposal for the subject project. If so please explain.

Circle One: YES NO

2. Have you or any member of your firm or team to be assigned to this engagement

ever been indicted or convicted of a criminal offense within the last five (5) years?

Circle One: YES NO 3. Have you or any member of your firm or team been terminated (for cause or

otherwise) from any work being performed for Fulton County or any other Federal, State or Local Government?

Circle One: YES NO 4. Have you or any member of your firm or team been involved in any claim or

litigation adverse to Fulton County or any other federal, state or local government, or private entity during the last three (3) years?

Circle One: YES NO


Page 11 of 12

5. Has any offeror, member of offeror’s team, or officer of any of them (with respect to any matter involving the business practices or activities of his or her employer), been notified within the five (5) years preceding the date of this offer that any of them are the target of a criminal investigation, grand jury investigation, or civil enforcement proceeding?

Circle One: YES NO If you have answered “YES” to any of the above questions, please indicate the name(s) of the person(s), the nature, and the status and/or outcome of the information, indictment, conviction, termination, claim or litigation, the name of the court and the file or reference number of the case, as applicable. Any such information should be provided on a separate page, attached to this form and submitted with your proposal. NOTE: If any response to any question set forth in this questionnaire has been disclosed in any other document, a response may be made by attaching a copy of such disclosure. (For example, said Offeror's most recent filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”) may be provided if they are responsive to certain items within the questionnaire.) However, for purposes of clarity, Offeror should correlate its responses with the exhibits by identifying the exhibit and its relevant text. Disclosures must specifically address, completely respond and comply with all information requested and fully answer all questions requested by Fulton County. Such disclosure must be submitted at the time of the bid or proposal submission and included as a part of the bid/proposal submitted for this project. Disclosure is required for Offerors, joint venture partners and first-tier subcontractors. Failure to provide required disclosure, submit officially signed and notarized documents or respond to any and all information requested/required by Fulton County can result in the bid/proposal declared as non-responsive. This document must be completed and included as a part of the bid/proposal package along with other required documents.

[SIGNATURES ON NEXT PAGE]


Page 12 of 12

Under penalty or\f perjury, I declare that I have examined this questionnaire and all attachments hereto, if applicable, to the best of my knowledge and belief, and all statements contained hereto are true, correct, and complete.

On this _______ day of __________________, 20_______ ____ (Legal Name of Proponent) (Date) ____ (Signature of Authorized Representative) (Date)

___________________________________________

(Title) Sworn to and subscribed before me, This _________ day of _________________________, 20___ __________________________________________________ (Notary Public) (Seal) Commission Expires _________________________________ (Date)

Insert Bid# Section 7 Insert Project Title Contract Compliance Requirements

Page 1 of 12

SECTION 7

CONTRACT COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS

NON-DISCRIMINATION IN PURCHASING AND CONTRACTING It is the policy of Fulton County Government that discrimination against businesses by reason of the race, color, gender or national origin of the ownership of any such business is prohibited. Furthermore, it is the policy of the Board of Commissioners (“Board”) that Fulton County and all vendors and contractors doing business with Fulton County shall provide to all businesses the opportunity to participate in contracting and procurement paid, in whole or in part, with monetary appropriations of the Board without regard to the race, color, gender or national origin of the ownership of any such business. Similarly, it is the policy of the Board that the contracting and procurement practices of Fulton County should not implicate Fulton County as either an active or passive participant in the discriminatory practices engaged in by private contractors or vendors seeking to obtain contracts with Fulton County.

Implementation of Equal Employment Opportunity (EEO) Policy Pursuant to Fulton County Code section §102-391, Equal Opportunity Clause, the County effectuates Equal Employment Opportunity. This policy considers racial and gender workforce availability. The availability of each workgroup is derived from the work force demographics set forth in the 2010 Census EEO file prepared by the United States Department of Commerce for the applicable labor pool normally utilized for the contract.

Monitoring of EEO Policy Upon award of a contract with Fulton County, the successful bidder/proposer must complete Exhibit B, Equal Employment Opportunity Report (“EEOR”), describing the racial and gender make-up of the firm’s work force. If the EEOR indicates that the firm’s demographic composition indicates underutilization of employee’s of a particular ethnic group for each job category, the EEOR will be submitted to the Division of Diversity and Civil Rights Compliance for further action.

Title VI Non-Discrimination Policy (600-71) The Fulton County Board of Commissioners is committed to compliance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 as amended and all related regulations and directives. In this regard, Fulton County assures that no person shall on the basis of race, color or national origin, as provided by Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, as amended and the Civil Rights Restoration Act of 1987 (P.L. 100.259) be excluded from participation in, be denied the benefits of, or be otherwise subjected to discrimination under any program or activity. Fulton County further assures every effort will be made to ensure nondiscrimination in all of its programs and activities, whether or not those programs and activities are federally funded. In addition, Fulton County will take reasonable steps to provide meaningful access to services for persons with Limited English

Proficiency at no additional cost.


Page 2 of 12

EQUAL BUSINESS OPPORTUNITY PLAN (EBO PLAN) In addition to the proposal submission requirements, each vendor must submit an Equal Business Opportunity Plan (EBO Plan) with their bid/proposal. The EBO Plan is designed to enhance the utilization of a particular racial, gender or ethnic group by a bidder/proposer, contractor, or vendor or by Fulton County. The respondent must outline a plan of action to encourage and achieve diversity and equality in the available procurement and contracting opportunities with this solicitation. The EBO Plan must identify and include:

1. Potential opportunities within the scope of work of this solicitation that will allow for participation of racial, gender or ethnic groups.

2. Efforts that will be made by the bidder/proposer to encourage and solicit minority and

female business utilization in this solicitation.

DETERMINATION OF GOOD FAITH EFFORTS In accordance with Fulton County Code Section §102-426, the Prime Contractor must demonstrate that they have made all efforts reasonably possible to ensure that Minority and Female Business Enterprises (MFBE) have had a full and fair opportunity to compete and win subcontracts on this project. The Prime Contractor is required to include all outreach attempts that would demonstrate a “Good Faith Effort” in the solicitation of sub-consultants/subcontractors. Written documentation demonstrating the Prime Contractor’s outreach efforts to identify, contact, contract with or utilize Minority or Female owned businesses shall include holding pre-bid conferences, publishing advertisements in general circulation media, trade association publications, minority-focused media, and the County’s bid board, as well as other efforts. Include a list of publications where the advertisement was placed as well as a copy of the advertisement. Advertisement shall include at a minimum, scope of work, project location, location(s) of where plans and specifications may be viewed or obtained and trade or scopes of work for which subcontracts are being solicited. PROMPT PAYMENT The prime contractor must certify in writing and must document that all subcontractors, sub-consultants and suppliers have been promptly paid for work and materials, (less any retainage by the prime contractor prior to receipt of any further progress payments). In the event the prime contractor is unable to pay subcontractors, sub-consultants or suppliers until it has received a progress payment from Fulton County, the prime contractor shall pay all subcontractors, sub-consultants or suppliers funds due from said progress payment within ten days (10) of receipt of payment from Fulton County. In no event shall a subcontractor, sub-consultant or supplier be paid later than ten (10) days as provided for by state regulation.


Page 3 of 12

REQUIRED FORMS (To be submitted with Technical Proposal) In order to be compliant with the intent and provisions of the Fulton County Non-Discrimination in Purchasing and Contracting Policy, bidders/proposers must submit the following completed documents with their Technical Proposal.

Exhibit A – Promise of Non-Discrimination Exhibit C – Schedule of Intended Subcontractor Utilization

The following documents must be completed as instructed if awarded the project:

Exhibit B – Equal Employment Opportunity Report (EEOR) Exhibit D – Letter of Intent to Perform as a Subcontractor or Provide Materials or

Services (To be submitted only by subcontractor/sub-consultant/suppliers of winning Prime prior to contract execution)

Exhibit E – Prime Contractor’s Subcontractor Utilization Report (To be submitted monthly with pay applications)

All Contract Compliance documents Exhibits A, C and the EBO Plan are to be placed in a separate sealed envelope clearly marked “CONTRACT COMPLIANCE”. These documents are considered part of and must be submitted with the Technical Proposal.


Page 4 of 12

EXHIBIT A – PROMISE OF NON-DISCRIMINATION “Know all persons by these presents, that I/We ( ), Name Title Firm Name Hereinafter “Company”, in consideration of the privilege to bid on or obtain contracts funded, in whole or in part, by Fulton County, hereby consent, covenant and agree as follows:

1) No person shall be excluded from participation in, denied the benefit of, or otherwise discriminated against on the basis of race, color, national origin or gender in connection with any bid submitted to Fulton County for the performance of any resulting there from,

2) That it is and shall be the policy of this Company to provide equal opportunity to

all businesses seeking to contract or otherwise interested in contracting with this Company without regard to the race, color, gender or national origin of the ownership of this business,

3) That the promises of non-discrimination as made and set forth herein shall be

continuing in nature and shall remain in full force and effect without interruption, 4) That the promise of non-discrimination as made and set forth herein shall be

made a part of, and incorporated by reference into, any contract or portion thereof which this Company may hereafter obtain,

5) That the failure of this Company to satisfactorily discharge any of the promises of

non-discrimination as made and set forth herein shall constitute a material breach of contract entitling the Board to declare the contract in default and to exercise any and all applicable rights and remedies, including but not limited to cancellation of the contract, termination of the contract, suspension and debarment from future contracting opportunities, and withholding and/or forfeiture of compensation due and owning on a contract; and

6) That the bidder shall provide such information as may be required by the Director

of Purchasing & Contract Compliance pursuant to Section 102.436 of the Fulton County Non-Discrimination in Purchasing and Contracting Policy.

NAME: _________________________________ TITLE: SIGNATURE: ADDRESS: PHONE NUMBER: _____________________ EMAIL:

of 12

EXHIBIT B – EMPLOYMENT REPORT

The demographic employment make-up for the bidder and all subcontractors performing work on this project must be submitted prior to the execution of the contract.

JOB CATEGORIES

TOTAL

EMPLOYED

TOTAL

MINORITIES

WHITE

(Not Hispanic Origin)

BLACK or AFRICAN

AMERICAN (Not of

Hispanic Origin)

HISPANIC or LATINO

AMERICAN INDIAN or ALASKAN NATIVE (AIAN)

ASIAN

NATIVE HAWAIIAN or OTHER PACIFIC

ISLANDER (NHOPI)

TWO or MORE RACES

M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F

EXECUTIVE/SENIOR LEVEL OFFICIALS and MANAGERS

FIRST/MID LEVEL OFFICIALS and MANAGERS

PROFESSIONALS

TECHNICIANS

SALES WORKERS

ADMINISTRATIVE SUPPORT WORKERS

CRAFT WORKERS

OPERATIVES

LABORERS & HELPERS

SERVICE WORKERS

TOTAL

FIRM’S NAME:

CONTACT NAME:

EMAIL: PHONE NUMBER: ___

SUBMITTED BY: TITLE: _____________________________

of 12

EXHIBIT C - SCHEDULE OF INTENDED SUBCONTRACTOR UTILIZATION If the bidder/proposer intends to subcontract any portion of this scope of work/service(s), this form must be completed and submitted with the bid/proposal. All prime bidders/proposers must submit Letter(s) of Intent (Exhibit D) for all subcontractors who will be utilized under the scope of work/services prior to contract execution. Prime Bidder/Proposer Company Name ITB/RFP Name & Number:

1. My firm, as Prime Bidder/Proposer on this scope of work/service(s) is NOT□, is□ a minority □African American (AABE)□; Asian American (ABE); □ Hispanic American (HBE); □Native American (NABE); □ White Female American (WFBE); **If yes, please attach copy of recent certification. (Check the appropriate box/es)

Indicate below the portion of work, including, percentage of bid/proposal amount that your

firm will carry out directly: $ or %

2. This information below must be completed and submitted with the bid/proposal if a joint venture (JV) approach is to be undertaken. Please provide JV breakdown information below and attach a copy of the executed Joint Venture Agreement.

JV Partner(s) information:

Business Name

Business Name

Business Name

(a.) (b.) (c.)

% of JV % of JV % of JV

Ethnicity Ethnicity Ethnicity

Gender Gender Gender

Phone# Phone# Phone#

3. Sub-Contractors (including suppliers) to be utilized in the performance of this scope of

work/service(s), if awarded, are: SUBCONTRACTOR NAME: ADDRESS: EMAIL ADDRESS: PHONE: CONTACT PERSON: ETHNIC GROUP*: COUNTY CERTIFIED** WORK TO BE PERFORMED: DOLLAR VALUE OF WORK: $ PERCENTAGE VALUE: %

of 12

SUBCONTRACTOR NAME: ADDRESS: EMAIL ADDRESS: PHONE: CONTACT PERSON: ETHNIC GROUP*: COUNTY CERTIFIED** WORK TO BE PERFORMED: DOLLAR VALUE OF WORK: $ PERCENTAGE VALUE: %



SUBCONTRACTOR NAME: ADDRESS: EMAIL ADDRESS: PHONE: CONTACT PERSON: ETHNIC GROUP*: COUNTY CERTIFIED** WORK TO BE PERFORMED: DOLLAR VALUE OF WORK: $ PERCENTAGE VALUE: % *Ethnic Groups: African American (AABE); Asian American (ABE); Hispanic American (HBE); Native American (NABE); White Female American (WFBE); **If yes, please attach copy of recent certification.

Total Dollar Value of Subcontractor Agreements: ($)

of 12

Total Percentage of Subcontractor Value: (%)

CERTIFICATION: The undersigned certifies that he/she has read, understands and agrees to be bound by the Bid/Proposer provisions, including the accompanying Exhibits and other terms and conditions regarding sub-contractor utilization. The undersigned further certifies that he/she is legally authorized by the Bidder/Proposer to make the statement and representation in this Exhibit and that said statements and representations are true and correct to the best of his/her knowledge and belief. The undersigned understands and agrees that if any of the statements and representations are made by the Bidder/Proposer knowing them to be false, or if there is a failure of the intentions, objectives and commitments set forth herein without prior approval of the County, then in any such event the Contractor’s acts or failure to act, as the case may be, shall constitute a material breach of the contract, entitling the County to terminate the Contract for default. The right to so terminate shall be in addition to, and in lieu of, any other rights and remedies the County may have for other defaults under the contract. Signature: Title: Business or Corporate Name: Address: Telephone: ( )

Fax Number: ( )

Email Address:

of 12

EXHIBIT D

LETTER OF INTENT TO PERFORM AS A SUBCONTRACTOR OR

PROVIDE MATERIALS OR SERVICES

This form must be completed by ALL known subcontractors and submitted only by subs of awarded Prime prior to contract execution.

To:

(Name of Prime Contractor’s Firm)

From: (Name of Subcontractor’s Firm)

ITB/RFP Number: Project Name: The undersigned is prepared to perform the following described work or provide materials or services in connection with the above project (specify in detail particular work items, materials, or services to be performed or provided):

Description of Work

Project Commence

Date

Project Completion

Date

Estimated Dollar

Amount

(Prime Bidder) (Subcontractor) Signature Signature Title Title Email Address Email Address Date Date

of 12

EXHIBIT E - PRIME CONTRACTOR/SUB-CONTRACTOR UTILIZATION REPORT

This report must be submitted by the tenth day of each month, along with a copy of your monthly invoice (schedule of values/payment application) to Contract Compliance. Failure to comply shall result in the County commencing proceedings to impose sanctions to the prime contractor, in addition to pursuing any other available legal remedy.

Sanctions may include the suspending of any payment or part thereof, termination or cancellation of the contract, and the denial of participation in any future contracts awarded by Fulton County.

REPORTING PERIOD PROJECT NAME:

FROM:

PROJECT NUMBER:

TO:

PROJECT LOCATION:

PRIME CONTRACTOR Contract

Award Date Contract Award

Amount Change Order

Amount Contract Period

% Complete to Date

Name:

Address:

Phone #:

Email:

AMOUNT OF PAY APPLICATION THIS PERIOD: $

TOTAL PAYMENT(S) RECEIVED FROM COUNTY THIS PERIOD): $

TOTAL AMOUNT PAID YEAR TO DATE: $

SUBCONTRACTOR UTILIZATION (add additional rows as necessary)

Name of Sub-Contractor

Description of Work Contract Amount

Amount Paid To Date

Amount of Pay Application This Period

Contract Period Starting Date Ending Date

TOTALS

Executed By: (Signature) (Printed Name) Notary: _________________________________________________________ Date: _____________________________________________________

My Commission Expires: _______________________

20ITB204811K-JAJ Section 8

Pryor Street Entry Plaza General Conditions

Page 1 of 34

SECTION 8

GENERAL CONDITIONS

00700-1 FAMILIARITY WITH SITE

Execution of this agreement by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, has become familiar with the local conditions under which the work is to be performed, and has correlated personal observations with the requirements of this agreement.

00700-2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

This agreement consists of Owner's invitation for bid, instructions to bidders, bid form, performance bond, payment bond, acknowledgments, the contract, general conditions, special conditions, specifications, plans, drawings, exhibits, addenda, and written change orders.

A. Notice of Award of Contract:

B. Execution of Contract Documents

Upon notification of Award of Contract, the Owner shall furnish the Contractor the conformed copies of Contract Documents for execution by the Contractor and the Contractor's surety.

Within ten (10) days after receipt the Contractor shall return all the documents properly executed by the Contractor and the Contractor's surety. Attached to each document shall be an original power-of-attorney for the person executing the bonds for the surety and certificates of insurance for the required insurance coverage.

After receipt of the documents executed by the Contractor and his surety with the power-of-attorney and certificates of insurance, the Owner shall complete the execution of the documents. Distribution of the completed documents will be made upon completion.

Should the Contractor and/or Surety fail to execute the documents within the time specified; the Owner shall have the right to proceed on the Bid Bond accompanying the bid.

If the Owner fails to execute the documents within the time limit specified, the Contractor shall have the right to withdraw the Contractor's bid without penalty.

Drawings and Specifications:

The Drawings, Specifications, Contract Documents, and all supplemental documents, are considered essential parts of the Contract, and requirements occurring in one are as binding as though occurring in all. They are intended to define, describe and provide for all Work necessary to complete the Project in an acceptable manner, ready for use, occupancy, or operation by the Owner.

In case of conflict between the Drawings and Specifications, the Specifications shall govern. Figure dimensions on Drawings shall govern over scale dimensions, and detailed Drawings shall govern over general Drawings.



Page 2 of 34

In cases where products or quantities are omitted from the Specifications, the description and quantities shown on the Drawings shall govern.

Any ambiguities or need for clarification of the Drawings or Specifications shall be immediately reported to the Construction Manager in writing. Any such ambiguity or need for clarification shall be handled by the Construction Manager in writing. No clarification of the Drawings and Specifications hereunder by the Construction Manager shall entitle the Contractor to any additional monies unless a Change Order has been processed as provided by "Changes in the Contract" hereof.

Any work done by the Contractor following a discovery of such differing site condition or ambiguity or need for clarification in the Contract Drawings and Specifications prior to a written report to the Construction Manager shall not entitle the Contractor to additional monies and shall be done at the Contractor's risk.

The Construction Manager will furnish the Contractor five (5) copies of the Contract Drawings and the Specifications, one copy of which the Contractor shall have available at all times on the Project site. 00700-3 DEFINITIONS

The following terms as used in this agreement are defined as follows to the extent the definitions herein differ or conflict with those in the Instructions for Bidders, Section 00100, the definitions herein shall control.

Alternate bids – the amount stated in the bid or proposal to be added to or deducted from the amount of the base bid or base proposal if the corresponding change in project scope or alternate materials or methods of construction is accepted.

Base bid – the amount of money stated in the bid or proposal as the sum for which the bidder or proposer offers to perform the work.

Change Order - an alteration, addition, or deduction from the original scope of work as defined by the contract documents to address changes or unforeseen conditions necessary for project completion. A written order to the Contractor issued by the County pursuant to Fulton County Code Section 102-420 for changes in the work within the general scope of the contract documents, adjustment of the contract price, extension of the contract time, or reservation of determination of a time extension.

Construction Manager - shall mean the individual designated in writing, by the Department of Real Estate and Asset Management as the Construction Manager.

Contractor - shall mean the party of the second part to the Contract Agreement or the authorized and legal representative of such party.

Contract Documents- include the Contract Agreement, Contractor's Bid (including all documentation accompanying the Bid and any post-Bid documentation required by the County prior to the Notice of Award), Bonds, all Special Conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Specifications, Drawings and addenda, together with written amendments, change orders, field orders and the Construction Manager's written interpretations and clarifications issued in accordance with the General Conditions on or after the date of the Contract Agreement.

Shop drawing submittals reviewed in accordance with the General Conditions, geotechnical investigations and soils report and drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface structures at or contiguous to the site are not Contract Documents.



Page 3 of 34

Contract Price - The sum specified in the Agreement to be paid to the Contractor in consideration of the Work.

Contract Time - shall mean the number of consecutive calendar days as provided in the Contract Agreement for completion of the Work, to be computed from the date of Notice to Proceed.

Owner or County - shall mean Fulton County Government, party of the first part to the Contract Agreement, or its authorized and legal representatives.

Day - A calendar day of twenty-four hours lasting from midnight of one day to midnight the next day.

Director - Director of the [insert department name] Department of Fulton County, Georgia or the designee thereof.

Final Completion - shall mean the completion of all work as required in accordance with the terms and conditions of the contract documents.

Liquidated Damages - shall mean the amount, stated in the Contract Agreement, which the Contractor agrees to pay to the Owner for each consecutive calendar day beyond the Contract time required to complete the Project or for failing to comply with associated milestones. Liquidated Damages will end upon written notification from the Owner of Final Acceptance of the Project or upon written notification of from the Owner of completion of the milestone.

Notice to Proceed - A written communication issued by the County to the Contractor authorizing it to proceed with the work, establishing the date of commencement and completion of the work, and providing other direction to the Contractor.

Products - shall mean materials or equipment permanently incorporated into the work.

Project Manual - The Contract Documents.

Provide - shall mean to furnish and install.

Substantial Completion - The date certified by the Construction Manager when all or a part of the work, as established pursuant to General Condition 0700-81, is sufficiently completed in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents so that the identified portion of the work can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended.

Work or Project - All of the services specified, indicated, shown or contemplated by the contract documents, and furnishing by the Contractor of all materials, equipment, labor, methods, processes, construction and manufacturing materials and equipment, tools, plans, supplies, power, water, transportation and other things necessary to complete such services in accordance with the contract documents to insure a functional and complete facility.

00700-4 CODES

All codes, specifications, and standards referenced in the contract documents shall be the latest editions, amendments and revisions of such referenced standards in effect as of the date of the request for proposals for this contract.

00700-5 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

Before making its proposal to the County, and continuously after the execution of the agreement, the Contractor shall carefully study and compare the contract documents and shall at once report to the Construction Manager any error, ambiguity, inconsistency



Page 4 of 34

or omission that may be discovered, including any requirement which may be contrary to any law, ordinance, rule, or regulation of any public authority bearing on the performance of the work. By submitting its proposal, the Contractor agrees that the contract documents, along with any supplementary written instructions issued by or through the Construction Manager that have become a part of the contract documents, appear accurate, consistent and complete insofar as can be reasonably determined. If the Contractor has timely reported in writing any error, inconsistency, or omission to the Construction Manager, has properly stopped the affected work until instructed to proceed, and has otherwise followed the instructions of the Construction Manager, the Contractor shall not be liable to the County for any damage resulting from any such error, inconsistency, or omission in the contract documents. The Contractor shall not perform any portion of the work without the contract documents, approved plans, specifications, products and data, or samples for such portion of the work. For purposes of this section “timely” is defined as the time period in which the contractor discovers, or should have discovered, the error, inconsistency, or omission, with the exercise of reasonable diligence.

00700-6 STRICT COMPLIANCE

No observation, inspection, test or approval of the County or Construction Manager shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the work in strict conformity with the contract documents except as provided in General Condition 00700-48.

00700-7 APPLICABLE LAW

All applicable State laws, County ordinances, codes, and rules and regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction over the construction of the project shall apply to this agreement. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of any Fulton County program concerning non-discrimination in contracting. All work performed within the right of way of the Georgia Department of Transportation and any railroad crossing shall be in accordance with Georgia Department of Transportation regulations, policies and procedures and, where applicable, those of any affected railroad. The Contractor shall comply with all laws, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations bearing on the conduct of the work as specified and the Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the County, its officers, agents and employees, as well as the Construction Manager and the Program Manager against any claim or liability arising from or based on the violation of any law, ordinance, regulation, order or decree affecting the conduct of the work, whether occasioned by the Contractor, his agents or employees.

00700-8 PERMITS, LICENSES AND BONDS

All permits and licenses necessary for the work shall be secured and paid for by the Contractor. If any permit, license or certificate expires or is revoked, terminated, or suspended as a result of any action on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor shall not be entitled to additional compensation or time. The Contractor shall obtain and keep in force at all times performance and payment bonds payable to Fulton County in penal amounts equal to 100% of the Contract price.

00700-9 TAXES

A. The Contractor shall pay all sales, retail, occupational, service, excise, old age benefit and unemployment compensation taxes, consumer, use and other similar taxes, as well as any other taxes or duties on the materials, equipment, and labor for the work provided by the Contractor which are legally enacted by any municipal, county, state or federal authority, department or agency at the time



Page 5 of 34

bids are received, whether or not yet effective. The Contractor shall maintain records pertaining to such taxes and levies as well as payment thereof and shall make the same available to the County at all reasonable times for inspection and copying. The Contractor shall apply for any and all tax exemptions which may be applicable and shall timely request from the County such documents and information as may be necessary to obtain such tax exemptions. The County shall have no liability to the Contractor for payment of any tax from which it is exempt.

B. The Contractor is obligated to comply with all local and State Sales and Use Tax laws. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with documentation to assist the Owner in obtaining sales and/or use tax refunds for eligible machinery and equipment used for the primary purpose of reducing or eliminating air or water pollution as provided for in Chapter 48-8-3 (36) and (37) of the Official Code of Georgia. All taxes shall be paid by the Contractor. All refunds will accrue to the Owner.

Acceptance of the project as complete and final payment will not be made by the Owner until the Contractor has fully complied with this requirement.

00700-10 DELINQUENT CONTRACTORS

The County shall not pay any claim, debt, demand or account whatsoever to any person firm or corporation who is in arrears to the County for taxes. The County shall be entitled to a counterclaim, back charge, and offset for any such debt in the amount of taxes in arrears, and no assignment or transfer of such debt after the taxes become due shall affect the right of the County to offset any taxes owed against said debt.

00700-11 LIEN WAIVERS

The Contractor shall furnish the County with evidence that all persons who have performed work or furnished materials pursuant to this agreement have been paid in full prior to submitting its demand for final payment pursuant to this agreement. A final affidavit, Exhibit A, must be completed, and submitted to comply with requirements of 00700-11. In the event that such evidence is not furnished, the County may retain sufficient sums necessary to meet all lawful claims of such laborers and materialmen. The County assumes no obligation nor in any way undertakes to pay such lawful claims from any funds due or that may become due to the Contractor.

00700-12 MEASUREMENT

All items of work to be paid for per unit of measurement shall be subject to inspection, measurement, and confirmation by the Construction Manager.

00700-13 ASSIGNMENT

The Contractor shall not assign any portion of this agreement or moneys due there from (include factoring of receivables) without the prior written consent of the County. The Contractor shall retain personal control and shall provide personal attention to the fulfillment of its obligations pursuant to this agreement. Any assignment without the express written consent of the County shall render this contract voidable at the sole option of the County.



Page 6 of 34

00700-14 FOREIGN CONTRACTORS

In the event that the Contractor is a foreign corporation, partnership, or sole proprietorship, the Contractor hereby irrevocably appoints the Secretary of State of Georgia as its agent for service of all legal process for the purpose of this contract only.

00700-15 INDEMNIFICATION

The Contractor hereby assumes the entire responsibility and liability for any and all injury to or death of any and all persons, including the Contractor’s agents, servants, and employees, and in addition thereto, for any and all damages to property caused by or resulting from or arising out of any act or omission in connection with this contract or the prosecution of work hereunder, whether caused by the Contractor or the Contractor’s agents, Servants, or employees, or by any of the Contractor’s subcontractors or suppliers, and the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the County, the Construction Manager, County’s Commissioners, officers, employees, successors, assigns and agents, or any of their subcontractors from and against any and all loss and/or expense which they or any of them may suffer or pay as a result of claims or suits due to, because of, or arising out of any and all such injuries, deaths and/or damage, irrespective of County or Construction Manager negligence (except that no party shall be indemnified for their own sole negligence). The Contractor, if requested, shall assume and defend at the Contractor’s own expense, any suit, action or other legal proceedings arising there from, and the Contractor hereby agrees to satisfy, pay, and cause to be discharged of record any judgment which may be rendered against the County and the Construction Manager arising there from.

In the event of any such loss, expense, damage, or injury, or if any claim or demand for damages as heretofore set forth is made against the County or the Construction Manager, the County may withhold from any payment due or thereafter to become due to the Contractor under the terms of this Contract, an amount sufficient in its judgment to protect and indemnify it and the Construction Manager, County’s Commissioners, officers, employees, successors, assigns and agents from any and all claims, expense, loss, damages, or injury; and the County, in its discretion, may require the Contractor to furnish a surety bond satisfactory to the County providing for such protection and indemnity, which bond shall be furnished by the Contractor within five (5) days after written demand has been made therefore. The expense of said Bond shall be borne by the Contractor.

00700-16 SUPERVISION OF WORK AND COORDINATION WITH OTHERS

The Contractor shall supervise and direct the work using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all construction methods and procedures and shall coordinate all portions of the work pursuant to the contract subject to the overall coordination of the Construction Manager. All work pursuant to this agreement shall be performed in a skillful and workmanlike manner.

The County reserves the right to perform work related to the Project with the County’s own forces and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the project, other work on the site under these or similar conditions of the contract, or work which has been extracted from the Contractor’s work by the County.

When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the project or other work on the site, the term “separate contractor” in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the contractor who executes each separate County Agreement.



Page 7 of 34

The Contractor shall cooperate with the County and separate contractors in arranging the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and execution of their work, and shall cooperate in coordinating connection of its work with theirs as required by the Contract Documents.

If any part of the Contractor’s Work depends for proper execution or results upon the work of the County or any separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Construction Manager any apparent discrepancies or defects in such other work that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results within fourteen (14) days of discovery of such discrepancy or defect. Failure of the Contractor to so report in writing shall constitute an acceptance of the County’s or separate contractor’s work as fit and proper to receive the Work, except as to any defects which may subsequently become apparent in such work by others.

Any costs caused by defective or untimely work shall be borne by the party responsible therefore.

Should the Contractor wrongfully cause damage to the work or property of the County or to other work or property on the site, including the work of separate contractors, the Contractor shall promptly remedy such damage at the Contractor’s expense.

Should the Contractor be caused damage by any other contractor on the Project, by reason of such other contractor’s failure to perform properly his contract with the County, no action shall lie against the County or the Construction Manager inasmuch as the parties to this agreement are the only beneficiaries hereof and there are no third party beneficiaries and neither the County nor the Construction Manager shall have liabilities therefore, but the Contractor may assert his claim for damages solely against such other contractor. The Contractor shall not be excused from performance of the contract by reason of any dispute as to damages with any other contractor or third party.

Where the Work of this Contract shall be performed concurrently in the same areas as other construction work, the Contractor shall coordinate with the Construction Manager and the separate contractors in establishing mutually acceptable schedules and procedures that shall permit all jobs to proceed with minimum interference.

If a dispute arises between the Contractor and separate contractors as to their responsibility for cleaning up, the County may clean up and charge the cost thereof to the Contractor or contractors responsible therefore as the County shall determine to be just.

00700-17 ADMINISTRATION OF CONTRACT

The Program Manager and Construction Manager shall provide administration services as hereinafter described.

For the administration of this Contract, the Construction Manager shall serve as the County’s primary representative during design and construction and until final payment to the Contractor is due. The Construction Manager shall advise and consult with the County and the Program Manager. The primary point of contact for the Contractor shall be the Construction Manager. All correspondence from the Contractor to the County shall be forwarded through the Construction Manager. Likewise, all correspondence and instructions to the Contractor shall be forwarded through the Construction Manager.

The Construction Manager will determine in general that the construction is being performed in accordance with design and engineering requirements, and will endeavor to guard the County against defects and deficiencies in the Work.



Page 8 of 34

The Construction Manager will not be responsible for or have control or charge of construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, nor will it be responsible for the Contractor’s failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Construction Manager will not be responsible for or have control or charge over the acts or omissions of the Contractor, its engineers, consultants, subcontractors, or any of their agents or employees, or any other persons performing the Work.

Based on the Construction Manager’s observations regarding the Contractor’s Applications for Payment, the Construction Manager shall determine the amounts owing to the Contractor, in accordance with the payment terms of the Contract, and shall issue Certificates for Payment in such amount to the County.

The Construction Manager shall render interpretations necessary for the proper execution or progress of the Work. Either party to the Contract may make written requests to the Construction Manager for such interpretations.

Claims, disputes and other matters in question between the Contractor and the County relating to the progress of the Work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents shall be referred to the Construction Manager for interpretation.

All interpretations of the Construction Manager shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and shall be in writing or in graphic form.

Except as otherwise provided in this Contract, the Construction Manager shall issue a decision on any disagreement concerning a question of fact arising under this Contract. The Construction Manager shall reduce the decision to writing and mail or otherwise furnish a copy thereof to the Contractor. The decision of the Construction Manager shall be final and conclusive unless, within thirty (30) days from the date of receipt of such copy, the Contractor files a written appeal with the Director of Public Works and mails or otherwise furnishes the Construction Manager a copy of such appeal. The decision of the Director of Public Works or the Director’s duly authorized representative for the determination of such appeals shall be final and conclusive. Such final decision shall not be pleaded in any suit involving a question of fact arising under this Contract, provided such is not fraudulent, capricious, arbitrary, so grossly erroneous as necessarily implying bad faith, or is not supported by substantial evidence. In connection with any appeal proceeding under this Article, the Contractor shall be afforded an opportunity to be heard and to offer evidence in support of Contractor’s appeal. Pending any final decision of a dispute hereunder, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with the performance of the Contract as directed by the Construction Manager.

The Construction Manager shall have authority to reject Work which does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever, in the Construction Manager’s opinion, it is considered necessary or advisable for the implementation of the intent of the Contract Documents, the County shall have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not such Work be then fabricated, installed or completed. The Contractor shall pay for such special inspection or testing if the Work so inspected or tested is found not to comply with the requirements of the contract; the County shall pay for special inspection and testing if the Work is found to comply with the contract. Neither the Construction Manager’s authority to act under this Subparagraph, nor any decision made by the Construction Manager in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority, shall give rise to any duty or responsibility of the Construction



Page 9 of 34

Manager to the Contractor, any subcontractor, any of their agents or employees, or any other person performing any of the Work.

The Contractor shall provide such shop drawings, product data, and samples as may be required by the Construction Manager and/or as required by these Contract Documents.

The Construction Manager shall conduct inspections to determine Substantial Completion and Final Completion, and shall receive and forward to the County for review written warranties and related documents required by the Contract Documents and assembled by the Contractor. The Construction Manager shall approve and issue Certificates for Payment upon compliance with Substantial and Final Completion requirements indicated in General Conditions 00700-81, 00700-82, 00700-84 and 00700-85 of this Agreement.

Except as provided in General Condition 00700-48, the Contractor shall not be relieved from the Contractor's obligations to perform the work in accordance with the contract documents by the activities or duties of the County or any of its officers, employees, or agents, including inspections, tests or approvals, required or performed pursuant to this agreement.

00700-18 RESPONSIBILITY FOR ACTS OF EMPLOYEES

The Contractor shall employ only competent and skilled personnel. The Contractor shall, upon demand from the Construction Manager, immediately remove any superintendent, foreman or workman whom the Construction Manager may consider incompetent or undesirable.

The Contractor shall be responsible to the County for the acts and omissions of the Contractor’s employees, subcontractors, and agents as well as any other persons performing work pursuant to this agreement for the Contractor.

00700-19 LABOR, MATERIALS, SUPPLIES, AND EQUIPMENT

Unless otherwise provided in this agreement, the Contractor shall make all arrangements with necessary support agencies and utility companies provide and pay for all labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for the execution and completion of the work.

00700-20 DISCIPLINE ON WORK SITE

The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among its employees and subcontractors at all times during the performance of the work, to include compliance with the Fulton County Drug Free Work Place Policy. The Contractor shall not employ any subcontractor who is not skilled in the task assigned to it. The Construction Manager may, by written notice, require the Contractor to remove from the work any subcontractor or employee deemed by the Construction Manager to be incompetent.

00700-21 HOURS OF OPERATION

All work at the construction site shall be performed during regular business hours of the Fulton County government, except upon the Construction Manager’s prior written consent to other work hours. It is further understood that the Contractor’s construction schedule is based on a normal 40 hours, five day work week, less Fulton County-recognized holidays. Contractors work schedule shall not violate Fulton County Noise Ordinance by working hours inconsistent with the Fulton County Noise Ordinance. The County’s current noise ordinance or other applicable ordinance shall govern. If the



Page 10 of 34

Contractor desires to work in excess of this limit, the Contractor shall submit a written request to the Construction Manager, a minimum of five days prior to the desired work date. The Contractor shall be responsible for any additional expenses incurred by the Owner as a result of the extended work hours, including resident inspection overtime. The cost associated with resident inspector overtime shall be deducted from the Contractor monthly payment request.

00700-22 FAMILIARITY WITH WORK CONDITIONS

The Contractor shall take all steps necessary to ascertain the nature and location of the work and the general and local conditions which may affect the work or the cost thereof. The Contractor's failure to fully acquaint itself with the conditions which may affect the work, including, but not limited to conditions relating to transportation, handling, storage of materials, availability of utilities, labor, water, roads, weather, topographic and subsurface conditions, other separate contracts to be entered into by the County relating to the project which may affect the work of the Contractor, applicable provisions of law, and the character and availability of equipment and facilities necessary prior to and during the performance of the work shall not relieve the Contractor of its responsibilities pursuant to this agreement and shall not constitute a basis for an equitable adjustment of the contract terms. The County reserves the right to perform with its own forces or to contract with other entities for other portions of the project work, in which case the Contractor’s responsibility to assure its familiarity with work conditions hereunder shall include all coordination with such other contractors and the County necessary to insure that there is no interference between contractors as will delay or hinder any contractor in its prosecution of work on the project. The County assumes no responsibility for any understandings or representations concerning conditions of the work made by any of its officers, agents, or employees prior to the execution of this agreement.

00700-23 RIGHT OF ENTRY

The County reserves the right to enter the site of the work by such agent, including the Construction Manager, as it may elect for the purpose of inspecting the work or installing such collateral work as the County may desire. The Contractor shall provide safe facilities for such access so that the County and its agents may perform their functions.

00700-24 NOTICES

Any notice, order, instruction, claim or other written communication required pursuant to this agreement shall be deemed to have been delivered or received as follows:

Upon personal delivery to the Contractor, its authorized representative, or the Construction Manager on behalf of the County. Personal delivery may be accomplished by in-person hand delivery or bona fide overnight express service.

Three days after depositing in the United States mail a certified letter addressed to the Contractor or the Construction Manager for the County. For purposes of mailed notices, the County's mailing address shall be 141 Pryor Street, 6th Floor, Atlanta, Georgia 30303, or as the County shall have otherwise notified the Contractor. The Contractor's mailing address shall be the address stated in its proposal or as it shall have most recently notified the Construction Manager in writing.

00700-25 SAFETY

A. SAFETY, HEALTH AND LOSS PREVENTION

The Contractor shall be responsible for implementing a comprehensive project-specific safety, health and loss prevention program and employee substance



Page 11 of 34

abuse program for this project. All Sub-Contractors must either implement their own program or follow the Contractor’s safety, health and loss prevention program and employee substance abuse program.

The Contractor’s safety, health and loss prevention program and employee substance abuse program must meet or exceed all governmental regulations (OSHA, EPA, DOT, State, local), and any other specific Fulton County requirements

B. COUNTY’S SAFETY, HEALTH, AND LOSS PREVENTION PROCESS GUIDELINES AND REQUIREMENTS

The County and its agents reserve the right, but assume no duty, to establish and enforce safety, health, and loss prevention guidelines and to make the appropriate changes in the guidelines, for the protection of persons and property and to review the efficiency of all protective measures taken by the Contractor. The Contractor shall comply with all safety, health, and loss prevention process guidelines and requirements and changes made by the County or its agent(s). The issuance of any such guidelines or changes by the County or its agent(s) shall not relieve the Contractor of its duties and responsibilities under this Agreement, and the County or its agent(s) shall not thereby assume, nor be deemed to have assumed, any such duties or responsibilities of the Contractor.

C. COMPLIANCE OF WORK, EQUIPMENT, AND PROCEDURES WITH ALL APPLICABLE LAWS and REGULATIONS

All Work, whether performed by the Contractor or its Sub-Contractors of any tier, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, and all equipment, appliances, machinery, materials, tools and like items incorporated or used in the Work, shall be in compliance with and conform to:

1. All applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and orders of any public, quasi-public or other governmental authority relating to the safety of persons and their protection against injury, specifically including, but in no event limited to, the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, as amended, and all rules and regulations now or hereafter in effect pursuant to said Act.

2. All rules, regulations, and requirements of the County or its agent(s) and its insurance carriers relating there to. In the event of a conflict or differing requirements the more stringent shall govern.

D. PROTECTION OF THE WORK

1. The Contractor shall, throughout the performance of the Work, maintain adequate and continuous protection of all Work and temporary facilities against loss or damage from whatever cause, shall protect the property of the County and third parties from loss or damage from whatever cause arising out of the performance of the Work, and shall comply with the requirements of the County or its agent(s) and its insurance carriers, and with all applicable laws, codes, rules and regulations, (as same may be amended) with respect to the prevention of loss or damage to property as a result of fire or other hazards.

2. The County or its agent(s) may, but shall not be required to, make periodic inspections of the Project work area. In such event, however, the



Page 12 of 34

Contractor shall not be relieved of its aforesaid responsibilities and the County or its agent(s) shall not assume, nor shall it be deemed to have assumed, any responsibility otherwise imposed upon the assurance of Contractor by this Agreement.

E. SAFETY EQUIPMENT

1. The Contractor shall provide to each worker on the Project work area the proper safety equipment for the duties being performed by that worker and will not permit any worker on the Project work area who fails or refuses to use the same. The County or its agent shall have the right, but not the obligation, to order the removal of a worker from the Project work site for his/her failure to comply with safe practices or substance abuse policies.

F. EMERGENCIES

1. In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, or in the event of a claimed violation of any federal or state safety or health law or regulation, arising out of or in any way connected with the Work or its performance, the Contractor shall act immediately to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss and to remedy said violation. Failing such action the County or its agent(s) may immediately take whatever steps it deems necessary including, but not limited to, suspending the Work as provided in this Agreement.

2. The County or its agent(s) may offset any and all costs or expenses of whatever nature, including attorneys' fees, paid or incurred by the County or its agent(s) (whether such fees are for in-house counsel or counsel retained by the County or its agent), in taking the steps authorized by Section 00700-25(G) (1) above against any sums then or thereafter due to the Contractor. The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold the County, its officers, agents, and employees harmless against any and all costs or expenses caused by or arising from the exercise by the County of its authority to act in an emergency as set out herein. If the Contractor shall be entitled to any additional compensation or extension of time change order on account of emergency work not due to the fault or neglect of the Contractor or its Sub-Contractors, such additional compensation or extension of time shall be determined in accordance with General Condition 00700-52 and General Condition 00700-87 of this Agreement.

G. SUSPENSION OF THE WORK

1. Should, in the judgment of the County or its agent(s), the Contractor or any Sub-Contractor fail to provide a safe and healthy work place, the County or its agent shall have the right, but not the obligation, to suspend work in the unsafe areas until deficiencies are corrected. All costs of any nature (including, without limitation, overtime pay, liquidated damages or other costs arising out of delays) resulting from the suspension, by whomsoever incurred, shall be borne by the Contractor.

2. Should the Contractor or any Sub-Contractor fail to provide a safe and healthy work place after being formally notified in writing by the County or



Page 13 of 34

its agents of such non-compliance, the contract may be terminated following the termination provision of the contract.

H. CONTRACTOR’S INDEMNITY OF THE COUNTY FOR CONTRACTOR’S NON-COMPLIANCE WITH SAFETY PROGRAM

1. The Contractor recognizes that it has sole responsibility to assure its Safety Program is implemented and to assure its construction services are safely provided. The Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold the County and its agents harmless, from and against any and all liability (whether public or private), penalties (contractual or otherwise), losses, damages, costs, attorneys' fees, expenses, causes of action, claims or judgments resulting, either in whole or in part, from any failure of the Contractor, its Sub-Contractors of any tier or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, to comply with the safety requirements of the contract. The Contractor shall not be relieved of its responsibilities under the safety requirements of the Contract should the County or its agent(s) act or fail to act pursuant to its rights hereunder.

2. The Contractor shall not raise as a defense to its obligation to indemnify under this Subparagraph I any failure of those indemnified hereunder to assure Contractor operates safely, it being understood and agreed that no such failure shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to assure safe operations or from its obligation to so indemnify. The Contractor also hereby waives any rights it may have to seek contribution, either directly or indirectly, from those indemnified hereunder.

3. In any and all claims against those indemnified hereunder by any employee of the Contractor, any Sub-Contractor of any tier or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this Subparagraph I shall not be limited in any way as to the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or any Sub-Contractor of any tier under any workers' compensation act, disability benefit or other employee benefit acts.

00700-26 BLASTING AND EXCAVATION

The Contractor acknowledges that it is fully aware of the contents and requirements of O.C.G.A. § 25-9-1 through 25-9-12 concerning blasting and excavation near underground gas pipes and facilities and shall fully comply therewith.

00700-27 HIGH VOLTAGE LINES

The Contractor acknowledges that it is fully aware of the contents and requirements O.C.G.A. § 46-3-30 through 46-3-39 concerning safeguards against contact with high voltage lines, and the Contractor shall fully comply with said provisions.

00700-28 SCAFFOLDING AND STAGING

The Contractor acknowledges that it is the person responsible for employing and directing others to perform labor within the meaning of O.C.G.A. § 34-1-1 and agrees to comply with said provisions.



Page 14 of 34

00700-29 CLEAN-UP

The Contractor shall clean up all refuse, rubbish, scrap materials, and debris caused by its operations to the end that the site of the work shall present a neat, orderly and workmanlike appearance at all times.

00700-30 PROTECTION OF WORK

The Contractor shall be responsible for maintenance and protection of the work, which shall include any County-furnished supplies, material, equipment, until final completion of this agreement and acceptance of the work as defined herein. Any portion of the work suffering injury, damage or loss shall be considered defective and shall be corrected or replaced by the Contractor without additional cost to the County.

00700-31 REJECTED WORK

The Contractor shall promptly remove from the project all work rejected by the Construction Manager for failure to comply with the contract documents and the Contractor shall promptly replace and re-execute the work in accordance with the contract documents and without expense to the County. The Contractor shall also bear the expense of making good all work of other Contractors destroyed or damaged by such removal or replacement.

00700-32 DEFECTIVE WORK

If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out any portion of the work in accordance with the contract documents, and fails within three days after receipt of written notice from the Construction Manager to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the County may, after three days following receipt by the Contractor of an additional written notice and without prejudice to any other remedy the County may have, make good such deficiencies and complete all or any portion of any work through such means as the County may select, including the use of a separate Contractor. In such case, an appropriate change order shall be issued deducting from the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such deficiencies. In the event the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the County on demand.

The County may, at its option, accept defective or nonconforming work instead of requiring its removal or correction. In such case, a change order shall be issued reducing the price due the contractor to the extent appropriate and equitable. Such contract price adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made.

00700-33 WARRANTY OF NEW MATERIALS

The Contractor warrants to the County that all materials and equipment furnished under this contract will be new unless otherwise specified, and the Contractor further warrants that all work will be of good quality, free from faults and defects, and in conformance with the contract documents. The warranty set forth in this paragraph shall survive final acceptance of the work.

00700-34 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF THE WORK

If within one year after the date of issuance of the certificate of final payment pursuant to General Condition 84, or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the term of any applicable special warranty required by the contract documents, any of the work is found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract



Page 15 of 34

documents, the Contractor shall correct such work promptly after receipt of written notice from the Construction Manager to do so. This obligation shall survive both final payment for the work and termination of the contract.

00700-35 ASSIGNMENT OF MANUFACTURERS' WARRANTIES

Without limiting the responsibility or liability of the Contractor pursuant to this agreement, all warranties given by manufacturers on materials or equipment incorporated in the work are hereby assigned by the Contractor to the County. If requested, the Contractor shall execute formal assignments of said manufacturer's warranties to the County. All such warranties shall be directly enforceable by the County.

00700-36 WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY LAW

The warranties contained in this agreement, as well as those warranties implied by law, shall be deemed cumulative and shall not be deemed alternative or exclusive. No one or more of the warranties contained herein shall be deemed to alter or limit any other.

00700-37 STOP WORK ORDERS

In the event that the Contractor fails to correct defective work as required by the contract documents or fails to carry out the work in accordance with contract documents, the Construction Manager, in writing, may order the Contractor to stop work until the cause for such order has been eliminated. This right of the County to stop work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of the County or the Construction Manager to execute this right for the benefit of the Contractor or for any other person or entity.

00700-38 TERMINATION FOR CAUSE

If the Contractor is adjudged bankrupt, makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, suffers the appointment of a receiver on account of its insolvency, fails to supply sufficient properly skilled workers or materials, fails to make prompt payment to subcontractors or materialmen, disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction, fails to diligently prosecute the work, or is otherwise guilty of a material violation of this agreement and fails within seven days after receipt of written notice to commence and continue correction of such default, neglect, or violation with diligence and promptness, the County may, after seven days following receipt by the Contractor of an additional written notice and without prejudice to any other remedy the County may have, terminate the employment of the Contractor and take possession of the site as well as all materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery thereon. The County may finish the work by whatever methods the County deems expedient. In such case, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the work is completed.

Upon completion of the work, the County shall determine in its sole discretion whether the Contractor is due any compensation for those services the Contractor performed prior to the termination to the satisfaction of the County (“Unpaid Satisfactory Work”), and shall compensate Contractor for the same. The County shall further determine in its sole discretion whether the County’s completion of the work was made more costly as a result of failures, acts, or omissions of the Contractor, and if so, shall deduct such amounts (“Overages”) from any amounts that may be due to the Contractor. In the event that the Overages exceed the Unpaid Satisfactory Work, the Contractor shall immediately pay the difference to the County on demand. These obligations for payment shall survive the termination of the contract. Termination of this agreement pursuant to



Page 16 of 34

this paragraph may result in disqualification of the Contractor from bidding on future County contracts.

00700-39 TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE

The County may, at any time upon written notice to the Contractor, terminate the whole or any portion of the work for the convenience of the County. The effective date of the termination shall be provided in the written notice. Said termination shall be without prejudice to any right or remedy of the County provided herein. In addition, in the event this agreement has been terminated by the County through the Termination for Cause provisions due to a claim of default by the Contractor, and it is later determined that the Contractor was not in default pursuant to the provisions of this agreement at the time of termination, then such termination shall be considered a Termination for Convenience pursuant to this paragraph and administered according to the provisions related to Termination for Convenience set out in this Contract.

00700-40 TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE - PAYMENT

If the Contract is terminated for convenience by the Owner as provided in this article, Contractor will be paid compensation for those services actually performed as approved by the Owner or his representative. Partially completed tasks will be compensated for based on a signed statement of completion prepared by the Project Manager and submitted to the Contractor which shall itemize each task element and briefly state what work has been completed and what work remains to be done. Contractor shall also be paid for reasonable costs for the orderly filing and closing of the project.

00700-41 TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE - PAYMENT LIMITATIONS

Except for normal spoilage, and except to the extent that the County shall have otherwise expressly assumed the risk of loss, there shall be excluded from the amounts payable to the Contractor the fair value, as determined by the Construction Manager, of property which is destroyed, lost, stolen or damaged so as to become undeliverable to the County or to another buyer.

00700-42 COST TO CURE

If the County terminates for cause the whole or any part of the work pursuant to this agreement, then the County may procure upon such terms and in such manner as the Construction Manager may deem appropriate, supplies or services similar to those so terminated, for the purpose of completing the work for which the Contractor was contractually engaged, and the Contractor shall be liable to the County for any excess costs for such similar supplies or services. The Contractor shall continue the performance of this agreement to the extent not terminated hereunder.

00700-43 ATTORNEY'S FEES

Should the Contractor default pursuant to any of the provisions of this agreement, the Contractor and its surety shall pay to the County such reasonable attorney's fees as the County may expend as a result thereof and all costs, expenses, and filing fees incidental thereto.

00700-44 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES UPON TERMINATION

After receipt of a notice of termination from the County, and except as otherwise directed by the Construction Manager, the Contractor shall:

1. Stop work under the contract on the date and to the extent specified in the notice of termination;



Page 17 of 34

2. Place no further orders or subcontracts for materials, services or facilities, except as may be necessary for completion of such portion of the work under the agreement as is not terminated;

3. Unless otherwise directed by the Construction Manager, terminate all orders and subcontracts to the extent that they relate to the performance of work terminated by the notice of termination;

4. Assign to the County in the manner, at the times, and to the extent directed by the Construction Manager, all of the rights, title and interest of the Contractor under the orders and subcontracts so terminated, in which case the County shall have the right, at its discretion, to settle or pay any and all claims arising out of the termination of such orders or subcontracts;

5. Settle all outstanding liabilities and all claims arising out of such termination of orders and subcontracts with the approval or ratification of the Construction Manager, to the extent the Construction Manager may require, which approval or ratification shall be final for all purposes;

6. Transfer title and deliver to the entity or entities designated by the Construction Manager, in the manner, at the times, and to the extent, if any, directed by the Construction Manager, and to the extent specifically produced or specifically acquired by the Contractor for the performance of such portion of the work as has been terminated:

a. The fabricated or un-fabricated parts, work, and progress, partially completed supplies, and equipment, materials, parts, tools, dyes, jigs, and other fixtures, completed work, supplies, and other material produced as a part of or acquired in connection with the performance of the work terminated by the notice of termination; and

b. The completed or partially completed plans, drawings, information, and other property to the work.

7. Use its best efforts to sell in the manner, at the times, to the extent, and at the prices directed or authorized by the Construction Manager, any property described in Section 6 of this paragraph, provided, however, that the Contractor shall not be required to extend credit to any buyer and further provided that the proceeds of any such transfer or disposition shall be applied in reduction of any payments to be made by the County to the Contractor pursuant to this agreement.

8. Complete performance of such part of the work as shall not have been terminated by the notice of termination; and

9. Take such action as may be necessary, or as the Construction Manager may direct, for the protection and preservation of the property related to the agreement which is in the possession of the Contractor and in which the County has or may acquire an interest.

00700-45 RECORDS

The Contractor shall preserve and make available to the County all of its records, books, documents and other evidence bearing on the costs and expenses of the Contractor and



Page 18 of 34

any subcontractor pursuant to this agreement upon three days advance notice to the Contractor.

00700-46 DEDUCTIONS

In arriving at any amount due the Contractor pursuant to the terms of this agreement, there shall be deducted all liquidated damages, advance payments made to the Contractor applicable to the termination portion of the contract, the amount of any claim which the County may have against the Contractor, the amount determined by the Construction Manager to be necessary to protect the County against loss due to outstanding potential liens or claims, and the agreed price of any materials acquired or sold by the Contractor and not otherwise recovered by or credited to the County.

00700-47 REIMBURSEMENT OF THE COUNTY

In the event of termination for cause or convenience, the Contractor shall refund to the County any amount paid by the County to the Contractor in excess of the costs properly reimbursable to the Contractor.

00700-48 SUSPENSION, INTERRUPTION, DELAY, DAMAGES

The Contractor shall be entitled to only those damages and that relief from termination by the County as specifically set forth in this agreement. The Construction Manager may issue a written order requiring the Contractor to suspend, delay or interrupt all or any part of the work for such period of time as the County may determine to be appropriate for the convenience of the County. If the Construction Manager issues a written order requiring the Contractor to suspend, delay or interrupt all or any part of the work and If the performance of the work is interrupted for an unreasonable period of time by an act of the County or any of its officers, agents, employees, contractors, or consultants in the administration of this agreement, an equitable adjustment may be made for any increase in the Contractor's costs of performance and any increase in the time required for performance of the work necessarily caused by the unreasonable suspension, delay, or interruption. Any equitable adjustment shall be reduced to writing and shall constitute a modification to this agreement. In no event, however, shall an equitable adjustment be made to the extent that performance of this agreement would have been suspended, delayed or interrupted by any other cause, including the fault or negligence of the Contractor. No claim for an equitable adjustment pursuant to this paragraph shall be permitted before the Contractor shall have notified the Construction Manager in writing of the act or failure to act involved, and no claim shall be allowed unless asserted in writing to the Construction Manager within ten days after the termination of such suspension, delay or interruption.

00700-49 COMMENCEMENT AND DURATION OF WORK

The County may issue a Notice to Proceed at any time within 120 days following execution of the contract by the County. The Contractor shall commence work pursuant to this agreement within ten days of mailing or delivery of written notice to proceed. The Contractor shall diligently conduct the work to completion within the time specified therefore in the Agreement. The capacity of the Contractor's construction and manufacturing equipment and plan, sequence and method of operation and forces employed, including management and supervisory personnel, shall be such as to insure completion of the work within the time specified in the Agreement. The Contractor and County hereby agree that the contract time for completion of the work is reasonable taking into consideration the average climatic conditions prevailing in the locality of the



Page 19 of 34

work and anticipated work schedules of other contractors whose activities are in conjunction with or may affect the work under this contract.

00700-50 TIME OF THE ESSENCE

All time limits stated in this agreement are of the essence of this contract.

00700-51 IMPACT DAMAGES

Except as specifically provided pursuant to a stop work order or change order, the Contractor shall not be entitled to payment or compensation of any kind from the County for direct or indirect or impact damages including, but not limited to, costs of acceleration arising because of delay, disruption, interference or hindrance from any cause whatsoever whether such delay, disruption, interference or hindrance is reasonable or unreasonable, foreseeable or unforeseeable, or avoidable, provided, however, that this provision shall not preclude the recovery of damages by the Contractor for hindrances or delays due solely to fraud or bad faith on the part of the County, its agents, or employees. The Contractor shall be entitled only to extensions in the time required for performance of the work as specifically provided in the contract.

00700-52 DELAY

The Contractor may be entitled to an extension of the contract time, but not an increase in the contract price or damages, for delays arising from unforeseeable causes beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor or its subcontractors for labor strikes, acts of God, acts of the public enemy, acts of the state, federal or local government in its sovereign capacity, by acts of another separate contractor, or by an act or neglect of the County.

00700-53 INCLEMENT WEATHER

The Contractor shall not be entitled to an extension of the contract time due to normal inclement weather. Unless the Contractor can substantiate to the satisfaction of the Construction Manager that there was greater than normal inclement weather and that such greater than normal inclement weather actually delayed the work, the Contractor shall not be entitled to an extension of time therefore. The following shall be considered the normal inclement weather days for each month listed, and extensions of time shall be granted in increments of not less than one half day only for inclement weather in excess of the days set out.

January 10 days

February 10 days

March 7 days

April 6 days

May 4 days

June 3 days

July 4 days

August 2 days

September 2 days

October 3 days

November 6 days

December 9 days



Page 20 of 34

00700-54 DELAY - NOTICE AND CLAIM

The Contractor shall not receive an extension of time unless a Notice of Delay is filed with the Construction Manager within ten days of the first instance of such delay, disruption, interference or hindrance and a written Statement of the Claim is filed with the Construction Manager within 20 days of the first such instance. In the event that the Contractor fails to comply with this provision, it waives any claim which it may have for an extension of time pursuant to this agreement.

00700-55 STATEMENT OF CLAIM - CONTENTS

The Statement of Claim referenced in Article 00700-54 shall include specific information concerning the nature of the delay, the date of commencement of the delay, the construction activities affected by the delay, the person or organization responsible for the delay, the anticipated extent of the delay, and any recommended action to avoid or minimize the delay.

00700-56 WORK BEHIND SCHEDULE, REMEDY BY CONTRACTOR

If the work actually in place falls behind the currently updated and approved schedule, and it becomes apparent from the current schedule that work will not be completed within the contract time, the Contractor agrees that it will, as necessary, or as directed by the Construction Manager, take action at no additional cost to the County to improve the progress of the work, including increasing manpower, increasing the number of working hours per shift or shifts per working day, increasing the amount of equipment at the site, and any other measure reasonably required to complete the work in a timely fashion.

00700-57 DILIGENCE

The Contractor's failure to substantially comply with the requirements of the preceding paragraph may be grounds for determination by the County that the Contractor is failing to prosecute the work with such diligence as will insure its completion within the time specified. In such event, the County shall have the right to furnish, from its own forces or by contract, such additional labor and materials as may be required to comply with the schedule after 48 hours written notice to the Contractor, and the Contractor shall be liable for such costs incurred by the County.

00700-58 SET-OFFS

Any monies due to the Contractor pursuant to the preceding paragraph of this agreement may be deducted by the County against monies due from the County to the Contractor.

00700-59 REMEDIES CUMULATIVE

The remedies of the County under Articles 00700-56, 00700-57, and 00700-58 are in addition to and without prejudice to all of the rights and remedies of the County at law, in equity, or contained in this agreement.

00700-60 TITLE TO MATERIALS

No materials or supplies shall be purchased by the Contractor or by any Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sales contract or other agreement by which any interest is retained by the seller. The Contractor hereby warrants that it has good and marketable title to all materials and supplies used by it in the work, and



Page 21 of 34

the Contractor further warrants that all materials and supplies shall be free from all liens, claims, or encumbrances at the time of incorporation in the work.

00700-61 INSPECTION OF MATERIALS

All materials and equipment used in the construction of the project shall be subject to adequate inspection and testing in accordance with accepted standards and in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. Additional tests performed after the rejection of materials or equipment shall be at the Contractor's expense.

00700-62 CONSTRUCTION MANAGER’S PRESENCE DURING TESTING

All tests performed by the Contractor shall be witnessed by the Construction Manager unless the requirement therefore is waived in writing. The Construction Manager may perform additional tests on materials previously tested by the Contractor, and the Contractor shall furnish samples for this purpose as requested.

00700-63 MATERIALS INCORPORATED IN WORK

The Contractor shall furnish all materials and equipment to be incorporated in the work. All such materials or equipment shall be new and of the highest quality available. Manufactured materials and equipment shall be obtained from sources which are currently manufacturing such materials, except as otherwise specifically approved by the Construction Manager.

00700-64 STORAGE OF MATERIALS

Materials and equipment to be incorporated in the work shall be stored in such a manner as to preserve their quality and fitness for the work and to facilitate inspection.

00700-65 PAYROLL REPORTS

The Contractor may be required to furnish payroll reports to the Construction Manager as required by the Owner Controlled Insurance Program.

00700-66 CONTRACTORS' REPRESENTATIVE

Before beginning work, the Contractor shall notify the Construction Manager in writing of one person within its organization who shall have complete authority to supervise the work, receive orders from the Construction Manager, and represent the Contractor in all matters arising pursuant to this agreement. The Contractor shall not remove its representative without first designating in writing a new representative. The Contractor's representative shall normally be present at or about the site of work while the work is in progress. When neither the Contractor nor its representative is present at the work site, the superintendent, foreman, or other of the Contractor’ employee in charge of the work shall be an authorized representative of the Contractor.

00700-67 SPECIALTY SUB-CONTRACTORS

The Contractor may utilize the services of specialty subcontractors on those parts of the project which, under normal contracting practices, are performed by specialty subcontractors. The Contractor shall not award more than seventy-five percent of the work to subcontractors.

00700-68 INSPECTION BY THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER

All work pursuant to this agreement shall be subject to inspection by the Construction Manager for conformity with contract drawings and specifications. The Contractor shall



Page 22 of 34

give the Construction Manager reasonable advance notice of operations requiring special inspection of a portion of the work.

00700-69 WORK COVERED PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION MANAGER’S INSPECTION

In the event that work is covered or completed without the approval of the Construction Manager, and such approval is required by the specifications or required in advance by the Construction Manager, the Contractor shall bear all costs involved in inspection notwithstanding conformance of such portion of the work to the contract drawings and specifications.

00700-70 SCHEDULING OF THE WORK

The work of this contract shall be planned, scheduled, executed, and reported as required by the Contract Documents.

00700-71 PROGRESS ESTIMATES

The Contractor shall prepare a written report for the Construction Manager’s approval, on County forms, of the total value of work performed and materials and equipment obtained to the date of submission. Such a report must accompany each request for a progress payment and is subject to review and approval by the Construction Manager. Approval of a progress estimate or tendering of a progress payment shall not be considered an approval or acceptance of any work performed, and all estimates and payments shall be subject to correction in subsequent estimates. Progress payments shall be made for all completed activities and for materials suitably stored on-site.

00700-72 PROGRESS PAYMENTS

Upon approval of each monthly estimate of work performed and materials furnished, the Construction Manager shall approve payment to the Contractor for the estimated value of such work, materials, and equipment, less the amount of all prior payments and any liquidated damages. The Contractor will be paid 100 percent, less retainage, of the cost of materials received and properly stored on-site but not incorporated into the work. Payments for materials or equipment stored on the site shall be conditioned upon submission by the Contractor of bills of sale to establish the County's title to such materials or equipment. The Contractor’s request for payment shall provide sufficient detail as to the work completed or materials purchased for which payment is requested to permit meaningful review by the Construction Manager.

00700-73 TIME OF PAYMENT

The Contractor will be paid within 45 days following receipt of an approved Progress Estimate. The Contractor expressly agrees that the payment provisions within this Contract shall supersede the rates of interest, payment periods, and contract and subcontract terms provided for under the Georgia Prompt Pay Act, O.C.G.A. §13-11-1 et seq., and that the rates of interest, payment periods, and contract and subcontract terms provided for under the Prompt Pay Act shall have no application to this Contract. The County shall not be liable for any late payment interest or penalty.

Submittal of Invoices: Invoices shall be submitted as follows: Via Mail: Fulton County Government 141 Pryor Street, SW Suite 7001 Atlanta, Georgia 30303



Page 23 of 34

Attn: Finance Department – Accounts Payable OR Via Email: Email: [email protected] At minimum, original invoices must reference all of the following information: 1) Vendor Information

a. Vendor Name b. Vendor Address c. Vendor Code d. Vendor Contact Information e. Remittance Address

2) Invoice Details

a. Invoice Date b. Invoice Number (uniquely numbered, no duplicates) c. Purchase Order Reference Number d. Date(s) of Services Performed e. A written report of the total value of work performed and materials

and equipment obtained to the date of submission 3) Fulton County Department Information (needed for invoice approval)

a. Department Name b. Department Representative Name

00700-74 RETAINAGE

The County shall retain from each progress payment ten percent of the estimated value of the work performed until the progress payments, including retainage, total 50 percent of the contract price. If a contract includes two or more projects or assignments that have been separately priced and have separate budgets, and the performances of such projects or assignments are not related to or dependent upon the performance of any other, the 50 per cent limit shall be based upon the price for each individual project or assignment. Thereafter, no further retainage shall be withheld so long as the Contractor is making satisfactory progress to insure completion of the work within the time specified therefore. The County may reinstate the ten percent retainage in the event the Construction Manager determines that the Contractor is not making satisfactory progress to complete the work within the time specified in this agreement or in the event that the Construction Manager provides a specific cause for such withholding. The County may also withhold retainage upon substantial completion of the work as provided in O.C.G.A. §13-10-81(c). Interest may be paid upon the retainage in accordance with Georgia law.

00700-75 PAYMENT OF SUBCONTRACTORS

The Contractor shall promptly pay each subcontractor upon the receipt of payment from the County. Such payment shall be made from the amount paid to the Contractor pursuant to the subcontractor's work. The Contractor shall also maintain the records of the percentage retained from payments to the Contractor pursuant to such subcontractor's work. The Contractor shall procure agreements from each subcontractor




Page 24 of 34

requiring each subcontractor to pay their subcontractors, agents and employees in a similar manner. The County reserves the right to inquire of any subcontractor, supplier, materialmen, or subconsultant, the status of any indebtedness of the Contractor. The County further reserves the right to require the Contractor to designate on each instrument of payment exceeding $400.00 to subcontractors, suppliers, materialmen, and subconsultants that such payment is on account of the work under this Contract.

00700-76 COUNTY'S RESPONSIBILITIES TO SUBCONTRACTORS

Neither the County nor the Construction Manager shall have any obligation to pay any subcontractor except as otherwise required by law.

00700-77 PROGRESS PAYMENTS - ACCEPTANCE OF WORK

Certification of progress payments, as well as the actual payment thereof, shall not constitute the County’s acceptance of work performed pursuant to this agreement.

00700-78 PAYMENTS IN TRUST

All sums paid to the Contractor pursuant to this agreement are hereby declared to constitute trust funds in the hands of the contractor to be applied first to the payment of claims of subcontractors, laborers, and suppliers arising out of the work, to claims for utilities furnished and taxes imposed, and to the payment of premiums on surety and other bonds and on insurance for any other application.

00700-79 JOINT PAYMENTS

The County reserves the right to issue any progress payment or final payment by check jointly to the Contractor and any subcontractor or supplier.

00700-80 RIGHT TO WITHHOLD PAYMENT

The Construction Manager may decline to approve payment and may withhold payment in whole or in part to the extent reasonable and necessary to protect the County against loss due to defective work, probable or actual third party claims, the Contractor's failure to pay subcontractors or materialmen, reasonable evidence that the work will not be completed within the contract time or contract price or damage to the County or any other contractor on the project.

00700-81 CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

Upon the Contractor's submission of a request for a certificate of Substantial Completion, the Construction Manager shall inspect the work and determine whether the work is Substantially Complete. If the work is Substantially Complete, the Construction Manager shall issue a certificate of Substantial Completion of the work which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall state the responsibilities of the County and the Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall complete the items submitted by the Contractor as requiring correction or further work. The certificate of substantial completion of the work shall be submitted to the County and the Contractor for their written acceptance of the responsibilities assigned to them pursuant to such certificate.

If in the sole opinion of the Construction Manager, the work is not substantially complete, the Construction Manager shall notify the Contractor of such, in writing, and outline requirements to be met to achieve Substantial Completion.



Page 25 of 34

00700-82 PAYMENT UPON SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

Upon Substantial Completion of the work and upon application by the Contractor and approval by the Construction Manager, the County shall make payment reflecting 100% work completed, less value of work remaining as determined by Construction Manager and any authorized retainage.

00700-83 COMMENCEMENT OF WARRANTIES

Warranties required by this agreement shall commence on the date of final completion of the project as determined under Article 00700-84 unless otherwise provided in the certificate of Substantial Completion.

00700-84 FINAL PAYMENT - WAIVER OF CLAIMS, DISPUTE OF FINAL PAYMENT

The acceptance of the Substantial Completion payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims by the Contractor except those previously made in writing and identified by the Contractor as unsettled at the time of application for payment at Substantial Completion and except for the retainage sums due at final acceptance. Following the Construction Manager’s issuance of the certificate of Substantial Completion and the Contractor's completion of the work pursuant to this agreement, the Contractor shall forward to the Construction Manager a written notice that the work is ready for final inspection and acceptance. If after inspection the Construction Manager certifies that the work is complete and issues written notification of such to the Contractor, the Contractor shall forward to the Construction Manager a final application for payment. The Construction Manager shall issue a certificate for payment, which shall approve final payment to the Contractor and shall establish the date of final completion.

In the event the Contractor timely disputes the amount of the final payment, the amount due the Contractor shall be deemed by the Contractor and the County to be an unliquidated sum and no interest shall accrue or be payable on the sum finally determined to be due to the Contractor for any period prior to final determination of such sum, whether such determination be by agreement of the Contractor and the County or by final judgment of the proper court in the event of litigation between the County and the Contractor. The Contractor specifically waives and renounces any and all rights it may have under O.C.G.A. §13-6-13 and agrees that in the event suit is brought by the Contractor against the County for any sum claimed by the Contractor under the Contract or for any extra or additional work, no interest shall be awarded on any sum found to be due from the County to the Contractor in the final judgment entered in such suit. All final judgments shall draw interest at the legal rate, as specified by law.

00700-85 DOCUMENTATION OF COMPLETION OF WORK

Neither the final payment nor the remaining retainage shall become due until the Contractor submits the following documents to the Construction Manager:

a. An affidavit that all payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the work have been paid other otherwise satisfied;

b. The surety's consent to final payment; and

c. Any other data reasonably required by the County or Construction Manager establishing payment or satisfaction of all such obligations, including releases, waivers of liens, and documents of satisfaction of debts.



Page 26 of 34

In the event that a subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver as required by the County or Construction Manager, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the County to indemnify the County against such loss. In the event that any lien or indebtedness remains unsatisfied after all payments are made, the contractor shall refund to the County all moneys that the County may become compelled to pay in discharging such lien or other indebtedness, including all costs and reasonable attorney's fees.

00700-86 GOVERNING LAW

Each and every provision of this agreement shall be construed in accordance with and governed by Georgia law. The parties acknowledge that this contract is executed in Fulton County, Georgia and that the contract is to be performed in Fulton County, Georgia. Each party hereby consents to the Fulton Superior Court's sole jurisdiction over any dispute which arises as a result of the execution or performance of this agreement, and each party hereby waives any and all objections to venue in the Fulton Superior Court.

00700-87 CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. CHANGE ORDERS

1. A Change Order is a written order to the Contractor signed to show the approval and the authorization of the County, issued after execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the Work and/or an adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. Change Orders shall be written using forms designated by the County with Contractor providing supporting documentation as required by the Construction Manager. The Contract Sum and the Contract Time may be changed only by approved Change Order pursuant to Fulton County Code Section 102-420. The amount payable by the Change Order is payment in full for all direct and indirect costs incurred and related to the work under said Change Order, including but not limited to delays, imports, acceleration, disruption and extended overhead. A Change Order signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor’s agreement therewith, including the adjustment in either or both of the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

2. The County, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract as defined herein. The time allowed for performance of the work and the contract price to be paid to the Contractor may be adjusted accordingly.

3. The cost or credit to the County resulting from a change in the Work shall be determined in one or more of the following ways:

a. By mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation;

b. By unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon;

c. By cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or

d. By the method provided in Subparagraph A4 below.



Page 27 of 34

4. If none of the methods set forth in Subparagraphs 3a, 3b, or 3c above is agreed upon, the Contractor, provided a written order signed by the Construction Manager is received, shall promptly proceed with the Work involved. The cost of such Work shall then be determined by the Construction Manager on basis of the reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change. The cost of the change shall include only the items listed in Subparagraph 5a below, and in the case of either a decrease or an increase in the Contract Sum, an allowance for overhead and profit in accordance with the schedules set forth in Subparagraphs 5b and 6 below shall be applied to the cost or credit.

a. In such case, and also under Subparagraph 3a above, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Construction Manager may prescribe, an itemized accounting of all actual costs expended, together with appropriate supporting data for inclusion in a Change Order.

b. All hourly rate charges shall be submitted to the Construction Manager for prior review and approval. All hourly rate charges shall be properly supported as required by the Construction Manager with certified payrolls, or their acceptable equivalent. When authorized to proceed for a given change and actual expenditures have been made prior to execution of a Change Order for the entire change, such actual expenditures may be summarized monthly, and if approved, incorporated into a Change Order. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in any one change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of the net increase or decrease, if any, with respect to that change.

5. In Subparagraphs 3 and 4 above, the items included in “Cost and “Overhead” shall be based on the following schedule:

a. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, “Cost” shall be limited to the following: cost of materials incorporated into the Work, including sales tax and cost of delivery; cost of direct labor (labor cost may include a pro rata share of foreman’s account of the change) including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, and fringe benefits required by agreement or custom; workers’ or workmen’s compensation insurance; rental value of equipment and machinery; costs for preparing Shop Drawings.

b. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, “Overhead” shall include the following: bond and insurance premiums including increase and decreases from change in the Work, supervision, superintendence, construction parking, wages of timekeepers, watchmen and clerks, small tools, consumable supplies, expendables, incidentals, general office expense, the cost of additional reproduction for the Contractor’s subcontractors beyond that agreed upon in the Contract Documents, construction parking, any additional costs of craft supervision by the



Page 28 of 34

Contractor’s or subcontractors’ superintendents, and overhead charges which would be customary and expended regardless of the change in the Work due to other overlapping activities which are included as part of the original Contract, and all other expenses not included in “Cost” above.

c. In the event that a change is issued by the County which would require the expenditure of substantial amounts of special supervision (beyond the foreman level) by the Contractor, the Contractor may, at the sole direction of the Construction Manager, be allowed to incorporate these charges into the agreement cost for the change.

6. In Subparagraphs 3 and 4 above, the allowance for overhead and profit combined, included in the total cost or credit to the County, shall be based on the following schedule:

a. For the Contractor, for any work performed by the Contractor’s own forces, ten (10) percent of the cost.

b. For the Contractor, for any work performed by a Contractor’s subcontractor, five (5) percent of the amount due the subcontractor.

c. For each subcontractor or sub-subcontractor involved, for any work performed by that subcontractor’s or sub-subcontractor’s own forces, ten (10) percent of the cost.

d. For each subcontractor, for work performed by a sub-subcontractor, five (5) percent of the amount due to the sub-subcontractor.

e. Cost to which overhead and profit is to be applied shall be determined in accordance with Subparagraph 5 above unless modified otherwise.

7. In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals or bids, except those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of costs, including labor cost, materials and subcontracts. Labor and materials shall be itemized in the manner defined in Subparagraph 4 above. Where major cost items are subcontracts, they shall be itemized also. In no case shall a change be approved without such itemization.

8. No payment shall be made for any changes to the contract that are not included in a fully executed Change Order.

B. CONCEALED, UNKNOWN AND DIFFERING CONDITIONS

1. Should concealed conditions be encountered in the performance of the Work below the surface of the ground, or should concealed or unknown conditions in an existing structure be at variance with the conditions indicated by the Contract Documents, or should unknown physical conditions below the surface of the ground or concealed or unknown conditions in an existing structure of an unusual nature, differing materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in this Contract, be



Page 29 of 34

encountered, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted by Change Order upon request by either party made within twenty (20) days after the first observance of the conditions. No such request for equitable adjustment shall be valid unless the Contractor complies with this (20) days’ notice and Subparagraph C.1. below.

2. The Contractor shall promptly, and before such conditions are disturbed, notify the Construction Manager in writing of any claim of concealed, unknown or differing conditions pursuant to this paragraph. The Construction Manager shall authorize the Engineer to investigate the conditions, and if it is found that such conditions do materially so differ and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of, or the time required for, performance of any part of the Work under this Contract, whether or not changed as a result of such conditions, an equitable adjustment shall be recommended to the Construction Manager.

3. No claim of the Contractor under this clause shall be allowed unless the Contractor has given the notice required in (a) above, prior to disturbing the condition.

4. No claim by the Contractor for an equitable adjustment shall be allowed if asserted after final payment under this Contract.

5. Any materially differing site condition as between what is shown on the Drawings and Specifications and actually found on site shall be immediately reported to the Construction Manager in writing prior to the commencement of Work at the site. Failure of the Contractor to notify the Construction Manager in writing of the differing site condition prior to performance of Work at the site shall constitute a waiver of any claim for additional monies. Any Change Order necessitated by the differing site condition shall be processed as provided under "Changes in the Contract".

C. REQUESTS FOR ADDITIONAL COST

1. If the Contractor wishes to request an increase in the Contract Sum, the Contractor shall give the Construction Manager written notice thereof within twenty (20) days after the occurrence of the event, or identification of the conditions, giving rise to such request. This notice shall be given by the Contractor before proceeding to execute the Work, except in an emergency endangering life or property in which case the Contractor shall proceed in accordance with Article 00700-25 and Subparagraph A.4 above. No such request shall be valid unless so made within the twenty (20) days specified above. If the County and the Contractor cannot agree on the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Sum, it shall be determined by the Construction Manager. Any change in the Contract Sum resulting from such claim shall be documented by Change Order.

2. If the Contractor claims that addition cost is involved because of, but not limited to (1) any written interpretation pursuant to General Condition 00700-17 of this Agreement, (2) any order by the County to stop the Work pursuant to Articles 00700-25 and 00700-37 of this Agreement where the Contractor was not at fault, or any such order by the Construction Manager as the County’s agent, or (3) any written order for a minor



Page 30 of 34

change in the Work issued pursuant to Paragraph D below, the Contractor shall submit a request for an increase in the Contract Sum as provided in Subparagraph C.1 above. No such claim shall be valid unless the Contractor complies with Subparagraph C.1 above and approved by the County pursuant to Fulton County Code Section 102-420.

D. MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

The Construction Manager may order minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment in the Contract Price, extension of the time allowed for performance of the work and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by a written Change Directive issued by the Construction Manager, and shall be binding on the County and the Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly.

E. BONDS

If any change order results in an increase in the contract price, the contractor shall increase the penal sum of the performance and payment bonds to equal the increased price.

00700-88 DISAGREEMENT WITH ORDERS FOR CHANGE

Contractor's written acceptance of a Change Order or other order for changes shall constitute his final and binding agreement to the provisions thereof and a waiver of all claims in connection therewith, whether direct or consequential in nature. Should Contractor disagree with any order for changes, he may submit a notice of potential claim to the Construction Manager, at such time as the order is set forth in the form of a Change Order. Disagreement with the provisions of an order for changes shall not relieve Contractor of his obligation under Article 00700-87 of this Agreement.

00700-89 NO WAIVER OF REMEDIES

Exercise by the County of any remedy is not exclusive of any other remedy available to County and shall not constitute a waiver of any such other remedies. Failure of the County to exercise any remedy, including breach of contract remedies, shall not preclude the County from exercising such remedies in similar circumstances in the future.

00700-90 LAND AND RIGHTS-OF-WAY

The owner will provide, as indicated in the Contract Documents and prior to Notice to Proceed, the lands upon which the work is to be done, right-of-way for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of the Contractor. The Contractor shall confine the Contractor’s work and all associated activities to the easements and other areas designated for the Contractor’s use. The Contractor shall comply with any limits on construction methods and practices which may be required by easement agreements. If, due to some unforeseen reason, the necessary easements are not obtained, the Contractor shall receive an equitable extension of contract time dependent upon the effect on the critical path of the project schedule or the County may terminate the Contract for its convenience.

00700-91 COORDINATION WITH STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

No clearing or grading shall be completed by Contractor within the State Department of Transportation (DOT) area under construction. The Contractor must coordinate his construction scheduling with DOT.



Page 31 of 34

If the Contractor begins work before DOT’s completion date, he must obtain the approval of DOT before starting work in the area. The state DOT has the right to stop the Contractor’s work the DOT area.

The Contractor shall receive no additional compensation or damages resulting from delay or work stoppage from DOT actions or scheduling.

Contractor shall obtain DOT drawings of the DOT, project area for verification of road geometry, storm drains, etc. from Georgia Department of Transportation or Fulton County. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining any pertinent DOT revisions.



Page 32 of 34

I N D E X

SUBJECT GENERAL CONDITION ARTICLE #

Administration of Contract 17

Applicable Law 7

Assignment 13

Blasting and Excavation 26

Changes 87, 88

Clean Site 29

Codes 4

Commencement of Work 49

Contract Documents 2

Contractor’s Representative 66

Defective Work 31, 32

Definitions 3

Delay 51, 52, 54, 55

Extension of Time 52, 53, 54

Familiarity of Time 1, 22

Final Payment 84

Governing Law 86

High Voltage Lines 27

Inclement Weather 53

Indemnification 15

Inspections 23, 61, 62, 68, 69

Interruption 48

Licenses 8

Liquidated Damages 46, 48

New Materials 33, 63

Notices 24

Payment 72, 73, 75

Payment of Subcontractors 75, 76

Payment Upon Substantial Completion 82, 84

Payroll Reports 65

Permits 8



Page 33 of 34

Progress Payments 72, 73, 77, 78, 79, 80

Protection of Work 30, 64

Records Inspection 45

Retainage 11, 74

Safety 25

Scaffolding and Staging 28

Scheduling 70

Service of Process 14

Stop Work Order 37

Subcontractors 67, 76

Substantial Completion 81

Suspension 48

Supervision of Work 16, 66

Surety’s Responsibility 17

Taxes 9, 10

Termination for Cause 38, 44, 47

Termination for Convenience 39, 40, 41

Time of the Essence 50

Warranties 33, 34, 35, 36

Work Behind Schedule 56



Page 34 of 34

EXHIBIT A

FINAL AFFIDAVIT

TO FULTON COUNTY, GEORGIA

I, _________________________, hereby certify that all suppliers of materials,

equipment and service, subcontractors, mechanic, and laborers employed by

________________________ or any of his subcontractors in connection with the design

and/or construction of ____________ at Fulton County have been paid and satisfied in

full as of _____________, 20__, and that there are no outstanding obligations or claims

of any kind for the payment of which Fulton County on the above-named project might

be liable, or subject to, in any lawful proceeding at law or in equity.

______________________________ Signature _______________________________ Title

Personally appeared before me this ___________ day of _____________________,

20_____. __________________________________, who under Oath deposes and

says that he is ___________________________of the firm of

_______________________, that he has read the above statement and that to the best

of his knowledge and belief same is an exact true statement.

________________________________ Notary Public

: ________________________________ My Commission expires

END OF SECTION

20ITB204811K-JAJ Section 9 Pryor Street Entry Plaza Special conditions

Page 1 of 1

SECTION 9

SPECIAL CONDITIONS

Noise from Construction Operations

The Contractor should take whatever reasonable efforts to minimize the amount of noise during normal business hours. Tenants will occupy the building each day and the goal is to minimize the number of complaints from any construction noise. If necessary, the work may be done after hours and on weekends.

Initially, the following will be required:

Quiet time hours shall begin at 8:00AM each tenant workday, and end at 5:00PM

On the Weekends and Holidays, any work shall cease at 8:00AM the day when

the tenant workday resumes, and following the same procedures noted above.

Temporary Barricade at the Main Entrance to the Government Center

The Contractor shall install a full height temporary barrier along the north end of the limits of construction. The barricade shall be constructed with 3/4” exterior grade plywood and the appropriate support framing, then painted (color to be selected) on the pedestrian side of the barricade. The purpose of the barricade is to isolate the limits of construction from the pedestrian traffic entering the Government Center.

A temporary barricade shall also be constructed along the west end of the limits of construction to protect the existing glass curtain wall.

20ITB204811K-JAJ Section 10 Pryor Street Entry Plaza Exhibits

Page 1 of 1

SECTION 10

EXHIBITS

No Exhibits for this project

Insert Bid # Section11 Insert Bid Title Appendices

Page 1 of 1

SECTION 11

APPENDICES

20ITB204811K-JAJ Pryor Street Entry Plaza Fulton County Contractor Safety and Health Management Process

FULTON COUNTY CONTRACTOR SAFETY AND HEALTH MANAGEMENT PROCESS

1.0 INTRODUCTION

Every Contractor performing construction related services shall follow the procedures outlined in this document.

2.0 REFERENCES

1.1 Occupational Safety and Health Regulations (OSHA) 29CFR1910 and 29CFR1926

1.2 Environmental Protection Agency Regulations (EPA) 4OCFR 1.3 Fulton County Safety and Health and Requirements 1.4 Georgia Department of Transportation Regulations and Requirements 1.5 US Department of Transportation Requirements 1.6 Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (ANSI

D6.1) 1.7 Georgia Department of Natural Resources Environmental Protection

Division Regulations

Safety rules and regulations will be followed using federal, state or local regulations in force. Should a Contractor’s rule be in use which is more effective, the most stringent rule or regulation will be enforced by the Contractor, Sub-Contractors and Fulton County designated Safety Representative(s). 3.0 RESPONSIBILITY The Contractor receiving the bid has the ultimate responsibility for the safety and health of all Sub-Contractors, all employees on the project, and the general public and complying with all governmental regulations and requirements (OSHA, EPA, DOT, state, local).

The Contractor is responsible for:

1. Implementing a safety, health and loss prevention process and program that meets or exceeds all the requirements in the Contract Documents and the safety, health and loss prevention guidelines referenced in the Contract Documents;

2. Reporting all accidents, incidents and near misses as required in the safety guidelines;

3. Coordinating the investigation of major accidents and incidents with the Project Manager;

4. Designating an employee on the site to be responsible for the Contractor’s safety program; and

5. Implementing corrective action plans to address safety, health and loss prevention findings identified on the work site.


Nothing contained herein shall relieve the Contractor or any Sub-Contractor of such responsibility or liability.

4.0 PROCEDURE

4.1 The Contractor and each Sub-Contractor must implement a written safety and health prevention process and program following the guidelines contained in this document and in any other relevant portion of the Contract Documents. This program must be accepted by Fulton County or its Representatives prior to Notice to Proceed.

4.2 The Contractor and each Sub-Contractor must implement a drug and alcohol policy following the guidelines contained in this document and in the bid specific actions. This program must be accepted by Fulton County or its Representatives prior to Notice to Proceed.

4.3 The Contractor must designate a person responsible for site safety. Each

Sub-Contractor must designate a person responsible for site safety.

4.4 Not Used.

4.5 Contractor is responsible for providing all necessary safety supplies and personal protective equipment required to protect its employees, Sub-Contractors, and the ‘general public.

4.6 Contractor shall make available certified First-aid services, First-aid supplies, and provisions for medical care for all employees at the construction site prior to beginning work on site.

4.7 Contractor shall maintain a competent person at the construction site at all times with an OSHA 10-hour certification, Said person shall have the knowledge to recognize hazards or potential hazards and has the authority to correct such hazards.

4.8 The status of project safety shall be included in the Contractor’s agenda, which is required in Progress Meetings.

5.0 DRUG AND ALCOHOL POLICY The Contractor and each Sub-Contractor must implement a drug and alcohol policy in order to maintain a safe and efficient work environment. This policy must include the following elements.

1. Written policy that prohibits the use, transportation, sale and possession of these materials

2. Disciplinary action plan for violations

3. Any treatment or reinstatement reemployment options

4. Drug and alcohol testing schedule that includes pre-employment, periodic for safety sensitive or critical jobs, and for cause

Note: AGC, ABC and/or Fulton County programs may be used as guidance documents.


6.0 OTHER CONTROLLED ITEMS The Contractor and each Sub-Contractor is required to include in the Project Safety Program a prohibition against the use, possession, concealment, transportation, promotion or sale of the following controlled items

1. Firearms, weapons, and ammunition. 2. Switchblades 3. Unauthorized explosives including fireworks 4. Stolen property or contraband 5. Controlled chemicals or chemicals recognized as being able to be used for

improper purposes 7.0 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES/GUIDELINES

7.1 The Contractor is required to establish site specific emergency procedures in the Project Safety Program to manage emergencies that may occur at any time in the following categories: 1. Fire 2. Employee injury 3. Pedestrian injury due to work activity of any kind 4. Property damage and damage to various utilities (i.e., electrical, gas,

sewerage, water, telephone or public roadways) 5. Public demonstrations 6. Bomb threats 7. Flood, Wind, Lightening, Hail 8. Terrorists Threats 9. Work place violence

7.2 These Emergency Procedures will be made part of the Contractor’s

Project Safety Program submittal and shall include but not be limited to the following elements:

1. A list of emergency phone numbers posted at the job site, along with

information to be transmitted in such emergencies. 2. An incident command structure defining duties and responsibilities 3. A system to train supervisors and employees on this emergency plan 4. Procedures on how to handle emergencies including access to the site

by emergency responders, accounting for workers, and securing the area.

5. Procedures for media releases. These releases must be coordinated through the Fulton County Information and Public Affairs Office in coordination with the County’s designated Representative.


6. A plan that addresses serious incidents that includes notification to Fulton County, Fulton County’s designated Representative immediately after the incident.

7. A review and updating frequency that includes forwarding a copy to Fulton County and the County’s designated Representative.

8.0 ACCIDENT AND INCIDENT INVESTIGATION AND REPORTING

8.1 The Contractor is responsible for reporting all accidents and incidents on the project site to the County’s designated Representative within (1) business day. Accidents or incidents resulting in a fatality, property loss in excess of $5,000, or involvement with the general public must be reported immediately to Fulton County’s designated Representative and the investigation of the accident or incident coordinated with Fulton County Safety staff.

8.2 The Contractor will maintain a log of all injuries that occur on the job site. This log will be current and available for review.

8.3 For any incidents such as fires, explosions, fatalities, etc., the Contractor must notify Fulton County’s designated Representative immediately and must coordinate any releases to the news media through the County’s designated Representative and the County’s Information and Public Affairs Office.

8.4 If a work-related injury should occur on this project, Contractor shall perform a thorough investigation of the incident and document the information.

8.5 A written accident investigation report containing the following information a minimum must be forwarded to the Fulton County’s designated Representative within 24 hours of incident.

1. Company Name 2. Location 3. Date and Time of incident 4. Description of incident 5. Names of all parties involved and all witnesses 6. Corrective action(s) taken to prevent recurrence 7. If the incident involves injury or illness, the following information must

be provided: a) A medical description of the injury or illness b) OSHA recordability status i.e. first aid, medical treatment, lost time,

days of restricted work. c) If the public is involved, information about treatment and treatment

location. 8. Any pictures, site drawings, etc. if they assist in describing the incident.

If the investigation cannot be completed in 24 hours, a preliminary report marked as such shall be forwarded and the report completed and forwarded as soon as possible.


9.0 JOB SAFETY ANALYSIS

9.1 The Contractor and each Sub-Contractor must implement a procedure to conduct a written job safety analysis or job hazard analysis for all project work tasks prior to beginning each task. Reference Appendix A.

9.2 The job safety analysis should follow National Safety Council, AGC, or other recognized guidelines and address all safety and health hazards for the work, identify personal protective and other safety equipment required, identify potential hazards to the general public if applicable, and identify any safety equipment, training, or controls that must be implemented prior to starting the work.

9.3 The Contractor must maintain a file for all job safety analysis forms, which is Accessible for review.

10.0 SAFETY AND HEALTH COMPLIANCE AUDITING

10.1 Self-Auditing Requirements

10.1.1 The Contractor and each Sub-Contractor must implement a procedure to assure that written safety and health audits or inspections are conducted at least biweekly (every 2 weeks). Safety checklists used by Fulton County’s designated Representative may be used. The Contractor may use this checklist or an equivalent approved by Fulton County’s designated Representative.

10.1.2 Each written safety audit must be filed on the site and a copy forwarded to Fulton County designated Representative.

10.2 NOT USED

10.3 INSPECTIONS BY REGULATORY AGENCIES

10.3.1 The Contractor must notify the Fulton County designated

Representative whenever a 051-IA compliance officer, health inspector, or EPA or Georgia Environmental Protection Division Representative arrives at the project site to conduct an inspection.

10.3.2 The Contractor is required to forward a copy of all regulatory citations, notice of violations, or similar for this project to Fulton County’s designated Representative.

10.3.3 These records will be reviewed with Fulton County designated Representative and included in the Construction Project files.


10.4 SAFETY INSPECTION AND AUDIT FOLLOW UP

10.4.1 Every safety audit or regulatory inspection conducted per the

requirements above may be reviewed by the Fulton County designated Representative. This review may identify serious and repeat safety items, look at trends, identify risks and potential losses, and site safety and loss prevention activities.

10.4.2 After this review the findings may identify areas needing improvement.

10.4.3 A copy of the audit and any areas identified, as needing improvement will be forwarded to the Contractor’s senior management.

10.4.4 For findings that indicate major loss potential or serious concerns about site safety, the areas identified as needing improvement and the overall performance may be reviewed by Fulton County’s designated Representative A written action plan to address the Contractor’s performance issues may be developed.

10.4.5 Fulton County or designated Representative may meet the Contractor’s senior management to discuss the findings, contract requirements, and their plans to address the findings.

10.4.6 The number and frequency of safety audits and site visits may be increased until improvements are noted.

11.0 SAFETY MEETINGS

11.1 The Contractor will conduct weekly safety meetings with all Contractor and Sub-Contractor employees on the site.

11.2 The Contractor will keep safety-meeting records that include meeting topic(s), outline of items discussed, and attendance and sign in sheet. At this meeting any accidents or audit findings and corrective actions from the previous week will be discussed.

11.3 The Contractor will maintain a job site file that contains copies of the safety meeting records.

12.0 TRAINING, INSPECTION AND CERTIFICATION

12.1 Employee Training

12.1.1 The Contractor must be able to show when requested the required safety training for all Contractor and Subcontractor employees and competent persons working on the site including any required craft training,


12.1.2 The Contractor must be able to show when requested that all

employees operating mobile equipment or cranes have met or exceeded training and licensing requirements.

12.1.3 The Contractor must be able to show when requested that all scaffolds are erected under the direction of a competent scaffold builder, that all users are properly trained, and that the scaffold is inspected daily.

12.1.4 The Contractor shall ensure that each employee is properly trained in the recognition and avoidance of unsafe conditions and the regulations applicable to his or her work environment to control or eliminate any hazards or other exposure to illness or injury.

12.1.5 If Contractor or Sub-Contractor employs anyone who cannot effectively communicate using the English language, a translator must be maintained on site who can relay instructions, questions, or concerns in a manner that the non-English and English-speaking employees will understand. The identification of this translator shall be provided to Fulton County’s designated Representative.

12.1.6 Contractor shall orient all supervision and employees concerning safety requirements before working on the project

12.2 Equipment Certification and Inspection

12.2.1 The Contractor must be able to document that all cranes and

mobile equipment used on the job site have current inspections and certifications.

12.2.2 The Contractor must assure that required daily and weekly equipment inspections are performed and documented in writing per governmental regulations and the requirements of this policy.

12.2.3 The Contractor must maintain a job site file for these required inspections and certifications.

12.2.4 Equipment identified as having safety problems or not meeting standards or codes shall be tagged as defective and shall not be used until those identified items have been corrected.

12.2.5 Contractor shall maintain, and have available for viewing, safety inspection reports for ladder, electrical cords, scaffolds, and trenches/excavations.

13.0 SAFETY AND HEALTH PROGRAM ELEMENTS

Note: Based on the project work activities and scope of work, some program elements may be not applicable to the project work and therefore do not have to be implemented. Elements marked with an asterisk are applicable to all Projects.


13.1 Return to Work Policy*

The Contractor and each Sub-Contractor will be required to establish a transitional work program for employees injured at work, which provides modified duty within the employee’s physical limitations.

13.2 Fire Prevention Program*

The Contractor and each Sub-Contractor will be required to submit a temporary\fire protection plan to be in effect for the duration of the contract. This plan must be submitted as part of the Contractor’s Safety Program submittal, it must include provisions for fire protection systems and equipment, as identified in OSHA Safety and Health for Construction 1926, Sub-Part F, Fire Protection and Prevention.

13.3 Hazard Communication (HAZCOM)*

The Contractor and each Sub-Contractor shall have a written HAZCOM Program. The program shall meet OSHA 1926 Requirements and provide for training so that all employees will be able to:

• Understand the program and identify hazardous chemicals with which they work.

• Understand product-warning labels. • Have MSDSs for all potentially hazardous materials brought onto, used

on, or stored at the job site. • Know the physical location of the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

13.4 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)*

All Contractor and Sub-Contractor employees and other site visitors will be required to wear the PPE necessary to accomplish the work in a safe manner, PPE required wilt vary from job to job and must be based on a written hazard assessment. A list of PPE that is required is identified below:

• Hard Hats shall be worn at all times on all projects • Hearing Protection for operations that create noise in excess of 65 dBA

is required. • Contractor shall provide eye or face protection equipment when

machines or operations present potential eye or face injury from physical, chemical, or radiation agents.

Work boots or work shoes made of leather shall be required. No open toed shoes or canvas shoes are allowed

• Shirts with sleeves at least 4 inches long are required. Tank tops and mesh shirt are not allowed.

• Full Body Safety Harnesses with shock absorbing lanyards for fail protection are required.

• Full body and chemical splash protection is required when handling hazardous chemicals.

• Respirators are required when employees may be exposed to dust and/or chemicals in excess of the OSHA permissible exposure limits.


* Long pants are required. 13.5 Confined Space Entry

If the project work involves permit required confined spaces, a permit required confined space entry program that meets 051-iA requirements must be established. This program must include but is not limited to the following elements.

• Confined Space Identification • Environmental Testing • Rescue • Communication with employees in the confined space • Employee Training • Permit System for entry

13.6 Excavations

If the Contractor or Sub-Contractor must make a cut, cavity, trench or depression in an earth surface formed by earth removal, the work must comply with the OSHA Regulations on trenching and excavations. A competent person must be assigned for each excavation. Requirements include but are not limited to:

• Employee Training * Daily inspections • Soil testing • Protective or support systems.

13.7 Electrical Tools, Equipment, and Systems*

* The Contractor and each Sub-Contractor must implement Assured Grounding Program or use Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) devices on all electrical tools and extension cords.

• All electrical work must be performed in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC) and OSHA,

• All electrical tools and extension cords must be in good repair and the Contractor must establish a written inspection program for all electrical tools. The frequency of inspection shall be at least monthly.

13.8 Lockout/Tagout Procedure

The Contractor and each Sub-Contractor will be required to implement a written Lockout/Tag procedure that meets OSHA requirements if their work requires energy isolation, Program elements include but are not limited to the following:

• Energy isolation lists for each piece of equipment • Employee training • Individually keyed locks and danger tags • Written Procedure that assigns responsibilities

13.9 Fall Protection*


Contractor shall provide an approved fall protection system for all employees working at an elevation of 6 feet or higher on this project, including scaffolding work and steel erection. Employees will be responsible for utilizing the fall protection 100% of the time. Sub-Contractor will be responsible for ascertaining their employees’ compliance with this requirement. The plan must address the following items:

• Only full body harnesses with shock absorbing lanyards and double locking hooks shall be use.

• Falls should be limited to less than. 6 feet such than employee can neither fall more than 6 feet nor contact any lower level.

• Fall protection systems must be planned into the job and must be designed to handle loads and forces expected. The project goal is 100% faIl protection.

• Employee training and enforcement of these requirements are mandatory to assure an effective program.

13.10 Scaffolding

All scaffolds and work platforms shall be constructed to meet the requirements of OSHA 1926,451 and ANSI A10.8. Some program elements include but are not limited to:

• User training for all employees who may use scaffolds; • Scaffolding is to be designed and erected by competent person(s)

following manufacturer’s guidelines. Employees must use fall protection when erecting scaffolding;

• Daily inspection by competent person. Must implement daily tag system to document inspection;

• Must have engineering approval for scaffolds above 100 feet in height; • Must be able to document competent person credentials; and • Scaffolds must have proper egress (ladder/stairs) and should have

guardrails, complete deck, toe boards and netting if anything can fall on people below. If guardrails or decking is not complete, fall protection must be used.

13.11 Cranes and Other Lifting Devices

• Trained and experienced operators shall operate Cranes in accordance with the applicable OSHA and ANSI/ASME.

• The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that the crane is properly sized for the job and that all required inspections and maintenance required by 051-IA and ANSI/ASME standards have been conducted.

• All cranes should have anti-two block devices installed and operational. Cranes lifting employees in personnel baskets must have an anti-two block device to stops the crane if this condition occurs (positive acting).

• Tag lines are required to secure materials while being moved or handled by cranes.

• All cranes working in the vicinity of overhead power lines shall be grounded and be equipped with proximity guards.


• A lift plan must be submitted for all lifts that exceed 20,000 pounds or 75% of the crane’s lift capacity. This plan must be reviewed and approved by the Contractor.

• Slings, hooks, and other lifting devices must be inspected on regular basis and stored properly.

13.12 Use of Personnel Baskets

• Personnel baskets should only be used as the last practical means after documenting that all other means are unacceptable.

• The personnel basket must be manufactured, tested, and used in accordance with OSHA 1926.550. The crane lifting the basket must also meet OSHA requirements.

13.13 Personal Lifts with Articulating Booms (Jig) and Scissors Lifts

• Operators must be trained in the safe operation of the lift including daily inspection procedures prior to use.

• Operators of JLG lifts must wear a full body harness with shock absorbing lanyard and be tied off while the lift is operation. Operators in a scissors lift must use fall protection anytime the guardrail system removed or altered.

13.14 Ladders*

• Ladders are acceptable means of access when used in compliance with OSHA 1926.1053.

• Ladders must be in good repair, have safety feet and be inspected. • Extension ladders must be either held by an employee on the ground

or tied off at the top. • Homemade ladders not meeting OSHA requirements should not be

used. • Non-conducting ladders are required for electrical work. • Fall protection is encouraged for employees working on ladders

especially if they will be leaning and turning in their work activities.

13.15 Tools and Equipment

All tools and equipment used on the project must be in a safe operating condition, with all guards in place, and must meet or exceed all governmental regulations (OSHA, EPA, DOT, etc.). Tools and equipment must be maintained, inspected, tested, and used in accordance with OSHA regulations.

13.16 Compressed Gas Cylinders*

• Compressed gas cylinders must be used, stored, and transported in accordance with OSHA requirements, DOT requirements, and Compressed Gas Association standards.

• Fuel and oxygen cylinders must be stored separately or separated in accordance with the appropriate code.

• Compressed gas cylinders are not allowed inside confined spaces.

13.17 Welding, Burning, and Cutting*


• The Contractor’s program must meet or exceed OSHA and NFPA requirements.

• All flammables must be removed from work area and a fire watch posted in area until 30 minutes after the job is completed.

• At a minimum a 10 LB ABC rated fire extinguisher must be available in the immediate work area.

• Regulators must be in good working order and must have anti-flash back and check valves.

• Welding shields and burning goggles must be used.

13.18 Sanitation and Housekeeping*

• The project site shall have an adequate number of portable toilets and hand washing facilities.

• The project site must establish a housekeeping plan that includes daily site clean-up and trash and debris removal.

13.19 Hearing Conservation*

The Contractor and each Sub-Contractor who has employees exposed to noise levels exceeding 85 dBA must establish a hearing conservation program that meets or exceeds OSHA requirements. Minimum program elements include audiometric testing, noise monitoring, use of hearing protectors, and employee training.

13.20 Respiratory Protection

The Contractor and each Sub-Contractor who has employees who wear respiratory protection must implement a respiratory protection program that meets or exceeds OSHA requirements. Minimum program elements include risk based respirator selection, medical surveillance, employee training, respirator fit testing, and written operating procedures.

14.0 SPECIALIZED SAFETY PROGRAM ELEMENTS

If required by the project scope of work and specific work site or activities, specialized programs listed below shall be included in the Contractor’s Safety Program submittal. The Contractor is required to implement the required programs and assure that they meet or exceed all contractual, regulatory and Fulton County’s requirements applicable. Details for specific program elements may be included in the contract documents,

14.1 Asbestos Removal 14.2 Lead Based Paint Removal 14.3 Exposure Assessment and Employee Monitoring (Industrial Hygiene) 14.4 Hazardous Waste Operations and Training 14.5 Overhead Power Lines 14.6 Locating underground utilities 14.7 Dust Control 14.8 Guarding for floor holes and roof openings 14.9 Heavy Equipment, Truck and Earth Moving Equipment requirements 14.10 Environmental Requirements


15.0 ROAD AND TRANSPORTATION SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

The Contractor shall implement the following into its safety program whether required by the contract or any other authority having jurisdiction if required to perform the work and maintain vehicular and pedestrian traffic safety:

15.1 Barricades and Cones 15.2 Traffic and Warning Signs 15.3 Traffic control devices 15.4 Equipment and materials storage 15.5 Reflective Clothing and other personal protective equipment 15.6 Excavation and road hole protection 15.7 Erosion protection 15.8 Trained flaggers

16.0 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS TO PROTECT THE GENERAL PUBLIC

Based on the Contractor’s scope of work and specific work activities or location the Contractor may be required to implement the following into its safety program to protect the general public:

16.1 Fencing and other measures for site security 16.2 Warning, direction and no trespassing signs 16.3 Alternate public walk ways 16.4 Protection of the public from overhead and other construction hazards 16.5 Site Traffic Control 16.6 Barricading off hazardous areas and open pits and holes


Appendix A Job Safety Analysis Worksheet Example and Information Job Safety Analysis! Job Pre-Planning Worksheet

Job Name and #: Completed By:

Date: Phase/Operation:

Task Hazard Control

20ITB204811K-JAJ Pryor Street Entry Plaza Contractor Rules & Regulations

Fulton County Government Center

Modifications & Alternations to Pryor Street Entry Plaza

Atlanta, GA 30303

CONTRACTOR RULES AND REGULATIONS

The purpose of these Contractor Rules and Regulations is to provide additional resources when

working at the Fulton County Government Center in downtown Atlanta, GA.

TABLE OF CONTENTS ............................................................................................................. 1

1. AIR BALANCE REPORTS .................................................................................................. 3

2. BLINDS AND DRAPERIES ................................................................................................. 3

3. BUILDING EQUIPMENT .................................................................................................... 3

4. BUILDING TIE-INS ............................................................................................................. 3

5. CARPET ................................................................................................................................ 4

6. CONCRETE CUTTING and CORE DRILLING REQUIREMENTS .................................. 4

7. CONCRETE DEMOLITION, POURING & SCHEDULING 5

8. CONDENSATION DRAIN LINES ...................................................................................... 5

9. CONSTRUCTION INSPECTIONS ...................................................................................... 5

10. DATA SHEETS ................................................................................................................... 5

11. DELIVERIES & ACCESS TO JOB SITE .......................................................................... 6

12. LOADING DOCK RULES AND REGULATIONS ........................................................... 6

13. INSURANCE ....................................................................................................................... 7

14. DUCT WORK ..................................................................................................................... 7

15. DUMPSTERS ...................................................................................................................... 7

16. DUSTY WORK ................................................................................................................... 8

17. EMERGENCY PROCEDURES .......................................................................................... 8

18. EXISTING BUILDING EQUIPMENT AND FIXTURES ................................................. 8

19. FIRE STOPPING MATERIALS ......................................................................................... 9

20. FLAMMABLES .................................................................................................................. 9

21. FOOD & DRINK ................................................................................................................. 9

22. HOURS ................................................................................................................................ 9

23. HOUSEKEEPING ............................................................................................................... 9

24. ISOLATION VALVES ..................................................................................................... 10

25. KEYS AND ACCESS PASSES ........................................................................................ 10

26. LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS ................................................................................................ 10

27. NEW-HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING................................... 11

28. NOISE/ODORS ................................................................................................................. 11

29. NOISY WORK .................................................................................................................. 12

30. NON-CONSTRUCTION AREAS & NORMAL LIMITS OF OPERATIONS ................ 12

31. OTHER CONTRACTORS ................................................................................................ 13

32. OUTAGES ......................................................................................................................... 13

33. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVES AND MANAGEMENT ............................................. 13


34. PARKING .......................................................................................................................... 13

35. PERSONNEL ID AND DAILY SIGN IN/SIGN OUT ..................................................... 14

36. PERMITS ........................................................................................................................... 14

37. PHONES ............................................................................................................................ 14

38. PIPING ............................................................................................................................... 15

39. POSTING OF RULES & REGULATIONS ...................................................................... 15

40. PROBLEMS, DISRUPTIONS, ALTERATIONS ............................................................. 15

41. SAFETY, GENERAL GUIDELINES ............................................................................... 15

42. SECURITY ........................................................................................................................ 15

43. SERVICING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ............................................................ 15

44. SIGNAGE .......................................................................................................................... 15

45. SMOKING ......................................................................................................................... 16

46. STAIRWELLS ................................................................................................................... 16

47. SUPERVISOR/GENERAL CONTRACTOR ................................................................... 16

48. TELEPHONE/ELECTRIC CLOSETS .............................................................................. 16

49. TURNOVER ...................................................................................................................... 16

50. UNUSED MATERIALS ................................................................................................... 17

51. UTILITY CONSUMPTION .............................................................................................. 17

52. UTILITY LINES ............................................................................................................... 17

53. VALVES ............................................................................................................................ 17

54. WALK-OFF MATS ........................................................................................................... 17

55. WATER AND ELECTRICITY ......................................................................................... 17

56. WELDING AND SOLDERING........................................................................................ 18

57. WINDOWS ........................................................................................................................ 18

58. WORK SCHEDULES ....................................................................................................... 18

59. WORKER CONDUCT ...................................................................................................... 19

60. AMENDMENT.................................................................................................................. 18


Appendix F-3

Fulton County

Government Center

Atlanta, GA 30303

CONTRACTOR RULES AND REGULATIONS

This document covers in detail how the Contractor is to handle most situations encountered

during construction.

1. AIR BALANCE REPORTS

If the Property Manager or Chief Engineer deems necessary, where partitions are installed,

moved, removed or altered, which can affect airflow, air supply requirements shall be supplied

and an air balance check performed at completion of work to ensure proper airflow.

Prior to the commencement of any air balancing work, the mechanical contractor shall request

HVAC design specifications for the building. The Contractor must also provide a detailed

summary of the proposed work along with a full set of mechanical plans for review prior to the

start of the construction.

Contractor, at the completion of the installation work, shall balance and adjust all air moving

equipment and air distribution equipment to within ten (10) percent of the design CFM’s and

submit a full balancing report. Air balance reports will be submitted prior to final acceptance and

release. The air balance contractor shall be certified by the National Environmental Balancing

Bureau.

2. BLINDS AND DRAPERIES

During construction, the Contractor shall protect the existing window treatment, i.e.,

shades/blinds/draperies, so as not to damage them, their appearance or proper operation. All

blinds must be clean, in proper working order and properly re-installed at the conclusion of the

tenant improvements.

3. BUILDING EQUIPMENT

The loan to Contractor of building equipment is discouraged by property management.

4. BUILDING TIE-INS

Any connections or "tie-ins" that are made to the building systems (plumbing, mechanical,

electrical, fire alarm, sprinkler, etc.) must be coordinated with the Property Manager and Chief

Engineer in advance.

The Contractor must provide advance written notice to Property Management and Chief

Engineer 48 hours or two business days, whichever is greater, in advance for all “tie-in” work.


Appendix F-4

Building Tie-ins request can be sent via email to [email protected] or

[email protected].

Authorization for building “tie-ins” that have the potential to impact building operations may

have a longer lead time and will be discussed at the pre-construction meeting. Property

Management will determine the best time of the day for all building tie-ins that have the potential

to impact other building operations.

5. CARPET

Prior to demolition, if carpet is to remain in suite, it is to be protected by a heavy plastic cover

and cleaned daily at the end of each work; otherwise it should be removed, stored and re-laid.

Additionally, public area corridor carpet is to be protected by plastic runners or a series of walk-

off mats from elevator to suite under reconstruction (including carpet in the elevators) and must

be cleaned daily as well.

All construction areas that impede or are accessed through public areas will be cleaned daily to

meet the standards of a Class “A” office building. If cleanup beyond vacuuming is required

daily, the Property Manager will meet with the Contractor to address the matter. The cost of this

additional cleaning will be an expense to the Contractor.

6. CONCRETE CUTTING and CORE DRILLING REQUIREMENTS

Prior to any concrete cutting/drilling, a plan must be submitted to the Property Manager, Project

Manager and/or Chief Engineer for review showing the proposed extent of slab removal. The

plan may also include the following information when requested.

1. Dimensions showing the length and the width of the slab removal.

2. The slab removal shall not begin until the proposed slab removal plan is approved by

the building’s structural engineer when designated by the Property or Project

Manager.

3. There shall not be any overcutting of the concrete slab during slab removal.

4. All corners or intersecting saw cuts shall be core drilled.

5. The contractor is responsible for repair work associated with all overcutting.

6. The extent of the repair will be as required and approved by the Property or Project

Manager.

7. The Contractor shall, prior to any cutting, x-ray the existing concrete to familiarize

himself with existing conditions. All films are to be available for the structural

engineer to review and all floor penetration locations are to be marked for review by

the structural engineer prior to removal when required by the Property or Project

Manager.

8. The Property Manager must be notified at least seventy-two (72) hours prior to

commencement of work.

The Property and/or Project Manager will discuss these requirements as well as provide copies of

the required work permits at the pre-construction meeting. Property Management will determine




Appendix F-5

the best time of the day for all concrete cutting work that will have the potential to impact

building operations.

7. CONCRETE DEMOLITION/POURING & SCHEDULING

All structural work must be approved by the building’s designated structural engineer, prior to

starting structural work when required by the Property or Project Manager.

Jack hammering and/or hammer drilling must be approved Property Management prior to

scheduling work. The Contractor must provide advance notice to Property Management 48

hours or two business days, whichever is greater, in advance for all concrete demolition/pouring

work. Notice must be in written form and must be 48 hours or two business days whichever is

greater in advance for all concrete work.

Contractor shall be responsible to repair any existing construction that may be damaged as the

result of demolition and will be financially responsible for any additional operating expense

incurred who may be affected by the damage.

Authorization for concrete demolition/pouring that has the potential to impact other building

operations may have a longer lead time and will be discussed at the pre-construction meeting.

Property Management will discuss these requirements as well as provide copies of the required

work permits at the pre-construction meeting between the Contractor and Property Management.

All approved designated times for this work will be determined by Property Management.

Final structural engineer approval is required prior to scheduling concrete pouring when required

by the Property Manager. All concrete specifications are to meet existing base building design

conditions.

8. CONDENSATION DRAIN LINES

Condensation drain lines from A/C units must be labeled and piped to a wet stack and not to a

sink.

9. CONSTRUCTION INSPECTIONS

Contractor is to perform a thorough inspection of all common areas prior to construction to

document any existing building deficiencies. Upon completion of work, contractor shall return

these areas to match the original condition in which they were originally viewed. Any damages

caused by the Contractor shall be corrected at the cost of the Contractor.

10. DATA SHEETS

The Contractor must submit to Property Management and Chief Engineer a manufacturer’s data

sheet for any major electrical or mechanical equipment to be installed and tied into base building

systems.


Appendix F-6

Copies of all Operations & Maintenance documents are to be submitted with the as-built plans to

the Project Manager along with any associated Material Safety Data Sheets.

11. DELIVERIES & ACCESS TO JOB SITE

Contractor's personnel must not access any floors other than the ones where they are assigned to

work. Any large deliveries, removal of materials, activities affecting the operations of the

building, or access to electrical or telephone closets must be coordinated through the Property

and/or Project Manager with minimum two-day advance notice.

Carrying tools and equipment on the passenger elevators and in lobbies will require special

permission by the Property Manager. The Contractor will be provided access to the freight

elevator to be used for deliveries. Extended use of freight elevators must be coordinated with the

Property Manager.

Contractors must use the freight elevator for all deliveries and movement through the building.

Construction workers are not allowed to enter or exit the building through the lobby except when

required by or permitted by the Sheriff Department. The loading dock area entry must be used at

all times. Since the ability to move material is dependent on the final destination floor of the

material and the height dimension of the service doors and freight elevator, Property

Management and Project Manager request that all contractors conduct a pre-delivery route

inspection at the time of the pre-construction meeting.

All deliveries will be made through the loading dock unless otherwise approved by the Property

Manager. All deliveries will either be made by a scheduled appointment through the Property

Manager or Project Manager 48 hours or two business days, whichever is greater, in advance of

the anticipated delivery date.

It is the Contractor’s responsibility to verify what size vehicles can be accommodated in the

loading dock. Any damage to the loading dock caused by negligence or the lack of proper due

diligence by the tenant’s Contractor will be the responsibility of the Contractor to repair.

Parking in the loading dock is not allowed. Blocking the building’s dumpster is prohibited.

Vehicles are prohibited from idling in the loading dock. The engines of all vehicles entering the

loading dock must be turned off immediately following entrance (except when lift gates are in

operation) and contractors must exit the dock immediately after turning on an engine.

12. LOADING DOCK RULES AND REGULATIONS

The loading dock area, which is accessed from Mitchell Street, serves the office portions of the

building. Strict adherence to these Contractor Rules and Regulations is required to ensure the

most efficient management and cooperative use of the loading dock.


Appendix F-7

The loading dock operation will commence at 6:00 a.m. and will close down each evening at

5:00 p.m., Monday thru Friday, excluding observed holidays. The dock access is controlled by

the Security Guard on duty.

No delivery through the Loading Dock will exceed the maximum allotted time of 30 minutes

unless scheduled ahead of time. All large-scale deliveries (i.e., furniture moves, electronics

deliveries, large inventory deliveries) and all after-hours deliveries must be scheduled with the

Property Management office. The advance notice requirement for construction material is at least

48 hours or 2 business days, whichever is greater, in advance for deliveries. Special deliveries of

this nature that have not been pre-scheduled will be turned away.

Upon arrival to the dock, before any delivery commences, all delivery personnel must sign in

with the Security Guard and produce valid identification. Additional information required will

be name, company they are representing, time in, anticipated delivery time, and tenant in whose

name delivery is being made.

Under no circumstances will the loading dock be used for storage of items to be picked up or for

temporary storage. Contractor shall become familiar with the Building, with special attention to

the size and capacity of the freight elevator and any other building system, building access,

utilities, or any other element of the facility, which may present a limitation to the construction

process proposed by Contractor.

13. INSURANCE

Refer to the Contract Documents for additional information on Insurance requirements.

14. DUCT WORK

The base building HVAC system shall contain a ducted supply and return air system to maintain

occupant comfort. All HVAC work must conform to building design criteria and be approved by

the Chief Engineer.

15. DUMPSTERS

The Contractor is responsible for the removal and hauling of trash and construction debris.

Trash dumpsters may be placed after 7:00 a.m. on Saturday and must be removed by 6:00 a.m.

Monday morning, and weeknights after 6:00 p.m. and must be removed before 6:00 a.m. The

location of the dumpster is to be determined by Property Management and Contractor must

obtain Property Manager’s approval before placing dumpster. The building compactor cannot be

used for any construction trash. No trash shall be left anywhere in the building (including

elevators and freight vestibules) at any time. Any damage caused by the placement, use,

servicing or removal of dumpsters will be the responsibility of the Contractor and repairs to

Property Management’s satisfaction.


Appendix F-8

16. DUSTY WORK

Activities that create excessive dust (i.e., sheet rock cutting, sanding, etc.), or smoke (i.e.,

burning or welding), or noise (drilling, saw-cutting) must be coordinated with Property

Management with 48 hours prior written notice and must be performed between the hours of

8:00 pm and 6:00 am. Notice must be in written form by way of the Work Permit and must be

sent 48 hours or two business days, whichever is greater, in advance for all dusty work. All areas

that are impacted by the dusty work including but not limited to telecom rooms, electrical room,

mechanical rooms, stairwells, etc. will be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean on a

regular basis.

Authorization for dusty work that may have the potential to impact other building operations

may have a longer lead time and will be discussed at the pre-construction meeting.

In areas where there will be dust generated, it is the Contractor's responsibility to bag the smoke

detectors in the area prior to commencing work and remove the bags at the end of the day.

Prior to starting work on any floor, Contractor shall replace existing HVAC filters with a set of

pre-approved filters (specification to be supplied by Chief Engineer) that prevent dust from

entering the HVAC ducting and replace with new filters at the conclusion of the project.

See also: Welding and Soldering

17. EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

All Contractor personnel are to be familiar with emergency procedures and are required to follow

instructions of the Floor Fire Warden, including fire drills.

18. EXISTING BUILDING EQUIPMENT AND FIXTURES

The Contractor will be responsible for repairing any existing building equipment and fixtures

damaged as a result of alteration work. This includes ceiling tiles, barrier paper system, light

fixtures, carpet, elevators, walls, floors, doors, induction units, grilles, registers and any other

fixtures not specifically mentioned. If alteration work requires the relocation of space

temperature sensors, thermostats or other building equipment, such relocation will be solely at

the Contractor’s expense.

It is the Contractor's responsibility to provide Masonite to protect common area floor when

bringing in materials and to remove it at the end of each workday.

It is the Contractor's responsibility to protect all core areas on the floors being worked: covering

existing doors and walls, not accessing restrooms, and protecting other completed finishes and

equipment. The disassembly of door props and door closures are not authorized.


Appendix F-9

19. FIRE STOPPING MATERIALS

OSHA-approved fire stopping materials are required for any wall, floor, or ceiling penetrations.

Any breach of existing materials is required to be resealed by same products. Any penetration

through Fire Rated partitions/floors must be pre-approved by the Property Manager and caulked

using approved Fire Caulking

20. FLAMMABLES

Contractor must file MSDS sheets for all chemicals used during construction with the Property

Manager, prior to performing the work. In addition, flammable liquids should be stored in and

dispensed from approved safety cans, flammable rags must be stored in airtight containers, and

flammable liquid dispensers of the plunger type should be used for wiping cloths.

21. FOOD & DRINK

All food and drinks are to be consumed only in designated contractor eating areas. No food or

drinks are to be carried on passenger elevators, over carpet, or in employee break rooms, or

finished office space.

22. HOURS

Building

Property Management must be notified, in advance per the time frames included in the pertinent

sections of this document, of any work that may disrupt normal business operations, (i.e., drilling

or cutting of the concrete floor slab, use of nail guns, electric saws). Property Management

reserves the right to determine what construction work is considered inappropriate for normal

business hours and to issue a stop-work order upon receipt of complaint/concern by other

occupants in the building.

Engineering

The Engineering staff's hours are from 7:30 a.m. until 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday. All

after-hours work must be coordinated through the Property Manager and/or Chief Engineer.

23. HOUSEKEEPING

All trash must be removed from the windowsills, including but not limited to lunch, trade tools,

and equipment. All lunch trash must be disposed of by the Contractor at the end of each work

day. The Contractor must remove all trash by way of the freight elevator. All trash removal times

will be coordinated with Property Management at the pre-construction meeting.

All clean up and trash removal from the building premises is the sole responsibility of the

Contractor. The building dumpster will not be used for construction debris.


Appendix F-10

The Contractor shall be responsible for cleaning the interior of the windows and sills prior to

substantial completion. All common areas used by the Contractor are to be cleaned and

vacuumed at the end of each workday. Contractor shall keep its work area, including the loading

area, in an orderly condition.

The premises must be secured and the doors to the work area, mechanical and electrical rooms,

and stairwells must be closed and the lights turned off at the end of each day. Upon construction

completion, the Contractor shall remove all debris and surplus material and thoroughly clean the

area.

24. ISOLATION VALVES

Equipment isolation valves shall be installed on all A/C units to facilitate maintenance and to

allow the unit to be removed without interfering with the building operation as approved by the

Chief Engineer. Contractor must include adequate provision for maintenance access at any

isolation valves they may install.

25. KEYS AND ACCESS PASSES

When necessary to perform the Work, Contractor may be issued a key/access pass to existing

mechanical/electrical equipment spaces (and other spaces as required) by the Property

Management or designed representative. These keys/passes shall be returned at the end of each

work period for which they are issued, and reissued on succeeding days, if necessary.

The fee for lost keys is $25.00 and for a lost access card is $100.00. Said fee is due and payable

within five days of billing.

26. LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS

Contractor, under no circumstances, will be allowed to disconnect, tamper with, delete, obstruct,

relocate or add-on any life safety, fire detection, notification suppression unit or devices, except

as indicated on the drawings approved by the Fire Department Authority having jurisdiction.

Any work involving the building's sprinkler or life safety systems must be arranged in advance

through the Property Manager, Project Manager and/or Chief Engineer. The system must be

back in operation at the end of the workday. Under no circumstances shall the sprinkler or fire

alarm system be left inoperative overnight without a fire watch approved by AHJ.

All work that may, in any way, affect the main building fire alarm system and/or building

operations must be noted on the Work Permit and communicated through the Property Manager.

Management reserves the right to require additional security measures in the event of repeated

false alarms.

Contractor must assist the Property Manager and/or Fulton County Safety Officer in preparing

“System Impairment Notification” to Fulton County’s Insurance Carrier prior to disabling any


Appendix F-11

Fire Alarm or Fire Suppression component in the building. Such notifications must be promptly

removed when impairment situation is resolved.

Permits for "Hot Work" are to be obtained from Property Management. All "Hot Work"

(cutting, welding, and soldering) is to be performed only after a Work Permit has been obtained

for the particular area or job and the following is provided: (i) fire extinguishers, (ii) non-

combustible covering, (iii) screening of arc welding operations, (iv) smoke detection system

disconnected, and (v) posting of Permit in conspicuous location.

All fire protections systems, including sprinklers, must be fully operational at night unless

previously arranged by Work Permit with Property Management.

One half hour before systems are reactivated, Contractor shall notify the Security Supervisor and

Property Management.

Fire Alarm Voice Annunciation Speakers will not be removed, disconnected or relocated without

permission of Property Management. Requests to do any work interfering with this system must

be expressed to Property Management in writing by Contractor with 48 hours or two business

days, whichever is greater. Contractor in turn must have written response from Property

Management only, before any work is permitted.

Contractor shall arrange with Property Management for protection of all fire alarm devices. All

sprinkler/fire system work including testing or inspection of the fire alarm system or the

sprinkler system must be coordinated with Property Management upon 72 hours’ written notice.

Contractor must not block fire exits or fire corridors or use these areas for storage.

27. NEW-HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING

All new HVAC equipment installed must have a service disconnect located within sight of the

unit when required by the Chief Engineer. Gauges and thermometers must be installed in both

the supply and return airside and waterside of new equipment when required by the Chief

Engineer. Copies of all required balancing reports must be submitted to Property Management

and Chief Engineer.

28. NOISE/ODORS

The floors above and below the area of contract work may be occupied. Contractor shall exercise

reasonable restraint and control of work to minimize noise and spread of odors. Contractor shall

execute the work in its Contract as quickly as practical to avoid unnecessary disturbances to

occupants within the premises.

Contractor is only permitted to perform work that produces an odor (e.g., use of cleaners, stains,

paints, adhesives) during normal business hours upon written notice to and prior approval by

Property Manager so building air systems can be adjusted. Contractor must use chemicals

(including paints, thinner, cleaning liquids) of low Volatile Organic Content (Low VOC) and

must have readily available the MSDS related to the chemical used. Contractor will include


Appendix F-12

temporary ventilation and/or other safety measures as necessary to protect work crew, tenants,

and the public.

29. NOISY WORK

Property Management must be notified 48 hours in advance of any work that may disrupt normal

business operations (e.g., drilling or cutting of the concrete floor slab, placing studs for party-

wall drywall), as outlined in the project schedule.

Contractor shall identify in weekly progress meetings upcoming work which may be noisy.

Property Management may be forced to stop excessive noisy work for the duration of the work

day.

Any operation that cause noise such as drilling, saw cutting, hammering, etc will not be allowed

during normal courthouse operating hours. Such operations will be allowed only on weekends or

after 5PM on working days.

Should Property Management receive complaints from tenants in other building in the complex

due to noisy operations, Contractor’s on-site representative will meet with the Property Manager

and work out an alternate schedule.

30. NON-CONSTRUCTION AREAS & NORMAL LIMITS OF OPERATIONS

The Contractor is totally responsible to protect existing finishes, furniture, etc. for any work

necessary in an occupied or unoccupied space. Damages in these spaces or in the common areas

or elevators will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Repairs will be done to the

reasonable satisfaction of Property Management. If those reasonable repairs are not made,

Property Management will cause the repairs to be made and the cost of doing so will be charged

to the Contractor.

Contractor's normal limit of operations shall be confined within the Limits of Work Area as

designated on the approved drawings.

The Contractor will prohibit his unauthorized personnel and visitors from using other areas.

Property Management, its consultants, and other contractors performing work within these

Limits of Work Areas shall be allowed regular access through security as necessary for

construction to proceed at pre-scheduled time (except as may be restricted by Property

Management as noted above).

When it becomes necessary for Contractor to work in areas other than the work area, at least 24

hours’ written notice shall be given to Property Management.

It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that all work shall be done in accordance with

O.S.H.A. regulations, all applicable city, state and federal building codes.


Appendix F-13

31. OTHER CONTRACTORS

Contractor is hereby notified there may be other contractors working in the Building. Some of

these contractors may be affiliated with labor unions and some will not. It is Contractor's

responsibility to maintain a harmonious relationship between his employees, his subcontractors,

and subcontractor's employees in the entire building.

Contractor will be notified in writing if his employees in any way impede the work of any

contract within the building within 24 hours. If the situation is not corrected immediately,

Contractor's employees will be removed from the premises.

32. OUTAGES

Any outages affecting areas outside of the Limits of Work Areas shall be noted no later than the

pre-construction meeting. Any requests by the Property Manager or Chief Engineer for

additional information, communication or meetings will be honored by Contractor.

Utility (electric, water, gas or oil) and service outages shall be kept to a minimum and will be

permitted only with a Work Permit issued. All requests for outages shall be made in writing 72

hours in advance of their need. There will need to be an exception for emergency situations.

Requests for outages will not be considered unless they include the identification of all areas that

will be affected by the proposed outage.

33. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVES AND MANAGEMENT

Contractor shall abide by the directions of the Property Manager and/or the Chief Engineer in

matters affecting the operation, safety and security of the premises, its employees, and its

visitors.

Contractor shall abide by all directions in matters affecting HVAC systems, fire safety, and fire

prevention measures.

All oral instructions given to Contractor's Superintendent by Property Manager and Chief

Engineer shall be implemented by Contractor's Superintendent within a reasonable time.

All personnel employed by Contractor, including subcontractors and their employees, shall be

instructed by Contractor to abide by all published regulations, and all directives of Property

Management.

34. PARKING

There is no parking allowed in the loading dock area or other designated parking areas by

contractors unless authorized by Property Management. Any unauthorized vehicles blocking the

loading dock or other designated parking areas will be towed. Property Management will arrange

parking guidelines at the pre-construction meeting.


Appendix F-14

35. PERSONNEL ID AND DAILY SIGN IN/SIGN OUT

Contractor ID Badges

All contractors shall wear I.D. badges or uniforms showing company name.

The identification badges shall be conspicuously fixed to outer garments above elbow level and

issued by Property Management for the duration of the project, upon completion of work, the

badge will be returned.

Any of Contractor's personnel or subcontractor's personnel who do not comply with this

requirement at all times will be denied access to the Building or will be escorted off the

premises, failure to comply with this requirement will be reported to the Contractor’s on-site

representative and Project Manager

Badges are to be returned to Contractor's Superintendent at the end of that person's need for a

badge. Contractor shall notify Security Supervisor should anyone no longer be authorized to

work on site and who has not returned their badge and shall keep a list of unauthorized badge

numbers on hand at the check-in point for the job site.

Sign In and Out

The Contractor will submit a log of personnel working in the Building by 10:00 a.m. each day to

the Security Supervisor.

Personnel List

Contractor will provide Security Supervisor and Property Management with a complete list of all

Contractor and subcontractor personnel authorized to access the job site. The list shall contain

full name, company, phone number, and floors authorized for access. The list must be kept

updated, as only listed personnel will be allowed access to the job site. All changes must be

made in writing to the Security Supervisor 8 hours prior to new personnel accessing the site.

36. PERMITS

City Permits

All permits pertaining to the job must be posted in a conspicuous place in the construction office.

A copy of the permit must also be submitted to Property Management prior to any work being

performed.

37. PHONES

Contractor needs to provide their own construction phones. The building has no phones, pay or

otherwise, available to the Contractor.


Appendix F-15

38. PIPING

All piping in proper sizes, including sinks, kitchen units, water closets, water heater and

condensation piping should be copper (use of plastic pipe in plenum ceilings is strictly

prohibited).

39. POSTING OF RULES & REGULATIONS

A copy of these Rules and Regulations acknowledged and accepted by the Contractor shall be

posted on the job site for all parties to observe. Contractor is responsible for instructing all of his

personnel, subcontractors and suppliers to comply with these regulations.

40. PROBLEMS, DISRUPTIONS, ALTERATIONS

All problems, disruptions, and emergency alterations must be reported to the Property

Manager/Chief Engineer at 410-547-3500.

41. SAFETY, GENERAL GUIDELINES

Adequate measures should be taken to protect building employees, visitors and occupants from

construction activities and hazards, such as: blocking off area, proper handling of materials,

storage of same removal of building debris and general good housekeeping practices.

42. SECURITY

Contractor personnel are required to be on-site for off-hour material deliveries.

Upon request by Building Security, contractors may be required to submit to an inspection of

bags, boxes, and other items leaving the building.

43. SERVICING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

No walls or ceilings shall be installed that inhibit the access to a variable air volume terminal

unit. The unit shall be relocated or an additional unit installed on the opposite side of the wall.

In addition, no walls shall be constructed across a ceiling light fixture, which would inhibit

changing of lamps or servicing the light fixtures when necessary. At the conclusion of the

project, it is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that access to all building equipment is

available. If access panels will be required to access building equipment, then it is the

responsibility of the Contractor to install such access panels.

44. SIGNAGE

Contractor or subcontractor signage may not be displayed in the building common areas or on

any of the window glass.


Appendix F-16

45. SMOKING

This is a Non-Smoking building. Please be aware that the penalty for not abiding by this

regulation is dismissal from the site. Please notify your subcontractors, suppliers, and any other

persons expected to use the site of this Fulton County policy. (Refer FC Policy Number 300-4

attached)

Smoking will be allowed in the areas outside of the 25 feet radius requirement of the building

entrances, outdoor air intakes and any building penetrations that may provide outside air to the

building.

46. STAIRWELLS

Contractor shall coordinate all work in stairwells with Property Manager with special attention to

fire issues. Safe egress must be maintained at all times for workers and tenants.

47. SUPERVISOR/GENERAL CONTRACTOR

The Contractor shall furnish a Construction Superintendent for 100% of the job.

All questions are to be directed to the Property Manager and/or Chief Engineer via the

Contractor’s Construction Superintendent.

The Contractor will be responsible for general protection of the Building in the areas he or his

subcontractors use or travel through and for securing the construction area daily.

48. TELEPHONE/ELECTRIC CLOSETS

Common area telephone/electric closets are the property of the building. No telephone/electrical

material will be allowed to be stored in these closets.

No device shall be attached to existing telephone/electrical equipment or installed within the

telephone/electric closets without written permission from the Property Manager.

Electrical receptacles within the confines of the telephone/electric closet are strictly for telephone

equipment and building operations use. Nothing shall be plugged into or unplugged from those

receptacles by Contractor.

49. TURNOVER

At the completion of construction and in addition to other Contract requirements, the Contractor

shall deliver to Property Management for internal distribution four (4) copies of the following:

- Photocopies of all warranties

- All operating manuals and final specifications

- EMS (Data link for zones) shall be complete


Appendix F-17

- Labeling (annunciator, panels, etc.) shall be complete

- Complete set of as-built plans including hard and soft copies. Soft copies should be in

AutoCad format and PDF format.

- Letter of Compliance relating to fire sprinkler heads.

- Copy of all approved submittals, including finish/color selection chart.

- Attic Stock Materials that are extra (flooring, paint, lights etc) and / or as required in the

contract

50. UNUSED MATERIALS

Any and all existing materials removed and not reused in the construction, except as directed by

the Property Manager, shall be disposed of by the Contractor as waste or unwanted materials.

Contractor shall keep areas outside its demised premises free at all times from waste material,

rubbish and debris, and shall remove all material on a daily basis.

51. UTILITY CONSUMPTION

Omitted.

52. UTILITY LINES

Before any drilling, core boring or other structural work is performed; the Contractors will verify

the locations of the building's utility lines so as not to damage them. Contractors are required to

take all possible precautions to protect utility lines.

53. VALVES

Any domestic, high temperature, chill or condenser water connections made to the building's

piping system must have good quality isolation, brass body gate-type valves and adequate system

drain valves installed as approved by the Chief Engineer. All valves must be easily accessible

and not concealed in a finished ceiling. All valves must be identified through appropriate

signages.

54. WALK-OFF MATS

Temporary walk-off mats are to be provided by the Contractor on the public corridor side of

entrance doors during construction.

55. WATER AND ELECTRICITY

Water will be furnished to the Contractor without cost, in reasonable quantities for use in

construction (exclusive of drinking water).

Electricity shall be supplied to the Contractor through electrical service located and approved by

the Chief Engineer. The Contractor shall make all connections, furnish any necessary extensions,

and remove same upon completion of work.


Appendix F-18

56. WELDING AND SOLDERING

The Property Manager and Chief Engineer must be contacted 48 hours prior to use of any

welding torches, burning rigs or other heat producing items so that the fire alarm systems can be

disabled.

The Contractor must provide advance notice 48 hours or two business days, whichever is greater,

in written form by way of a Work Permit for all welding and soldering work. Authorization for

welding or soldering work that may have the potential to impact other building operations may

have a longer lead time and will be discussed at the pre-construction meeting.

Property Management will discuss these requirements and provide standard form Work Permits

at the pre-construction meeting. All approved designated times for this work will be determined

by Property Management.

Neither open-flame burning, nor welding, nor arc welding will be permitted without the

Contractor having secured an appropriate Work Permit from Property Management. The

Property Manager and/or Chief Engineer have the right to stop any work at any time if he or she

determines that unsafe conditions may exist. Contractor shall correct all such unsafe conditions

as directed and obtain the approval by Property Management of such corrections prior to

commencing further work.

Contractor shall keep a portable hand fire extinguisher of the appropriate class within reach at

ALL times during welding or burning. Contractor shall also keep all required exit corridors, and

the like, clear and unobstructed at all times when working in such areas. All flammable

materials shall be removed to a location not closer than 35 feet from all burning and welding

operations. All workmen shall be instructed as to the location of the nearest fire alarm device.

All fixed flammable items shall be completely covered with fireproof blankets. Arc welding

shall be screened from vision of all passers-by.

Contractor shall be required to maintain a "Fire Watch" security effort during, and for a

minimum of 30 minutes at, the completion of each welding operation.

57. WINDOWS

During construction, contractor is to make every effort to protect window treatments, and not

store tools or materials on the window ledges.

58. WORK SCHEDULES

Property Management will be notified of all work schedules for all workmen on the job and will

be advised, in writing, of the names of personnel who may be working in the building before or

after standard building operating hours.


Appendix F-19

59. WORKER CONDUCT

Contractors and subcontractors personnel shall be respectful of occupants, visitors, and building

staff and shall not permit its employees to use foul language (FC Policy 100-30 against verbal

harassment attached), smoke, exhibit rude behavior, commit vandalism, use alcohol, illegal drugs

or exhibit improper appearance. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to enforce this

regulation on a day-to-day basis. Individuals violating this rule will be removed from the

building and will not be allowed to return.

Lounging in the elevator or main lobbies or building areas is forbidden.

Contractor Personnel

- Must obey all safety procedures and participate in all drills or other life safety exercises.

- Must wear shirts and shoes at all times.

- Clothing must not display obscene language or graphics.

- Must not access any floor other than the one where they are assigned to work.

- Must not use abusive and offensive language.

- Must not discharge bodily fluids (e.g., spitting or urinating) except in proper facilities

- Shall use only the restrooms designated for Contractor use.

- Must not litter or abuse the designated restrooms.

- Must only eat or drink in assigned areas.

Playing or radios or musical instruments is not permitted in the Building. Use of earphones for

playing of radios or other musical listening devices is also prohibited for safety reasons.

Work on occupied floors shall be conducted in such a manner as to cause as little disruption to

occupants and building operations as possible.

60. AMENDMENT

Property Management has the sole right to amend these Contractor Rules and Regulations as the

situation warrants at any time. Any questions regarding these rules and regulations must be

brought to the Property Manager’s attention immediately.